all | frequencies |
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 |
|
08 user guide part 1 | Users Manual | 5.97 MiB | April 06 2008 | |||
1 |
|
08 user guide part 2 | Users Manual | 2.81 MiB | April 06 2008 | |||
1 | ID Label/Location Info | April 06 2008 | ||||||
1 | Cover Letter(s) | April 06 2008 | ||||||
1 | Cover Letter(s) | April 06 2008 | ||||||
1 | External Photos | April 06 2008 | ||||||
1 | Test Report | April 06 2008 | ||||||
1 | Test Report | April 06 2008 | ||||||
1 | Test Setup Photos | April 06 2008 | ||||||
1 | Test Setup Photos | April 06 2008 | ||||||
1 | Internal Photos | April 06 2008 | ||||||
1 | RF Exposure Info | April 06 2008 | ||||||
1 | Attestation Statements | April 06 2008 |
1 | 08 user guide part 1 | Users Manual | 5.97 MiB | April 06 2008 |
General Inquiries DOCOMO Information Center
(In English) 0120-005-250 (toll free)
*Can be called from mobile phones and PHSs.
(In Japanese only)
(No prefix) 151 (toll free) Repairs
(In Japanese only)
(No prefix) 113 (toll free)
*Can only be called from DOCOMO mobile phones.
(In Japanese only) 0120-800-000 (toll free)
*Can be called from mobile phones and PHSs.
*Can only be called from DOCOMO mobile phones. Please confirm the phone number before you dial. For application procedure, repairs and after-sales service, call inquiries above or contact your local DOCOMO shop on DOCOMO website or i-mode site. DOCOMO website: http://www.nttdocomo.co.jp/english/
i-mode site: iMenu (Information)
(DOCOMO shop) (Japanese) Lost or theft of FOMA terminal, or payment of cumulative cost overseas
<DOCOMO Information Center> (available 24 hours a day) DOCOMO mobile phone International call access number of the country you stay (Table 1)
-81-3-5366-3114*(toll free) Failures encountered overseas
<Network Technical Support and Operation Center> (available 24 hours a day) DOCOMO mobile phone International call access number of the country you stay (Table 1)
-81-3-6718-1414*(toll free)
*Calling from the fixed phone will be charged according to the call rate for Japan. If you use SO706i, you should dial the number +81-3-5366-3114
(to dial +, press the 0 key for over a second).
*Calling from the fixed phone will be charged according to the call rate for Japan. If you use SO706i, you should dial the number +81-3-6718-1414
(to dial +, press the 0 key for over a second). Fixed phone Universal number Universal number international prefix (Table 2)
-800-0120-0151 *
* You may be charged according to the call rate for the country where you are staying. Fixed phone Universal number Universal number international prefix (Table 2)
-800-5931-8600 *
* You may be charged according to the call rate for the country where you are staying. See p.334 for International call access code of main countries (Table 1) and International Prefix number for the universal number (Table 2) in this manual. If your FOMA terminal is lost or stolen overseas, take procedure to suspend the subscription immediately. See p.334 for International call access code of main countries (Table 1) and International Prefix number for the universal number (Table 2) in this manual. If your FOMA terminal has been damaged overseas, bring it to a repair counter designated by DOCOMO after returning to Japan. Dont forget your cellular phone ... or your manners!
When using your mobile phone in public, dont forget to show common courtesy F O M A S O 7 0 6 i FOMA SO706i 08.7 ISSUE DATE:
NAME:
PHONE NUMBER:
MAIL ADDRESS:
INSTRUCTION MANUAL I I N S T R U C T O N M A N U A L and consideration for others around you. Sales: NTT DOCOMO, Inc. Manufacturer: Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications Japan, Inc. To prevent damage to the environment, bring used battery packs to an NTT DOCOMO service counter, an NTT DOCOMO agent or a recycle center. Utilizing recycled papers This manual is printed using an ink based on soy bean oil. 08.7 (1st Edition) MDT-000091-EAA0 0 8 7
. Easy Search/Contents/Precautions Before Using the Handset Voice/Videophone Calls Phonebook Sound/Screen/Light Settings Security Settings Camera i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel Mail i-ppli Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa 1seg Full Browser Data Display/Edit/Management Music&Video Channel/
Music Playback Convenient Functions Character Entry Network Services PC Connection Overseas Use Appendix/External Devices/
Troubleshooting Index/Quick Manual K DIC 2484 SO706i (1) H1H4 DOCOMO W-CDMA and GSM/GPRS Systems Thank you for choosing FOMA SO706i. Read this manual carefully before use or during operation as well as separate manuals for other components, and use FOMA SO706i properly. If you have further questions regarding manuals, contact the inquiries number provided on the back of this manual. FOMA SO706i is your useful companion. Take good care of it for so long a period. Notes on use FOMA terminals use wireless communications and cannot be used in tunnels, underground areas, buildings, and other areas without reception; in outdoor locations with weak reception; or outside the service area. Reception may also be weak in even some unobstucted upper floors of high-rise buildings and apartments. Please be aware that calls or communications may be disconnected even under optimal conditions when reception is strong and all three antenna marks are displayed, and when in a stationary position. Please be careful not to disturb people around you when using your mobile phone in public places, crowded areas, or quiet locations. A third party may be able to use special equipment to listen in on your calls, as FOMA terminals use radio waves. However, W-CDMA and GSM/GPRS automatically support privacy protection with a scrambling function for all calls to make conversations incomprehensive to third parties. FOMA terminals convert voice into digital signals for wireless communications, and therefore if you are in an area where radio reception is weak, these signals may not be properly reconverted and this may result in distortion of the callers voice. The user hereby agrees that the user shall be solely responsible for the result of the use of SSL/TLS. Neither DOCOMO nor the certifier as listed herein makes any representation or warranty as for security in the use of SSL/TLS. In the event that the user shall sustain damage or loss due to the use of SSL/TLS, neither DOCOMO nor the certifier shall be responsible for any damage or loss. Certifier: VeriSign Japan K.K., Cybertrust Co., Ltd., GlobalSign K.K., RSA Security Inc. and SECOM Trust Systems Co., Ltd. This FOMA terminal is available in FOMA Plus-Area/FOMA HIGH-SPEED area. The FOMA terminal can be used only via the FOMA network provided by DOCOMO and DOCOMOs roaming area. Please keep a separate record of the information (Phonebook, Schedule, Text memo, Record message, Voice memo, Video memo, etc.) you have registered in your FOMA terminal or FOMA card. Please be aware that DOCOMO bears no obligation or responsibility in the event that data is altered or lost. It is recommended to back up the important data to the microSD card. If you own a PC, you can also transfer and save the data such as Phonebook, Mail or Schedule to your PC by using DOCOMO keitai datalink. Before using this manual This FOMA terminal supports Kisekae Tool (p.97). When you change the design of the menu display using Kisekae Tool, the menu structure may change in accordance with frequency of using functions. Also, you cannot access some functions entering the menu number assigned to the functions. In this case, it is not possible to operate it according to this manual, so be sure to switch the main menu to Standard Menu (p.33) or perform Reset menu op. log (p.91). Latest information regarding to this manual may be downloaded from the DOCOMO website. To download Instruction Manual (PDF file), access the following site http://www.nttdocomo.co.jp/english/support/manual/index.html
* The URL and the contents are subject to change without notice. How to Refer to This Manual In this manual, following methods are available to find the descriptions of functions and services. Index p.396 You can find keywords and functions displayed on the display of the FOMA terminal. Easy Search p.4 You can find often-used functions and convenient functions in simple terms. See the next page for details. Index on the front cover Cover You can find the table of contents for each chapter by using the Index on the front cover. Contents p.6 You can find descriptions using the Table of Contents which is divided by the function. Feature Preview p.8 You can find main functions of the FOMA SO706i, such as new functions and convenient functions. Menu Function List p.340 You can find menu displayed on the display of the FOMA SO706i and default settings. Quick Manual p.408 You can find brief descriptions of the basic functions. You can also remove the pages to take along. Take Quick Manual (For Overseas Use) when using your FOMA terminal abroad.
In this manual for FOMA SO706i, the FOMA SO706i is described as the FOMA terminal.
This manual describes functions that use the microSD card. To use these functions, the microSD card is required. microSD Cardp.243
It is prohibited to reprint a part or all of the contents of this manual without permission.
The contents of this manual may change without prior notification.
Main menu and screen color patterns are described using default settings when the phone color is platinum white. 1 How to Refer to This Manual (continued) Following example shows how to look up the alarm function using Index, Easy Search and Index on the front cover. Index p.396 You can find keywords and functions displayed on the display of the FOMA terminal. Alphabetical/Numerical/Kana KA A mode (2in1) . 320 AC adapter. 42 Accessories/Options . 363 A-Continuous mode . 124 Add bookmark . 142 Adding a new word (Own dictionary) . 309 Signal quality . 85 Alarm notification actions . 290, 295 Alarm setting . 289 Alarm tone (pre-installed) . 82 Alarm tone (stop). 289 Alarm (Timer) . 284 Animation (create) . 230 Animation (playback). 231 Anniversary (check). 287 Answer hold. 62 Auto Decomail-picture (download) . 146 Auto power ON/OFF . 45 Auto receive (Mail/Message) . 162 Auto redial as voice . 67 Auto replay (i-motion) . 152 Auto reset total cost . 294 Auto save set (Movie) . 127 Auto save set (Still image) . 123 Auto timer . 128 Auto-display setting . 148 Easy Search p.4 You can find often-used functions and convenient functions in simple terms. p.255 p.260 Infrared data exchange/iC communication OBEX connection p.267 p.243 Music Player/Music&Video Channel Use microSD card Exchange information with PC or other FOMA terminal Listen to music Use alarm p.284 Use as calculator Use FOMA terminal overseas Update for the latest software p.377 Update for the latest security settings Software Update p.295 p.331 p.383 Calculator Alarm Scanning function Index on the Cover Cover Refer to Cover, Chapter title page and Description pages sequentially to nd the descriptions of the function you want to set. You can nd the detailed table of contents on the chapter title page. INSTRUCTION MANUAL Music&Video Channel/
Music Playback Convenient Functions Character Entry Network Services Convenient Functions 282 Multi Access.................................................................................................. 283 Multitask............................................................................................................. Assigning a Function to the FUNC Key ............................................ 284 Sorting the Main Menu ................................................................................................... 284 284 Using the Alarm Function ...................................................................................... 285 Managing Schedule .......................................................................................... Adding To Do List Entries ................................................................................. 288 289 Setting the Alarm Mode ...............................................................................
* The contents above differ from the actual ones in this manual. Multi access Multitask Holding down ch-key Alarm Schedule To Do list Alarm setting 2 This manual uses illustrations and marks to explain how to operate the function so that you can use the FOMA terminal correctly. Describes the function name. Describes the operation on each step. Describes the screen at the time of the operation. Compare it with the screen when you operate. Describes the items displayed on the screen (some items cannot be operated depending on the operation). Describes the explanation of each item. Using the Alarm Function
<Alarm>
You can store up to 10 alarms. 1 i LIFEKIT Alarm The Alarm list screen appears. To switch ON/OFF with the last settings Highlight the setting item p (ON/OFF) ON/OFF switches each time you press p. To check the previous settings Select the setting item The Alarm detail screen appears. Alarm list Function menu p.284 Alarm detail 2 Highlight the item to set o (Edit) 3 Select any item:
Edit titleEnters the title of the alarm. You can enter up to 6 double-byte or 12 single-byte characters. Time settingEnters the time at which the alarm will sound. RepeatSelects the alarm repetitions from 1 time/Daily (
)/Select day (
). Alarm toneSelects the alarm tone from clock alarm tone or folders of melody, i-motion, music, etc. VolumeSets the alarm tone volume with c. Snooze settingSpecifies whether a snooze
(repeating) alarm is set or not. ONEnter the number of times for ringing (01 to 10 times) and the ringing interval (01 to 10 minutes). The alarm tone (about 1 minute) rings repeatedly for the set number of times in the set interval. OFFEnter the ringing time (01 to 10 minutes). Sounds the alarm tone continuously for the specified time. Auto power ONSpecifies whether the FOMA terminal is automatically turned on or not when the time for an alarm is reached. 4 Set the respective items o (Finish) N When the FOMA terminal is automatically turned on to notify you of an alarm, if you set a melody, i-motion or music downloaded from sites as alarm tone, the Clock Alarm Tone is played. Before entering an area such as an aircraft or hospital where there is electronic equipment that uses extremely precise control systems or very low signal levels and the use of mobile phones is prohibited, set the Auto power ON setting to OFF and then turn the FOMA terminal off. Alarm list screen (p.284)/Alarm detail screen (p.284) EditEdits the alarm. Display detail*Displays the alarm contents. Set thisActivates the alarm. Release thisDisables one alarm. Release allDisables all set alarms.
* : Available only with the Alarm list screen. Managing Schedule
<Schedule>
If you add an event to your schedule, an alarm tone sounds at the specified date and time and the FOMA terminal displays an animation and message notifying you of the details stored for the event. You can also add holidays and anniversaries. Stored scheduled events and holidays can be quickly checked on the FOMA terminals calendar. You can switch the calendar display mode between 1-month and 1-week to view the number or details of scheduled or To Do list events for a given day. The FOMA terminal supports from January 1, 2004 to December 31, 2037. Adding schedule entries You can organize your schedule in variety of ways, such as storing regularly scheduled events such as weekly meetings on a set day every week or setting alarm tones and animations that match the scheduled event. i C o n v e n e n t F u n c t i o n s Continued on next page 284
* The contents above differ from the actual ones in this manual. Describes the necessary settings, notes or useful information about the function. The function menu title is described with the icon of the function menu and the screen name on which the function menu is displayed. You can search the chapters using the index. Page number Indicates that the descriptions go on to the next page.
The screens shown as examples in this manual are displayed when English is set for (Select language). Set English for (Select language) in advance.p.45
To view a sample screen easily, this manual adopts the color setting to white as background and black as font with Stand-by display set to OFF. In addition, Style is set to 24th clock and Size is set to Big as the main clock description.
Descriptions are basically based on the default settings, and screens displayed on the FOMA terminal may differ from the descriptions in this manual.
A screen is used as an image in this manual. Some screens are zoomed in for explanation. Therefore they may differ from the actual ones.
In this manual, Osaifu-Keitai i-ppli compatible with IC card function is described as Osaifu-Keitai i-ppli.
In the operation explanation in this manual, simple key illustrations are used to indicate the operation to press the key. 3 Easy Search Easy Search Find out a function with easy words from the Easy Search index below. Useful functions for talking p.46 Show/Hide your caller ID Switch voice/videophone call during call Adjust the volume during a call Hold the current call p.61 p.62 Holding Caller ID Notification p.50 Volume When you cannot answer incoming call Hold the ringing call without answering Notify that you cannot answer the call p.62 On hold p.62 Public mode (Driving mode) p.63 Public mode (Power OFF) Have your party record voice/videophone message p.64 Record message Change melody or illumination p.82 p.77 Ring volume Adjust the ring volume p.61 Set ring tone to specify party Change ring tone Set vibration to notify incoming call or mail Mute keypad tone Set silent mode Change illumination color or pattern Select ring tone Keypad sound Manner mode p.86 p.85 p.92 Ring tone/Image p.84 Vibrator Change/Understand display Display p.27 Mark (icon) on the display Switch menu display p.33 Change standby screen (wallpaper) Display calendar on the standby screen Change font size Simple Menu p.93 Font p.88 p.89 Illumination set Display setting
E a s y S e a r c h C o n t e n t s P r e c a u t i o n s
4 Master mail Send Deco-mail p.158 Send image or melody Sort and save mail automatically p.160 Deco-mail Attach file p.174 Auto-sort Master camera Change the size of image to shoot Display the shot Save image on the microSD card p.225 My picture p.122 p.249 Use your phone without worries Lock the FOMA terminal remotely when lost Prevent others from viewing the phonebook Reject unidentified calls Reject calls from callers who are not stored in phonebook Save data such as phonebook in case of loss of data Call setting w/o ID p.103 p.101 p.114
E a s y S e a r c h C o n t e n t s P r e c a u t i o n s
Omakase Lock*1 Secret mode/Secret data only mode p.114 Reject unknown p.115 Data Security Service*2
*1: Omakase Lock is a pay service.
*2: Data Security Service is a pay service you need to apply for. (i-mode subscription is necessary to apply for this service.) Master 1seg p.210 Active 1Seg Watch 1seg Record 1seg Program 1seg Change TV/sound settings p.213 p.214 Record 1seg Booking program list/Timer recording list p.215 User settings Miscellaneous p.267 p.243 p.129 Bar code reader Read QR code or bar code Use microSD card Exchange information with PC or other FOMA terminal Listen to music Use alarm p.284 Use as calculator Use FOMA terminal overseas Update for the latest software p.377 Update for the latest security settings Music Player/Music&Video Channel Software Update p.295 p.331 p.383 Calculator Alarm Scanning function p.255 p.260 Infrared data exchange/iC communication OBEX connection For mode information about other operation guides, see How to refer to this manual.p.1 Also, Quick Manual instructs you how to operate the functions used often.p.408 5
E a s y S e a r c h C o n t e n t s P r e c a u t i o n s
How to Refer to This Manual ..................................................1 Easy Search ...........................................................................4 Contents .................................................................................6 Feature Preview of the FOMA SO706i ...................................8 Mastering the FOMA SO706i!...............................................10 Precautions...........................................................................12 Handling with Care ...............................................................18 Intellectual Property Right.....................................................20 Package Contents ................................................................22 aNames and functions aHow to view the display aSelecting the menu aBasic operations aFOMA card (UIM) aAttaching/Removing the battery pack aCharging aTurning on the FOMA terminal aInitial setting aSet time aCaller ID notification, etc. aMaking a voice/videophone call aSwitching between voice/videophone calls aHands-free aRedial/Received calls aChaku-moji aWORLD CALL aReceiving a voice/videophone call aVolume aRing volume aAnswer hold aPublic mode (Driving mode/Power off) aRecord message aVideophone settings, etc. aAdd to phonebook aGroup setting aSearch phonebook aEditing/deleting phonebook entries aRing tone/Image aChoku-Den aData Security Service, etc. aRing tone aVibrator aManner mode aDisplay setting aShield veiw aBacklight aDisplay design aChanging menu display aIndicator display aIllumination set aKisekae Tool, etc. aSecurity code aPIN code aDial lock aOmakase Lock aSecret mode aSecret folder aOriginal lock aKeypad lock aIC card authentication aSide key guard aSelf mode, etc. aPhoto mode aMovie mode aSettings for shooting aBar code reader aText reader, etc. aWhat is i-mode? aViewing sites aHow to view sites and operations ai-mode password aInternet access aBookmark aPhone To/AV Phone To Mail To Web To Media To aDownloading i-motion aUsing i-Channel, etc. aWhat is i-mode mail? aComposing/Sending i-mode mail aDeco-mail aAttaching files aReceiving mails aCheck new messages aReplying/Forwarding mails aSaving attached files aUsing mail boxes aMail Setting aMessage service aWhat is Early Warning Area Mail?
aSMS, etc. aWhat is an i-ppli? aDownloading an i-ppli aLaunching an i-ppli aPre-installed software ai-ppli standby screen aUpgrading an i-ppli, etc. Contents Before Using the Handset p.23 Voice/Videophone Calls p.47 Phonebook p.69 Sound/Screen/Light Settings p.81 Security Settings p.99 Camera p.117 i-mode/i-motion/
i-Channel p.135 Mail p.155 i-ppli p.185 6 aWhat is Osaifu-Keitai? aWhat is iC transfer service?
aUsing Osaifu-Keitai aWhat is ToruCa? aAcquiring ToruCa aViewing ToruCa aIC card lock, etc. aWhat is 1seg? aChannel setting aViewing 1seg aData broadcasting aBooking program/Timer recording a1seg settings, etc. aDisplaying website designed for PC aFull Browser settings, etc. Osaifu-Keitai/
ToruCa p.201 1seg p.207 Full Browser p.217 Data Display/Edit/
Management aData box aStill image aMovie/i-motion aPlaying video aChara-den aMelody aKisekae Tool amicroSD card aMovable contents aUIM operation aInfrared data exchange/iC communication aViewing PDF data aViewing documents, etc. aWhat is Music&Video Channel? aDownloading Chaku-Uta-Full aPlaying music aUsing playlist aUsing the Music Player, etc.
* Chaku-Uta-Full is a registered trademark of Sony Music Entertainment (Japan) Inc. p.223 Music&Video Channel/Music Playback p.267 Convenient Functions p.281 Character Entry p.301 Network Services p.311 PC Connection p.325 Overseas Use p.331 Appendix/External Devices/
Troubleshooting p.339 Index/Quick Manual aIndex aQuick Manual p.395 aMulti access aMultitask aAlarm aSchedule aTo Do list aAlarm setting aMy profile aChecking Call data aCalculator aText memo aDictionary aEarphone/microphone with switch aReset settings aInitialize, etc. aCharacter entry a5-touch input aFixed common phrases aCopying/cutting/pasting text aOwn dictionary aClear learning record aDownload dictionary a2-touch, etc. aVoice Mail service aCall Waiting aCall Forwarding service aNuisance Call Blocking aCaller ID Request service aDual Network Service a2in1, etc. aData communication available for the FOMA terminal, etc.
* The details are described in Manual for PC Connection (PDF format) in the provided CD-ROM. aWORLD WING aAvailable overseas service aChecking before using overseas aMaking/Receiving a call abroad aNW search mode, etc. aMenu function list aCharacter assignment to dial keys aSymbols/pictographs/face marks/fixed common phrases list aMulti access/Multitask combination patterns aOptions/Accessories aTroubleshooting aSoftware Update aSpecifications, etc. aQuick Manual (For Overseas Use)
E a s y S e a r c h C o n t e n t s P r e c a u t i o n s
7
E a s y S e a r c h C o n t e n t s P r e c a u t i o n s
Feature Preview of the FOMA SO706i FOMA is the name of DOCOMOs service based on the W-CDMA system approved as one of the global standards for third-generation mobile telecommunication systems (IMT-2000). i-mode i-mode is an online service that you can use to send e-mail as well as using the useful information from the i-mode menu site (program) and i-mode compatible website. Features of SO706i Chaku-Uta-Full/Uta-hodai/Music&Video Channel*/Video clip pp.272, 267, 151
*: This is a pay service you need to apply for. You can download the entire track (Chaku-Uta-Full) and use another service (Uta-hodai) that you can download the entire track as many as you want with fixed monthly charge. Music&Video Channel is also available, that you can enjoy the music/video programs downloaded by the automatic operation at night time only by setting it beforehand. The FOMA terminal also supports i-motion up to 10M bytes, you can enjoy music clips of the entire track or video clips. Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa pp.195, 201 By downloading an Osaifu-Keitai i-ppli, you can transmit electric money from the site into the IC card in your FOMA terminal or check the accountant balance or transaction history. The i-ppli of the DOCOMO credit service DCMX is pre-installed in your FOMA terminal. iC transfer service is also supported so that you can easily move your IC card data to a new terminal when replacing your FOMA terminal. ToruCa can be acquired via a reader/writer unit or websites and easily exchanged via mail or Infrared data exchange. Kisekae Tool p.97 Favorite standby screen or menu screen can be replaced at a time. SO706i enables the change of menu sequence in high use and customization of the menu screen to your favor. i-mode mail/Deco-mail/Deco-mail pictograph pp.156, 158 In addition to the message body, you can attach pictures or video clips. As the FOMA terminal is compatible with Deco-mail/Deco-mail pictograph, you can change the character color, size, or background color of the message body or insert images or moving pictographs. International roaming p.332 The FOMA terminal, phone number and mail address you use in Japan are also available overseas (GSM/3G areas). You can use voice call, videophone call, i-mode, i-mode mail, SMS and network services. High-speed communication The data is received at the maximum speed of 3.6 Mbps and sent at the maximum speed of 384 kbps in the FOMA high speed communication area.
* 3.6M bps and 384K bps are maximum values on technical standards, and the actual communication speed varies depending on the network congestion or environment. When out of FOMA HIGH-SPEED area or connecting to an access point such as mopera incompatible with HIGH-SPEED, data are sent and received at 384K bps max. Mega i-ppli/Chokkan game (touchy-feely p.185 game) You can automatically receive updated stock prices, weather information, etc., and play games. As the FOMA terminal supports chokkan games, you can enjoy touchy-
feely operations when playing games by waving/shaking the handset or talking. 8
E a s y S e a r c h C o n t e n t s P r e c a u t i o n s
Wide variety of functions p.92 Colorful illuminations 3 lamps, 11 patterns and 20 color combinations offer favorites illuminations. Time signal can be received using illumination. Style-Up panel Style-Up panel is adopted. You can enjoy changing the optional panel to your moods. Also, it is available to download panel-fit Kisekae Tool from PlayNow by SO. POBox Pro and handy text entry p.301 The prediction conversion function POBox Pro
(Predictive Operation Based On eXample Pro) is installed. Pressing g for 1 second or longer moves the candidates in POBOx on a line basis and selects a target word. Press and hold the dial keys and you can switch the character assigned to the dial keys consecutively such as abcABC. Stand-by books Flash contents with a difference are preinstalled. Every time you open the standby screen, various information such as bits of knowledge, general knowledge and picture books appear. Select your favorite contents from DATA BOXMy picturePre-installed and set it to the standby screen for your enjoyment. Contents useful when traveling overseas p.89 pp.89, 298 Contains Flash content TalkMan useful for foreign language conversation. The content can be downloaded from PlayNow by SO. Also contains
(Chikyu-no Arukikata) and (World Heritage) as stand-by books, supporting overseas travel. Dictionary Japanese, English-Japanese and Japanese-English dictionaries are available. p.296 p.117 Wide scale display The approximately 2.8-inch high-resolution display is adopted. This recreates the still images or videos in bright and vivid colors. Camera Use the camera with the effective pixels 2 million
(maximum recorded pixels 1.9 million) to take 2M (1,200 1,600) pictures. microSD card Your FOMA terminal supports the microSD card where you can copy data such as phonebook entries, mail messages and images from the FOMA terminal storage and view them on the display. Connecting the FOMA terminal with PC enables you to use it as a reader/writer for the microSD card. p.217 Full Browser You can access websites for PC to view more information. PDF viewer/Document viewerpp.261, 263
With the PDF viewer, you can easily view useful pp.243, 252 information such as map, catalogue or time table on your i-mode terminal.
The document viewer allows you to view Microsoft Word, Microsoft Excel and Microsoft PowerPoint files. control Infrared data exchange or Infrared remote pp.257, 261 You can exchange data with other FOMA terminals using infrared communication. You can also operate the devices such as a TV which supports the infrared remote control. Multi access/Multitask You can use voice phone, packet communication and SMS simultaneously (Multi access). You can activate multiple functions and use them simultaneously by switching them (Multitask). pp.282, 283 Security Omakase Lock p.102 You can lock your FOMA terminal if you lost it, and cancel lock on your request. For inquiries, see the back cover of this manual.
* Omakase Lock service is charged. However, it shall be free of charge when you subscribe to this service at the same time or during the period that you suspend the subscription of the FOMA terminal.
* Omakase Lock is a service to lock the FOMA terminal at the subscribers request. If the subscriber and user are different, the FOMA terminal may be locked on the subscribers request. p.115 Data Security Service Back up the Phonebook and other data on your FOMA terminal at Data Center on the i-mode network to be able to smoothly restore data if you lose your FOMA terminal, etc. You can edit or manage data stored at Data Center using a PC and restore edited data on the FOMA terminal.
* For precautions and usage instructions on Data Security Service, see Mobile Phone Users Guide
[i-mode] FOMA version. For inquiries, see the back of this manual.
* This is a pay service you need to subscribe to.
Voice Mail (charged)*
Call Waiting (charged)*
Call Forwarding (free)*
*: You need to apply for. Wide variety of network services (p.311)
Nuisance Call Blocking (free)
Caller ID Request (free)
Dual Network (charged)*
English Guidance (free)
Multi Number (charged)*
2in1(charged)*
9
E a s y S e a r c h C o n t e n t s P r e c a u t i o n s
Mastering the FOMA SO706i!
Send and receive real-time movie while talking Videophonep.49 You can talk to the other party seeing images. Your FOMA terminal is set to emit other party's voice through the speaker by default so that you can start talking immediately when making or answering a call. Furthermore, you can change the call mode from voice to videophone without having to end the call.
* FOMA SO706i does not contain front camera. A substitute image (Chara-den) or rear camera image will be sent to the other party. Image at the Image at the other side other side Image at your Image at your side side Digital terrestrial TV service 1segp.207 Enjoy viewing 1seg (mobile digital terrestrial TV service). View subtitles or data broadcast, or record programs you are viewing. Program booking and timer recording are also supported. The telop appears on the standby screen when the latest information is distributed i-Channelp.153 You can receive news or weather report as graphical information. You can also select optional channels on the channel list screen to receive rich, detailed information which was created by Flash (more detailp.140).
* This is a pay service you need to apply for. p Connect Notify the arrival of your phone call with an animation before answering Chaku-mojip.55 When calling someone, you can show a message on the screen of the other partys phone. The other party can see your business or feeling from the message before answering the call. Chaku-moji 10
E a s y S e a r c h C o n t e n t s P r e c a u t i o n s
Use 2 phone numbers and e-mail addresses for your FOMA terminal 2in1p.320 You can separately use 2 phone numbers and 2 mail addresses on your FOMA terminal as if you have 2 terminals. You can manage the data in your FOMA terminal, such as Phonebook, Mail boxes, Dialed calls or standby screen, separately in A mode and B mode, or all together of A/B mode in Dual mode.
* Subscription is required (Charged). Napster compatible Music Playerp.277 Napster service provides you of copying songs downloaded from sites or on music CDs to the microSD card using a PC and play music on the FOMA terminal. Since Chaku-Uta-Full is supported, you can download the entire track from an online music distribution site to play it. Other functions include BGM playback, which allows you to listen to music while you use other functions, display of album cover images and lyric sheets, and creation of the playlist on the FOMA terminal. You can also play the i-motion and use Music&Video Channel that downloads the specified program automatically during the night. Set display design simultaneously Kisekae Tool/Direct Menup.97 A mode B mode Phone number: 090-AAAA-AAAA Mail address: xxA@docomo.ne.jp Phonebook: For A mode Phone number: 090-BBBB-BBBB Mail address: xxB@docomo.ne.jp Phonebook: For B mode Make a call/send a mail in A mode A mode Dual mode Make a call/send a mail in B mode B mode Phonebook A Mail box A Dialed/received calls A Voice mail A Phonebook A/B Mail box A/B Dialed/received calls A/B Voice mail A/B Phonebook B Mail box B Dialed/received calls B Voice mail B Music CD Music distribution website microSD card FOMA terminal Connect the flat-plug stereo earphone (optional). You can use the FOMA terminal as a portable audio player. Installed (Direct menu) allows you to access often-used functions/
services easily. Menus are categorized into 4 and located vertically and horizontally. LAST10 button is located at the center and automatically displays 10 previously-used functions/
services. The 5 categories link to the multi-function key, and are easy to memorize and operate. h: SERVICES (Mail, i-mode, i-ppli, Full Browser, Osaifu-Keitai, 1seg, etc.) j: TOOLS (Alarm, Caluculator, Text memo, Schedule, Receive Ir data, etc.) g: SETTINGS (Settings, Network services, My profile) f: DATABOX (My picture, etc.) d: LAST10 (10 previously-used menu items appear)
* Functions are stored at the time of purchase. Menus 11 Safety Precautions are explained in the following categories:
1. Handling the FOMA terminal, Battery Pack, Adapter (including the Charger) and FOMA card (Common) ........................................... 12 2. Handling the FOMA terminal ..................... 13 3. Handling the Battery Pack ......................... 15 4. Handling the Adapter (including the Charger)....................................................... 16 5. Handling the FOMA card (UIM).................. 17 6. Handling Mobile Phones near Electronic Medical Equipment ..................................... 17 1. Handling the FOMA terminal, Battery Pack, Adapter
(including the Charger) and FOMA card (Common) Dont DANGER Do not use, keep or leave the devices in locations subject to high temperatures, such as near the fire or heater, in direct sunlight or inside a car on a hot day. This may cause the battery pack to leak, overheat, explode or ignite, cause the devices to malfunction or be deformed, or suffer performance loss and a reduced service life. Also, this may cause a part of the case to become hot and burn you. Do not disassemble or rebuild. Also, do not solder the devices. This may cause fire, injury, electric shock or malfunction. This also may cause the battery pack to leak, overheat, explode or ignite. No liquids Do not wet the devices. Exposing the FOMA terminal and other devices to liquids such as water or pet urine may cause overheating, electric shock, fire, malfunction, injury, etc. Be careful where and how you use the devices.
E a s y S e a r c h C o n t e n t s P r e c a u t i o n s
Precautions
(ALWAYS FOLLOW THESE DIRECTIONS) To ensure that you use your FOMA terminal correctly, read the Precautions carefully before use. Keep this manual after reading for future reference. The precautions must be observed at all times since they contain the information intended to prevent the bodily injuries or the damage to the property. The following symbols indicate the different degrees of injuries and damage that may occur if the information provided is not observed and the FOMA terminal is used incorrectly:
Indicates that the death or serious bodily injury may result directly and immediately from the improper use. Indicates that the death or serious bodily injury may result from the improper use. DANGER WARNING Indicates that the bodily injury and/
or damage to the property may result from the improper use. CAUTION The following symbols indicate the specific directions:
Indicates that it is prohibited. No disassembly Indicates that it must not be disassembled. Indicates that you must not touch it with your wet hand. Indicates that it must not be used near the water, which means that you must not wet it. Indicates that you must do it following the instructions. Indicates that you must unplug the power code from the outlet. Dont No disassembly No wet hands No liquids Do Unplug 12 Do Dont Dont Dont Do Do Use the battery pack and adapter
(including the charger) specified by NTT DOCOMO for the FOMA terminal. Using the devices other than those specified by NTT DOCOMO Group may cause the FOMA terminal, battery pack and other devices to leak, overheat, explode, ignite or malfunction. Battery Pack SO03 Desktop Holder SO11 FOMA AC Adapter 01/02 FOMA DC Adapter 01/02 FOMA AC Adapter 01 for Global use FOMA Dry Battery Adapter 01 FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 FOMA Portable Charging Adapter 01
* For the information on other compatible products, contact the NTT DOCOMO shop or service counter. WARNING Do not place the FOMA terminal, battery pack, adapters (including the charger) or FOMA card in cooking appliances such as microwave ovens or in a pressure cooker. This may cause the battery pack to leak, overheat, explode or ignite, cause the FOMA terminal or adapter (including the charger) to overheat, smoke or ignite, or damage the IC. Do not shock or throw the FOMA terminal. This may cause the battery pack to leak, overheat, explode or ignite, or cause the devices to malfunction or ignite. Keep the conductive foreign materials
(metal, pencil lead, etc.) away from the charge terminal or external connector. Do not insert those matters inside. This may result in the short-circuit causing the FOMA terminal to ignite or malfunction. Turn off the FOMA terminal, when you are near the flammable gas such as at the gas station. Do not also charge. It may cause to ignite to the gas. Turn off the FOMA terminal, when you use Osaifu-keitai at the gas station (if IC card lock is set, turn the FOMA Terminal off after lock is released). If you find extraordinary happenings, such as an unusual odor, overheating, discoloration or deformation during the use, charge or storage, make sure to:
1. Unplug the power code from the power outlet or the cigar lighter outlet. 2. Turn off the FOMA terminal. 3. Remove the battery pack from the FOMA terminal. Continuing to use or charge the FOMA terminal may cause it to overheat, explode, ignite or leak of battery.
E a s y S e a r c h C o n t e n t s P r e c a u t i o n s
Dont Dont Do Do Do CAUTION Do not leave the FOMA terminal on a slope or unstable surface. This may fall the FOMA terminal and cause the injury or malfunction. Keep the FOMA terminal away from the humid, dusty or hot places. This may cause malfunction. If your child uses the FOMA terminal, instruct him/her how to use it. Make sure that he/she always uses the FOMA terminal correctly as you instruct. Improper usage could result in the bodily injury. Keep the FOMA terminal out of young childrens reach. A young child may swallow it or suffer from the injury. Pay a special attention when you use the FOMA terminal connected to the adapter
(including the charger) for a long duration. If you use i-ppli or videophone or view 1seg for a long time while charging the FOMA terminal, the temperature of the FOMA terminal, battery pack or adapter (including charger) may rise. If you touch the warm part of these devices for a long period of time, it may cause redness, itch, skin irritation, or burns depending on your constitution or physical condition. 2. Handling the FOMA terminal Dont Dont Dont WARNING Do not direct the infrared data port towards your or another persons eyes. This may cause the eye injury. Do not aim or direct the infrared data port towards another infrared device as this may interfere with the operation of the device. Do not put the FOMA terminal on the dashboard, etc. as a problem may occur due to air bag inflation. The air bag inflation may cause the FOMA terminal to hit you or another person, which may lead to injury, malfunction, breakage, etc. If you are wearing electronic medical equipment, do not put the FOMA terminal in your breast pocket or in the inside pocket. Using the FOMA terminal in close proximity to electronic medical equipment may cause the equipment to malfunction. Continued on next page 13
E a s y S e a r c h C o n t e n t s P r e c a u t i o n s
Dont Do not put fluids such as water or objects such as pieces of metal or flammable materials into the FOMA card inserting slots or microSD card slots inside of the FOMA terminal. Such actions could cause fire, electric shock or malfunction. Turn off the FOMA terminal in a place where it is prohibited to use the mobile phone, such as in an airplane or in a hospital. This may affect the electric or medical equipment. If the FOMA terminal is set with the Auto power function, make sure to disable the function before turning off the FOMA terminal. Follow the instructions provided by the medical facility about using the mobile phone. If you use the phone in an airplane, which is prohibited, you may be punished by law. Make sure to hold the FOMA terminal off your ear and keep enough distance from it when you talk in the handsfree mode. When you also play games or music with an earphone-microphone connected to the FOMA terminal, adjust the volume properly. If the volume is too high, it may cause an auditory disturbance. Also, it may cause an accident if you have difficulty in hearing the sound of your surroundings. If you have a weak heart, take precautions when setting the Vibrator or Ring volume. This may affect your heart. If you hear thunder while using the FOMA terminal outdoors, immediately turn off the FOMA terminal and take shelter in a safe location. There is a risk of being struck by the lightning and suffering an electric shock. Turn off the FOMA terminal near the electric equipment using the high-
precision control or weak signals. This may interfere with the operation of sensitive electronic equipment.
* Take great care on the following electric devices:
Hearing aids, implantable cardiac pacemakers, implantable cardioverter-defibrillators, and other electronic medical equipment, fire alarms, automatic doors and other equipment controlled by electronic signals. If you use an implantable cardiac pacemaker, implantable cardioverter-defibrillator or other electronic medical equipment, contact the respective manufacturer or vendor to check whether the operation of the equipment is affected by radio waves. Do Do Do Do Do 14 Do Dont Dont Dont Dont Dont Dont If the display or camera lens is broken, be careful of the broken glass and the inside of exposed FOMA terminal. The surface of the display or camera lens is covered by a plastic panel to minimize the possibility of glass scattering. However, touching the broken or exposed parts cause the injury. CAUTION Do not swing the FOMA terminal by its strap or other parts. The FOMA terminal may strike you or others around you, resulting in body injury, malfunction or damage to the FOMA terminal or other property. When you use the motion tracking, be sure to confirm surrounding safety, grasp the FOMA terminal firmly and do not swing the FOMA terminal more than the necessity. Motion tracking is a function to operate the FOMA terminal by inclining and shaking it. It hits the person and others because of the shake too much, and there is a possibility of causing a serious accident and damage. With metallic straps or other metallic objects in the FOMA terminal and applying the motion tracking, be sure to not hit the person or others. It causes injury, malfunction or breakage. Do not let the FOMA terminal come close to or sandwich magnetic cards, etc. between the FOMA terminal. The magnetic data stored on cash cards, credit cards, telephone cards, floppy disks, etc. may be erased. Do not let the FOMA terminal come close to magnetism. If strong magnetism is brought close, operation may fail. If the display is broken and the liquid crystal leaks, do not take it in, draw it in or put it on your skin. If the liquid crystal comes into your eyes or mouth, immediately rinse your eyes or mouth with clean water and see a doctor. If the liquid crystal adheres to your skin or clothing, immediately wipe it off with alcohol and rinse it off with water and soap. It may cause a loss of eyesight or damage your skin. When the FOMA terminal plays the ring tone or plays a melody, do not bring the speaker close to your ear. It may cause a hearing defect. Dont
E a s y S e a r c h C o n t e n t s P r e c a u t i o n s
Do Do In some types of vehicle, using the FOMA terminal in the vehicle may interfere with the operation of the vehicles electronic equipment. Do not use the FOMA terminal if the terminal may impair the safe driving. Using the FOMA terminal may cause skin irritations such as itch, rashes or eczema. If this occurs, immediately stop using the FOMA terminal and see a doctor. Metal components are used for the following parts. Material PC resin Parts Multifunction key Sidekeys Illumination parts Camera parts ABS resin Hinge parts Charging terminal
(contact terminal for desktop holder) Nickel Phosphorus bronze Finish Aluminum deposition + UV coating Tin deposition +
UV coating Tin deposition +
UV coating Chromium plating Nickel + Gold plate Take care not to pinch your finger or strap when opening or folding the FOMA terminal. It cause injury or breakage. When viewing 1seg programs, keep a proper distance from the display in a bright place. Failure to observe this precaution may cause visual deterioration. Do Do 3. Handling the Battery Pack Refer to the information shown on the battery pack label to check the type of battery pack you have. Display Li-ion00 Battery type Lithium-ion Dont Dont Dont Do Dont Do Do Do DANGER Do not let wire or other metals touch the terminal. Also, do not carry or store the battery pack with metallic necklaces, etc. This may cause the battery pack to leak, overheat, explode or ignite. Dont Dont If you have difficulty in attaching the battery pack to the FOMA terminal, do not use the excessive pressure to force the battery into place. Check that the battery pack is facing in the correct direction before you try to attach it. This may cause the battery pack to leak, overheat, explode or ignite. Do not throw the battery pack into a fire. This may cause the battery pack to leak, overheat, explode or ignite. Do not puncture the battery pack, hit it with a hammer or step on it. This may cause the battery pack to leak, overheat, explode or ignite. If battery fluid comes into your eyes, do not rub your eyes but immediately rinse your eyes with clean water and see a doctor. This may result in loss of eyesight. WARNING If a battery pack malfunction is found due to an external shock such as deformation or damage by a fall, immediately stop using the FOMA terminal. This may cause the battery pack to leak, overheat, explode or ignite, or cause the devices to malfunction or ignite. If the battery pack is not fully charged after the specified charging time has elapsed, stop charging. This may cause the battery pack to leak, overheat, explode or ignite. If the battery pack leaks or emits an unusual odor, stop using it immediately and move it away from any flame or fire. The battery fluid is flammable and could ignite, causing a fire or explosion. Be sure that your pet doesnt bite to the battery pack. This may cause the battery pack to leak, overheat, explode or ignite, or cause the devices to malfunction or ignite. CAUTION Do not dispose of used battery packs with ordinary garbage. This causes a fire and constitute an environmental hazard. Apply insulation tape to the terminal of used battery pack and return it to the NTT DOCOMO shop or service counter, or dispose the battery pack in accordance with your local regulations. Continued on next page 15 Do not charge the wet battery pack. This causes the battery pack to overheat, ignite, or explode. Do not touch the power cords of the adapter (including charger) or the power outlet with wet hands. This may cause an electric shock. No wet hands
E a s y S e a r c h C o n t e n t s P r e c a u t i o n s
Dont Do If battery fluid comes into contact with your skin or clothing, stop using the FOMA terminal immediately and rinse it off with clean water. Battery fluid is harmful to your skin. 4. Handling the Adapter
(including the Charger) WARNING Do not use the adapter (including charger) of which the cord or power cord is damaged. This may cause electric shock, overheat or fire. Do not use the AC adapter or desktop holder in humid locations such as bathroom. This may cause an electric shock. The DC adapter must be used only for vehicles with a negative ground. Do not use the adapter in positively grounded vehicles. This may cause a fire. Do not touch the FOMA terminal, adapter
(including charger) when you hear a crash of thunder. There is a risk of being struck by the lightning and suffering an electric shock. Do not short-circuit the charging terminal when the adapter or charger is plugged to the power outlet or the socket in a vehicle. Also, do not let the charging terminal contact with your body (hand, finger, etc.). This may cause fire, malfunction, electric shock or injury. Place the charger or desktop holder on a stable surface during charging. Also, do not cover or wrap the charger or desktop holder with clothing or bedding. This may cause the FOMA terminal to fall out of the charger or heat to build up, resulting in a fire or malfunction. Do not put heavy objects on the power cord of the adapter (including charger). This may cause electric shock or fire. Dont Dont Dont Dont Dont Dont Dont 16 Use the specified power supply and voltage. Using the adapters with incorrect voltage may cause a fire or malfunction. Use the AC adapter for global use to charge the terminal overseas. AC adapter: AC 100V DC adapter:
DC12V/24V (specific to vehicle with negative ground) AC Adapter for global use:
100V to 240V AC (should be plugged to AC power outlet for home use only) If the fuse in the DC adapter blows, always replace it with the specified type of fuse. Using the unspecified fuse may cause a fire or malfunction. Refer to the respective manuals for the information on the specified fuse. Wipe off any dust on the plug. This may cause a fire. When plugging the AC adapter into a power outlet, make sure that no metallic straps or other metallic objects are caught between the plug and the socket. This may result in an electric shock, short-circuit or fire. Always grasp the plug when unplugging the adapter or charger from the power outlet or cigar lighter socket. Do not pull the cord itself. Pulling the cord may damage the cord and cause an electric shock or fire. Do Do Do Do Do Unplug the power code from the power outlet when it will be left unused for a long period. This may cause electrical shock, fire or malfunction. If any water or other liquid gets into the adapter or charger, immediately unplug it from the power outlet or socket. This may cause an electric shock, smoke emission or fire. Unplug Unplug Unplug the adapter or charger from the power outlet or cigar lighter socket before cleaning. This may cause an electric shock. Unplug
E a s y S e a r c h C o n t e n t s P r e c a u t i o n s
Do Do If you use an implantable cardiac pacemaker or implantable cardioverter-
defibrillator, keep the FOMA terminal at least 22 cm away from the devices. Radio waves may affect the operation of implantable cardiac pacemakers or implantable cardioverter-defibrillators. If you use the electronic medical equipment other than implantable cardiac pacemakers or implantable cardioverter-defibrillators out of the medical facility due to the home treatment, etc,, consult the respective manufacturers for the information about the effects of radio waves on the equipment. Radio waves may affect the operations of the electronic medical equipment. 5. Handling the FOMA card CAUTION Be careful about a cut surface when dismounting the FOMA card (IC part). This may injure your hands or fingers. Do 6. Handling Mobile Phones near Electronic Medical Equipment The following precautions conform to the guidelines drawn up during the Electromagnetic Compatibility Conference Japan, regarding how to protect electronic medical equipment from radio waves emitted by mobile phones. WARNING Do Do Observe the following in hospitals or other medical facilities:
a Do not take your FOMA terminal into operating rooms, ICUs (Intensive Care Units) or CCUs (Coronary Care Units). a Turn off your FOMA terminal inside hospital wards. a Turn off the FOMA terminal even if you are in a hospital lobby when electronic medical equipments are in use nearby. a If a medical facility gives specific instructions prohibiting you from carrying or using mobile phones, follow those instructions. a If the FOMA terminal is set with the Auto power function, make sure to disable the function before turning off the FOMA terminal. Turn off the FOMA terminal in crowded places such as rush-hour trains in case somebody nearby is using an implantable cardiac pacemaker or implantable cardioverter-defibrillator. Radio waves may affect the operation of implantable cardiac pacemakers or implantable cardioverter-defibrillators. 17
E a s y S e a r c h C o n t e n t s P r e c a u t i o n s
Handling with Care General Notes c Do not water the devices. The FOMA terminal, battery pack, adapter
(including the charger) and the FOMA card (UIM) are not water-proof. Do not use them in humid locations such as bathrooms, and avoid exposing them to rain. If you carry your FOMA terminal close to your skin, sweat may cause internal components to corrode and result in a malfunction. If the problem is found to be due to moisture, it will not be covered by the warranty and in some cases may be irreparable. Even if it can be fixed, you will be charged since the damage is not covered by the warranty. c Wipe with a soft, dry cloth (such as a cloth for glasses). aThe surface of the FOMA terminals LCD has a specific coating to improve the visibility of the color display. Rubbing the LCD of the FOMA terminal with a dry cloth to clean it may scratch the LCD surface. Handle the FOMA terminal carefully and clean it using a soft dry cloth (of a type used for eyeglasses). The LCD coating may peel off or stain if moisture or soiling is left on the surface for a long period. aNever use chemicals such as alcohol, thinners, benzene or detergents as these agents may erase the printing on the FOMA terminal or cause discoloration. c Occasionally clean the connection terminals with a dry cotton bud. Soiled connection terminals may result in poor connections and loss of power. Also, as it may cause insufficient charging, clean the terminal with a dry cloth or cotton bud when it is dirty. c Do not place the FOMA terminal near an air conditioning vent. Condensation may form due to rapid changes in temperature, and this may cause internal corrosion and malfunction. c Do not apply an excessive pressure or weight to the FOMA terminal and battery pack. Do not put the FOMA terminal in a bag filled with many objects or in the hip pocket of clothing as you sit down. This may result in faults or damage to the LCD, other internal components or battery pack. When an external device is connected to external connector, it may cause connecting breakage or malfunction. c Read the separate manuals supplied with the FOMA terminal, adapter and charger carefully. c Do not scrabble the display with metallic objects. This may cause scratch, malfunction or damage. 18 Handling the FOMA Terminal c Avoid using the FOMA terminal in extremely high or low temperatures. Use the FOMA card within a temperature range between 5C and 35C with humidity between 45%
and 85%. c Using the FOMA terminal close to ordinary phones, TVs or radios may affect the operation of such devices. Use the FOMA terminal away from such devices. c It is your responsibility to keep a separate record of all data stored on your FOMA terminal. Under no circumstances shall NTT DOCOMO be liable for any loss or damage to the data stored on your FOMA terminal. c When connecting an external device to the external connector (Earphone/microphone terminal), do not plug inclined in the connector or pull the code. This may cause malfunction or damage. c Do not fold the FOMA terminal with its strap caught between the folding parts. This may cause malfunction or damage. c It is normal for the FOMA terminal to become warm while being used or charged. It is not a malfunction and you can keep on using. c Do not leave the camera exposed to direct sunlight. This may discolor or burn the element. c Usually fit the external connector cap and microSD card slot cap before use. Failing to fit these covers may cause the FOMA terminal to malfunction due to the dust or water getting in. c Do not use FOMA terminal when the back cover is removed. This may cause of removing the battery pack, malfunction or damage. c Do not put a sticker with an extreme thickness, etc. on the face of the display or keys. This may cause malfunction. c Do not remove the microSD card or turn off the FOMA terminal when using the microSD card. Otherwise, loss of data or malfunction may result. Handling the Battery Pack c The battery pack is consumable. If the battery pack does not work for enough time even when it is fully charged, it is time to exchange it. Exchange it for a specified new battery pack. c Charge the battery pack within the proper ambient temperature range (5C to 35C). c Make sure to charge the battery when you use the FOMA terminal for the first time or if you have not used it for a long period of time.
E a s y S e a r c h C o n t e n t s P r e c a u t i o n s
c The available operating time of the battery pack depends on the conditions in which you use it and the condition of the battery pack itself. c When the life of the battery pack is near end, the battery pack may expand a little according to the usage condition, but this is not a malfunction. c Do not keep or leave the battery pack empty. The performance and life of the battery pack may be deteriorated. Handling the Adapter (including the Charger) c Charge the battery pack within the proper ambient temperature range (5C to 35C). c Do not charge the battery pack in the following places:
aIn a humid, dusty or shaky place aNear your home phone, TV or radio c It is normal for the adapter or charger to become warm while being charged. It is not a malfunction and you can keep on using. c Do not use the DC adapter to charge the battery pack when the car engine is not running. This may drain the car battery. c If you use an electrical outlet with a disconnection prevention mechanism, follow the instructions of the users manual of the outlet. c Do not shock the adapter or charger. Do not deform the charging terminal. This may cause malfunction. Handling the FOMA card c Do not apply unnecessary force to attach or remove the FOMA card. c It is normal for the FOMA card to become warm while being used. It is not a malfunction and you can keep on using. c The warranty does not cover damage caused by inserting the FOMA card into some other type of IC Card reader/writer. c Always keep the IC part clean. c Wipe with a soft, dry cloth (such as a cloth for glasses). c It is the users responsibility to keep a separate record of all data stored on your FOMA card. Under no circumstances shall NTT DOCOMO be liable for any loss or damage to the data stored on your FOMA terminal. c To preserve the environment, take discarded FOMA card to the NTT DOCOMO shop or service counter. c Avoid using the FOMA card in extremely high or low temperatures. c Do not damage, scratch, touch imprudently, or short circuit the IC. Otherwise, loss of data or malfunction may result. c Be careful not to drop the FOMA card or apply an impact to it. This may cause malfunction. c Do not bend the FOMA card or place a heavy object on it. This may cause malfunction. c Do not attach the FOMA card to the FOMA terminal with a label or sticker is pasted. This may cause malfunction. Handling the FeliCa Reader/Writer c The FeliCa reader/writer function of the FOMA terminal uses very weak radio waves that require no licensing of radio stations. c The 13.56MHz frequency band is used. If there is another reader/writer around, keep enough distance between the FOMA terminal and that reader/writer. Also, make sure that there is no radio equipment using the same frequency band nearby. Caution c Do not use the altered FOMA terminal. Using the altered device is a violation of the Radio Law. The FOMA terminal is certified to conform to technical regulations for specified radio equipments that are based on the Radio Law, and Technical Conformity Mark model name seal as the certification. If you remove the screw and alter inside of the FOMA terminal, the technical regulations conformity certification becomes invalid. Do not use the FOMA terminal with the certification invalid, as it is a violation of the Radio Law. is affixed on the c Be careful when you use the FOMA terminal while driving a vehicle. The penalty is imposed on using a mobile phone while driving. Unwillingly receiving a call, use the Hands-free to tell the caller that you will call back, then stop the car in a safe place before using the phone. c Use the FeliCa reader/writer function in Japan. The FeliCa reader/writer function of the FOMA terminal complies with radio standard in Japan. You may be punished if you use it overseas. c Use the IC card authentication function in Japan. The IC card authentication function of the FOMA terminal complies with radio standard in Japan and is certified. You may be punished if you use it overseas. 19 aEricle, Deco-e maker, Style-Up, Stand-by books, Shield View, and My Shortcut are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications Japan, Inc. aPlayNow is a trademark of Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB. aTALKMAN is a registered trademark of Sony Computer Entertainment, Inc. aPOBox and POBox Pro are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sony Corporation. aQuickTime is a registered trademark of Apple Inc., in the US and other countries. aMicrosoft, Windows, Windows Media and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. aNapster is a registered trademark of Napster, LLC. and/or its affiliates in the US and/or other countries. aQR code is a registered trademark of Denso Wave Inc. aJava and all Java-related trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of US Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States and other countries. aPowered By Mascot Capsule/Micro3D Edition MASCOT CAPSULE is a registered trademark of HI CORPORATION. aThe other company names and brand names described in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective companies. Others aThis product is licensed complying with MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfolio License, and you are permitted to use personally and for the nonprofit purpose in the following situations:
aTo record a movie based on the standard of MPEG-4 Visual (MPEG-4 Video) aTo play MPEG-4 Video recorded by the consumer engaged in the nonprofit activities aTo play MPEG-4 Video provided by the provider licensed by MPEG-LA When you use it for other purposes, such as promotion, in-house information and profit activity, contact the U.S. corporation MPEG LA, LLC. aFeliCa is a contactless IC card technology developed by Sony Corporation. FeliCa is a registered trademark of Sony Corporation. aPOBox technology has been developed by Sony Computer Science Laboratories, Inc. and Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications Japan, Inc.
E a s y S e a r c h C o n t e n t s P r e c a u t i o n s
Intellectual Property Right Copyright and Portrait Right It is prohibited to duplicate, modify or publicly transmit content such as text, images, music or software that was photographed using the FOMA terminal or downloaded from Internet website and that is subject to third-party copyright without the permission of the copyright folder, except where the duplication or quoting of the content for personal use is permitted under copyright law. It may be prohibited to shoot or record the stage performance, entertainment or exhibition even if it is for personal use. Shooting a photo of someone by the FOMA terminal without his or her permission, or displaying a photo of someone shot by the FOMA terminal on the website without his or her permission is a breach of portrait right. Trademarks aFOMA, mova, i-mode, i-ppli, i-ppli DX, i-motion, Deco-mail, Chaku-motion, Chara-den, ToruCa, mopera, mopera U, WORLD CALL, Dual Network, FirstPass, visualnet, V-live, i-Channel, DCMX, iD, Security Scan, i-shot, i-motion mail, i-area, Short Mail, WORLD WING, Public mode, DoPa, sigmarion, musea, IMCS, OFFICEED, 2in1, FOMA logo, i-mode logo, i-ppli logo, ToruCa logo, DCMX logo, iD logo and HIGH-SPEED logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of NTT DOCOMO, Inc. aFree Dial logo mark is a registered trademark of NTT Communications Corporation. aCatch Phone (Call Waiting service) is a registered trademark of Nippon Telegraph and Telephone Corporation. aMcAfee is registered trademarks or trademarks of McAfee, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the US and/or other countries. aG-GUIDE, G-GUIDE MOBILE and their logos are registered trademarks in Japan of U.S. Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or its affiliates. aPowered by JBlend Copyright 2002-
2008 Aplix Corporation. All rights reserved. JBlend and JBlend-related trademarks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Aplix Corporation in Japan and other countries. a is a registered trademark of FeliCa Networks, Inc. aThe microSD logo is a trademark. aMultitask is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation. 20
E a s y S e a r c h C o n t e n t s P r e c a u t i o n s
aContains Adobe Flash Lite and Adobe Reader LE technology by Adobe Systems Incorporated. Adobe Flash Lite Copyright 2003-2007 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved. Adobe Reader LE Copyright 1993-2007 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved. Adobe, Adobe Reader, Flash and Flash Lite are registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. aContent owners protect copyrighted intellectual properties by WMDRM (Windows Media digital rights management) technology. This product uses the WMDRM software to access WMDRM-
protected contents. If the WMDRM software is unable to protect contents, the content owners request Microsoft to disable the WMDRM function of the software for playing or copying protected contents. No contents other than protected ones are affected by disabling the function. Please note that, if downloading the license to use protected contents, Microsoft may include the revocation list in the license. Content owners may request upgrading of the WMDRM software when you access the contents. If rejecting the upgrade, contents requiring the upgrade cannot be accessed. aThis product contains NetFront Browser and NetFront Sync Client of ACCESS CO., LTD. ACCESS and NetFront are trademarks or registered trademarks of ACCESS CO., LTD. in Japan, the United States and other countries. Copyright 2008 ACCESS CO., LTD. All rights reserved. aThis product contains the module developed by Independent JPEG Group. aThis product contains NetFront Document Viewer as a document viewer function by ACCESS CO., LTD. ACCESS and NetFront are trademarks or registered trademarks of ACCESS CO., LTD. in Japan and/or other countries. aIrSimple, IrSS or IrSimpleShot are trademarks of Infrared Data Association. aThis product is equipped with IrFront by ACCESS CO,. LTD. as the infrared data exchange function. Copyright 1996-2008 ACCESS CO., LTD. ACCESS and IrFront are trademarks or registered trademarks of ACCESS CO., LTD. in Japan and/or other countries. aDialog Clarity and WOW technologies are industrialized based on the license from SRS Labs, Inc. Dialog Clarity, SRS, WOW and the symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. aThis product contains software licensed complying with GNU General Public License (GPL), GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL), etc. For more details, see readme.txt in the GPLLGPL folder on the bundled CD-ROM.
(readme.txt is only available in Japanese version.) aThis product is equipped with NetFront DTV Profile Wireless Edition as data broadcast BML browser by ACCESS CO., LTD. This product is equipped with Media:/media colon as broadcast content activation function by ACCESS CO., LTD. Copyright 1996-2008 ACCESS CO., LTD. ACCESS, NetFront and Media:/media colon are trademarks or registered trademarks of ACCESS CO., LTD. in Japan and/or other countries. aThis product is equipped with the font FontAvenue product by NEC Corporation. FontAvenue is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation. aGoogle and mobile Google map are registered trademarks of Google, Inc. a ATR-Trek Co.,Ltd. aThis product is equipped with GestureTek technology. Copyright 2006-2008, GestureTek, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Description of Windows aIn this manual, each OS (Japanese Edition) is described as follows:
Windows Vista stands for Windows Vista (Home Basic, Home Premium, Business, Enterprise, Ultimate).
Windows XP stands for Microsoft Windows XP Professional operating system or Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition operating system.
Windows 2000 stands for Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional operating system. 21
E a s y S e a r c h C o n t e n t s P r e c a u t i o n s
Package Contents
<Main Components>
FOMA SO706i
(Including the warranty and Back Cover SO12) Manual for FOMA SO706i
(This manual)
* The Quick Manual starts on p.408. CD-ROM for FOMA SO706i Battery Pack SO03
* This CD-ROM contains the PDF files of Manual for PC Connection and Kuten Code List.
<Optional Equipment>
FOMA AC Adapter 01/02
(Including warranty and manual) Desktop Holder SO11
(Including manual) Other options and accessoriesp.363 22 Before Using the Handset Component Names and Functions ................................................................................. Display ............................................................................................................................ Menu Selection ............................................................................................................... Changing the Main Menu................................................................................................ The Basic Operations on the Screens ............................................................................ Description of the Operations ......................................................................................... Function Menu ................................................................................................................ Setting the FOMA Card .................................................................................................. Attaching/Removing the Battery Pack ............................................................................ Charging ......................................................................................................................... Checking the Battery Level ........................................................................... Battery level Turning the FOMA Terminal On/Off .......................................................... Power ON/OFF Select language Switching Between Japanese and English .............................................. Setting the Default ........................................................................................ Initial setting Setting the Clock............................................................................................................. Caller ID Notification Notifying the Other Party of Your Phone Number .............................. Checking Your Own Phone Number ................................................................ My Profile 24 27 29 33 34 36 37 39 41 41 44 44 45 45 45 46 46 23 Component Names and Functions i B e f o r e U s n g t h e H a n d s e t 2 3 4 6 7 9
* : The Antenna of the FOMA terminal is built-in. Functions 1 Infrared data portp.257 2 Earpiece 3 Display 4 u Function key 1
Performs the function displayed (principally the FUNC menu)p.32
Displays the mail menu 5 o Function key 2
Performs the displayed functionp.32
Displays the i-mode menu
Makes videophone callsp.48
Switches the character type when entering charactersp.306 24 w q
r y u 1 5 8 0
t e
) 6 Multi-function keys f/g
Moves the cursor or the displayed contents, etc. up or down (scrolls continuously when the key is held down)
f: Displays Choku-Denp.78
g: Displays the phonebook h/j
Moves the cursor to the left or right
Scrolls the display to the previous or next screens by pagesp.34
h: Displays the Received calls recordp.53
j: Displays the Redialp.53 d
Performs the function displayed (Select or Set, mainly) p.32
( microSD card slot
Used to insert the microSD cardp.244
) External connecter 7 i Function key 3
Performs the function displayedp.32
Displays the main menu/Simple Menu pp.29, 33
Displays the task change screenp.283 8 p Function key 4
Performs the function displayedp.32
Displays the i-Channel list 9 r Send key
Makes voice callsp.48
Receives voice/videophone callsp.59
Switches the entered character into upper or lower casep.306 0 t Back (Clear) key
Undoes the last step in the operationp.35
Puts a call on holdp.62
Deletes the entered phone number or characterspp.48, 307
! y Power/End of operation/Hold key
Turns on the power (1 second or longer)/turns off the power (2 seconds or longer)p.44
Ends each functionp.35
Ends a callp.49
Puts an incoming call on holdp.62
@ 0 to 9 Dial keys
Enters phone numbers, characters and numbers
# w key
Sets the IC card lock (1 second or longer)
Enters or dakuten/handakuten/kutoten p.206 p.306
$ q/Public mode (Driving mode) key
Sets Public mode (Driving mode) (1 second or longer)p.62
Enters # or the line feed
Returns to the previous reading in 5-touch p.306 p.306
% Mouthpiece/Microphone
^ Charging terminal
& a () Volume up key
Sets Manner mode (1 second or longer)p.86
Raises the earpiece volume during a callp.61
Scrolls back the display to the previous screens by pagesp.34
Connects to the site set as Home URLp.148
* s () Volume down key/MUSIC
Lowers the earpiece volume during a callp.61
Scrolls the display to the next screens by pages p.34
Reads out the current time (Voice clock)p.64
Plays recorded messagesp.65 i B e f o r e U s n g t h e H a n d s e t
Connects an AC adapter (optional), DC adapter
(optional), FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (optional) or Earphone Plug Adapter for External connector terminal
(optional)* etc.
* : Connects the flat-plug stereo earphone set
(optional) or the flat-plug earphone/microphone with switch (optional), etc. q Speaker (mono) w Illumination lamp
Flashes in the set color when a call/mail arrives p.92
Flashes when there is a missed call/new mail p.92
The center lamp lights in red while charging p.44
The center lamp flashes in red during shooting modep.119
The center lamp flashes in blue while the auto timer is activatedp.119 e Lens selector switch
Switches (Standard)/
camerap.118 r Camera
(Macro) for the
Shoots still images and movies
Shoots the movie of scenery during videophone calls t Through-hole for strap y FeliCa mark
Reads the IC cardp.202
iC communicationp.259 u Back cover
* a ( ) and s () are referred to as side keys in this manual. 25 Functions that involve holding down keys for 1 second or longer The functions available by holding down each key for 1 second or longer in the standby screen are as follows:
i B e f o r e U s n g t h e H a n d s e t Function Key h Displays the Received address list. Displays the Sent address list. j 2 Switches the Shield view. 5 Turns the display light on/off. 7 Displays the font setting screen. 8 Sets 2in1. 0 Enters +. q Sets/Releases Public mode
(Driving mode). Ref. page p.177 p.177 p.90 p.90 p.93 p.320 p.51 p.62 Key c Function u s () Adjusts the earpiece volume. a () Sets/Releases Manner mode. Activates the Music Player and Quits it when playing BGM. Check new messages Displays the i-ppli software list screen. Activates the function set in Holding down ch-key
(Default: The Photo mode screen appears) o p Ref. page p.61 p.86 p.280 p.164 p.187 p.118 w Sets/Releases IC card lock. p.206 t Clears the advising shortcut icons. p.95 26 Display
The symbols (such as
A calendar, etc. can be set to the display.p.89
, etc.) displayed on the screen are referred to as icons. The status of the FOMA terminal is indicated with icons in this areap.27 Clock displayp.93 Shortcut icon display area etc. : Advising shortcut iconsp.94 etc. : Pasted shortcut iconsp.94
(1Seg),
(Photo mode) and
(My selection) are the default settings. Task icon display area etc. : Task icons of the activated functionsp.283 Function /i-Channel ticker display areapp.32, 153 Icons that indicates the status of the FOMA terminal Display 1 3 5 7 9 ! #
2 4 86 0 @
i B e f o r e U s n g t h e H a n d s e t
q e t
) w r y Icon Description Signal strengthp.44 1 2 3
Out of service area/Radio wave does not reachp.44 Self modep.115 i-mode/i-mode communication in progressp.136
Packet communication in progress
(no data exchange/sending/
receiving)*
Packet communication in progress
(sending/receiving)*
5 SSL-compatible page displayed p.138 4 Icon
(Red) Description Unread mail/Inbox is fullp.163 SMS in the FOMA card (UIM) is full p.254 Unread mail/SMS in the FOMA card (UIM) is fullpp.163, 254 Inbox is full/SMS in the FOMA card
(UIM) is fullpp.163, 254 Unread Area Mailp.181 Unread MessageR/Fullp.179 Unread MessageF/Fullp.179 Continued on next page 27
(Red)
(Red)
(Red) Description Icon Description Icon 5
Unread message R and F (in red when each of them is full)p.179 i B e f o r e U s n g t h e H a n d s e t 6
(Red) Mail kept at the i-mode Center/Full p.164
(Red)
(Red)
7 8 9 0 Receive option setting is set to ON and a mail is kept at the i-mode Centerp.164 MessageR kept at the i-mode Center/Fullp.179 MessageF kept at the i-mode Center/Fullp.179 Dial lockp.101 Secret mode/Secret data only modep.103 Original lock/Original lock released temporarilypp.106, 107 Secret mode or Secret data only mode and Original lock is set or released temporarilypp.103, 106 IC card lockp.206 microSD mode/MTP mode setp.251 USB cable connected and Communication mode/microSD mode/MTP mode setp.251 Handsfree compatible device connected and Communication mode/microSD mode/MTP mode setpp.59, 251 USB cable/Handsfree compatible device connected and Communication mode/microSD mode/MTP mode setpp.59, 251 Infrared data exchange in progress p.257 Infrared remote control operated p.261 IC card authentication in progress p.111 iC communication in progress
(sending/receiving data)p.259
microSD card insertedp.244 microSD card (invalid) inserted p.244 28
) q w e r t y to to to microSD reader/writer operated p.252 microSD being accessedp.247 During a voice callp.48 64K data communication in progress*
During a videophone callp.48 Switching between voice call and videophone callpp.50, 60 Battery levelp.44 Vibratorp.84 Ring volume set to Silentp.61 Mail/Msg. ring time is set to OFF p.85 Manner modep.86 Public mode (Driving mode)p.62 Music&Video Channel program reservation setp.269 Alarm notification functionp.289 1seg timer recordingp.214 Voice mail messagep.312 Record messagep.65 Record VP messagep.65 Display light set to OFFp.90 Shied view set to ONp.90 Shield veiw set to ON, backlight set to OFFp.90 Keypad being locked/standby
(Timer set)p.110 Side key guard set to ONp.112
* : For details on the icons, refer to the Manual for PC Connection (PDF format) in the provided CD-ROM. N
The display adopts state-of-the-art technology; some dots (points) may not light up while others may constantly light up due to its characteristics. Note that this phenomenon is not a failure.
You can check the name of the displayed icons by selecting SETTINGSDisplayIcons description. i B e f o r e U s n g t h e H a n d s e t Menu Selection You can run, set, and check the FOMA terminals functions in a variety of ways. There are various methods of the rest though the method of selecting the function from the main menu is general. Selecting functions from the main menu You can select the functions of the FOMA terminal from the main menu displayed by pressing i in the standby screen. The menus are sorted by function.p.340
<Example: To set Setting when folded>
1 Press i on the standby screen to display the main menu i Tip If you do not press any key for 15 seconds while the main menu is displayed, the main menu is turned off and returns to the previous screen. 2 Use b to move the highlight, then press d (Select) to select the displayed menu sequentially c c d c d d The highlighted item is displayed in two lines and the current setting is displayed. Tip Holding down c moves the highlight in sequence. 29 i B e f o r e U s n g t h e H a n d s e t Accessing functions with the function keys On each screen, you can access functions easily by pressing the function keys pre-assigned to the function. 1 Press the function key on the standby screen Pressing u displays the mail menu.p.156 Pressing o displays the i-mode menu. p.136 Pressing p displays the Channel list.p.153 Pressing f displays the Choku-Den screen.p.78 Pressing g displays the phonebook list screen.p.73 Pressing h displays the Received calls screen.p.53 Pressing j displays the Redial screen. p.53 N
When using the Simple Menu (p.33), pressing u or o on the standby screen displays the Simple Menus Mail menu or i-mode menu. 30 i B e f o r e U s n g t h e H a n d s e t Searching menu items to access functions Even if you do not know the procedure to access the menu, you can still access the desired function by entering key words to search menu items.
<Example: To access Select ring tone>
1 Press i on the standby screen, then press u (FUNC), and highlight Search, then press d (Select) i u d 2 Enter ring and press d (Set), then select the displayed menu d p d The search result is displayed with an underline. If there are two or more search results, press p (Next) to move the frame. Selecting functions from My select By storing your frequently used functions (p.92), you can access the menus easily. 1 Press i on the standby screen to display the main menu, then press p (MySelect) in sequence Pressing p switches between the main menu and My select. i p p 31 i B e f o r e U s n g t h e H a n d s e t Accessing functions by selecting menu numbers When the main menu is set to Standard Menu (p.33), you can access functions quickly by pressing the keys pre-assigned to the menu numbers (p.340).
<Example: To access Select ring tone>
1 Press i on the standby screen, then press 13 in sequence i 1 3 How to use the function keys The operation icons (Function display) corresponding to u, d, o, i, p and the direction icons corresponding to b are displayed on the screen. Only when the corresponding keys can be used, those icons are displayed. Performing the functions assigned to the function key Press the key for 1 to 5, the function is activated. 1 includes (FUNC), (Exit), etc. 2 1 3 When the FUNC key is displayed, press u to show the function menu. p.37 The center of 2 includes (Select), (Set), (Play), (Dial) etc. 3 includes (Edit), (Finish), (Chrct) etc. 4 includes (MENU) and (MULTI). 5 includes (ch), (Change), (Ir data), (Pict/Sym) etc. Moving or scrolling the screen Press b in the direction you want to scroll. 4 1 5 3 2 4 5
[Notation]
Description of the function display In this manual, operations related to the keys for the function display are generally described with the function display in the parenthesis, such as Xd (Select) and Zu (FUNC). 32 Changing the Main Menu You can change the design of the main menu (style for background or icon, etc.) as you want.
When you change the design of the menu display using Kisekae Tool, the menu structure may change in accordance with frequency of using functions. Also, you cannot access some functions entering the menu number assigned to the functions. In this case, change the main menu to Standard Menu (p.33) or perform Reset menu op. log (p.91) so as to operate as described in this manual. 1 Press i on the standby screen, then press o (Change) in sequence Switching pagesp.34 i o i B e f o r e U s n g t h e H a n d s e t 2 Select an item Main Menu Theme Lacy Pink to Standard Menu Switches the display design in each menu. When set to Standard Menu, you can access functions by entering the menu numbers.p.32 Large Menu Large-font menu appears. Simple Menu Simple Menu consists of frequently used menus, and its character size is large and operation procedure is simple.p.349 Sets the character size of the screens to X-large all at once. p.93 Original themep.91 You can change the icons and background image used on the main menu. You can also set the picture you shot as the background. Kisekae Toolp.97 You can change various design of the FOMA terminal such as the main menu all at once with the Kisekae Tool package. Changing the Main Menu temporarily Highlight an item on the theme screen and press o (Change) to change the main menu temporarily. When the main menu is displayed again, the main menu before it sets is displayed. Simple Menu N
When you set the menu that supports the user customizing, you can sort the menu items by selecting Manual-sort by pressing u (FUNC) in the main menu.p.284
[Notation]
Description of the main menu The menu name may be different depending on the selected theme of Menu display set. Steps are described using default settings when the phone color is platinum white. MAIL DATA BOX OWN DATA SETTINGS PHONE BOOK OSAIFU-KEITAI I-APPLI SERVICE 1SEG I-MODE LIFEKIT MUSIC 33 i B e f o r e U s n g t h e H a n d s e t The Basic Operations on the Screens When items appear in multiple pages 1 Press v to display other pages To switch the page, press h (or a ()) for the previous page and press j (or s ()) for the next page. Current page/Total pages j h To display other pages using c Pressing f displays the previous page when the highlight is located at the top of the list, and pressing g displays the next page when the highlight is located at the bottom of the list. Using the dial keys to select items 1 Press 1 to 90wq corresponding to the menu numbers 3 The number corresponding to the dial key Selecting YES/NO or ON/OFF 1 Press c to move the frame, then press d (Select) 34 i B e f o r e U s n g t h e H a n d s e t To display images in 9 images display 1 Press b to move the frame, then press d (Disp.) Entering a security code 1 Enter the 4 to 8 digit security code, then press d (Set) The numbers of the entered security code is displayed as _. The detail screen of the function is displayed when the security code is successfully entered. If the entered security code is incorrect A message notifying that the security code is wrong is displayed. Re-enter the security code from the beginning. Entering numbers 1 Enter numbers by pressing 0 to 9 To enter a 1-digit number or 2-digit number in a 3-digit number entry screen, press 0 twice or once before entering a number. To enter 3
003 To cancel operations, and to return to the standby screen t Press t to cancel the last operation, such as when you select wrong menu item. Though the previous screen appears basically, another screen may appear depending on the function. y Press y to complete operations such as settings and to return to the standby screen. Though the function is completed and the standby screen appears basically, another screen may appear depending on the current displayed screen and function. If you press y during setting operation, the setting operation is canceled and the standby screen reappears. 35 i B e f o r e U s n g t h e H a n d s e t Description of the Operations In this manual, instructions for menu operations are briefly described in almost all cases as follows:
The example of description of operations and the actual operations 1 iLIFEKITAlarmHighlight the item to set u (FUNC)
: Press i on the standby screen.
: Press b to move the highlight to the menu in the double quotation mark, then press d (Select).
: Press b to move the highlight to the item in the double quotation mark, and then press d (Select). Or, press 1 to 9 0 w q for the menu number in the double quotation mark.
: Press b to move the highlight.
: Press the key for the function displayed in parentheses.
[Notation]
Omission of Xd in the Select and Set operations
When a target function is selected from the main menu or list, such as example and , Xd (Select) is omitted.
In the cases such as Select an item or Enter your security code, Xd (Select) and Xd (Set) are omitted in the same way.
When you are supposed to move to the next step without pressing Xd (Select), Highlight xxx is used, such as example . Easy operations are preferred
Though the operation of the main menu has been described, this manual gives priority to the operations by short cut keys operations (p.30).
If you select the menu from the Simple Menu, refer to Simple Menu function list (p.349). Omission of the descriptions after completing the operations
The descriptions for the operations after completing the function are omitted.
To cancel operations, and to return to the standby screenp.35 Brief description of keys and menus
In this manual, instructions for key illustrations/menu displays/holding down keys are simply described as follows:
Actual display/operation Description in this manual Key 1 Menu display Holding down keys Menu iMenu Press and hold down q for 1 second or longer q (1 second or longer) 36 i B e f o r e U s n g t h e H a n d s e t Function Menu Function Menu is one of the menus of the FOMA terminal that can be accessed from the function display. The function menu activates supplementary functions of each screen. For example, you can use the function menu to delete a mail after reading it, or to select the folder to save an image you shot with the camera. How to use the function menu There are mainly three ways to use the function menus. Use the appropriate method depending on the situation. Refer to the explanation of the function menu items from the reference page stated with the operation screen. Refer to the explanation of the function menu items from the function menu index. Find the procedure to display the operation screen from the reference page of the function menu. Operation screen with the reference page for the function menu is illustrated in a blue frame and differentiated from others. New mail screen (p.156) Function menu SendSends i-mode mail. Savep.161 Delete receiverIf there are 2 or more addresses entered, you can delete the address you select. Change rcv. typeChanges the address type with an address highlighted. Mail Address (list/detail) . 177 Detail . 176 Folder list . 173 List . 175 Message . 158 New mail . 157 New mail Function menup.157
* Function menu item and Function menu index in the above illustration are only excerpts. Operation target on the list screen In the function menu on the list screen, either data highlighted in the list or all the data in the list is targeted by the function. For example, Edit title or Delete this targets a highlighted title or data, and Delete all targets all the data. When you select a function menu which targets one data in the list, such as Edit title or Delete this, highlight the data, then press u (FUNC).
<Example: To edit the bookmark title on the list screen>
Highlight the bookmark
u (FUNC)
Edit title
Edit the title
d (Set) The bookmark title changes. 37 i B e f o r e U s n g t h e H a n d s e t About multiple-choice When you delete unnecessary data, protect important data or move the data you do not want to be viewed by others to the secret folder, etc., you can select not only one data or all data but also multiple data. In this case, perform the following operation.
<Example: To delete multiple mail on the received mail list screen>
Delete selected
Check mails to delete
o (Finish)
YES Marking a checkbox When you use b to move the frame to the item to select and press d (Select), the checkbox changes from
. In the images display,
. This means that the item is selected. Pressing d (Select) switches between appears when the item is selected. Nothing appears when unselected. and to d d d d
When appears on the function display area, pressing u (FUNC) allows you to use Select all or Release all. Menus which switch alternately Depending on the menu, menu items switches alternately as follows:
<Example 1>
When normal font is set
<Example 2>
When large font is set When the Phonebook detail screen is displayed in Set normal font mode, Set large font appears as in
<Example 1>. If Set large font is selected, the font mode changes to large font mode, and Set normal font appears next time the function menu appears.
[Notation]
Description of the menus which switch alternately Such menus are described as Set large fontSet normal font. N
When the displayed menu contains sub menus,
The displayed contents of the function menu may vary or you may not be able to select the item of function menu appears on the right. depending on the operating function and settings. The function menu items you cannot select are displayed in gray. 38 i B e f o r e U s n g t h e H a n d s e t Setting the FOMA Card Security codes The FOMA card is an IC card that contains private information such as your phone number. Before inserting or removing the FOMA card, first turn the power off and remove the battery pack. p.41 Note also that when you try to insert or remove the FOMA card, keep the FOMA terminal folded and held in your hand. Attaching/Removing the FOMA card The illustration shows how to attach the FOMA card. 1 Put the FOMA card into the card inserting slot with the IC side downward as shown in the illustration Cut corner IC FOMA card (UIM) FOMA card inserting slot Gold colored IC side down 2 Insert the FOMA card until it is fixed To remove the FOMA card, carefully pull it out straight from the following status. Properly inserted You can set two security codes of PIN1 code and PIN2 code for the FOMA card (UIM). p.100 FOMA card security function The FOMA terminal incorporates the FOMA card security function (FOMA card operational restriction function) to protect your data and files.
When you download data or files from sites or receive data attached to mails, the FOMA card security function is automatically set to these data and files.
Data and files with this function set are accessible only when the same FOMA card (UIM) used when downloading these data or files is used.
Target data and files for the FOMA card security function are as follows:
File attached to i-mode mail (except for ToruCa)
Screen memo
Image inserted into Deco-mail or signature
i-ppli (including i-ppli standby screen)
Image (including the animation and Flash movie)
Melody
Word/Excel/PowerPoint data
Image of ToruCa (detail)
Image downloaded from the Data Security Center
Program of the Music&Video Channel
Movable contents data
i-motion
Chara-den
Chaku-Uta*/Chaku-Uta-Full
PDF data
Kisekae Tool
Record Videophone message
Template including data to protect
Download dictionary
MessageR/F with attached file (melody/image)
* : Chaku-Uta is a registered trademark of Sony Music Entertainment (Japan) Inc.
The FOMA card (UIM) that was inserted when you downloaded or received data or files is referred to as your FOMA card (UIM) and other FOMA cards as other FOMA card (UIM) hereinafter. Continued on next page 39 i B e f o r e U s n g t h e H a n d s e t
Functions that are set to Invalid
Cookie settings for Full Browser
(Cookie information is kept)
Functions of which current settings of the FOMA card (UIM) become invalid
Program setting of the Music&Video Channel
(Set the program again) FOMA card type The FOMA card (UIM) (blue) has the following functional differences from the FOMA card (green/
white). Function Max number of digits for phone number to be stored in the FOMA card (UIM) phonebook User certificate operation to use FirstPass WORLD WING Service Numbers Blue 20 digits Green/White 26 digits Not available Available Not available Not available Available Available WORLD WING WORLD WING is DOCOMOs FOMA international roaming service that you can make or receive a call with your proper phone number even oversea using your FOMA terminal with the FOMA card
(UIM) (green/white) and supporting services.
For the customers who have subscribed to the FOMA service on September 1, 2005 or after, a separate subscription is not necessary. However, customers who declared that they did not require this service at the FOMA service subscription or who unsubscribe from this service need a separate subscription.
For the customers who have subscribed to the FOMA service on August 31, 2005 or before without subscribing to WORLD WING, a separate subscription is necessary.
This service is not available in some payment plans.
In case the FOMA card (UIM) (green/white) is lost or stolen in overseas, contact to DOCOMO as soon as possible and take the course of service interruption. Refer to the back of this manual for the inquiries numbers. Note that you are charged for the call and communication even after the FOMA card (UIM) (green/white) is lost or stolen. When the inserted FOMA card (UIM) was used to download data or receive mails, you can view or play the data that applies to the FOMA card security function. When the inserted FOMA card (UIM) was not used to download data or receive mails, you cannot view or play the data that applies to the FOMA card security function. Your FOMA card Another FOMA card Changing the FOMA card N
If the FOMA card (UIM) is not attached or you replace the FOMA card (UIM) with another one, attached to data and files with this function set and you cannot set these data to Display setting or Select ring tone. is
Data and files with this function set are only can be moved and deleted with other FOMA cards (UIM).
If you remove the FOMA card (UIM) or change to other FOMA card (UIM) when data or a file with this function set is set to Display setting or Select ring tone, these settings are reset to the default settings. When your FOMA card (UIM) is inserted again, the settings return to your settings. Settings for replacing the FOMA card
(UIM) When you replace the FOMA card (UIM) inserted to the FOMA terminal with other FOMA card (UIM), the following settings are changed:
Functions of which settings are changed to settings stored on the newly inserted FOMA card (UIM)
Select language SMS center selection
SMS validity period
Host selection of i-mode common set
PIN setting
Functions that are reverted to the default setting
i-Channel setting
Access setting for Full Browser 40 Attaching/Removing the Battery Pack
Make sure to turn the FOMA terminal off before removing the battery pack. Note also that keep the FOMA terminal folded and held in your hand. Attaching 1 Remove the back cover Pressing the back cover in direction , slide it in direction to remove the back cover. Removing 1 Remove the back cover 2 Remove the battery pack Press the tab on the side of the battery pack in direction , then lift upwards in direction to remove the battery pack. i B e f o r e U s n g t h e H a n d s e t 2 Attach the battery pack A side of the battery pack facing up, With the attach the battery pack in direction making sure that the mark of the battery pack fits the mark of the FOMA terminal (Phone), then press the battery pack down in direction . 3 Attach the back cover Lift the back cover about 3 mm and fit the back claws in the groove of the FOMA terminal
(Phone). Pressing the back cover in direction , slide it in direction and press the back cover until the catch clicks shut. Back claws Make sure that there is no space between the Back cover and the FOMA terminal (Phone). Finger tab N
Do not use excessive force when the tip of the back cover is inserted into the FOMA terminal. The finger tab of the back cover may be broken. Charging Use the specified Battery Pack SO03 for the FOMA terminal. Battery pack life
The battery pack is consumable. The amount of usable time decreases every time the battery pack is recharged.
When a fully charged battery pack only lasts half as long as it did at the time of purchase, the battery pack life is almost over, so it is recommended to replace it with a new one. When the life of the battery pack is near end, the battery pack may expand a little according to the usage condition, but this is not a malfunction.
The battery pack life may be shortened if i-ppli or videophone is used or 1seg is viewed for a long time while charging. To protect the environment, take used battery packs to NTT DOCOMO, the agency, the recycle shop, etc. Continued on next page 41 i B e f o r e U s n g t h e H a n d s e t Battery pack charging
For details, refer to the manuals for the FOMA AC Adapter 01/02 (optional), FOMA AC Adapter for Global Use 01 (optional) and FOMA DC Adapter 01/02 (optional). Continuous Talk Time
[FOMA/3G] Voice communications: Approx. 220 min.
[GSM]
Videophone: Approx. 100 min. Voice communications: Approx. 190 min. 1seg Viewing Time
FOMA AC Adapter 01 supports voltage of 100V AC Normal: Approx. 280 min. ECO mode: Approx. 350 min. only.
FOMA AC Adapter 02 and FOMA AC Adapter 01 for Global Use support voltage from 100V AC to 240V AC, but the plug shape of the AC adapter is for 100V AC (domestic). For overseas use, the compatible conversion plug adapter is required. Do not charge the battery using the transformer for travel.
When charging the battery pack, the battery pack must be attached to the FOMA terminal.
You can receive calls during charging if the FOMA terminal is turned on. However, the battery level will fall during the call and the time required for charging will increase. Charging time also increases when Charging of Backlight setting is set to All time ON.
When plugging in or out the connector, do it slowly and securely not to apply an excessive force.
When you make a call or perform packet communication during charging in a high-
temperature environment, the FOMA terminals temperature may rise and the charging may be stopped. If this occurs, stop a running function and wait for the temperature or the FOMA terminal to fall before you retry charging. Do not charge the battery pack for a long period of time (several days) with the FOMA terminal turned on
If you charge the battery pack for a long period of time with the FOMA terminal turned on, power to the FOMA terminal will be supplied from the battery pack once charging ends. As a result, you will only be able to use the FOMA terminal for a short time and the low-voltage alarm may sound immediately. In this case, recharge the battery pack correctly. Disconnect the FOMA terminal from the AC adapter (or desktop holder) or DC adapter, then set it again for recharging. Battery usage rough time (The duration varies depending on the charging time and the deterioration of the battery pack)
* : To switch networks, use 3G/GSM setting (p.336).
The continuous standby time in stationary is the average usage time when the FOMA terminal is folded and standing still while radio waves can be normally received.
The continuous standby time in moving is the average usage time when the FOMA terminal is folded under condition of stationary, moving, and out of service area within the area where radio waves can be normally received.
Note that the actual continuous talk/standby time and 1seg viewing time may decrease by as much as half depending on the following conditions: the battery pack charging level, the function settings, ambient environment such as temperature, the status of radio waves (out of service area or weak radio waves). It may shorten the talk
(communication)/standby time to make i-mode communication, compose i-mode mail, transfer data, execute multi access, activate i-ppli or i-ppli standby screen, use camera, play movie/
i-motion/music and view 1seg.
Depending on the network condition of the country, talk
(communications) and standby time may decrease.
When using in Japan, talk (communications) and standby times will be longer if 3G/GSM setting
(p.336) is set to 3G. Charging the battery pack with the AC/
DC adapter AC adapter (optional) 100V AC power outlet Connector cap Plug Release button 12 Continuous Standby Time 3
[FOMA/3G] Stationary (Auto*): Approx. 580 hrs. In transit (3G*): Approx. 430 hrs. In transit (Auto*): Approx. 360 hrs. Stationary (Auto*): Approx. 290 hrs.
[GSM]
42 Connector Plug the connector with arrows side facing upward FOMA AC Adapter 01/02 i B e f o r e U s n g t h e H a n d s e t DC adapter (optional) Cigarette lighter socket Charging the battery pack with the desktop holder Plug the connector with arrows side facing upward 1 3 3 Plug FOMA DC Adapter 01/02 FOMA terminal 1 Open the external connector cap of the 2 Plug the AC/DC adapter connector horizontally into the FOMA terminals external connector Connector 100V AC power outlet 2 Plug 3 Plug the AC adapter into the outlet Plug the DC adapter into the cigarette lighter socket in your car Charging starts. Standard charging time Approx. 120 min. 4 When charging is completed, remove the AC adapter/DC adapter connector horizontally from the FOMA terminal while pressing the release button Do not pull the connector with excessive force because this may cause a malfunction. 5 Unplug the AC adapter from the outlet Unplug the DC adapter from the cigarette lighter socket in your car 6 Close the external connector cap of the FOMA terminal Desktop Holder SO11 FOMA AC Adapter 01/02 1 Plug the connector of the AC adapter
(optional) horizontally to the terminal on the back of the desktop holder (optional) 2 Plug the AC adapter into the outlet 3 Hold down the desktop holder and place the FOMA terminal securely in the direction of the arrow Standard charging time Approx. 120 min. 4 After charging is completed, hold down the desktop holder, then lift the FOMA terminal up in the direction of the arrow Continued on next page 43 i B e f o r e U s n g t h e H a n d s e t N
The center illumination lamp lights up in red during charging. The charge lamp turns off when charging ends (Full charge). If the FOMA terminal is turned on, charging ends. You can set illumination for charge start/end.p.92 flashes during charging and lights when
The battery pack cannot be charged separately. Always charge the battery pack while it is attached to the FOMA terminal.
If the battery runs out, the center illumination lamp may not lights up right away, but the charging itself has started.
<AC adapter/DC adapter>
When the center illumination lamp of the FOMA terminal
(Phone) and on the display disappears, and the message Charge unusual Stop charge is displayed, disconnect the FOMA terminal from the AC adapter or DC adapter and remove the battery pack. Then set them again for recharging. If the same error occurs again, there may be a problem or fault on the AC adapter or DC adapter. Contact the NTT DOCOMO shop or service counter.
The DC Adapter uses a 2A fuse. If the fuse (2A) blows, always use a fuse with the same specifications. Fuses
(2A) are consumable items. Purchase a replacement fuse at your local car accessory shop, etc.
<Desktop holder>
Attach the FOMA terminal to the desktop holder securely. Also, take care not to pinch the strap. Checking the Battery Level
<Battery level>
The battery level is indicated only as a guide. Checking the battery level with icon When the FOMA terminal is turned on, the icon indicating the remaining battery level is displayed.
: Full charge.
: Partial charge.
: The battery is almost running out. Recharge the battery. Checking the battery level with sound and animation The current battery level is indicated by sound and animation. 1 iSETTINGSOther settings Battery level The check screen is displayed, and beeps sound in accordance with the level. The battery level animation disappears in about 3 seconds. 3 short beeps 2 short beeps 1 short beep
: Full charge.
: Partial charge.
: The battery is almost running out. Recharge the battery. 44 When the battery runs out The screen as shown on the left appears and the low-voltage alarm sounds. The alarm sounds for about 10 seconds and the power is turned off in about 1 minute. To stop this alarm, press any key (except for side keys). N
The recharge battery screen and 3 short beeps sound during a voice call and the recharge battery screen
(Camera Off message to the other party) appears during a videophone call to notify. Note that the call will be disconnected in about 20 seconds and the power turns off in about one minute. Turning the FOMA Terminal On/Off
<Power ON/OFF>
Turning the FOMA terminal on
Before turning the FOMA terminal on, make sure that the FOMA card is inserted correctly. 1 y (1 second or longer) After Wake-up screen appears, the standby screen or initial settings screen appears. If you have just attached the battery pack or you turn the FOMA terminal back on immediately after turning it off, Wait a minute message may appear for a short time. When appears You are outside the FOMA service area or in a place where radio waves do not reach. Move to a place where the radio reception level icon such as appears. The reception level is displayed as follows:
Standby Good If the Initial setting screen appearsp.45 If the PIN1 code/PIN2 code entry screen Poor appearsp.100 N
When you change the FOMA card (UIM), you have to enter the 4 to 8 digit security code after turning on the FOMA terminal. The standby screen appears when the security code is successfully entered. When you enter wrong security code for 5 times, the FOMA terminal turns off (however, you can turn on the FOMA terminal again). N
If the battery runs out or Auto power OFF activates then the power is turned off, a screen appears indicating that the power was turned off last time. Turning the FOMA terminal off 1 y (2 second or longer) The shutdown screen SO706i appears and the power is turned off. Turning the FOMA terminal on/off automatically
<Auto power ON/OFF>
Set the Auto power function, the power supply automatically on or off at the specified time.
The FOMA terminal does not turn off during using another function, even if the Auto power OFF set time is reached. In addition, the FOMA terminal does not turn off when the alarm notification time or the i-ppli Auto-
start time is the same as the Auto power OFF set time. The FOMA terminal turns off after finish the function.
If the FOMA terminal turns off, the Music&Video Channel program is not downloaded and reserved update of the software or 1seg timer recording is not available. Note above when setting Auto power OFF.
<Example: To turn the FOMA terminal on automatically>
1 iSETTINGSClockAuto power ON To turn the FOMA terminal off automatically
Auto power OFF 2 ActiveEnter the timeSelect whether to repeat or not To cancel the Auto power ON/OFF
Inactive N
Before entering an area such as an aircraft or hospital where there is electronic equipment that uses extremely precise control systems or very low signal levels and the use of mobile phones is prohibited, set the Auto power ON setting to Inactive and then turn the FOMA terminal off. Switching Between Japanese and English
<Select language>
You can switch the languages between Japanese and English to display function names and messages on the display. 1 iSETTINGSDisplaySelect languageEnglish To change from English to Japanese
i B e f o r e U s n g t h e H a n d s e t N
When the FOMA card (UIM) is inserted, Select language setting is stored on the FOMA card (UIM).
When Select language is set to English, only two options of ON/OFF are available for Info notice setting. You can switch announcement language between Japanese and English for outgoing and incoming calls in some announcements.p.316 Setting the Default
<Initial setting>
After turning the FOMA terminal on, you can set Set main time, Change security code, Character size and Keypad sound as initial settings. 1 Initial setting screenYES 2 Set the main timep.46 3 Change the security codep.101 The default setting is 0000 (4 zeros). Initial setting 4 Set the font sizep.93 5 Set the keypad soundp.85 6 Check the contents about Software Update, then select OK N
When you set all functions, the initial setting screen no longer appears when you turn on the FOMA terminal. Setting the Clock Use Set main time to set the date and time for the FOMA terminal. Use Set sub clock to show/hide the sub clock or set the display mode.
The FOMA terminal offers the function to retrieve the time information (Greenwich Mean Time, GMT) and time zone information (Area you are in) and adjust time automatically.
There are different time zones from GMT. If multiple cities or areas are registered in the same time zone, or areas. appears. Press o to change cities 45 i B e f o r e U s n g t h e H a n d s e t
<Set main time>
Setting the main clock 1 iSETTINGSClockSet main timeAuto time adjust To set summer time
Summer time When set to ON, time is displayed with 1 hour added. 2 Select any item:
AutoAdjusts the date and time of the main clock automatically. AutoAdjusts the date and time automatically based on the retrieved time information and time zone information. Local time appears during international roaming. Manual(Time zone set)Select a time zone to display the local time. Manual(Date time set)Set the date and time of the main clock manually. Select a time zone, and enter the date and time. To enter the date and time Use b to move the highlight, then use the dial keys to enter the numbers. N
After you set the date and time, you can use functions such as Alarm or Schedule which manages the date and time.
The adjustable range of the date and time is between 00:00 on January 1, 2004 and 23:59 on December 31, 2037.
<Auto time adjust>
Time is automatically adjusted e.g. when the power is turned on with a FOMA card (UIM) inserted.
A several-second time lag may occur. Time may not be adjusted depending on the signal status or i-ppli set as the standby screen.
Time may not be adjusted depending on the overseas carriers network.
<Set sub clock>
Setting the sub clock 1 iSETTINGSClockSet sub clockdisplay method To set summer time
Summer time When set to ON, time is displayed with 1 hour added. 2 Select any item:
AutoDisplays the sub clock automatically during international roaming. If the main time Auto time adjust is set to Auto, the main time automatically changes to the local time, but the Japan time appears for the sub clock. AlwaysSelect a time zone to always display the local time for the sub clock. OFFHides the sub clock. 46 3 YES or NO Select YES to display the sub clock. If OFF is selected in Step 2, this step is skipped. N
The sub clock appears only when Size under Clock display is set to Small.
If Auto is selected here and GMT+09 is not selected as time zone under Set main time, the Japan time appears for the sub clock (If the time zone is GMT+09, the sub clock does not appear in Japan. Notifying the Other Party of Your Phone Number
<Caller ID Notification>
The FOMA terminal can send your phone number
(caller ID) to the other partys phone (Display) when you make a call.
Since the phone number is important information, please take care when you send your caller ID. is
You cannot perform the setting when displayed. 1 iSERVICECaller ID NotificationSelect any item:
Activate/DeactivateSets whether to send your caller ID or not. Check settingChecks the current Caller ID Notification settings. N
This function is available only when the other partys phone is capable of displaying the caller ID.
If you hear a message requesting your caller ID, make a call again after setting your caller ID activated. Checking Your Own Phone Number
<My Profile>
You can display and check your phone number (own number) stored in your FOMA card (UIM). 1 i0 N
You can easily quote the information stored in My Profile when entering the owner information (such as name or mail address) on websites, etc.p.307
You can check your i-mode address by selecting i-mode menuiMenuEnglishOptions Mail SettingsConfirm Settings.
When 2in1 is in Dual mode, press c to switch the My Profile display.
Reset My Profile in B mode when you exchange the FOMA card (UIM) while using 2in1. p.291 Voice/Videophone Calls Making a Voice/Videophone Call Making a Voice/Videophone Call .................................................................................... Switching a Voice/Videophone Call During a Call (Caller).............................................. WORLD CALL Making International Calls ......................................................................... Hands-free Using Handsfree Call During a Call ................................................................ Using the Redial/Dialed Calls/Received Calls Record..... Redial/Dialed calls/Received calls Chaku-moji Using Chaku-moji .......................................................................................... Setting Caller ID Notification........................................................................................... Sending Push Signals...................................................................................... Pause dial Using the Prefix Function................................................................................................ Sub-address setting Setting Sub-addresses When Making Calls ...................................... Reconnect signal Setting the Alarm Used for Reconnection.............................................. Noise reduction Blocking Out Ambient Noise .................................................................... Making Handsfree Calls in the Car ........................................................ In-car Hands-free Receiving a Voice/Videophone Call Receiving a Voice/Videophone Call................................................................................ When the Other Party Switches a Voice/Videophone Call (Caller)................................. Answer setting Using the Dial Keys to Answer a Call......................................................... Setting when folded Ending/Holding Calls with the FOMA Terminal Folded ....................... Adjusting the Earpiece Volume............................................................................ Volume Ring volume Adjusting the Ring Volume............................................................................ Settings for when you cannot take calls Answer hold/Holding Holding the Ringing/Current Call ....................................................... Public mode (Driving mode) Using the Public Mode (Driving Mode) .................................... Using the Public Mode (Power OFF) .......................................... Public mode (PowerOFF) Missed calls When You Cannot Answer a Received Call .................................................. Record message Having the Caller Leave a Message ....................................................... Having Callers Leave a Message During an Incoming Call...................... Quick message Playing/Erasing Recorded Messages and Voice Memos ............................................... Setting the Videophone Using Chara-den............................................................................................................. Setting Functions for the Videophone............................................................................. Using the Videophone Connecting to External Devices ................................................. 48 50 51 52 53 55 56 57 57 58 58 58 59 59 60 60 61 61 61 62 62 63 64 64 65 65 66 67 68 47 Making a Voice/Videophone Call
* FOMA SO706i does not contain front camera. A substitute image (Chara-den) or rear camera image will be sent to the other party. A substitute image (Chara-den) can be changed to an image in My picture, etc. using Select image.p.67 1 Enter the phone number of the other i
i V o c e V d e o p h o n e C a l l s party The Enter phone number screen appears. Always start by entering the area code, even for calls within the same area. You can enter up to 80 digits for the phone number. However, only the last 26 digits are displayed. Enter phone number Function menup.49
<When you enter a wrong number>
To insert a number Press v to move the cursor to the number to the left of the position where you want to insert the number, then enter the number. To delete a number Press v to move the cursor to the number you want to delete, then press t. Hold down t for 1 second or longer to delete all the numbers to the left of the cursor and the number in the cursor position. To re-enter the number Move the cursor to the beginning or end of the number and hold down t for 1 second or longer to return to the standby screen.
<Videophone>
To change a substitute image (Chara-
den)
Zu (FUNC)Select imageChara-den
Select Chara-den 48 2 r (voice call) /o (V. phone)
<Voice call>
The In-call screen appears. and lights up during the call. If you hear the busy flashes while dialing tone The line is busy. Call again after a while. If you hear a message saying that the In-call other party cannot be reached The other partys mobile phone is not turned on or is out of signal range. Call again after a while. If you hear a message requesting your caller ID Call again with caller ID notification enabled. p.46 flashes while dialing
<Videophone>
The Videophone in-call screen appears. a videophone call and lights up during the call. If a videophone call is not connectedp.50 To switch between substitute image and camera image Videophone in-call Function menup.49
Xd (Change) Each time you press Xd
(Change), the substitute image and camera image switch. To switch the main screen
Xd (1 second or longer) Change main disp.p.49 To enlarge the image to be sent
Adjust the zoom using Xv Zoomp.128 To mute the voice to send
Ya ( ) (1 second or longer) The icon is displayed. Press Ya ( ) (1 second or longer) again cancels muting. To switch a voice/videophone call during a To put the current voice/videophone call callp.50 on holdp.62 i
i V o c e V d e o p h o n e C a l l s When the 2in1 is in Dual mode The Outgoing number selection screen appears. Select a phone number. 3 y after talking N
<Videophone call>
If you make a videophone call to an emergency number (110, 119 or 118) from the FOMA terminal, the call is automatically changed to a voice call.
You cannot receive i-mode mail or a MessageR/F during a videophone call (you can receive SMS). Received mail is kept at the i-mode Center and can be retrieved using Check new messages after the videophone call.
When you are using videophone and recording 1seg simultaneously with the camera during charging, the Camera Off message may appear and the camera may turn off depending on the temperature of the FOMA terminal.
Digital communication charges are still applied to the caller when the substitute image is displayed during a videophone call. What is the Videophone You can use the videophone call function between the terminals that support the DOCOMO videophone system.
DOCOMO videophone conforms to the 3G-
324M*2 standard set down in the international 3GPP*1 standards. Your FOMA terminal cannot connect to a videophone terminal that uses a different system from DOCOMO videophones.
*1: 3GPP (3rd Generation Partnership Project) A regional standardization body established to develop commonly applied technical specifications for 3rd-generation mobile communications systems (IMT-2000).
*2: 3G-324M An international standard for 3rd-generation mobile videophones. How to view the videophone screen 11 33 44 22 Main screen (Camera image of the other party is displayed at the time of purchase) Sub-screen (Your substitute image is displayed at the time of purchase) Call duration Settings
: Sending or receiving voice/
Transmission error
: Sending or receiving video/
Transmission error
: Sending camera image/Sending substitute image
: Hands-free ON/OFF
: Muting microphone (in silence)
: Photo mode (Portrait/Scenery/
Close-up)
: Key operation mode (DTMF mode*1/Whole action mode*2/
Parts action mode*2)
: Sending Chara-den
*1: Send DTMF tone/DTMF tone OFFp.50
*2: Using Chara-denp.66 Enter phone number screen
(p.48) Notify Caller IDp.56 Prefix numbersp.58 Chaku-mojip.55 Intl callp.52 Multi Numberp.319 Add to phonebookp.70 Compose message*p.156 Select imageSelects the image used during a videophone call from Chara-den. Select Release settings to cancel the setting.
* : Not available when 2in1 is in B mode. Videophone in-call screen
(p.48) Substitute imageCamera imageSwitches between the camera image and the substitute image. Change main disp.Changes the main display. The screen changes in the order of Displaying the image from the other partys camera on your main screen Displaying your image on your main screen Displaying only the image from the other partys camera Displaying only your image V.phone settingsSets the screen for videophone call. Visual prefer.Sets the image sent to and received from the other party from Normal/Prefer img qual/Prefer motion spd. This setting is only retained during the call. Continued on next page 49 i
i V o c e V d e o p h o n e C a l l s BrightnessFive brightness levels (-2 to 0 to +2) are available. White balanceSets image color tones.p.123 This setting is also applied to the equivalent camera functions. Color mode setSelects the image effect from Normal/Sepia/Monochrome. This setting is only retained during the call. Photo modeSets modes suited to the scene being shot.p.122 Chara-den set.Set the following when Chara-den is used. This setting cannot be set for the camera images. Switch Chara-denSelects the character to be displayed. Action ListChecks the available actions and the corresponding keys. You can also view the action list by pressing w. Change ActionChanges the Action mode. Switch imageDisplays the image selected in Substitute image (p.67) on the other partys display. Display lightSets lighting of backlight. All time ON (default)Turns the backlight on all the time. 15 seconds ONTurns the backlight on for 15 seconds only. Own numberDisplays your phone number during a videophone call. Send DTMF toneDTMF tone OFFSets/cancels push signal transmission mode during Chara-den. Except for Chara-den, videophone calls are always in push signal transmission mode. Change to voicep.50 If a videophone call is not connected When a videophone call is not connected, the cause of the failure appears.
The cause may not appear depending on the situation.
Depending on the type of other partys phone or the possible lack of a network service subscription, the reason may not accurately reflect the other partys actual status. Display Check number then redial Busy Busy with packet transmission Cause Phone number is not available The line is busy The other party is using packet communication Display Out of service area/
power off Your call is being forwarded Redial using voice call Please activate caller ID before dialing again Your call cannot be connected Upper limit has been exceeded Connection failed Connection failed Please make your call from the i-mode web page Cause The other party is out of service area or the phone is turned off The call is being forwarded (A Videophone call is made when the forwarding number is for a 3G-324M-compatible videophone.) The phone for the forwarding number is not compatible with videophone calls. The other party sets the Caller ID request service. The other party sets the Nuisance call blocking service. The upper limit set for a Limit billing plan (Type Limit and Family Wide Limit) is exceeded. Set the caller ID notification to ON and retry You connected without notifying your caller ID (when dialing into visualnet, etc.)
This message may also appear in other situations. You attempted to make a videophone call to watch V-live without browsing the i-mode official site.
If the videophone call is not connected, your call is automatically switched to a voice call when you set Auto redial as voice to ON. However, the call may not be handled in this way if you call an ISDN synchronous 64K, ISDN videophone which does not support the 3G-324M standard (as of May, 2008) or if you dial a wrong number. Note that call charge may be applied in some cases. Switching a Voice/Videophone Call During a Call (Caller)
You can use this function with the terminals compatible with voice call/videophone call switch.
You can switch the voice call only when you are the caller.
To switch the call, the receiver needs to set Ntfy switch-mode to notify the switch beforehand.p.67
<Example: To switch a voice call to a videophone call>
1 In-call screen (p.48)d (V. phone) YES While switching, the screen which indicates that the calls are being switched appears and the voice guidance is played. 50 i
i V o c e V d e o p h o n e C a l l s
WORLD CALL can be used to call around 240 countries and regions worldwide.
The WORLD CALL is charged with your monthly call charges.
In addition to dialing a phone number, you can make an international call by adding + or selecting Intl call or Prefix numbers from the function menu in the enter phone number screen, Redial/Dialed calls screen, Received calls screen or Phonebook detail screen.
This service is not available in some payment plans. For additional information regarding WORLD CALL, refer to the contact information provided on the back of the manual. International videophone calls can be made to users of some specific overseas 3G mobile terminals by pressing o (V. phone) to make the call after using the dialing procedure below.
See the DOCOMO website for information on accessible countries and operators.
Depending on the other partys terminal, the image of the other party displayed on your FOMA terminal may be distorted or the connection may fail when making a international videophone. Using dial keys to make international calls 1 Dial the number in the following order:
010Country codeArea code (Long distance code)The other partys phone number 009130 can be added first. If the area code (long distance code) begins with 0, omit the first 0. However, to call to ordinary phones in Italy, 0 is required. 2 r The international call is made. Quick and simple procedures for making an international call
You can store the country codes and IDD prefix codes in Intl dial assistance. Using + to make an international call By using the + that is automatically replaced with the IDD Prefix Code set in the Auto intl call set., you can make international calls without dialing the IDD prefix code. Continued on next page 51 The digital communication fee is charged after the appearance of this screen. To switch a videophone call to a voice call
Videophone in-call screen (p.48)u (FUNC)
Change to voice N
It takes about 5 seconds to switch the calls. Note that the signal quality may affect how long it takes.
You cannot switch the calls during calling in the following cases:
When the other party is holding the call
When the other party activates Record message
The displayed call duration is reset to 0 second each time the calls are switched. However, the total time for voice and videophone call is displayed after ending a call.
Depending on the other partys communication conditions or the signal quality, you may not be able to switch the calls and the call may be canceled.
When the call is switched, the first dialed or received call is registered to the Redial/Dialed calls records or Received calls records.
<When switching from voice call to videophone call>
If the caller is using i-mode, the i-mode communication is canceled to switch to videophone.
If the other party is using packet communication
(including i-mode), you receive the message No Switch meaning you cannot switch the calls.
You cannot switch the calls when Call Waiting is activated. Making International Calls
<WORLD CALL>
WORLD CALL is an international dialing service that can be used from DOCOMO mobile phones. FOMA service subscribers are also subscribed to WORLD CALL when they subscribe to the FOMA service. (This excludes subscribers who declared that they did not require the service.) i
i V o c e V d e o p h o n e C a l l s
As Auto intl call set. in Intl dial assistance is set to ON (automatically added) at the time of purchase, the FOMA terminal automatically dials the IDD prefix code. 1 On the standby screen, dial the following; + (0 (1 second or longer)) Country codeArea code (Long distance code)The other partys phone number If the area code (long distance code) begins with 0, omit the first 0. However, to call to ordinary phones in Italy, 0 is required. 2 rDial The international call is made. To make a call without converting + into the IDD prefix code
Original phone No.
* Not available in this terminal. To cancel the call
Cancel Making an international call from the function menu You can make an international call by adding a country code and IDD prefix code from the function menu.
You can use the international dial function from the Enter phone number screen and the detail screens of Phonebook/Received calls/Dialed calls/
Redial screens.
<Example: To use the international dial function from the enter phone number screen>
party 1 Enter the phone number of the other 2 u (FUNC)Intl callSelect the country codeSelect the IDD prefix code The selected country code and IDD prefix code are added. If the area code (long distance code) begins with 0, the first 0 is automatically deleted (except when Italy is selected for the country code). 3 r The international call is made. Making the setting for the international call
<Intl dial assistance>
You can set the automatic conversion of +, and also edit and store the country codes and IDD prefix code for international calls. 52 1 iSETTINGSDialingIntl dial assistanceSelect any item:
Auto intl call set.You can set the automatic conversion of + when you make an international call.
ONSelect a country codeSelect an IDD prefix code When you do not convert automatically
OFF Country Code setting Stores up to 22 country names and country codes used when you make an international call. See the DOCOMO website for information on country codes.
Highlight an itemo (Edit)
Enter the country name Enter the country code Country Code setting Function menup.52 IDD Prefix settingStores the IDD prefix name and IDD prefix code used when you make an international call. Up to 3 entries can be stored.
Highlight an item to be stored or changedo (Edit)
Enter the IDD prefix name Enter the IDD prefix code IDD Prefix setting Function menup.58 Country Code setting screen
(p.52) EditEdits the country code. DeleteSelects the deleting method from Delete this/
Delete selected/Delete all. About multiple-choicep.38 Using Handsfree Call During a Call
<Hands-free>
You can hear the other partys voice from the speaker while talking. 1 In-call screen (p.48)o (
) appears and you can hear other partys voice through a speaker during a handsfree call. While your terminal is ringing, you can switch to handsfree operation by pressing o (
). Ex. Voice call Ex. Videophone call To cancel the handsfree operation
Press o (
) during a handsfree call disappears when you make a voice call. is changed to in case of videophone. Notes on using the handsfree operation It is recommended to keep a distance of about 30 cm from the FOMA terminal during a handsfree call. If the distance is longer or shorter than 30 cm, the other party may find it difficult to hear you or your voice may sound differently. N
Move to an area where your call will not disturb other people before switching to a handsfree call.
When a call is finished, the handsfree setting is canceled. Using the Redial/Dialed Calls/
Received Calls Record
<Redial/Dialed calls/Received calls>
Information on dialed or received calls, including the callers phone number and the date and time are stored in the Redial/Dialed calls/Received calls record. You can make a call to the other party easily by using these records.
When you make calls to the same phone number repeatedly, the latest entry is stored as the Redial record and separate entries are stored for the Dialed calls record.
The Redial record can hold up to 30 phone numbers for voice/videophone calls.
The Dialed calls/Received calls record stores up to 30 voice/videophone call entries and 30 packet communication or 64K data communication entries.
If the maximum number of logs is exceeded, logs are overwritten starting with the oldest one.
<Example: To make a call from the Redial/Received calls list screen>
1 On the standby screenj (Redial)/
h (Received calls) The Redial screen (list)/
Received calls screen (list) appears. To check the Dialed calls
iOWN DATA Dialed calls The Dialed calls screen
(list) appears. Ex. Redial (list) Function menup.54 i
i V o c e V d e o p h o n e C a l l s 2 Highlight the Redial/Received calls record entry To make a call after checking the details of the Redial/Received calls record
Select the Redial/
Received calls record entry The Redial screen (detail) or Received calls screen
(detail) appears. Ex. Redial (detail) Function menup.54 3 r (voice call)/o (V. phone) Checking the number of missed calls To confirm only the missed calls from the Received calls record
iOWN DATAReceived calls Total number of received calls, the number of missed calls and the number of unconfirmed missed calls appear. When you select Missed calls, only the missed calls appears. Redial/Dialed calls/Received calls record icons Icon*1
Description Incoming and outgoing/missed/
unconfirmed missed voice calls Incoming and outgoing/missed/
unconfirmed missed international voice calls Incoming and outgoing/missed/
unconfirmed missed videophone calls Continued on next page 53 Icon*1
*2
i
i V o c e V d e o p h o n e C a l l s Description Incoming and outgoing/missed/
unconfirmed missed international videophone calls Incoming and outgoing calls to B mode for 2in1 setting Recorded voice record message/
videophone message Received calls with Chaku-moji Outgoing/Incoming/missed/
unconfirmed missed packet communication
Incoming and outgoing/missed/
unconfirmed missed 64K data communication Incoming packet communication or 64K data communication that is received without external device connected Incoming and outgoing calls when the time zone is not GMT+09 regardless of the Auto time adjust setting (if summer time is set, the summer time setting applies)
*1: Some icons look different between the detail screen and the list screen.
*2: Displayed only when the 2in1 is in Dual mode. N
If you use 2in1, up to 30 records are stored for each phone number. Also, when set to Dual mode, up to 30 Redial/Dialed calls/Received calls records for both phone numbers and total of the 60 records are displayed.
If the same phone number is registered in the multiple phonebook entries with different names, the name retrieved by the phonebook search in the order of reading is displayed in the Redial/Dialed calls/
Received calls record. p.73
<Redial/Dialed calls>
Setting Restrict dialing deletes all the Redial/Dialed calls records.
If you make a call by selecting Multi number from the function menu, the registered name and number of the additional number are displayed under the phone number in the Redial screen (detail)/Dialed calls record screen (detail). If you make a call without using the function menu, nothing is displayed even when Set Multi Number is set to additional number.
<Received calls>
When Missed calls display in the Ring time(sec.) is set to Not display and you receive a call of which ring tone sounded for shorter time than the time set in the Set mute seconds, the call is not displayed on the Received calls record.
If the caller is using Dial-in, a number different from the Dial-in number may be displayed. 54 N
When you have subscribed to Multi number and make a call from the Received calls record screen, the phone call is made from the number which received the call regardless of the Set Multi Number setting.
When you receive a call for additional number of Multi number, the registered name of the additional number are displayed under the phone number in the Received calls record screen (detail). Redial/Dialed calls/Received calls screen (p.53) Notify Caller ID*1p.56 Prefix numbers*1p.58 Chaku-moji*1p.55 Intl call*1p.52 2in1/Multi Num.*1When 2in1 is set to ON and Dual mode, selects from Number A/Number B/Cancel number (p.323) (not available when A mode or B mode is set). Selects from Basic number/Additional number 1/
Additional number 2/Cancel number (p.319) at the Multi Number when 2in1 set to OFF. Ring time*2*3Displays the missed call record entries with the ringing times. Add to phonebookp.72 Look-up phonebookAccessing the phonebook from the Redial or Dialed Calls recordp.74 Add shortcutp.94 Compose message*4p.156 Compose SMS*4p.182 Sent address*5*6Displays the sent address list. Received address*2Displays the received address list. Select imageSelects the image used during a videophone call from Chara-den. Select Release settings to cancel the setting. Set large fontSet normal font*3Switches the character size of the displayed name.p.93 DeleteSelects the deleting method from Delete this/
Delete selected/Delete all. About multiple-choicep.38
*1: Available only for the detail screen.
*2: Available only for the Received calls screen.
*3: Available only for the list screen.
*4: Available only when 2in1 is in A mode or Dual mode, and selecting the record screen for the A mode.
*5: Available only for the Redial/Dialed calls screen.
*6: Not available when 2in1 is in B mode. N
Selecting Delete all from the Redial/Dialed calls record deletes all the Redial and Dialed calls records. Note that selecting Delete this or Delete selected for the Redial record does not delete the entries of Dialed calls record, and selecting Delete this or Delete selected for the Dialed calls record does not delete the entries of the Redial record.
<Compose message>
When the phonebook stores the phone number and the mail address, an address listed first is used as destination to create a message. Using Chaku-moji
<Chaku-moji>
When making a voice call or videophone call, you can send a message (Chaku-moji) to the other party to show the summary of the call, etc. beforehand.
5 Chaku-moji messages are stored at the time of purchase. You can change the pre-installed Chaku-
moji messages.
You can include pictographs or face marks in Chaku-moji, and you can send a message of up to 10 characters including pictograph/symbol/double-
byte character/single-byte character.
For details on Chaku-moji and the compatible models, refer to the DOCOMO website or Mobile Phone Users Guide [Network services]. Making a call with a message You can add Chaku-moji when making a voice or videophone call from the Enter phone number screen and the detail screen of the Phonebook or Redial/Dialed calls/Received calls.
<Example: To make a call with Chaku-moji from the enter phone number screen>
1 Enter phone number screen (p.48) u (FUNC)Chaku-mojiSelect any item:
Create messageEnters Chaku-moji. You can enter up to 10 characters. Select messageSelects from the stored Chaku-
moji. You can edit Chaku-moji by pressing o (Edit) on the message selection screen. Sent messagesSelects from the previously sent Chaku-moji. You can edit Chaku-moji by pressing o (Edit) on the sent message screen. To delete the entered Chaku-moji (to make a call without Chaku-moji)
u (FUNC)Chaku-mojiCreate message
Clear all the entered Chaku-moji i
i V o c e V d e o p h o n e C a l l s 2 r (voice call) /o (V. phone) When the other partys terminal receives Chaku-
moji, the result Transmission completed appears. N
Sending Chaku-moji is charged. Receiving Chaku-
moji is not charged.
You can store up to 30 Chaku-moji in the sent messages record (if you use 2in1, up to 30 sent messages records when set to each mode, and up to 30 sent messages records for each and total of the 60 records are stored when set to Dual mode). When you send same Chaku-moji repeatedly, only the latest one is recorded. When the entries exceed the maximum number, entries are overwritten from the oldest entry.
If the receivers terminal is under the following conditions, Chaku-moji cannot be sent. In this case, no sending charges apply.
The terminal is not compatible with Chaku-moji
(Transmission failed appears)
Chaku-moji does not appear on the screen of the receiver terminal because of the MSG display settings on the receiver terminal (Transmission failed appears)
Public mode (Driving mode) is set
The ringing time for recording message is set to 0 second.
or the FOMA terminal is turned off.
Depending on the signal status, sending result does not appear on the sender terminal even when the receiver terminal receives Chaku-moji. In this case, sending charges apply.
You cannot send or receive Chaku-moji when using the FOMA terminal overseas. When you receive a voice or videophone call with a message The Chaku-moji appears on the ringing screen. The Chaku-moji disappears when you answer the call. Chaku-moji Ex. Voice call Continued on next page 55 i
i V o c e V d e o p h o n e C a l l s N
Even when you receive a call whose ring tone sounded for shorter time than the time set in the Set mute seconds of Ring time (sec.), Chaku-moji is displayed and recorded in the Received calls record.
Depending on the status of the sender or receiver, Chaku-moji may not be displayed even if you receive a call with Chaku-moji.
When the Original lock is set to Chaku-moji, Chaku-
moji is not displayed even if you receive a call with Chaku-moji. In this case, Chaku-moji is stored to the Received calls record after releasing the lock. Displaying a message from the Received calls record icon When you receive Chaku-moji, the appears on the Received calls record, and you can check the Chaku-moji message on the Received calls screen (detail). N
Even when you make a call using the Received calls record, the Chaku-moji in the record is not sent. Editing and setting messages 1 iSERVICEChaku-moji Select any item:
Create messageStores or edits frequently used Chaku-moji. You can store up to 30 Chaku-moji (including 5 pre-installed).
Highlight an item to be stored or editedo (Edit) Enter the Chaku-moji Create message list screen
(p.56) EditEdits Chaku-moji. DeleteSelects the deleting method from Delete this/
Delete selected/Delete all. About multiple-choicep.38 N
You cannot delete the pre-installed Chaku-moji. Even when you change a pre-installed Chaku-moji and delete the Chaku-moji, it is restored to the default. Setting Caller ID Notification Set whether to display your phone number (caller ID) on the other partys phone (display) each time you make a call.
Take care when informing others of your phone number, as this is important personal information.
You can set Caller ID Notification all at once.p.46 Adding the 186/184 prefix to the other partys phone number To provide your caller ID, add the 186 prefix when you dial the phone number. To withhold your caller ID, use the 184 prefix. To provide your phone number 186 - The other partys phone number - r (voice call)/o (videophone call) To withhold your phone number 184 - The other partys phone number - r (voice call)/o (videophone call) Create message list Selecting from the function menu Function menup.56 MSG display settingsSets the Chaku-moji display setting when you receive a call with Chaku-moji. Display all messagesDisplays all Chaku-
moji messages. Only number in PH-bookDisplays only the Chaku-moji messages from senders stored in the phonebook. Calls with Caller IDDisplays only the Chaku-moji messages from senders providing the caller ID. Hide all messagesHides all Chaku-moji messages. 56 Select OFF or ON from the function menu the Enter phone number screen and the detail screens of Phonebook/Received calls/Dialed calls/Redial.
<Example: To make a voice call from the Enter phone number screen>
party 1 Enter the phone number of the other 2 u (FUNC)Notify Caller IDOFF or ON To cancel Notify Caller ID
Cancel prefix When Cancel prefix is selected, the Caller ID Notification setting is applied. i
i V o c e V d e o p h o n e C a l l s 3 r (voice call)/o (videophone) N
This function is available only when the other partys phone can display caller ID.
If you hear a message requesting your caller ID, show your caller ID.
When making an international call, 186/184 may be disabled. Select Notify Caller ID from the function menu.
If you make a call with the 186/184 prefix, the phone number including this prefix is recorded in the Redial/Dialed calls. Sending Push Signals
<Pause dial>
By sending push signals from the FOMA terminal, you can use services such as ticket ordering and bank balance requests. Storing dialing data as pause dial record entries You can store the dialing data used as push signals to Pause dial beforehand. Inserting P (pause) into the dialing data allows you to send data with a separation where a pause lies.
You can store 1 dialing data, consisting of up to 128 characters.
You can enter numbers from 0 to 9, the # and *
symbols, and P (pause) for dialing data.
You cannot enter P (pause) in succession or at the beginning of the dialing data. 1 iSETTINGSDialingPause dial The Pause dial screen appears. If there is dialing data already stored The stored dialing data appears. Pause dial Function menup.57 2 o (Edit)Enter the dialing data Press 0 to 9, q and w to enter the dialing data. To enter P (pause)
w (1 second or longer) Pause dial screen (p.57) EditEdits the dialing data. Send pause dialEnters the phone number of the other party and sends the dialing data. Each time you press r, the dialing data up to P (pause) is transmitted. DeleteDeletes the stored dialing data. Transmitting the dialing data as a pause dial 1 iSETTINGSDialingPause 2 Dial the phone number of the diald (Send) destinationr The FOMA terminal calls the entered phone number and displays the dialing data up to the first P (pause) while the dialed phone is ringing. P (pause) is not displayed. 3 r Each time you press r, the dialing data up to P (pause) is transmitted. Once the FOMA terminal has finished sending the last number, the in-call screen reappears. To transmit all the dialing data at once
j (1 second or longer)Send at one time It may not be possible to send all the data at once to some recipients. N
Some phones may be unable to receive push signals. Using the Prefix Function You can store the prefix numbers such as IDD prefix code and 186/184 for notifying/withholding your caller ID beforehand and add these prefix numbers when you make calls. Storing the prefix numbers
<Prefix setting>
You can store up to 7 prefix numbers.
You can enter numbers from 0 to 9 and the #, *
and + symbols. Continued on next page 57 N
In the following cases, * does not function as a sub-
address separator. The entered number including *
is recognized as an ordinary phone number:
When the * is entered at the beginning of a phone number
When * immediately follows 186/184 at the beginning of a phone number
When * immediately follows a number entered using Prefix numbers
When the phone number contains *590#/*591#/
*592#
Setting the Alarm Used for Reconnection
<Reconnect signal>
When the signal quality deteriorates during a voice/
videophone call and the call drops out, the FOMA terminal will automatically reconnect the call if the signal quality quickly improves. Set the type of alarm when a call is reconnected for this function.
The interval for reconnection varies depending on communication conditions or the signal quality. It takes about 10 seconds. 1 iSETTINGSTalkReconnect signalSelect an alarm tone Select from No tone/High tone/Low tone. N
Call charges apply in the interval (up to about 10 seconds) for reconnection. Blocking Out Ambient Noise
<Noise reduction>
This function suppresses ambient noise and makes it easier for the other party in a voice or videophone call to hear you. 1 iSETTINGSTalkNoise reductionON or OFF i
i V o c e V d e o p h o n e C a l l s 1 iSETTINGSDialingPrefix setting The Prefix setting screen appears. 2 Highlight the item to store or change o (Edit) 3 Enter the name to be stored Function menup.58 You can enter up to 8 double-byte or 16 single-
byte characters. Prefix setting 4 Enter the numbers (prefix) You can enter up to 10 digits. Prefix setting screen (p.58)/IDD Prefix setting screen (p.52) EditEdits the prefix number or IDD prefix code. Delete thisDelete allDeletes one or all prefix numbers/IDD prefix codes. Making a call with the Prefix numbers
<Prefix numbers>
You can add the prefix numbers from the Enter phone number screen and the detail screens of Phonebook/Received calls/Dialed calls/Redial screens.
<Example: To make a voice call by adding prefix numbers from the enter phone number screen>
1 Enter the phone number of the other party 2 u (FUNC) Prefix numbersSelect the stored namer Setting Sub-addresses When Making Calls
<Sub-address setting>
You can set whether to specify * in the phone number as a separator so that the numbers following
* are recognized as a sub-address (ON/OFF).
Sub-addresses are used in ISDN to identify calls made from specific communications devices and to select content in V-live. 1 iSETTINGSDialingSub-
address settingON or OFF 58 Making Handsfree Calls in the Car
<In-car Hands-free>
You can make or receive voice calls with handsfree compatible devices by connecting the FOMA terminal to handsfree compatible devices such as the In-Car Hands-Free Kit 01 (optional) or a car navigation system. For information on how to use the handsfree device, refer to the manual provided with the device. The FOMA In-Car Hands-Free Cable 01 (optional) is required to use the In-Car Hands-Free Kit 01 (optional). N
To operate from the handsfree device, set the USB mode to Communication mode.
The display and ring tones used for incoming calls and mail are as specified in the FOMA terminal settings.
When the handsfree device is set to emit the sound from the handsfree device, the ring tone still sound through the handsfree device even when the FOMA terminal is set to Manner mode or the ring volume is set to Silent.
When the Public mode (Driving mode) is set, operation for incoming calls and messages is as specified in the Public mode (Driving mode) settings.
When the Record message is set, operation for incoming calls is as specified in the Record message settings.
When the handsfree device is set to emit the sound from the FOMA terminal, operation when the FOMA terminal is folded during a call is as specified in Setting when folded. When the handsfree device is set to emit sound from the handsfree device, folding the FOMA terminal does not affect the call status regardless of the Setting when folded setting. Receiving a Voice/
Videophone Call
* FOMA SO706i does not contain front camera. A substitute image (Chara-den) or rear camera image will be sent to the other party. A substitute image (Chara-den) can be changed to an image in My picture, etc. using Select image.p.67 1 Voice/Videophone call is received The ring tone sounds and the illumination flashes. The Ringing screen/Videophone ringing screen appears. When you receive a call with Chaku-moji The Chaku-moji appears on the ringing screen/
videophone ringing screen.p.55 i
i V o c e V d e o p h o n e C a l l s Ringing Function menup.60 Videophone ringing Function menup.60 To put a voice/videophone call on hold while the FOMA terminal is ringingp.62 2 r The In-call screen/Videophone in-call screen appears. Operations during a videophone call You can perform various operations such as changing the camera image to the substitute image and muting the sound.p.48 When the other party switches a voice/
videophone call during a callp.60 To put the current voice/videophone call on holdp.62 3 To end the call, press y Display while receiving a call When the other partys phone number is notified The other partys phone number appears on the screen. When the caller is stored in the phonebook, the name stored in the phonebook appears (only the name is displayed while Keypad lock is set).p.70
If the same phone number is registered in the multiple phonebook entries with different names, the first name retrieved by the phonebook search in the order of reading appears.p.73
If the caller is stored as secret data, the name or other information does not appear and only the phone number appears.
When you receive a call for additional number of Multi number, the registered name of the additional number is displayed on the ringing screen. When the other partys phone number is not notified The reason of not notifying appears. 59 i
i V o c e V d e o p h o n e C a l l s Ringing screen/Videophone ringing screen (p.59) Call RejectionTerminates the receiving call without answering. Call ForwardingForwards the call. The call is forwarded regardless of the Call Forwarding setting Activate/Deactivate. Voice MailConnects the call to the voice mail service center. The call is connected to the voice mail service center regardless of the Voice Mail setting Activate/Deactivate. Change DisplaySwitches the display from additional number 1 or 2 to the number from which the call is forwarded. This can be selected when receiving multi number call (for additional number 1 or 2) and the call is forwarded at the same time. N
You can receive a call using a flat-plug earphone/
microphone with switch (optional).p.298
If you have subscribed to the Call waiting, Voice mail or Call forwarding service, activate Set in-call arrival and set Incoming Call Mng to Answer, you will hear a short double-beep (bibip) when you receive a call when you are already on a call.
If you subscribe to the Voice mail or Call forwarding service, you can answer the call by ending the current call.
If you subscribe to the Call waiting service, you can answer the voice call by putting the current call on hold and you can answer the videophone call by ending the current call.
You can set the incoming call management from the caller who is not stored in the phonebook.p.114
You can set the incoming call restriction for each phone number stored in the phonebook.p.112
<Videophone>
It may take a few seconds to switch from a camera image to a substitute image (Chara-den) depending on the Chara-den. When the Other Party Switches a Voice/Videophone Call (Caller) When you receive a voice/videophone call, the other party can switch the call between voice call and videophone call.
The receiver cannot switch a voice call to a videophone call.
To switch the call, the receiver needs to set Ntfy switch-mode to notify the switch beforehand. p.67
You can use this function with the terminals compatible with voice call/videophone call switch. 60
<Example: When the other party switched a voice call to a videophone call>
1 In-call screen (p.48)The other party switches to a videophone call While switching, the screen which indicates that the calls are being switched appears and the voice guidance is played. When the voice call is switched to the videophone call, the substitute image is sent to the other party. When the other party switched a videophone call to a voice call
Videophone in-call screen (p.48)The other party switches to a voice call The videophone call is switched to the voice call. Using the Dial Keys to Answer a Call
<Answer setting>
You can use this setting to turn off the ring tone or answer the phone quickly when you receive a call. 1 iSETTINGSIncoming call Answer settingSelect any item:
Any key answerValid for voice calls. You can answer the call by pressing any of the following keys. r, d (Answer) , 0 to 9, q, w, t, o, p, b
* For videophone calls, you can answer the call only by ordinary key operations (r, d (Subst.)). Quick silentPressing any of the following keys or opening the FOMA terminal stops the incoming call reaction while the caller continues to hear the ring tone. 0 to 9, q, w, t, b, p or o (for voice calls only) To answer the call, press r or d (Answer/Subst.). OFFYou can answer the call only with r or d (Answer/Subst.). N
Even when Quick silent is set, the Any key answer function is used in Manner mode. Ending/Holding Calls with the FOMA Terminal Folded
<Setting when folded>
You can set how your FOMA terminal operates when it is folded during a voice or videophone call. 1 iSETTINGSTalkSetting when foldedSelect any item:
No toneMutes the sound. The other party does not hear the hold tone. Tone onPuts a call on hold (holding). When the FOMA terminal is folded, the other party hears the hold tone. For videophone calls, the image for holding is sent to the other party. Speaker ONThe hold tone is sent to the other party and also plays through the speaker. Speaker OFFOnly the other party hears the hold tone. End the callEnds the call. It is the same operation as pressing y. N
When Manner mode is set, no sound is played through the speaker even if Speaker ON is set.
When a flat-plug earphone/microphone with switch
(optional) is connected, this function is disabled.
Even if the Tone on setting is selected, folding the FOMA terminal activates the No tone setting if Call Waiting is switched on. Adjusting the Earpiece Volume 1 On the standby screenc (1 second or longer)Adjust the volume with c
<Volume>
Pressing c (1 second or longer) displays the earpiece volume screen. If no operation is conducted for 2 seconds or longer when the earpiece volume screen is displayed, the earpiece volume screen is expired. You can adjust the volume in 6 steps from Level 1 (quietest) to Level 6 (loudest). To adjust the earpiece volume during a call During a voice call: c (1 second or longer) During a videophone call: c
You can also adjust with a ( )/s (
). N
If you adjust the volume during a call, the adjusted setting is retained after you end the call. Adjusting the Ring Volume
<Ring volume>
You can adjust the volume of the ring tone for a incoming call, mail, MessageR/F in 6 steps for each type of call. You can also set to silent or to gradually get louder. i
i V o c e V d e o p h o n e C a l l s 1 iSETTINGSIncoming call Ring volumeSelect an item to adjust its volume Select Phone to adjust the ring tone volume for voice calls and 64K data communication. Select Mail to adjust the ring tone volume for i-mode mail, Area Mail, SMS or packet communication. 2 Use c to adjust the ring volume d (Set) To raise the volume gradually
Press f in Level 6 When set to Step, the ring volume becomes louder and louder in every 3 seconds. To set to silent
Press g in Level 1 An icon appears in the standby screen to confirm that a Silent ring tone is set.
: Phone or Videophone is set to Silent
: Silent is set for Mail, MessageR and/or MessageF.
: Both and are set. N
The ring volume setting specified for Phone in this function is also applied to the Select ring tone setting for a voice call, the alarm tones for Schedule and To Do list. 61 Holding the Ringing/Current Call
<Answer hold/Holding>
<Example: To put the ringing call on hold>
1 While ringingy The FOMA terminal makes three rapid beeps and puts the call on hold. The caller hears a message saying that you cannot answer at the moment and the call is held without hanging up. To put the current call on hold
During a callt To end the call during answer hold/
holding
y 2 Press r to resume the call You can also use t to cancel holding when you put the current call on hold. N
Call charges apply while putting the ringing call or current call on hold. i
i V o c e V d e o p h o n e C a l l s You can set the guidance messages to the other party during the answer hold.
You cannot change the hold tone that is played during a call. 1 iSETTINGSTalkSet hold toneOn hold tone Select the hold tone Select from Tone 1/Tone 2/Voice announce 1*/
Voice announce 2*.
* : Not available when no Voice announce is recorded. Using the Public Mode
(Driving Mode)
<Public mode (Driving mode)>
The Public mode is an automatic answering service provided to keep manner in public circumstances. During Public mode, a caller hears a message that you cannot answer the call because you are driving or you are in the place you have to refrain from calling
(on the train or bus, in the theater, etc.), then the call ends. 62
Public mode can only be set/released from the standby screen. (It can also be set/released when the icon is displayed.)
You can still make calls when the FOMA terminal is in Public mode.
This function is not available during data communication.
When you receive a call of User unset while Caller ID Request is set to Activate, caller ID request message is announced. (The Public mode message is not announced.) 1 On the standby screenq (1 second or longer) Public mode is set and appears. When you receive a call, the caller hears the message I cant answer the call because I am driving or I have to refrain from calling now. Please call back later. To release the Public mode (Driving mode)
On the standby screenq (1 second or longer) Public mode is canceled and disappears. N
The Public mode setting takes priority when Record message is ON. mode is set at the same time.
If you make a voice call to an emergency number
(110, 119 or 118) while Public mode is set, Public mode is released.
The following tones do not sound in Public mode:
Ring tone for voice/videophone call
Ring tone for mail or message
Alarm tone
Charge sound
Software tone for i-ppli
Ring tone for packet communication/64k data communication When Public mode (Driving mode) is set The FOMA terminal does not ring when you receive a voice or videophone call. Calls are logged in the Received calls record as Missed calls record, and the Missed call shortcut icon appears on the standby screen.
A caller making a voice call hears a message that you cannot answer the call because you are driving or you are in the place you have to refrain from using mobile phones, then the call ends.
A caller making a videophone call sees the Public mode video message on his or her display, then the call ends. Setting the hold tone
<Set hold tone>
The Public mode setting takes priority when Manner i
i V o c e V d e o p h o n e C a l l s
If the FOMA terminal is set to Public mode (Driving mode) while network services are activated, voice calls and videophone calls are handled as shown in the Table 1 (p.63).
When you receive a mail, the ring tone does not sound and the New mail shortcut icon appears on the standby screen. N
If the power is off or is displayed, the message for message even when Public mode is set. is announced instead of the Public mode Using the Public Mode (Power OFF)
<Public mode (Power OFF)>
The Public mode (Power OFF) is an automatic answering service provided to keep manner in public circumstances. During Public mode (Power OFF), a caller who made a call while the FOMA terminal is turned off hears a message that you cannot answer the call because you are in the place you have to turn off the mobile phone (in the hospital, on the airplane, around the priority seat on the train, etc.), then the call ends. 1 On the standby screen w25251r Public mode (Power OFF) is set. (Nothing changes on the standby screen.) When you receive a call after setting Public mode (Power OFF) and turning off the FOMA terminal, the caller hears the message The person you are calling is in an area where cell phone should not be used. Please call back later. To cancel the Public mode (Power OFF)
On the standby screen w25250r To check Public mode (Power OFF) setting
On the standby screen w25259r When Public mode (Power OFF) is set The setting is valid until *25250 is dialed to release the Public mode (Power OFF). The setting is not canceled only by turning on the FOMA terminal. The Public mode (Power OFF) message is announced even when you are in an out-of-service area or where the reception is very poor.
A caller making a voice call hears a message that you cannot answer the call because you are in the place you have to turn off the mobile phone, then the call ends.
A caller making a videophone call sees the Public mode (Power OFF) video message on his or her display, then the call ends.
If the FOMA terminal is set to Public mode (Power OFF) while network services are activated, voice calls and videophone calls are handled as shown in the Table 1 (p.63).
[Table 1] Handling of received calls when network services and Public mode (Driving mode/Power OFF) are set Service Voice Mail Service Call Forwarding Service Nuisance Call Blocking When a voice call is received When a videophone call is received
Connects to the Voice mail service center after announcing the Public mode message.*
Connects to the Voice mail service center without showing the Public mode video message.
Transfers the call to the forwarding number after announcing the Public mode message.*
The Public mode message is announced or
Transfers the videophone call to the forwarding number without showing the Public mode video message. not depending on the setting of the call forwarding service.
The connection is not established when the videophone for the forwarding number is not compatible with 3G-324M.
Ends the call after showing the message that the connection could not be established for the barred callers.
Ends the call after showing the video message that the connection could not be established for the barred callers.
Ends the call after announcing the Public
Ends the call after showing the Public mode mode message for other callers. video message for other callers. Caller ID Request
Ends the call after announcing the caller ID request message for the callers who do not provide the caller ID.
Ends the call after showing the caller ID request video message for the callers who do not provide the caller ID.
Ends the call after announcing the Public mode
Ends the call after showing the Public mode video message for the callers who provide the caller ID.
* : If the ring time is set to 0 second, the Public mode message is not announced and the Voice Mail Service or Call message for the callers who provide the caller ID. Forwarding Service is applied. In addition, they are not recorded in the Received calls record and Missed call shortcut icon does not appear. 63 i
i V o c e V d e o p h o n e C a l l s When You Cannot Answer a Received Call
<Missed calls>
When you cannot answer a received call, the appears on the standby screen. When you select
, you can check the date, time and the caller ID about the call.
Advising shortcut iconsp.94 1 On the standby screendSelect The Received calls list screen appears.p.53 To check the information with the FOMA terminal folded When there is a missed call or new mail (i-mode mail, Area Mail and SMS), the illumination keeps on flashing. When you press s (), you can confirm the caller or sender in the voice. 1 Press s () with the FOMA terminal folded Notify it with a voice according to the setting of Info notice setting. Illumination flashing When there is a missed call or new mail, the illumination continues flashing according to the following patterns and colors:
Voice call/Videophone Lighting pattern: Slow Beat Flashing color: Citrine orange
New mail/Area mail Lighting pattern: Slow Beat Flashing color: Light purple Flashing conditions
If Missed call under Illumination set is set to OFF, the illumination does not work when there is a missed call.
If Missed mail under Illumination set is set to OFF, the illumination does not work when a new mail arrives.
The illumination does not flash in Public mode
(Driving mode). To turn off the lamp
Selects the icon for Missed call or New mail in the display or push t (1 second or longer) to check the description. 64 Setting the Notification Method for Missed Calls
<Info notice setting>
You can set the notification type when s () is pressed.
The following shows options and actions:
Item When there is a missed When there is no missed call, new mail, etc. call, new mail, etc. Bibip, bibip tone. ON Bibip tone. OFF The Confirmation Tone does not sound. 1 iSETTINGSIncoming call Info notice settingON or OFF When (Voice) is selected If you set (Japanese) in Select language, you can select (electronic sound), (voice) and OFF. You can set the voice to read out (ON) the name or not (OFF) when the caller is stored in the phonebook, when a message is recorded or when a mail arrives. N
This function alerts you using a YES indication when the Missed call, New mail, etc. shortcut icon is displayed on the standby screen.p.94
You cannot use s () to check for missed calls or new mail in the following cases:
When Side key guard is set to ON
When playing music with the Music Player/
Music&Video Channel
The volume set in the Phone in the Ring volume setting is used (if Phone is set to Silent or Step, the volume is set to Level 2).
Opening the FOMA terminal during the notification stops the notification.
If the reading of callers name is not stored in the phonebook or the name stored in the phonebook is not displayed, the callers name is not read out even when (name notification) of
(voice) is set to ON in Japanese language mode. Having the Caller Leave a Message
<Record message>
When you cannot answer a voice or videophone call, this function allows you to record a message from the caller on your FOMA terminal.
The voice call can record 5 messages up to 20 seconds, and the videophone call can record 2 messages up to 20 seconds for each 1 case. and to
: Recorded voice messages (1 to 5) Setting Record message 1 iSETTINGSIncoming call Record messageSelect any item:
ONSelect the desired type of answer message from Japanese 1/Japanese 2/English/Voice announce 1*/Voice announce 2*, then set the record message. OFFCancels the Record message setting.
* : Not available when no Voice announce is recorded. 2 Enter the ringing time (between 000 to 120 seconds in 3 digits) The record message is set and appear on the standby screen. N
To give priority to Record message function when Voice Mail, Call Forwarding and Record message are set at the same time, set the ringing time of Record message shorter than that of Voice mail and Call forwarding.
If the mute time set in Ring time(sec.) is longer than the ringing time set for the Record message function, the FOMA terminal switches directly to Record message without ringing first. To have the FOMA terminal ring before it records a message, make sure that the ringing time for Record message is longer than the mute time.
You can use Ring tone/Image (for each phonebook entry) to set an answer message for each phone number and Ring tone/Image (for the phonebook group) to set an answer message for each group. When Record message is set The record message activates when the set time is elapsed.
To the caller of a voice call, the answer message is played and the recording starts.
To the caller of a videophone call, the Preparing image is sent and the answer message is played, then the Recording image is sent and the recording starts. When message recording starts
The recording screen appears. The callers voice can be heard through the FOMA terminal earpiece during message recording. To answer a voice/
videophone call while recording
r Ex. Voice call i
i V o c e V d e o p h o n e C a l l s When message recording ends
The original screen reappears and the Missed call and Record message shortcut icons appear on the standby screen. You can check the contents by selecting the one of the shortcut icons.p.65
Number of recordings are displayed with icons on the icon display area at the top of the screen.
: Recorded videophone messages (1 or 2) N
When Manner mode is set, you cannot hear the callers voice during a message recording.
You cannot answer another call while recording a message. Having Callers Leave a Message During an Incoming Call
<Quick message>
Even when the Record message function is not set to ON, you can record messages while receiving a call by pressing a key. 1 While ringings () The recording of the message starts. To set Manner mode when recording starts
While ringinga ( ) N
You cannot set Record message to ON with this operation.
If a voice/videophone call arrives when full of voices/
videos, Record message does not activate but the call keeps ringing (with operational conditions set in Manner mode set when a ( ) is pressed). Playing/Erasing Recorded Messages and Voice Memos
When there is a recorded message which has not been played,
(Record VP message) appears on the standby screen.
(Record message) or Continued on next page 65 To make a voice/videophone call to the phone number displayed while playing a message
r (voice call) /o (V. phone) To erase the playing message
u (FUNC)EraseYES N
When 2in1 is in A mode or B mode, does not appear for the recorded message recorded in the unused phone number. When set to Dual mode, appears for the recorded message recorded in the both phone numbers. Play/Erase msg. screen (voice/
video) (p.66) PlayPlays the message. Delete thisErases one recorded message or voice memo. Delete rec. msg.*Erases all the recorded messages. Voice memos are not erased. Delete allErases all the recorded messages and voice memos.
* : Available only with the Play/Erase msg. screen. Using Chara-den This function sends a cartoon character instead of your own image when you make a videophone call. What is Chara-den?p.237
You can display your favorite Chara-den if you set Substitute image of Select image to Chara-den beforehand. You can also use Chara-den by setting Chara-den in the phonebook or Ring tone/Image function. 1 Sending a substitute image (Chara-
den) on videophoneControl your character by pressing the dial keys Pressing a dial key makes the character perform the action assigned to that key. Using Chara-den charactersp.238 Chara-den i
i V o c e V d e o p h o n e C a l l s
<Example: To check the recorded message which has not been played>
1 On the standby screendSelect
(Record message) or
(Record VP message) The Play/Erase msg. screen or Play/Erase VP msg. screen appears. appears for the recorded item. To play the recorded message with the menu operation Play/Erase msg. Function menup.66
iLIFEKITPlay/Erase. msg. (voice) or Play/Erase. VP msg. 2 Select the item to play
<Record message/Voice memo>
The FOMA terminal beeps and playback begins. When the playback ends, the FOMA terminal gives 2 short beeps and the Play/
Erase msg. screen reappears. You can also play the messages by pressing Vs () on the standby screen. To play the next message while playing a message
Vs () Each time you press Vs (), the recorded messages are played from the newest one. Voice memos are played last. To stop the playback
Xd (Stop) or Wt The Play/Erase msg. screen reappears.
<Record Videophone message>
The playback starts. When the playback ends, the Play/Erase VP msg. screen reappears. To play another message while playing a message
Xv To adjust volume while playing a message
Xc To switch ON/OFF of the speaker while playing a message
Zu (FUNC)Speaker ON or Speaker OFF To pause the playback
Xd (Stop) To resume playback, press Xd (Play). To stop the playback
Wt The Play/Erase VP msg. screen reappears. 66 Setting Functions for the Videophone 1 iSETTINGSVideophone The Videophone settings screen appears. 2 Select any item:
Videophone settings Visual preferenceSelects the image quality of videophone calls from Normal/Prefer img qual/
Prefer motion spd. Select imagep.67 Auto redial as voiceSets whether to switch to a voice call when a videophone call cannot be made
(ON/OFF). Display setting Main displaySelects the image displayed on the main display from Other side/My side. Ntfy switch-modep.67 Hands-free switchSets whether to switch to Handsfree automatically when starting a videophone call (ON/OFF). V-phone while packetp.67 Setting an image to send <Select image>
You can set a JPEG image whose file size is 100K bytes or less and not larger than 854 dots wide 854 dots high, or a GIF image whose file size is 100K bytes or less and not larger than 854 dots wide 480 dots high or 480 dots wide 854 dots high (except for the files with restrictions). 1 Videophone settings screen (p.67) Select imageSelect any item:
On holdSets the image sent for a call on answer hold. HoldingSets the image sent while holding a call. Substitute imageSets the image. Record messageYou can set the image sent while recording videophone messages. PreparingYou can set the image sent while preparing for recording videophone messages. i
i V o c e V d e o p h o n e C a l l s Voice memoSets the image sent while recording the voice memo. 2 Select the image to be sent:
Pre-installedSends only a message. OriginalSends an image and a message. To change the image, select an image from My picture from Change setting of the function menu. Chara-den*Sends the image selected in Substitute image. Function menu of Chara-den list screenp.238 Priority order for Chara-den settingp.71 To change the Chara-den, select a Chara-den from Chara-den list from Change setting of the function menu.
* : Available only when Substitute image is selected. Setting for Switching between Voice Call and Videophone Call
<Ntfy switch-mode>
You can set whether to notify the other party that your FOMA terminal supports the switch between a voice call and a videophone call.
The other party cannot switch the call when set to Indication OFF.
You cannot set this function during a call or while appears. 1 Videophone settings screen (p.67) Ntfy switch-modeSelect any item:
Indication ONIndication OFFActivates or deactivates the Ntfy switch-mode. Check IndicationDisplays the Ntfy switch-
mode setting. Setting the answer mode when you receive a videophone call during i-mode
<V-phone while packet>
As the multi access function cannot be used for videophone, incoming videophone calls during i-mode communication or while sending or receiving mails are handled according to this setting.p.360 1 Videophone settings screen (p.67)V-
phone while packetSelect any item:
V-phone prioritySwitches to the videophone ringing screen. When you answer the incoming videophone, i-mode communication is disconnected. Packet downld priorityRejects the incoming videophone call. Continued on next page 67 i
i V o c e V d e o p h o n e C a l l s V-phone answerphoneIf you have subscribed to the Voice Mail Service, the videophone call is connected to the Voice Mail service center regardless of Activate/Deactivate setting of Voice Mail. When you have not subscribed to this service, Packet downld priority is activated. Call forwardingIf you have subscribed to the Call Forwarding Service, the videophone call is forwarded regardless of Activate/Deactivate setting of Call Forwarding. When you have not subscribed to this service, Packet downld priority is activated. N
<Visual preference>
If the signal quality deteriorates during a videophone call, the image may become grainy or patchy regardless of the settings in Visual preference.
<Select image>
If you delete the original still image, the pre-installed image is displayed (sent).
When the Chara-den character set as the substitute image is deleted and the Chara-den substitute image cannot be displayed, the pre-installed (Miffy) is sent. If you delete the pre-installed (Miffy), the Pre-installed substitute still image is sent.
<Auto redial as voice>
When a videophone call is switched and redialed as a voice call, the call is charged as a voice call and digital communication charges are not applied.
When a call is redialed, only the voice call records are logged in the Redial/Dialed calls record.
Even if Auto redial as voice is set to ON, it may not be possible to redial due to the conditions of the network or the other party, such as busy.
<Hands-free switch>
The FOMA terminal does not switch to handsfree mode automatically in the following cases even when Hands-free switch is set to ON:
While Manner mode is set
When a flat-plug earphone/microphone with switch
(optional) is connected (however, the microphone operation follows the Select microphone setting)
When holding a call or Record message is activated for the incoming call
<V-phone while packet>
Even when set to V-phone priority, you cannot answer the videophone call if you are using multi access such as using the i-mode communication during a voice call.
When set to Packet downld priority, V-phone answerphone or Call forwarding, the received videophone calls are recorded as Missed calls in the Received calls.
Even when set to V-phone priority or Packet downld priority, Voice Mail or Call Forwarding service is activated if the ring time for the Voice Mail or Call Forwarding service is set to 0 second. 68 Using the Videophone Connecting to External Devices You can make or receive videophone calls from external devices such as the PC by connecting to the FOMA terminal with the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (Optional). To use this function, you have to install a videophone application on the dedicated external device or PC and prepare commercially available devices such as an earphone/microphone and USB compatible Web camera.
Set the USB mode setting to Communication mode. There is no specific settings for connecting external devices.
For details on the operational environment, settings, operations of the videophone application, refer to the manuals supplied with the external terminals.
(DOCOMO Videophone Software) (Japanese) is available as the application which is compatible with this function. You can download the Software from the website of DOCOMO Videophone Software (Japanese).
(For details of the PC operating environment, etc., refer to the support website.) http://videophonesoft.nttdocomo.co.jp/
FOMA videophone Connection speed: 64K FOMA network Base station N
You cannot make a videophone call from the external device during a voice call.
When you have subscribed to either of the Call Waiting service, Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding and you receive a videophone call from an external device during a voice call, you can answer the call after ending the current call. When you receive a voice call, videophone call or 64K data communication during a videophone call from the external device, you can answer these calls in the same way. Phonebook Phonebooks Available with the FOMA Terminal ............................................................. Adding Information to the Phonebook .................................................. Add to phonebook Adding Phonebook Entries from the Redial, Dialed Calls and Other Records ............... Group setting Renaming Groups....................................................................................... Making a Call from the Phonebook...................................................... Search phonebook Editing the Phonebook............................................................................. Edit phonebook Delete data Deleting a Phonebook Entry.......................................................................... Checking the Phonebook Storage Status.............................................. No. of phonebook Setting Different FOMA Terminal Actions for Each Phone Number and Mail Address
................................................................................................................ Using Choku-Den .......................................................................................... Using Dialing Shortcuts ......................................................................... Storing the Phonebook at the Data Security Center............................ Ring tone/Image Choku-Den Two-touch dialing Data security serv. 70 70 72 72 73 76 76 76 77 78 79 79 69 Phonebooks Available with the FOMA Terminal Displaying names Voice and videophone calls P h o n e b o o k Your FOMA terminal contains two phonebooks. One is the phonebook in the FOMA terminal (Phone) itself, for which you can set a range of functions, and the other is the UIM (FOMA card) phonebook, which can also be used in other FOMA terminals. Each phonebook can be used differently depending on the purpose. Differences between the FOMA terminal
(Phone) and FOMA card (UIM) phonebooks Phonebook data Entry Number of entries Group Phone number storage E-mail address storage Image storage Other data storage FOMA terminal (Phone) Up to 1,000 entries FOMA card (UIM) Up to 50 entries No Group, Group 01 to 19 4 numbers per entry
(4,000 numbers in total in the phonebook) You can select from 23 icons 3 addresses per entry
(3,000 addresses in total in the phonebook) You can select from 5 icons 1 sill image and 1 Chara-den per entry
(respectively 100 in total in the phonebook) Name, Reading, ZIP code, Address, Birthday, Memo No Group, Group 01 to 10 1 number per entry only 1 address per entry only Name, Reading Features of the FOMA terminal (Phone) phonebook The following utility functions can be used with entries stored in the FOMA terminal (Phone) phonebook:
Choku-Denp.78
Two-touch dialingp.79
Ring tone/Imagep.77
Restrictionsp.112
Storing as secret datap.103
Secret code settingp.75 Features of the UIM phonebook As phonebook entries are stored on the FOMA card
(UIM), you can transfer your phonebook entries to another FOMA terminal simply by switching the FOMA card (UIM). This makes the UIM phonebook very useful when you use multiple FOMA terminals. 70 When receiving a call with caller ID notified from someone who is stored in the phonebook, the phone number and callers name is displayed. When a still image is stored in the phonebook, the image is displayed. However, depending on the size and amount of data of the stored image, it may take time to display the image. The callers name is also displayed in the Received calls, Dialed calls and Redial records. Displaying names for i-mode mail and SMS When you send/receive i-mode mail or SMS to/from someone who is stored in the phonebook, his/her name is displayed in the sent/received mail list/detail screen or address list. Adding Information to the Phonebook
<Add to phonebook>
The entry cannot be stored unless the Name field is filled. 1 iPHONEBOOKu (FUNC) Add to phonebookSelect a phonebookEnter a name You can enter kanji characters, hiragana, katakana, alphabets, numbers, symbols and pictographs (Phone only). You can store up to 16 double-byte or 32 single-
byte characters for Phone and 10 double-byte or 21 single-byte alphanumeric characters only
(including some single-byte symbols) for UIM. 2 Check the readingd (Set) When the reading is incorrect Correct the reading using katakana (single-byte for Phone and double-byte for UIM), single-
byte alphabet, numbers and symbols. You can store up to 32 single-byte characters for Phone and 12 double-byte or 25 single-byte alphanumeric characters only (including some single-byte symbols) for UIM. 3 Select any item:
(group)Selects a group number among Group 01-19 for Phone or among Group 01-10 for UIM. If no group is selected, the entry is automatically assigned to No Group.
(phone number)Enters the phone number.
Also select an icon for Phone. You can enter up to 26 digits for the phone number. Once you have stored the first phone number, the stored> option appears on the Phonebook edit screen. Select this option to store an additional phone number.
<Not
You can enter 20 digits for a blue FOMA card
(UIM), and 26 digits for a green/white FOMA card
(UIM).
(mail address)Enters the e-mail address. You can enter up to 50 single-byte alphabets, numbers and symbols. Also select an icon for Phone. Once you have stored the first e-mail address, the stored> option appears on the Phonebook edit screen. Select this option to store an additional e-
mail address.
<Not
(address)Enters the ZIP code and street address. Enter the 7 single-byte numbers for ZIP codes. You can enter up to 50 double-byte or 100 single-byte kanji characters, hiragana, katakana, alphabets, numbers and pictographs.
(birthday)Enters the contacts birthday
(year, month and day). Any year from 1800 to 2099 can be set.
(memorandums)Enters a memo (short note). You can enter up to 100 double-byte or 200 single-byte characters which include kanji characters, hiragana, katakana, alphabets, numbers and pictographs.
(image)Shoots or selects the image displayed when you receive a call from the contact.
(Chara-den)Selects the Chara-den character displayed as the substitute image for videophone calls.
(memory No.)Memory numbers are automatically* assigned when an entry is stored in the phonebook, but can be changed to any number between 000 and 999.
* : Assigned to the available number between 010 to 999 from the smallest number. If no number is available from 010 to 999, it is assigned to the available number between 000 to 009. 4 o (Finish) P h o n e b o o k N
Phonebook entries stored using symbols or pictographs may not be displayed correctly when data are transferred by the infrared communication, etc.
Enter the correct domain when storing e-mail addresses. The domain is the part of the address that follows the @ symbol. However, if the contacts e-mail address is in the
[phone number]@docomo.ne.jp format, store just the phone number as the e-mail address.
2in1 setting in Phonebook is specified according to
the 2in1 mode at registration. The setting of Phonebook 2in1 setting (
on the Phonebook list screen or Phonebook detail screen when 2in1 mode is in Dual mode. However, when attaching the phonebook to a mail or copying it to the UIM phonebook, Phonebook 2in1 setting is not to be sent.
) is displayed Phonebook 2in1 setting Mode Dual mode A mode B mode OFF You can change the Phonebook 2in1 setting in 2in1 setting.p.322 A A B A
<Chara-den settings priority sequence>
The priority order for Chara-den settings is as follows:
Chara-den setting of Ring tone/Image (for individual) Chara-den setting of Ring tone/Image (for group) Chara-den stored in the phonebook entry Substitute image in Select image When phonebook editing is interrupted You can resume editing the phonebook entry which is stopped being edited because of the emit of the low-
voltage alarm or activation of a task of Tool groups using Multitask, etc. 1 iPHONEBOOKu (FUNC) Add to phonebookSelect the destinationRecall When you are re-editing the entry, if you cancel editing without storing the changes, the data being edited is erased. To add a new phonebook entry
New 71 Renaming Groups <Group setting>
You can assign your stored phonebook entries to groups according to the contact role (Work, Friends, etc.) or by hobby (Baseball, Football, etc.). This allows you to use the phonebook as if it were divided into different volumes according to purpose.
No Group cannot be renamed. 1 Phonebook list screen (p.73) u (FUNC)Group setting The Group setting screen appears. 2 Select a groupEnter icon appears next the new group name The to UIM groups. You can enter up to 10 double-byte or 21 single-
byte characters. If the same name is used for groups on the FOMA terminal (Phone) and UIM, they are displayed as separate groups. Function menup.72 Group setting Group setting screen (p.72) Edit group nameEdits the group name. Ring tone/Imagep.77 Reset group nameThe changed group name is reset to the default name assigned at the time of purchase. N
Resetting the group name does not clear the Ring tone/Image setting. Adding Phonebook Entries from the Redial, Dialed Calls and Other Records You can add information to the phonebook from the Received calls, Dialed calls, Redial, Received address, Sent address, Text reader, Site screen or enter phone number screen, etc. P h o n e b o o k
<Example: To add information from the Received calls record to the FOMA terminal (Phone) phonebook>
1 Received calls screen (p.53) u (FUNC)Add to phonebook Phone To add to the FOMA card (UIM)
UIM 2 AddSearch for the phonebook entry to add the information Searching the phonebookp.73 To add a new phonebook entry
New To add information to the UIM
New or Overwrite 3 Display the phonebook detail screen d (Select) Phone number is automatically entered and the phonebook editing screen appears. Editing the phonebookp.76 4 After completing the changes, press o (Finish) If a message appears asking whether to overwrite existing data
YES N
The Notify Caller ID setting (Notify or Not notify) displayed in the Dialed calls and Redial records is not stored in the phonebook. 72 Making a Call from the Phonebook
<Search phonebook>
2 Select the phonebook entry you want The Phonebook detail screen appears. You can make a call by searching for the phonebook entry from the FOMA terminal (Phone) phonebook or the FOMA card (UIM) phonebook.
When tabs appear on the phonebook list screen, you can switch the display as follows:
<Example: To switch tabs from (Others) to Ta-
column in the Alphabet display>
Tab p (
Four times
) o (
Four times
) List of (Others) List of Ta-column N
You can use v to switch pages within the same tab.
You cannot switch the tab with o (
) when you store to the Choku-Den or compose a message with using the Look-up phonebook. Searching for the phonebook entry of the person you want to make a call 1 iPHONEBOOK The Phonebook list screen appears. To make a voice call from the list screen
Highlight the phonebook entry you want to call r (voice call) If the phonebook entry contains multiple phone numbers, the call is made to the first phone number stored for that entry. To switch the tab display
u (FUNC)Change Display Select the tab from Alphabet/Memory No./Group. Function menup.74 Phonebook list Alphabet Memory No. Group P h o n e b o o k 3 Use v to display the phone number you wantr (voice call) or o (V.phone) To send a mail
Use v to display the e-mail address you want d (MAIL) Composing and Sending i-mode Mailp.156 Phonebook detail Function menup.75 N
Pressing f during a call displays the group search screen and pressing g displays the column search screen. Searching for the phonebook entry by specifying the search method You can search for a phonebook entry using any of 8 search criteria; reading, name, phone number, e-mail address, memory number, group or column in Japanese phonetics (a, ka, sa, ta, na, etc.) or all.
Search results are displayed in the sequence shown below based on the reading entered when the entry was stored (except for memory number search). katakana alphabets numbers symbols the reading of callers name is not stored
* If a space is placed at the beginning, it is searched first. 1 On the standby screen g u (FUNC)Search phonebook To display your preferred search method first
Highlight the search method that you want to display firsto (Prefer) OK appears next to the preferred search method. Pressing g on the standby screen displays the phonebook search screen with your preferred method. To cancel your preferred search method setting
On the standby screengtHighlight the search method with the star o (Reset) Continued on next page 73 P h o n e b o o k 2 Select the search method:
Search readingEnter the readingc Enter the reading from the beginning. You do not need to enter the entire name. Search nameEnter the namec Enter the name from the beginning. You do not need to enter the entire name. Search phone No.Enter the phone numberc Enter some digits numbers of the phone number. You can also search the phone number by entering a part of the phone number and press c on the Enter phone number screen (p.48). Search e-mailEnter the e-mail addressc You do not need to enter the entire address. Search memory No.Enter the 3 digits memory number. You cannot search the UIM phonebook by memory number. Search groupSelect the group you want Note that the UIM phonebook uses different groups from the FOMA terminal (Phone) phonebook. Search columnPress the key for the column (tab) you want to search 1: a column 2: ka column 3: sa column 4: ta column 5: na column 6: ha column 7: ma column 8: ya column 9: ra column 0: wa column w: Others (alphabet or number, etc.) Search allAll the stored phonebook entries are displayed in the Alphabet tab. When the search ends, the Phonebook list screen that meets the searching conditions appears. is displayed for the UIM phonebook. Phonebook list Function menup.74 74 Accessing the phonebook from the Redial or Dialed Calls record You can access the stored phonebook detail screen from the function menu of Received calls, Dialed calls, Redial, Received address or Sent address screen by selecting Look-up phonebook. Phonebook list screen (p.73)
The available functions vary depending on the searching method and display method. Add to phonebookp.70 Connect to CenterStores the phonebook data at the DOCOMO Data Security Center.p.79 Search phonebookSelect the search type and call the phonebook entry.p.73 Sort*1Sorts the phonebook list in a selected criteria. Change DisplaySelect from Alphabet/Memory No./
Group. Ring tone/Imagep.78 Restrictionsp.112 Group settingp.72 Copy to microSD*2p.248
When Copy all is selected, you can select whether to copy the My Profile data in addition to the phonebook data. iC transmission*2p.259 iC trans. all*2p.260 Send Ir data*2p.258 Send all Ir data*2p.258 No. of phonebookp.76 Attach to mail*2Displays a new mail screen with the phonebook data attached. Set large fontSet normal fontSwitches the displayed font size between Big font/Standard font. p.93 microSD phonebookOriginal phonebookRefers to the phonebook in the microSD card or the FOMA terminal (Phone). Delete dataSelects the deleting method from Delete this/Delete selected/Delete all. About multiple-choicep.38
Delete all deletes the phonebook on the FOMA card
(UIM).
*1: Available on the result screen displayed when the phonebook is searched by entering a condition such as Search reading.
*2: Not operate for the phonebook stored in the FOMA card
(UIM) Phonebook detail screen (p.73) Edit phonebookp.76 Notify Caller IDp.56 Chaku-mojip.55 Dial setting Prefix numbersp.58 Intl callp.52 2in1/Multi Num.When 2in1 is set to ON and Dual mode, selects from Number A/Number B/
Cancel number (p.323) (not available when A mode or B mode is set). Selects from Basic number/Additional number 1/
Additional number 2/Cancel number (p.319) at the Multi Number when 2in1 set to OFF. Select imageSelects the image used during a videophone call from My side/Chara-den. Select Release settings to cancel the setting. Ring tone/Image*1p.77 Restrictions*1p.112 Move to top*1Moves the displayed phone number/
mail address to the top when multiple phone numbers/
mail addresses are stored in one phonebook entry. Add to Choku-Den*1p.78 Add shortcutp.94 Compose message*2p.156 Attach to mail*1*2Displays a new mail screen with the phonebook data attached. Compose SMS*2p.182 iC transmission*1p.259 iC trans. all*1p.260 Send Ir data*1p.258 Send all Ir data*1p.258 Copy to microSD*1p.248 Copy NameCopies the name. The copied name can be pasted into input and other screens.p.308 Phone number*3Copies the phone number. The copied phone number can be pasted into input and other screens.p.308 Secret code*1p.75 Set codeSets the secret code (4 digits). Check codeConfirms the set secret code. Release settingsCancels the set secret code. Set secret*1*4p.103 Copy to UIM*5p.255 Set large fontSet normal fontSwitches the displayed font size between Big font/Standard font. p.93 Delete datap.76
*1: Not operate for the UIM phonebook.
*2: Not available when 2in1 is in B mode.
*3: Depending on the selected item, one of Mail address/
Address/Birthday/Memorandums appears.
*4: Release secret when referring to the phonebook of the secret data.
*5: Copy from UIM when referring to the UIM phonebook. N
<Add to Choku-Den>
When stored to Choku-Den, appears on the function menu. P h o n e b o o k Secret code When the mail address of the other party is [phone number]@docomo.ne.jp and he/she sets a secret code, you have to specify [phone number + secret code]@docomo.ne.jp as the e-mail address. There are 2 ways to send an e-mail to such a destination.
Set a secret code for the phonebook entry from the phonebook detail screen function menu (when referring to the mail address, the secret code is automatically added to the mail address in the phonebook).
Store the mail address with a secret code in the phonebook. N
Secret code settings are valid only to mail addresses in [phone number]@docomo.ne.jp or phone number format.
You cannot set secret codes for the UIM phonebook. 75 Editing the Phonebook
<Edit phonebook>
Checking the Phonebook Storage Status
<No. of phonebook>
1 Phonebook list screen (p.73) u (FUNC)No. of phonebook Phone (the phonebook stored on the FOMA terminal) Phonebook : Displays the number of entries Secret Image stored in the phonebook. Number of stored data/1,000
(storage limit)
: Displays the number of entries stored as secret data. (This can only be displayed in Secret mode or Secret data only mode.)
: Displays the number of images stored in the phonebook. Number of stored data/100
(storage limit) Chara-den : Displays the number of Chara-
den characters stored in the phonebook. Number of stored data/100
(storage limit) UIM (the phonebook stored on the FOMA card (UIM)) Phonebook : Displays the number of entries stored in the phonebook. Number of stored data/50 (storage limit) P h o n e b o o k 1 Phonebook detail screen (p.73) u (FUNC)Edit phonebookEdit the respective items Edit the required items using the procedure used in Add to phonebook. Adding information to the phonebookp.70 To store in a new memory number
Select 999) that has not already been stored. The original phonebook entry is left in its pre-
edited state and the edited entry is stored as a new phonebook entry with a different memory number.
Enter a memory number (000 to 2 After editing, press o (Finish)YES To add information to the UIM
o (Finish)Overwrite or Add Selecting Overwrite stores the edited information. Selecting Add leaves the original phonebook entry unchanged and stores the edited entry as a new phonebook entry. N
When the edited entry is stored to the Choku-Den, the Choku-Den is also changed. Deleting a Phonebook Entry
<Delete data>
1 Phonebook detail screen (p.73) u (FUNC)Delete dataSelect any item:
Delete phone No.*Deletes the selected phone number (e-mail address, address, birthday, memorandums, image or Chara-den character). Delete thisDeletes the phonebook entry.
* : Depending on the selected item, one of Delete mail add./Delete address/Delete birthday/Delete memorandums/Delete image/Delete Chara-den appears. N
If you delete a phone number or mail address in the phonebook entry in which multiple phone numbers or mail addresses are stored, the order of the subsequent phone numbers or mail addresses moves up. 76 Setting Different FOMA Terminal Actions for Each Phone Number and Mail Address
<Ring tone/Image>
You can set different ring tones or answer messages for the Record message depending on groups, phone numbers or e-mail address in the phonebook. This function is useful when you want to distinguish the caller only by the ring tone.
You cannot set this setting for No Group on the FOMA terminal (Phone) or the phonebook or groups on the FOMA card (UIM).
The Ring tone/Image functions are disabled when the caller does not notify the caller ID. It is recommended to set the Caller ID Request service. 1 Phonebook detail screen (p.73) u (FUNC)Ring tone/Image The Ring tone/Image screen appears. appears next to the selected function. The available functions vary depending on the item selected in the phonebook detail screen. To set this function for each group
Group setting screen (p.72)u (FUNC) Ring tone/Image Ring tone/Image 2 Select the item to distinguish Select the item from Voice call (recv.)/V.phone
(dial/recv.)/Mail (recv.).
When Mail (recv.) is selected, this function is applied not only i-mode mail but SMS. 3 Select any item:
appears next to the selected function. To release a selected function
Highlight the function with o (Reset) The function is released and the disappears. Ring tone*1Sets ring tones to distinguish the caller of the phone or sender of mail. Changing the Ring Tonep.82 Image*1*2Sets images to distinguish the caller of the phone. Changing the Displayp.88 Chara-den setup*3Selects Chara-den to be displayed as the substitute image for videophone calls. Set illumination*1Sets the illumination pattern and color to distinguish the caller of the phone or sender of mail. Setting the Flashing Mode of the Illumination p.92 Vibrator*1Sets vibration patterns to distinguish the caller of the phone or sender of mail. Setting the Vibration to Notify You of Incoming Callsp.84 Answer message*2Changes the answer message used when record message*4 or quick message starts up depending on the caller. Having the Caller Leave a Messagep.64
*1: You can also distinguish the incoming 64K data communication.
*2: Available only when Voice call (recv.) or V.phone
(dial/recv.) is selected.
*3: Available only when V.phone (dial/recv.) is selected. P h o n e b o o k
*4: You need to set Record message to ON beforehand. When you set Ring tone/Image An icon appears in the phonebook detail screen indicating that each item is set.
: Ring tone (voice/
videophone call)
: Ring tone (mail)
Illumination (voice/
videophone call) Illumination (mail)
: Vibration (voice/
videophone call)
: Vibration (mail)
: Answer message (voice/videophone call)
: Chara-den (videophone call) Image (voice/videophone call) N
You cannot set this setting for the phonebook stored as the secret data. Even if the setting is made for the group, it is disabled for the phonebook entry stored as the secret data.
The Mail (recv.) setting set for a phone number is activated when you receive an SMS or the senders e-
mail address is [phone-number]@ docomo.ne.jp.
Refer to the following pages for the priority when the Ring tone/Image settings and other settings for incoming calls, etc. are duplicated.
Ring tone priorityp.83
Vibrator priorityp.84
Image priorityp.83
Illumination priorityp.93
Chara-den priorityp.71 77 Adding to Choku-Den 1 On the standby screenf The Choku-Den screen appears. When there is a stored data, the Choku-Den screen of the first tab with the stored data appears. To change the location to add
Use v to move the tab You can also use 1 to 5 to move to the tab of the respective number. Choku-Den Function menup.79 2 o (Store) Search the phonebook Searching the phonebookp.73 To change the added contents
o (Edit) 3 d (Select) The Quote phonebook screen appears. 4 Use c to select a checkbox ( ) Select only one phone number and mail address to add respectively. When a checkbox () is selected, other phone numbers or mail addresses are displayed in gray and the checkbox cannot be selected. To select another checkbox, release the selected checkbox first. Quote phonebook 5 o (Finish) N
The setting of Phonebook 2in1 setting is displayed on the Choku-Den screen when 2in1 mode is in Dual mode.
When an image is stored in the phonebook, the image in the phonebook is added to Choku-Den. Checking the Ring tone/Image settings You can check the phonebook entries or groups set in Ring tone/Image by function or item. 1 Phonebook list screen (p.73) u (FUNC)Ring tone/Image The Ring tone/Image screen appears. appears next to the items to which this function is set. 2 Select the function or item with
Highlight the function or item with
u (FUNC)Select any item:
Check settingsChecks the setting status.
Highlight the function or item with * Check the phonebook or group which is set Release settingsReleases all the settings of the functions marked with .
* : The number of the selected items (the number of times d is pressed) varies depending on the function or setting specified. P h o n e b o o k Using Choku-Den
<Choku-Den>
By storing frequently used phonebook to Choku-Den, you can make a call or send a mail quickly.
You can store up to 5 Choku-Den by quoting the stored data (such as phone number) from the FOMA terminal (Phone) phonebook.
When mail addresses are stored to Choku-Den, you can compose i-mode mail to all the members easily.
You cannot use this function in Secret data only mode.
You can use this function in Secret mode, but you cannot add the phonebook stored as secret data to Choku-Den. 78 Making a call/composing a mail from Choku-Den
<Example: To make a call>
1 Choku-Den screen (p.78)Use v to display Choku-Den screen to make a call You can also use 1 to 5 to move to the tab of the respective number. 2 Use c to select CALL To compose a mail
Use c to select MAIL p.156 To make a videophone call
Use c to select VIDEO PHONE Choku-Den screen (p.78) Store/EditAdds a phonebook to Choku-Den which is not stored or edits the stored Choku-Den.p.78 ImageChanges the image displayed in Choku-Den by selecting an image from My picture. Broadcast mailDisplays the new mail screen with all mail addresses stored to Choku-Den are entered to the address.p.156 Release thisRelease allReleases one or all Choku-Den. N
<Image>
You can add an image whose file size is 100K bytes or smaller and whose width or height is 854 dots or smaller.
You cannot add images other than JPEG or GIF. Using Dialing Shortcuts
<Two-touch dialing>
By assigning memory numbers 000 to 009 to phone numbers in the phonebook, you can call those phone numbers only by pressing one of 0 to 9
(last digit of the memory number) and r. 1 0 to 9r (voice call)/
o (V.phone) N
If the phonebook entry contains multiple phone numbers, the call is made to the first phone number stored for that entry. P h o n e b o o k Storing the Phonebook at the Data Security Center
<Data security serv.>
You can store the FOMA terminal (Phone) phonebook at the DOCOMO Data Security Center. The stored phonebook can be restored to the FOMA terminal or updated by connecting to the Data Security Center.
Data Security Service is a pay service you need to apply for. If you have not subscribed to the service and try to connect to the Data Security Center, the notification screen appears.
The service is not available when out of i-mode service area or the power is off.
Follow the procedure below to restore the phonebook or set the auto update (Japanese):
oiMenu (My Menu)
(Data Security)
For details on how to use the Data Security Service, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide
[i-mode] FOMA version. 1 iLIFEKITData security serv. Connect to Center To set about sending images in the phonebook
Sndg img in PhonebookON (default: OFF) The images stored in the phonebook are also stored at the Data Security Center. 2 Enter your security codeYES The FOMA terminal connects to the Data Security Center to start saving the phonebook. 3 o (Finish) N
You cannot store the phonebook stored in the FOMA card (UIM) at the Data Security Center.
A phonebook entry with an image larger than 100K bytes cannot be stored or updated. 79 Checking the communication log with the Data Security Center
You can check up to 30 communication logs. If the maximum number of logs is exceeded, logs are overwritten starting with the oldest one.
On the communication log detail screen, the transmission results, dates, transmission details, data sizes, sending results to the Data Security Center, reception results of the mobile phone and number of data files left in the Data Security Center appear. 1 iLIFEKITData security serv.
Exchanging history The Exchanging history screen appears. Exchanging history Function menup.80 2 Select the communication log item Exchanging history screen (p.80) Delete thisDelete selectedDelete allSelect the deleting method. About multiple-choicep.38 P h o n e b o o k Restoring/updating the phonebook The phonebook data stored at the Data Security Center can be stored on the FOMA terminal from the site of the Data Security Center. You can also edit the phonebook data stored at the Data Security Center from a PC, etc. For details on how to use, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide [i-mode] FOMA version. N
Automatic update is not performed when another function is activated while updating the phonebook.
When the phonebook is not updated, it is notified with shortcut icon.
When you restore the phonebook data stored at the Data Security Center to the FOMA terminal, icons stored with phone number or mail address may be replaced with or
Deleting the FOMA terminals phonebook also deletes the phonebook in the Data Security Center when updated. To download the phonebook in the Data Security Center to the FOMA terminal, follow the procedure below (Japanese):
oiMenu (My Menu)
(Data Security) (Data Security Center)Enter your i-mode password
(Select) (Download to Phone)OK Download starts in about 15 seconds. Redisplay the standby screen. 80 Sound/Screen/Light Settings Select ring tone Sound effect Vibrator Melody Call setting Keypad sound Charge sound Clock Alarm Tone set Quality alarm Mail/Msg. ring time Headset usage setting Manner mode Manner mode set Sound Settings Changing the Ring Tone .......................................................................... Setting 3D Sound.......................................................................................... Setting the Vibration to Notify You of Incoming Calls.......................................... Changing the Ringback Tone............................................................... Setting the Keypad Tone............................................................................ Setting the Confirmation Tone for Charging................................................ Setting the Clock Alarm Tone ........................................................... Setting the FOMA Terminal to Warn You before a Call Drops Out .............. Setting the Ring Time for Incoming Mail.............................................. Enabling the Tone to Ring through the Earphone and Speaker ..... Switching Off the FOMA Terminals Tone ................................................... Modifying Manner Mode ........................................................................ Screen/Light Settings Changing the Display................................................................................. Display setting Disp. Phonebook image Displaying Phonebook Images When You Receive Calls ............. Disp. call/receive No. Setting the Color for Incoming Call Display ...................................... Preventing Others from Peeping the Screen ................................................. Shield view Backlight Setting the Display and Keypad Lighting .......................................................... Display design Changing the Display Design..................................................................... Changing the Menu Display............................................................................................ Illumination set Setting the Illumination Flashing............................................................... Changing the Font ................................................................................................... Font Setting the Clock Display ............................................................................. Clock display My shortcut Using Shortcut Icons ..................................................................................... Selecting the Icons to Display on the Standby Screen ................................. Icons setting Setting the Kisekae Tool .................................................................... Kisekae Tool setting 82 84 84 84 85 85 85 85 85 85 86 86 88 89 90 90 90 91 91 92 93 93 94 96 97 81
S o u n d S c r e e n L g h t
i S e t t i n g s Changing the Ring Tone
<Select ring tone>
You can set the ring tone and receiving screen in each voice call, videophone call or i-mode mail. You can also set the ring tone for specified phone number, mail address or group of phonebook respectively. p.77
Guide to the melody listp.241
Setting the sending screenp.88 1 iSETTINGSIncoming call Select ring toneSelect an item to set a ring tone:
Select the item from Phone/Videophone/Mail/
MessageR/MessageF.
When Phone is selected, the ring tone for voice calls and 64K data communication is set.
When Mail is selected, the ring tone for i-mode mails, SMS and packet communication is set. 2 Select ring toneSelect any item:
MelodySelect the ring tone or melody. i-motionSelect the i-motion/Chaku-Uta downloaded to the FOMA terminal or a movie
(i-motion) shot using the camera. When you receive a call, the video or sound for the selected i-motion is played (Chaku-motion). MusicSets the Chaku-Uta-Full. Set any item from the following when the Chaku-Uta-Full contains the portion where the ring tone is specified by the provider:
Fullsong ring toneSets the whole song as the ring tone. Point ring toneSets a part of the song as the ring tone.
Use v to specify the portion (displayed in orange) to set as the ring toned (Set) When you select Movable contents folder, select YES and select the destination folder. Voice announceSets the message recorded using Voice announce. Random melodySelects a folder containing stored melodies. When you receive a call or message, one of the melodies stored in the folder played at random. OFFThe FOMA terminal plays no ring tone. 82 To set the calling/receiving display
Select calling disp. or Select receiving disp. In Ringing screen, select an image from the My picture or i-motion. In Select receiving disp., select an image from the My picture. 3 Select the ring tone When you select a melody, the FOMA terminal plays the melody. Press r, q, u, o or p to stop the melody playback. Pre-installed ring tones, melodies and alarms Track Title 1 to 5 Go For It!
Sophisticated Lady Classy Walts Kanon Forest Cuckoo Clock School Chime Track Title Grand Clock Elevator Whistle Piano Man Hand Bell Brilliance Typewriter Vibe X Vibe Pre-installed Chaku-Uta-Full Track Title What Can U Do (Mashup Style) N
Some i-motion (i-motion with video only) and Chaku-
Uta-Full cannot be specified to the ring tone.
An i-motion with sound only (an i-motion with no video, such as a singers voice) cannot be specified as the receiving display.
Flash movies can be set in the Select calling disp. /
Select receiving disp., but the ring tone used is the tone set in Select ring tone.
Even if the movie/i-motion can be set as Chaku-
motion or image displayed for incoming calls, you cannot set these movie/i-motion in the following cases:
When the movie/i-motion is transferred to a PC or other FOMA terminal through infrared data exchange function, IC communication function or DOCOMO keitai datalink (p.329), then returned to the FOMA terminal (Phone)
When the movie/i-motion is copied from a microSD card to the FOMA terminal (Phone) (including the case that the movie/i-motion is copied from the FOMA terminal (Phone) to a microSD card, then copied to the FOMA terminal (Phone))
When you select the i-motion in the Movable contents folder, the selected i-motion is moved to the Inbox folder of i-motion.
S o u n d S c r e e n L g h t
i S e t t i n g s N
When you select the Chaku-Uta-Full in the Movable contents folder and Fullsong ring tone is set, the selected Chaku-Uta-Full is moved to the Inbox folder of Music. When Point ring tone is set, the selected portion is clipped as an i-motion and stored in the folder of i-motion.
When you set Chaku-Uta-Full stored on the FOMA terminal (Phone) as a ring tone with Point ring tone, it is not clipped as an i-motion and the selected portion is set to the ring tone.
The ring tone is played at the volume set in Ring volume while selecting the ring tone.
If you set an i-motion that includes both video and sound as the ring tone and receiving display, the FOMA terminal plays the i-motion set as the ring tone.
If you set something other than an i-motion that includes both video and sound as the ring tone and then set an i-motion that includes both video and sound as the receiving display, the FOMA terminal plays the i-motion set as the receiving display.
When the i-motion is set to the ring tone for mail, the default ring tone of Mail is used for the ring tone of packet communication. The special screen appears when packet communication is received regardless of the incoming screen settings.
When you set Chaku-Uta-Full which contains the jacket image as the ring tone, the jacket image is not displayed when you receive a call.
When multiple mails or MessageR/F are received at the same time, the operation of the ring tone becomes as follows:
Received contents Operation of the ring tone The ring tone set for the last Multiple mails are received received mail is used. Mail and MessageR/
F are received at the same time MessageR/F are received at the same time The ring tone set for MessageR is used. N
<Ring tone priority for incoming calls>
When the ring tone settings for incoming calls are duplicated, the priority is assigned as follows:
Ring tone for Multi number (additional number 1, 2) Ring tone for Ring tone/Image (for individual) Ring tone for Ring tone/Image (for group) Ring tone for B mode of 2in1 Ring tone for Select ring tone/Kisekae Tool setting
* The priority is assigned as follows in the Ring tone/
Image ( above) and the Ring tone/Image (
above). i-motion for Ring tone i-motion for Calling display i-motion for Ring tone (i-motion with no video, such as a singers voice), melody or Chaku-Uta-
Full
<Ring tone priority for mails (including SMS)>
When the ring tone settings for mails are duplicated, the priority is assigned as follows:
Ring tone for Ring tone/Image (for individual) Ring tone for Ring tone/Image (for group) Ring tone for Select ring tone/Kisekae Tool setting
<Image priority>
When the image settings for incoming calls are duplicated, the priority is assigned as follows:
Image setting for Ring tone/Image (for individual) Image setting for Ring tone/Image (for group) Still image stored in the phonebook Image setting for B mode of 2in1 i-motion for Select ring tone Display setting/Kisekae Tool setting
* The priority is assigned as follows in the Ring tone/
Image (for individual) ( above) and the Ring tone/Image (for group) ( above):
i-motion for Ring tone i-motion or still image/image for Select calling disp. 83
S o u n d S c r e e n L g h t
i S e t t i n g s Setting 3D Sound
<Sound effect>
Enjoy rich sounds of melodies, voice/videophone call and mail ring tones, sound effects and i-motion when an earphone/microphone (optional) is connected. 1 iSETTINGSIncoming call Sound effectStereo&3D sound ON or OFF Sound effects Create 3-dimensional and resonating sounds using an earphone/microphone. Sound effects allow you to enjoy i-ppli games and melody playback with richer and more realistic sound. Playing i-motion with sound effects adds effects such as natural third dimension, rich low sound and clear instrumental or voice sound to sounds heard through earphone.
An icon appears for i-motion with sound effects on the movie list screen.p.226 N
Individuals feel differently about 3 dimension. If sound bothers you, set this function to OFF.
Setting this function to ON does not add effects to sounds heard through the built-in speaker.
This function is not available if Headset usage setting is set to Headset+speaker. To enable the function, set the setting to Headset only. Melody linkageThe FOMA terminal vibrates in a pattern matched to the melody set as the ring tone. OFFThe FOMA terminal does not vibrate. Icons on the standby screen while setting the vibration pattern
: The vibration starts when receiving either voice or videophone calls.
: The vibration starts when receiving either mail/
MessageR/F.
: Both and are set. N
When the vibration is set, take care that the vibration does not move the FOMA terminal towards fire (e.g. on a space heater) or cause it to fall off a table, etc.
Even when Melody linkage is selected, the FOMA terminal not always vibrates to the melody. When no vibration pattern is set for the melody or when an i-motion or Chaku-Uta-Full is set as the ring tone, the FOMA terminal vibrates in Pattern 2.
When receiving Area Mail, vibration is linked with the beep sound (when the buzzer sounds) or follows the settings in Mail under Vibrator (when an incoming Area Mail sounds).
<Vibrator priority>
When the vibrator settings are duplicated, the priority is assigned as follows:
Vibrator for Ring tone/Image (for individual) Vibrator for Ring tone/Image (for group) Vibrator setting Setting the Vibration to Notify You of Incoming Calls <Vibrator>
Changing the Ringback Tone
<Melody Call setting>
You can set different vibration patterns to notify you when you receive a voice call, videophone call or mail. You can set whether to change the tone heard by the other party or not (YES/NO) when you receive a voice call. 1 iSETTINGSIncoming call VibratorSelect an item to set the vibration:
Select Phone to set the vibration for voice calls and 64K data communication. Select Mail to set the vibration for i-mode mail, Area Mail, SMS and packet communication. 2 Select the vibration pattern:
Pattern 1-Pattern 3Vibrates in each pattern. When you switch the highlighted item while selecting an item, the FOMA terminal vibrates in the highlighted pattern. 1 iSETTINGSIncoming call Melody Call settingYES or NO When you select YES, accesses the Melody Call i-mode site. Packet communications charges apply when accessing an IP site, i-mode menu site or free music corner except the setup site. Follow the instructions on the screen to set. N
Melody Call is not activated when the other party dial up from a videophone call. 84
S o u n d S c r e e n L g h t
i S e t t i n g s Setting the Keypad Tone
<Keypad sound>
Setting the Ring Time for Incoming Mail
<Mail/Msg. ring time>
Setting this function to OFF also disables the battery level tone and the warning tone.
The keypad sound is played at the level set in Volume during a call, and fixed at the same level while not talking on the phone. 1 iSETTINGSOther settings Keypad soundON or OFF Setting the Confirmation Tone for Charging
<Charge sound>
This function sets to emit a sound when charging starts or is completed.
When the screen other than Standby screen is displayed or when Manner mode or Public mode
(Driving mode) is set, the charge sound does not ring. 1 iSETTINGSOther settings Charge soundON or OFF Setting the Clock Alarm Tone
<Clock Alarm Tone set>
You can change the clock alarm tone for Alarm, Schedule, To Do list and 1Seg booking program. 1 iSETTINGSClockClock Alarm Tone setSelect any item:
Select the alarm tone from Melody/i-motion/
Music/Voice announce/OFF. Setting the FOMA Terminal to Warn You before a Call Drops Out
<Quality alarm>
The FOMA terminal emits an alarm tone to warn you that the signal quality is deteriorating and the call is likely to drop out.
The call may drop out without a warning tone if the signal quality worsens very quickly. 1 iSETTINGSTalkQuality alarmSelect an alarm tone Select the alarm tone from No tone/High tone/
Low tone. You can set a ring time when you receive mail or a MessageR/F. 1 iSETTINGSIncoming call Mail/Msg. ring timeSelect an item to set the ring time:
Select Mail to set the ring time for i-mode mail, Area Mail and SMS. 2 ONEnter the ring time (01 to 30 seconds in 2 digits) To turn off the ring tone
OFF When Vibrator is activated, the vibration stops. Enabling the Tone to Ring through the Earphone and Speaker
<Headset usage setting>
You can set the FOMA terminal to play the ring tone or alarm notification through the earphones and speaker when a flat-plug earphone/microphone with switch (optional) is connected. 1 iSETTINGSExternal connectionHeadset usage setting
Headset+speaker or Headset only N
If Ring volume is set to Silent, there is no sound from the earphone or speaker.
When Phone vol. and Mail vol. in the Manner mode
(Original) is set to other than Silent, the ring tone still sound. However, Manner mode (Manner mode and Super silent) is set, the ring tone sounds only from the earphones. 85 Switching Off the FOMA Terminals Tone
<Manner mode>
Modifying Manner Mode
<Manner mode set>
You can select the FOMA terminal operations used in Manner mode. 1 iSETTINGSIncoming call Manner mode set The Manner mode set screen appears. 2 Select any item:
Manner mode set Manner modeMutes all tones played through the speaker and uses vibration to notify you of incoming calls, etc. However, confirmation tones played through earpiece (when a voice memo or memo is played) are not muted. Super silentMutes all tones played through the speaker and confirmation tones played through the earpiece and uses vibration to notify you of incoming calls, etc. Originalp.88
S o u n d S c r e e n L g h t
i S e t t i n g s You can set the FOMA terminal not to play the ring tones or keypad tones through the speaker with a single key operation.
Refer to the Table 1 (p.87) and Table 2 (p.87) for details of Manner mode setting.
In Manner mode set, you can select Manner mode/Super silent/Original as the FOMA terminal operation mode when Manner mode is set. 1 On the standby screena ( )
(1 second or longer) You can set the Manner mode by pressing a (
) (1 second or longer) during a voice call. The FOMA terminal is set to Manner mode, appears, and the information specified in Manner mode set is displayed.
The FOMA terminal notifies you using Vibrator
: Ring volume is set to Silent
Record message and Record VP message is set to record messages (The number indicates the number of recorded messages) to to During a voice call, the FOMA terminal emits a short double-beep (bibip) and a message appears notifying you that Manner mode is set. To cancel Manner mode
On the standby screena ( ) (1 second or longer) You can cancel the Manner mode by pressing a () (1 second or longer) during a voice call. Manner mode is canceled and disappears. During a voice call, the FOMA terminal emits a short double-beep (bibip) and a message appears notifying you that Manner mode is canceled. N
Even in Manner mode, the camera shutter clicks.
When the vibration is set, take care that the vibration does not move the FOMA terminal towards fire (e.g. on a space heater) or cause it to fall off a table, etc. 86
S o u n d S c r e e n L g h t
i S e t t i n g s
[Table 1] When you set Manner mode Item Record message activation Vibrator Ring volume for voice/videophone call and 64K data communication Ring volume for mail, packet communication, MessageR/F and Area Mail Area Mail beep tone Alarm volume (including snooze function) i-ppli volume Schedule/To Do List/Cost limit alarm volume Activation and completion tones for recorded messages, voice memos, etc. Keypad sound Microphone sensitivity during calls Holding tone On hold tone Low-voltage alarm Reading out received mails Super Manner silent Mode Record message
(p.65) setting Original
(displays the Original manner mode settings) Record message setting ON Silent Silent Silent Silent Silent Silent Vibrator setting Phone vol. setting Mail vol. setting Level 6*
Alarm vol. setting i-ppli vol. setting Phone vol. setting ON OFF VM tone setting OFF Up Silent Silent OFF Keypad sound setting Mic sensitiv. setting Phone vol. setting Played at Level 1 when set to other than Silent Phone vol. setting Played at Level 2 when set to Step LVA tone setting Even when Phone vol. is set to Silent, the low-
voltage alarm sounds at Level 1 when LVA tone is set to ON. Phone setting of Ring volume Played at Level 2 when set to Silent or Step Valid only when Read out message in the function menu of the received mail detail screen is selected Voice clock (Standby, Snoozing) Missed call/new mail confirmation tones when the FOMA terminal is folded ToruCa acquisition tone Silent Silent Phone vol. setting Played at Level 2 when set to Step Phone vol. setting Played at Level 4 when set to Step
* : If all the following are set to OFF or Silent, the beep tone does not sound:
Phone vol. Mail vol. Alarm vol. i-ppli vol. Keypad sound Record msg. LVA tone VM tone
[Table 2] When earphones are connected Item Reading out received mails Voice clock (during standby or snooze) and missed call/new mail confirmation tones when the FOMA terminal is folded Music Player volume 1seg viewing/recording playback volume
(displays the Original manner mode settings) Original Super silent Manner Mode Phone setting of Ring volume Played at Level 2 when set to Silent or Step Phone setting of Ring volume Played at Level 2 when set to Silent or Step Volume setting of the Music Player (p.278) Volume setting for 1seg viewing/recording playback (p.210) Phone vol. setting Played at Level 2 when set to Step 87
S o u n d S c r e e n L g h t
i S e t t i n g s Changing the Display
<Display setting>
You can also set the still images you shot or downloaded images as the standby screen, dialing/
calling screen, etc. 1 iSETTINGSDisplay Display setting The Display setting screen appears. Display setting 2 Select any item:
Stand-by displayChanges the standby screen image.p.89 Wake-up displaySpecifies a message or image displayed when the FOMA terminal is turned on. OFFDoes not display an image, etc. MessageEnters a message. You can enter up to 50 double-byte or 100 single-byte characters. My pictureSelects an image to be displayed from My picture. Dialing/Calling/V.phone Dialing/V.phone Calling/
Mail sending/Mail receivingSets the image displayed when making/receiving voice/videophone calls or sending/receiving mails (i-mode mails and SMS). Dialing/V.phone Dialing/Mail sending setting Select from My picture. Calling/V.phone Calling/Mail receiving setting Changing the Ring Tone (Step 2)p.82 Check new messagesMail recd resultSelects the image displayed for Check new messages
(i-mode mails and messages), Check new SMS or mail received result screen from My picture. N
Some i-motion cannot be specified. Setting the Original manner You can set your preferred Manner mode setting.
The following are the default settings of the Original manner mode:
Record msg.: OFF
Vibrator: ON
Phone vol.: Silent
Mail vol.: Silent
Alarm vol.: Silent
i-ppli vol.: Silent
VM tone: ON
Keypad sound: OFF
Mic sensitiv.: Up
LVA tone: OFF 1 Manner mode set screen (p.86) OriginalSelect any item:
Record msg.Sets the Record message.p.64 VibratorSets the vibrator.p.84 Phone vol.Sets the ring tone volume for voice/
videophone calls and 64K data communication. p.61 Mail vol.Sets the ring tone volume for mail, packet communication and MessageR/F.p.61 Alarm vol.Sets the volume of the alarm. p.284 i-ppli vol.Sets the volume of the i-ppli. p.189 However, Step cannot be set. VM toneSets confirmation tones for Record msg., Voice memo, etc. Keypad soundSets the keypad sound.p.85 Mic sensitiv.Selects from Normal/Up for the microphone sensitivity during calls. LVA toneSets the low-voltage alarm. When the battery runs outp.44 2 Set the respective itemso (Finish) N
The record message function set in Original starts up after the ringing time set in Record message
(p.64) (when set to OFF, the recording starts after 13 seconds).
If the microphone sensitivity during calls is set to Up, the volume of the voice heard by the other party raises even if you speak quietly. The microphone sensitivity is set to Normal when shooting movies in Camera mode. 88
S o u n d S c r e e n L g h t
i S e t t i n g s Changing the standby screen image
Some screens change its image depending on the timing.
This function sets the standby screen when 2in1 is in A mode or 2in1 setting is set to OFF. The settings are not applied when set to B mode or Dual mode. Set Standby display of 2in1 setting. 1 Display setting screen (p.88)Stand-
by displaySelect any item:
OFFNo image is displayed. CalendarSets a calendar. BackgroundFor the background image for the calendar, selects one from My picture. No backgroundDisplays the calendar only. My pictureSelects the standby screen image. To set Stand-by books, select
, 1 to 5 or 1 to 6 from Pre-installed. i-motion*Selects the i-motion to be displayed on the standby screen. i-ppli displaySets the i-ppli standby screen. p.198 When the i-ppli standby screen is set, is displayed. Random displayDisplays an image in the specified folder at random each time you open the FOMA terminal or display the standby screen.
* : When you select the i-motion in the Movable contents folder, the content is moved to the Inbox folder of the FOMA terminal, then set. When the screen for setting the display style is displayed
Select the display styleCheck the image d (Set) The following display styles are available:
Centering disp. (centering an image on the screen)
Fit in disp. (enlarging/reducing an image size until its height or width fits to the screen)
Arrange disp. (displaying images from upper left side in order)
Full-screen disp. (enlarging or clipping an image to fit it into the screen size) N
You may not select how to display depends on images you select.
When Bigger is set to Clock display and Calendar is also set, Big is applied.
If a movie or i-motion is set in the standby screen, it is played when you open the FOMA terminal. N
When a Flash movie or GIF animation is set as the standby screen, the movie or animation is played when the following operations are performed (no sound):
FOMA terminal is opened
t is pressed on the standby screen
Return to the standby screen from another screen If Keypad lock, etc. is active, Flash movies do not work. Release the lock.
<Flash movie that works as clock>
If the Flash movie clock stops, play the Flash movie to restart the clock. If the time is not correct, it will be adjusted within a minute after playback ends.
<Priority sequence for standby screen>
Priority is assigned as follows when standby screen settings are duplicated:
Standby screen (i-ppli) Display setting/Kisekae Tool setting When you set the calendar for the standby screen The calendar appears on the standby screen. You can quickly and easily refer to previous or next calendar dates or activate the schedule. To check the adjacent months on the calendar Press d on the standby screen to select the shortcut icons or calendar. After using c to highlight the calendar, press d (Select). The shortcut icons disappear and you can check the calendar of previous or next month with c. To activate the schedule function When the calendar of the previous or the next month can be displayed with f or g, press d (Select) to launch the schedule function and store a scheduled event for the displayed month. Displaying Phonebook Images When You Receive Calls
<Disp. Phonebook image>
You can set whether to display a still image when receiving a voice/videophone call from a phone number of which still image is stored in the phonebook (ON/OFF). 1 iSETTINGSIncoming call Disp. Phonebook imageON or OFF 89 Setting the Color for Incoming Call Display
<Disp. call/receive No.>
Setting the Display and Keypad Lighting
<Backlight>
1 iSETTINGSDisplay BacklightSelect any item:
LightingSelects ON or OFF. Enter the waiting time for the Power saver mode (01 to 20 minutes in 2 digits) when you set the Power saver mode to ON.
You can also change the backlight operation (ON/
OFF) with 5 (1 second or longer).
Setting the normal lighting settings for the backlight to OFF displays the standby screen. icon on the
If you set the Power saver mode to ON, the standby screen turns off when the specified waiting time has elapsed. If any key is pressed during the Power saver mode, the Power saver mode is canceled. ChargingSelects Standard or All time ON.
When set to Standard, the backlight lights up with the setting of Lighting ON (not enter Power saver mode).
When set to All time ON, the backlight of the screen lights up all the time (when there is no operation for about 15 seconds, the brightness is set to Dark). AreaSelects LCD+Keys or LCD. BrightnessSelects backlight brightness from Bright/Middle/Dark. N
When Lighting is set to ON, the backlight turns on when a call is received and lights for about 15 seconds when you turn the FOMA terminal on, press one of the keys, or unfold the FOMA terminal. The backlight also stays on while using the camera or playing a movie/
i-motion. If you select OFF, the backlight does not turn on. However, the backlight turns on during movie shooting regardless of the Lighting setting.
S o u n d S c r e e n L g h t
i S e t t i n g s You can display names, phone numbers or mail address on the Redial/Received calls screen or sent/
received address list screen with their font color changed. 1 iSETTINGSIncoming call Disp. call/receive No.Select a color To revert the setting to the original
p (Reset) N
Press o (Change) to switch the number of colors to be selected from 16 to 256. The pallet of 16 colors and 256 colors switches each time you press o (Change).
This setting may change depending on the Color pattern setting. To return to the setting corresponding to Color pattern, press p (Reset) after changing this setting.
When you use 2in1, information of Number A/Address A are displayed in the color set in this function. To display the information of Number B/Address B in different color, set Disp. call/receive No. of 2in1 setting. Preventing Others from Peeping the Screen <Shield view>
You can make it difficult for others to see the contents on the display. 1 2 (1 second or longer) Shield view is set and To release the setting
2 (1 second or longer) appears. N
You cannot set or release shield view during editing the text or i-ppli is activated. 90 Changing the Display Design
<Display design>
You can change the text, background and the background pattern for the function keys. 1 iSETTINGSDisplay Display designSelect any item:
Color patternSelects the color pattern from White/Yellow/Blue/Red/Black. Icon patternSelects the design for the Battery icon or Antenna icon from Pattern 1 to 5. Soft keySelects the background pattern for the function keys from Pattern 1 to 3. N
There are some screens or functions that are not affected by the changes made to the settings of this function, such as i-mode sites. Changing the Menu Display Setting the menu display mode
<Menu display set>
You can change the display of the branch settings
(functions) of Settings and the main menu design. You can also set the last one function of the Main Menu and Simple Menu. 1 iSETTINGSDisplayMenu display set The Menu display set screen appears. 2 Select any item:
Menu display set Menu displaySelects the display mode for the branch settings from List/Detail. ThemeSelects the background or icon for the main menu from Lacy Pink/Plain White/Seductive Black/@World (Ericle@World)/Standard Menu/Large Menu/Simple Menu/Original theme/
Kisekae Tool.
When Original theme is selectedp.91
When Kisekae Tool is selectedp.242 Memory focusSets whether to highlight the last selected main setting when the Main Menu or Simple Menu is redisplayed (Last one function).
S o u n d S c r e e n L g h t
i S e t t i n g s Reset menu op. log*Resets the menu for the automatically sort of menu items (p.33).
* : Only available on the menu display that supports this function. N
Last one function memorize the main menu icon when a branch menu is displayed. The icon is not memorized when the operation is interrupted while sub item is selected. Changing the main menu screen You can change the icons and background image used on the main setting selection screen (main menu). 1 Menu display set screen (p.91) ThemeOriginal theme The Original theme screen appears. Original theme Function menup.92 2 Select any item:
Maili-modei-ppliSettingsData box LifeKitNetwork servicePhonebookOwn dataMUSIC1SegOsaifu-KeitaiSelects the icon images for the main menu from My picture. Background imageSelects the background image for the main menu from My picture. N
You cannot set the following images:
100KB-or-larger image
JPEG image larger than 854 dots wide 854 dots high
GIF image larger than 854 dots wide 480 dots high or 480 dots wide 854 dots high
If the image is larger than the display area, the size is reduced without changing the aspect ratio, and displayed in the middle if the image is smaller than the display area. 91
S o u n d S c r e e n L g h t
i S e t t i n g s Original theme screen (p.91)
This setting is displayed only when you change the Original theme setting. ResetRestores the changed main menu icon or background image to the default settings. All resetRestores all the main menu icons and background image to the default settings. Creating My select
<My select>
You can store the frequently used functions as My select and easily call them up.p.31
You can store up to 10 My select entries.
You can set the main menu of Mail, i-mode or i-ppli or each item under Settings, Data Box, LifeKit, Service, Phonebook, Own data, MUSIC, 1Seg and Osaifu-keitai as My select.
You cannot store the same function twice. 1 ip (MySelect) The My select screen appears. 2 Highlight an item to be stored or changed o (Edit) Use b to select the function My select Function menup.92 My select screen (p.92) Add to org. menuCreates My select. SortPress c to move the highlighted menu then sort My select. Add shortcut iconp.94 Reset my selectRestores the menu to the default settings. ReleaseRemoves one function from My select. Release allRemoves all the stored functions from My select. 92 Setting the Illumination Flashing
<Illumination set>
Set the illumination flashing mode of receiving a voice/videophone call or mail. You can also set the illumination for power-on/off, alarm or time signal. 1 iSETTINGSIllumination set Select any item:
DialingSet the illumination (ON/OFF) for voice/
videophone call reception. Incoming Call, Incoming V.phone, Call light, Mail receiving, Mail sendingSelect the illumination lighting pattern/flashing color.
To disable the illumination flashing, set the pattern to OFF.
Incoming Call can set illumination for receiving a voice call or 64K data communication.
Mail receiving can set illumination for receiving i-mode mail, SMS or packet communication.
You can set different lighting patterns/flashing colors respectively for calls or messages from specific phone numbers, mail addresses and groups.p.77 Missed mailSet the illumination (ON/OFF) for new mail. Missed callSet the illumination (ON/OFF) for missed calls. Open phone, Close phoneSelect the illumination lighting pattern/flashing color. To disable the illumination flashing, set the pattern to OFF. Power ONSet the illumination (ON/OFF) for power-on. Power OFFSet the illumination (ON/OFF) for power-off. Charging start, Charging end, To Do, Schedule/
AlarmSelect the illumination lighting pattern/
flashing color. To disable the illumination flashing, set the pattern to OFF. Time signalSelect the illumination pattern, color and cycle (30 minutes/60 minutes). To disable time signal, set the pattern to OFF. Exchanging dataSet the illumination (ON/OFF) for infrared communications. Play soundSet the illumination (ON/OFF) for music playback. Activate 1SegSet the illumination (ON/OFF) for 1seg activation.
S o u n d S c r e e n L g h t
i S e t t i n g s Demo playFlashes the illumination in order in patterns other than Random and Melody linked.
(Color is all in Rainbow) To check the pattern or color for each setting
o (Play) N
When the Pattern/Color list screen is displayed, illumination flashes in the highlighted pattern or color.
If Pattern is set to Melody linked but the melody-
linkage-compatible pattern is not registered, the default pattern applies.
Area Mail Illumination works as follows:
Pattern: Flashes in Mail linkage when beep sounds, and follows this functions settings when new mail tone sounds.
Color: Red (Ruby red)
If you receive multiple mail at the same time, the illumination flashes according to the illumination setting of the last received mail.
<Illumination priority for reception>
When the illumination settings are duplicated, the priority is assigned as follows:
Illumination for ring tones/images Illumination for group ring tones/images Incoming Call or Incoming V.phone under Illumination set Changing the Font
<Font>
You can change the characters displayed on the screen to your favorite font (typeface). 1 On the standby screen7 (1 second or longer)Select any item:
Font typeSelects Gothic or Ming-cho. ThicknessSelects Thin or Bold. Character sizeSets the character size for the respective screens. StandardX-largeSets the character size of the screens to Standard or X-large all at once. Separate settingSets the character size of the screens respectively. Screens that can be set with Separate setting p.93 Screens that can be set with Separate setting Item Char. Input Mail i-mode Full brw. Target screen for setting The character entry screen (Edit), the new mail screen (excluding SMS), the preview screen (excluding he sent SMS, etc) Mail list/detail screen, screens displayed when referring to Header/Signature/
Template Sites screen, Screen memo, Message list/detail screen Full Browser screen (except Original layout) Phonebook Phonebook list/detail screen, My Profile screen History data Redial/Dialed/Received calls screen, Address list screen i-Channel i-Channel ticker N
The character in the enter phone number screen is not included in this function.
You can change the character size in the following menus. Char. Input: CHG input sizep.303 Mail: Font sizepp.176, 178 i-mode: Font sizep.148 Full brw.: Change font sizep.220 Phonebook: Set large fontSet normal font pp.74, 75, 291 History data: Set large fontSet normal font pp.54, 177 i-Channel: Ticker size settingp.154 Setting the Clock Display
<Clock display>
You can set the Clock display format (12h clock/24h clock), size and character color. You can also set not to display the date or time.
In the screens other than standby screen, only the time is displayed in small size at the top of the display regardless of this setting.
Sub clock can be displayed when setting Size to Small. 1 iSETTINGSClockClock displaySelect any item:
StyleSelects 12h clock or 24h clock. SizeSelects the display size of date and time from Bigger/Big/Small/Up Small/OFF. ColorSelects Black or White. Continued on next page 93
S o u n d S c r e e n L g h t
i S e t t i n g s N
The Flash movie clock time on the standby screen cannot be set in this function. Using Shortcut Icons
<My shortcut>
Pasting frequently phone numbers and functions to the standby screen as shortcut icons provides a quick and simple way of accessing those numbers and functions. When you cannot answer a received call or when you receive a mail, the icon appears on the standby screen. Shortcut icons that can be pasted Icon Operation when selected Phone number: Displays the Enter phone number screen with the phone number entered Mail address: Displays the New mail screen with the e-mail address entered SMS address: Displays the New SMS screen with the phone number entered URL (i-mode): Displays the site URL (Full Browser): Displays the site Melody: Plays the melody Image: Displays the image Movie or i-motion: Plays the movie or i-motion Chara-den: Displays the Chara-den PDF: Displays PDF data i-ppli software: Launches the i-ppli Inbox folder: Displays the Received mail list screen Photo mode: Activates the Photo mode Movie mode: Activates the Movie mode Voice mode: Activates the Voice mode To Do list: Displays the To Do list screen Schedule: Displays the Schedule screen Text memo: Displays the Text memo screen Text reader: Activates the Text reader Bar code reader: Activates the Bar code reader i-Channel: Displays the i-Channel Music&Video Channel: Displays the Music&Video Channel screen Music: Displays the Music Player screen Receive Ir data: Displays the Receive Ir data screen 94 Icon Operation when selected Dictionary: Displays the Dictionary screen My select: Displays My select Calculator: Activates the Calculator 1Seg: Activates 1seg
* When a shortcut icon is selected, only the first 11 double-
byte or 22 single-byte characters of the title are displayed. You can edit the title.p.95 Advising shortcut icons Icon Operation when selected New mail: Displays received mail detail screen New message: Displays the received message detail screen New ToruCa: Displays the ToruCa list screen Missed call: Displays the missed call screen Record message: Displays the play/erase msg. screen Record VP message: Displays the play/
erase VP msg screen Message in the voice mail service center:
Displays the voice mail screen Missed alarm: Displays the details of the missed alarm If i-ppli could not be launched automatically: Displays the auto-start info screen if i-ppli standby screen shut down due to an error: Displays the security error history screen Receive software update notifications:
Updating Software When the software update has been completed: Displays the update results screen after entering your security code When the timer rewriting is set: Displays the install content preview screen When 1Seg timer recording ends:
Displays the result screen When 1Seg booking program alarm does not work: Displays unviewed program info screen When accumulated charge exceeds the cost limit set: Displays the alarm information for notify cost limit after entering your security code Automatic updating result of the pattern data for the scanning function has been completed: Displays the automatic updating result of the pattern data Icon Operation when selected When the updating has not been done successfully or when the new pattern data has been released: The screen prompting you to update the pattern data for the scanning function appears When the Data Security Service could not be updated: Displays the screen that allows you to connect to the Data Security Center after you enter your security code When the Music&Video channel download has been completed: Displays the Music&Video Channel screen
* The shortcut icon that provides information disappears when it is called from each function or when it is performed.
* To erase the display of the shortcut icon that provides information, hold down t for 1 second or longer (you cannot erase some icons). Pasting shortcut icons Select Add shortcut icon from the function menu on the screen of the function you want to paste, the list screen or the detail screen of the data.
(Photo mode) and
(1Seg),
(My selection) are pasted at default.
You can paste up to 15 shortcut icons for Theme 1 to 3 respectively.
<Example: To paste a phone number from the phonebook>
Add shortcut icon in the Function menu (Phonebook detail screen)p.75 Using shortcut icons to retrieve data or functions 1 On the standby screend The Shortcut icon screen appears, and you can select a shortcut icon. The title of the highlighted shortcut icon is displayed in the balloon. Desktop icon Function menup.95 2 Use b to select the shortcut icon If there are 6 or more shortcut icons stored appears on the left or right of the The screen. You can use v to scroll through the shortcut icons.
S o u n d S c r e e n L g h t
i S e t t i n g s Changing the theme of My shortcut on the standby screen 1 iSETTINGSDisplayMy shortcut The My shortcut screen
(Theme) appears. The appears for the theme that is set. 2 Select a themeYES My shortcut screen (Theme) Function menup.95 When adding shortcut icons to the standby screen (p.95) after this procedure, you can sort and paste shortcut icons to the selected theme. To check the theme contents
Highlight the theme o (Detail) My shortcut screen (Detail) appears. My shortcut screen (Detail) Function menup.95 Shortcut icon screen (p.95)/My shortcut screen (Theme/Detail)
(p.95)
As available functions are different between the Shortcut icon screen and My shortcut screen
(Theme/Detail), displayed items vary. Add new iconSelect an icon to paste from the function name list. Create iconSelects icons to be pasted from the function name list, then selects the theme. Sort iconChanges the position of desktop icons. Display settingSelects the icon display method from Display always/Display at use. When set to Display at use, the desktop icons are displayed only when you press d on the standby screen. Edit titleYou can enter up to 16 double-byte or 32 single-byte characters for the icon title, and 11 double-
byte or 22 single-byte characters for the theme. Shortcut icon infoDisplays the icon title, type, contents, etc. CopySelects from Copy this/Copy selected/Copy all and copies the ions to another theme. About multiple-choicep.38 MoveSelects from Move this/Move selected/Move all and moves the icons to another theme. About multiple-choicep.38 Continued on next page 95
S o u n d S c r e e n L g h t
i S e t t i n g s Reset my shortcutRestores the settings to the default settings (1Seg, Photo mode and My selection). Change themeChanges the theme of My shortcut. DeleteSelects the deleting method from Delete this/
Delete selected/Delete all. About multiple-choicep.38 Setting the standby screen 1 On the standby screend o (Settings)Select any item:
Stand-by image setChanges the standby screen image.p.89 Kisekae Tool set.p.97 ch-key settingp.284 Clock disp setSets the clock on the standby screen. p.93 Selecting the Icons to Display on the Standby Screen
<Icons setting>
You can set whether to use b or not (ON/OFF) for selecting the icons, date or time displayed on the standby screen. 1 iSETTINGSDisplayIcons settingON or OFF Selecting displayed icons 1 On the standby screendHighlight the icon with b The title of the highlighted icon is displayed. 2 d (Select) The setting screen for the selected icon, etc. is displayed. Icon you can select Icon After selected Icon
(Red)
(Red)
(Red)
(Red)
(Red)
(R: Red)
(F: Red)
(Red)
(Red)
(Red) Displays Display design Displays Display design Displays the screen for releasing Self mode to
, to 96 After selected Displays the unread mail list Displays the Inbox Displays MessageR or MessageF Displays the screen for selecting MessageR or MessageF Displays the unread mail list Performs Check new messages Displays the Lock function selection screen Displays the screen for releasing IC card lock setting Displays USB mode setting Displays the screen for selecting Vibrator or Mail/
Msg. ring time When Manner mode is not set : Displays the screen for selecting Ring volume or Mail/Msg. ring time When Manner mode or Super silent mode is set :
Displays the message that the setting is not available When Original manner is set : Displays the screen for selecting Original or Mail/
Msg. ring time Displays Manner mode set Displays the screen for selecting Schedule, Alarm, To Do list, 1Seg booking program or 1Seg timer recording Displays Voice Mail Displays a message notifying that nothing is recorded. Or, displays Play/Erase msg. Icon After selected Displays a message notifying that nothing is recorded. Or, displays Play/Erase VP msg. Displays the screen for selecting Backlight or Shield view Displays the screen for setting Keypad lock Displays Side key guard Displays Schedule Displays Set main time when the time is not set Displays Alarm Displays Set main time when the time is not set Displays Set sub clock Switches and displays the active tasks Date Main clock Sub clock Setting the Kisekae Tool
<Kisekae Tool setting>
You can change various design of the FOMA terminal such as screens and ring tones all at once with the Kisekae Tool package.
In addition to Kisekae Tool designed for the phone color, , @World and are pre-installed at the time of purchase.
You can download the Kisekae Tool package from sites.p.146 The downloaded packages are stored in Data Box and you can check the contents.p.225
The following items can be set all at once.
Display setting
Select ring tone
Clock Alarm Tone set
Menu display set - Theme
i-Channel - i-Channel setting - Ticker color setting
Change skin of the Music Player
Clock display
Display design
When 2in1 is set, Kisekae Tool set in any mode is applied to all modes/phone numbers/mail addresses except for the following:
Standby screen are applied only to A mode.
Ring tones for voice call and videophone call, Voice call ringing screen and Videophone ringing screen are applied only to A mode.
Ring tone for mail is applied only to A mode.
When you change the design of the menu display using Kisekae Tool, the menu structure may change in accordance with frequency of using functions. Also, you cannot access some functions entering the menu number assigned to the functions. In this case, change the main menu to Standard Menu (p.33) or perform Reset menu op. log (p.91) so as to operate as described in this manual. Setting a package
If you store the current settings to (My favorite) before setting all at once, you can restore the stored setting later.p.98 1 iSETTINGSKisekae Tool setting The Kisekae Tool set screen appears.
S o u n d S c r e e n L g h t
i S e t t i n g s 2 Select an itemYES Kisekae Tool set No item is set in
(My favorite) at the time of purchase. To check the settings
Highlight an itemo (Detail)Highlight an itemo (Play) To search packages by i-mode
Search by i-modeYES Function menup.98 N
Items to be changed vary depending on the package.
When a package is set, the color of Disp. call/receive No. may be changed.
Highlighting the pre-install package in Kisekae-tool setting list screen displays the color pattern and standby image and the thumbnail of the main menu. 97
S o u n d S c r e e n L g h t
i S e t t i n g s Kisekae Tool set list screen
(p.97) Contents checking screen
(p.98) Set all*1/Finish*2Sets to the currently displayed items all at once. Take Setting info*2Retains the current settings and stores in (My favorite). Reset Setting info*2Deletes settings stored in
(My favorite) and set all items to No data.
*1: Available only for ,
) from sites. and downloaded Kisekae Tool package (
*2: Displayed only with the data with Edit titleEdits the title. You can enter up to 10 double-
byte or 20 single-byte characters. Check Setting infoChecks the set contents. Reset Setting infoDeletes the (My favorite) settings. Storing the current setting to
(My favorite) 1 Kisekae Tool set list screen (p.97) Highlight (My favorite) o (Detail) The Contents checking screen appears. No data appears for items with no settings. 2 u (FUNC)Take Setting infoYES Contents checking Function menup.98 Changing (My favorite) settings You can change the items stored in (My favorite) on the contents checking screen. 1 Contents checking screen (p.98) Select an itemChange the setting N
The details of i-ppli display is not stored to Stand-
by image in (My favorite).
If an image, i-motion or melody stored in
(My favorite) is deleted, it is also deleted from
(My favorite) and No data appears. 98 Security Settings 101 Dial lock/Omakase Lock Change security code PIN setting Secret mode/Secret data only mode Secret folder About Your Security Codes Security Codes Used on the FOMA Terminal................................................................. 100 101 Changing Your Security Code.......................................................... Setting Your PIN Codes .................................................................................. 101 Release PIN Lock ........................................................................................................... 101 Restricting the Phone Controls and Functions Preventing Others from Using Your Terminal................................ Preventing Others from Viewing Your Phonebook or Schedule Data
............................................................................................ Preventing Others from Viewing Data........................................................... Preventing Others from Viewing Your Personal Information or Performing the Phone/Mail Operations ........................................................................... Locking the Key Operation Automatically ..................................................... Using the IC Card Authentication........................................................... Disabling the Side Key.............................................................................. Restricting Incoming and Outgoing Calls or Transmissions Preventing Unwanted Mail Display .............................................. Restricting Incoming and Outgoing Calls for Specific Phone Numbers......... Rejecting Calls from Unidentified Callers ............................................. Muting Ring Tones for Callers Not Stored in the Phonebook.................... Rejecting Calls from Callers Not Stored in the Phonebook ..................... Disabling Making/Receiving Calls, etc. ........................................................... Other Security Settings Data Security Service ...................................................................... 115 Other Security Settings................................................................................................... 116 Mail box lock/Folder lock Restrictions Call setting w/o ID Ring time(sec.) Reject unknown Self mode Original lock Keypad lock IC card authentic. Side key guard 112 112 114 114 114 115 106 110 111 112 Data Security Service 103 104 99 Security Codes Used on the FOMA Terminal To make the FOMA terminal more convenient and secure, some functions require the security code. In addition to the security code for various FOMA terminal operations, you also have the Network security code for accessing network services and the i-mode password. Make use of the FOMA terminal using an appropriate security code according to the purpose. S e c u r i t y S e t t i n g s Notes on the security codes
Avoid using a readily predictable number such as birthday, part of the phone number, street address number or room number, 1111 and 1234. Make sure to make a note of the security code you set in case you forget it.
Take great care not to disclose your security code to others. If your security code is disclosed to others and abused, NTT DOCOMO shall have no liability for any damage due to any unauthorized use of it.
DOCOMO by no means inquire your security code.
If you forget any of your security codes, you must bring your official identification providing that you are the subscriber (such as a drivers license), the FOMA terminal, and the FOMA card (UIM) with you to an NTT DOCOMO service counter. For details, contact the inquiries number provided on the back of this manual. Security Code The security code is set to 0000 (4 zeros) at the time of purchase. You can change the security code by yourself.p.101 When the security code screen appears, enter the 4 to 8 digit security code and press d (Set).
The entered security code is displayed as _ and the numbers are not displayed.
When you enter a wrong security code or enter nothing for about 15 seconds, a warning tone sounds and a warning message appears. Network Security Code The network security code is a 4-digit number required for using the DOCOMO e-site or various network services. You can set any number at the time of subscription but you can change it afterwards by yourself. If you have the docomo ID/Password for general PC support site My docomo, you can change the network security code from your PC. 100 You can also change it by yourself using i-mode, from
(Applications and Procedures) on the DOCOMO e-site. (Only in Japanese)
* For details of My docomo and DOCOMO e-site, see the back of the back cover of this manual. i-mode Password The 4-digit i-mode password is required when registering/unregistering My Menu, subscribing to/
unsubscribing from the message service or the pay services of i-mode (There may be other passwords set independently by the information service providers). The i-mode password is set to 0000 (4 zeros) at the time of subscription. You can change the i-mode password by yourself. You can change the password using i-mode, by selecting oiMenuEnglishOptions Change i-mode Password. PIN1 Code and PIN2 Code You can set two security codes of PIN1 code and PIN2 code for the FOMA card (UIM). These security codes are set to 0000 (4 zeros) at the time of subscription. You can change the PIN1/
PIN2 codes by yourself.p.101 PIN1 code is a 4 to 8 digit number (code) you enter each time you insert the FOMA card (UIM) to the FOMA terminal or you turn on the FOMA terminal. This code identifies you as the user and is designed to prevent improper use of your FOMA card (UIM) by others. When the PIN1 code entry set is set to ON, entering the PIN1 code enables you to make and receive calls and use the functions of the FOMA terminal. The PIN2 code is a 4 to 8 digit number that is used for resetting the total cost, using or requesting the user certificates, etc.
* When you purchase a new FOMA terminal and insert your current FOMA card (UIM), use the PIN1 and PIN2 codes you set to the current card. When the PIN1 or PIN2 code entry screen appears, enter the 4 to 8 digit PIN1/PIN2 code and press d (Set).
The entered PIN1/PIN2 code is displayed as _.
If you enter a wrong PIN1/PIN2 Ex. PIN1 code code three times consecutively, the PIN1/PIN2 code is locked and cannot be used anymore. (The remaining number of times for the entry appears on the screen.) When you enter the correct PIN1/PIN2 code, the number of times for entry is reset to 3. PIN Unlock Code (PUK Code) The PIN unlock code (PUK code) is an 8-digit number for releasing the lock of PIN1/PIN2 code. You cannot change the PUK code.
If you enter a wrong PUK code ten times consecutively, the FOMA card is locked.
<When powering on>
Enter PIN1 Set new PIN1/PIN2 3 consecutive errors 3 consecutive errors Enter PUK Entered successfully 10 consecutive errors
<User certificate operations>
<Access FirstPass-compatible site, etc.>
Enter PIN2 Contact a DOCOMO shop PIN1 code entry setSets whether PIN1 code to be input when you turn the FOMA terminal on or not
(ON/OFF). Release PIN Lock If you enter incorrect PIN1 code or PIN2 code 3 times in a row, you must unlock the locked PIN1 code or PIN2 code then set a new PIN1 code or PIN2 code.
<Example: To unlock your PIN1 code>
1 Enter the 8 digit PUK code Changing Your Security Code
<Change security code>
1 iSETTINGSLock/Security Change security codeEnter your current security codeEnter new 4 to 8 digits security codeYES 2 Enter a new 4 to 8 digit PIN1 code Enter the new 4 to 8 digit PIN1 code again Preventing Others from Using Your Terminal
<Dial lock/Omakase Lock>
S e c u r i t y S e t t i n g s Setting Your PIN Codes
<PIN setting>
You can set PIN1 code and PIN2 code for your FOMA card (UIM). PIN1 code and PIN2 codep.100
PIN1 code, PIN2 code and PIN1 code entry set are recorded to the FOMA card (UIM).
To change your PIN1 code, select ON in PIN1 code entry set. 1 iSETTINGSLock/Security PIN settingEnter your security code The PIN setting screen appears. PIN setting 2 Select any item:
Change PIN1 codeEnter the current PIN1 code
(4 to 8 digit) and enter a new PIN1 code 2 times (1 time for confirmation). Change PIN2 codeEnter the current PIN2 code
(4 to 8 digit) and enter a new PIN2 code 2 times (1 time for confirmation). To lock your FOMA terminal to prevent others from using, you can set Dial lock that can be set on the FOMA terminal and Omakase Lock that can be set remotely.
Dial lock or Omakase Lock is not released even when the power is turned off. Available operations and functions when Dial lock or Omakase Lock is set Function Dial lock Turning the FOMA Terminal on/off Calling emergency numbers (110, 119 or 118) Setting/releasing Dial lock Setting/releasing Omakase Lock Receiving a voice or videophone calls Updating the Data Security Service data
: Available : Unavailable Omakase Lock Continued on next page 101 S e c u r i t y S e t t i n g s
When Dial lock or Omakase Lock is set, the Alarm, Schedule, To Do list, 1Seg booking program and 1Seg timer recording are not given. Once Dial lock or Omakase Lock is released, the
(Missed program) shortcut icon appears on the standby screen.
(Missed alarm) or
The shortcut icon is not displayed when Dial lock or Omakase Lock is set. Once Dial lock or Omakase Lock is released, these icons reappear.
Even when you receive calls from the callers stored in the phonebook, only the phone numbers are displayed when Dial lock or Omakase Lock is set. Setting the Dial lock 1 iSETTINGSLock/Security LockEnter your security code Dial lock Operations during Dial lock
Dial lock and appear on the screen. IC card lock is also set to ON and IC card functions become unavailable
(Dial lock can be released using the IC card authentication function).
You can still receive MessageR/F, i-mode mail or SMS automatically when Dial lock is set, but the receiving screen or reception results screen does not appear. Once Dial lock is released, the icon for the received message/mail appears on the standby screen.
You can still receive the Area Mail automatically and view the contents. Releasing Dial lock
If you fail to release Dial lock 5 times in a row, the FOMA terminal turns off. However, you can turn it on again. 1 Enter your security code on the screen when Dial lock is setd Dial lock is released and To release the lock using the IC card disappears. authenticationp.111 N
Even if an incorrect security code is input while releasing Dial lock, no error message appears. Press y and input a correct security code again. 102 Using Omakase Lock This service enables you to remotely lock the FOMA terminal with the FOMA card (UIM) you subscribed to inserted by contacting DOCOMO or from My docomo when you lost your FOMA terminal. You can release the lock by calling DOCOMO, etc.
* Omakase Lock is a pay service. If you subscribe to the service at the same time with the subscription of suspending the service or while the service is suspended, no charge applies. Call Center (for setting/releasing Omakase Lock) 0120-524-360 (Operating time: 24 hours a day)
(only in Japanese)
* My docomo is also available to set/release Omakase Lock via a PC, etc.
* For details on Omakase Lock, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide [i-mode] FOMA version. Operations during Omakase Lock
(Omakase Lock set) appears on the display.
When Omakase Lock is set, all the key operations except answering voice/videophone calls and powering on/off are locked, and the functions (including IC card) become unusable.
Although you can receive voice/videophone calls, only the phone number appears on the display while the name, image, etc. stored in the phonebook do not.
Mails received when Omakase Lock is set are kept at i-mode center.
You can turn the FOMA terminal on/off, but Omakase Lock is not released even when the power is turned off.
The FOMA card (UIM) and microSD card remain unlocked. N
When other function is activated, the function is terminated and the FOMA terminal is locked (the editing data may be canceled before terminating).
You can set Omakase Lock even when other lock function is set. In this case, releasing Omakase Lock returns to the lock setting before Omakase Lock is set
(however, Secret or Secret data only mode are released).
Lock is not set when
, Self mode is set or the FOMA terminal is turned off.
The lock is not set if you subscribed to the Dual Network service and are using the mova service. N
The FOMA terminal is locked if the subscriber requests even if the subscriber and the user of the FOMA terminal are different.
If the FOMA terminal is on voice or videophone call when you try to release Omakase Lock, the lock is released after the call ends. Preventing Others from Viewing Your Phonebook or Schedule Data
<Secret mode/Secret data only mode>
When the phonebook or schedule entries are stored in Secret or Secret data only mode, these entries are stored as secret data and are not displayed in normal mode. To display the secret data, set the FOMA terminal to Secret mode (displays all data including the secret data) or Secret data only mode (displays only the secret data).
You can also keep the data in My picture, i-motion, Received mails, Sent mails and Bookmark into the secret folder to prevent others from viewing the data.p.104 Setting to Secret or Secret data only mode 1 iSETTINGSLock/Security Secret mode or Secret data only modeEnter your security code When setting to Secret mode, When setting to Secret data only mode, flashes and the number of secret data is displayed for about 2 seconds. appears. Icons displayed when other lock function is set at the same timep.27 Storing/viewing the Secret data and setting the Secret data back to normal data
You cannot set phonebook entries as secret data on the FOMA card (UIM).
When making or receiving voice/videophone calls during secret mode or secret data only mode, set mode is released even if you do not answer the call. Setting phonebook entries or schedule entries as secret data Store the information in Secret or Secret data only mode. Adding information to the phonebookp.70 Adding information to your schedulep.285 Setting the stored phonebook entries as secret data Select Set secret from the function menu of the phonebook detail screen.
* If you set the phonebook entry stored to Choku-
Den as a secret data, the entry is deleted from Choku-Den. Viewing the secret data Set the FOMA terminal to Secret or Secret data only mode, then view the phonebook or schedule. Searching the phonebookp.73 Checking your schedulep.287 Setting the secret data back to normal data Set the FOMA terminal to Secret or Secret data only mode, display the Phonebook detail screen (p.73) or Schedule list screen (p.287) to select Release secret from the function menu. S e c u r i t y S e t t i n g s Canceling Secret or Secret data only mode 1 In Secret or Secret data only mode, disappears. y Secret or Secret data only mode is canceled and You can also release the set mode by selecting iSETTINGSLock/SecuritySecret mode or Secret data only mode N
When a secret data is highlighted in the list screen during Secret mode or when the detail screen of a secret data is displayed, the lighting of to flashing. changes
Phonebook or Schedule entries stored as secret data can only be retrieved, modified, deleted or referred in Secret or Secret data only mode. When the FOMA terminal is in normal mode, you will be notified of schedule events stored as secret data by an alarm, but no alarm message is displayed. Continued on next page 103 N
If the caller of the incoming call is stored as secret data and notifies the caller ID, the stored name or image is not displayed and only the phone number is displayed. Only the phone number is displayed in Received calls record. Setting Secret mode or Secret data only mode displays the name stored in the Received calls record.
If the Secret mode or Secret data only mode is released when you receive mail from a sender stored as secret data, not the name but the mail address is displayed. The mail address is not stored in Received address record.
If you modify your Phonebook or Schedule in Secret mode, the modified data becomes secret data. If you modify the phonebook, all the items stored under the modified memory number become secret data.
If Dial lock/Omakase Lock is set at the same time with Secret mode or Secret data only mode, releasing Dial lock/Omakase Lock also cancels Secret mode or Secret data only mode.
When you make a call or send a mail using the phonebook stored as a secret data, it is not recorded in the Redial, Dialed calls or Sent address records. S e c u r i t y S e t t i n g s Preventing Others from Viewing Data
<Secret folder>
You can store images, movies, i-motion, received mail, sent mail, and bookmarks you want to prevent others from viewing data, using Secret folder which is displayed only in Secret mode or Secret data only mode.
You can store the data stored in the FOMA terminal only.
The maximum number of data records that can be stored in each secret folder is as follows:
My picture Approx. 100
(Approx. 2M bytes) Sent mail Approx. 100
(Approx. 1.2M bytes) i-motion Received mail Approx. 10
(Approx. 10M bytes) Bookmark
(i-mode) Approx. 10
(Approx. 3K bytes) Approx. 100
(Approx. 1.2M bytes) Bookmark
(Full Browser) Approx. 10
(Approx. 6K bytes)
* The data may not be able to be stored up to the maximum number depending on the file size of each data.
<Example: To store an image in My picture into the Secret folder>
1 Switch the FOMA terminal to Secret mode or Secret data only modep.103 2 Image list screen (p.225)Use b to move the frame of the image u (FUNC)Keep in secret N
The Secret folder is already prepared for the FOMA terminal. You cannot create another Secret folder, or delete or rename the existing Secret folder.
If the secret/secret data only mode is canceled by an incoming call, etc. while displaying the data in the secret folder, the screen returns to the list screen of each folder.
<Received mail> <Sent mail>
When you receive the SMS report for the SMS stored in the Secret folder, you cannot select Disp. SMS report from the function menu of the SMS detail screen. You can select after putting out a mail message from the Secret folder. 104 N
<Shortcut icon>
When the image, movie or i-motion pasted as a shortcut icon is stored in the Secret folder, it is not displayed even when the shortcut icon is selected.
Even when the Bookmark, received mail or sent mail pasted as a shortcut icon is stored in the Secret folder, normal operation is performed when the shortcut icon is selected. Function menu of the Secret folder Some functions for the folder or data in the folder are restricted in the Secret folder. The table below shows the available functions on the folder list screen, the data list screen, and the data detail screen. For information on Put out, refer to Changing a secret data to normal data (p.106). Function menu when the Secret folder is highlighted on the folder list screen My picture
(p.253) Add folder Delete all image*1 Memory info i-motion
(p.253) Add folder Delete all*1 Memory info Received/Sent mail
(p.173) Bookmark
(p.142) Add folder No. of bookmarks*1 iC trans. all*1 Send all Ir data*1 CopyAll to microSD*1 Delete all*1 Add folder No. of messages*1 Open folder iC trans. all*1 Send all Ir data*1 CopyAll to microSD*1 Delete read*1*2 Delete all*1
*1: The data in the Secret folder are not included.
*2: Available only with the Inbox folder list screen. Function menu (Data list screen) My picture
(p.228) i-motion
(p.233) Display image Image info Memory info Chg. list view*1 Delete Put out i-motion info Memory info List setting Delete Put out Received/Sent mail
(p.175) Bookmark
(p.143) No. of bookmarks Delete Put out Color coding List setting Protect*2 Unprotect*2 Protect ON/OFF*3 Unprotect all*3 Mail info*2 No. of messages Delete Put out
*1: In list display, Chg. images view appears.
*2: Available only with the received mail list screen.
*3: Available only with the sent mail list screen. Function menu (Data detail screen) My picture
(p.228) i-motion
(p.279) Image info Set image disp. Full screen*
Retry Delete this Received/Sent mail
(p.176) Action setting Play menu Detail Info Select file Help Protect ON/OFF Scroll Font size Delete Put out
* : Normal appears when in the Full screen mode. S e c u r i t y S e t t i n g s 105 Changing a secret data to normal data To change the secret data back to normal data, move the data from the Secret folder to another folder.
<Example: To return an image from the Secret folder of My picture to normal data>
1 Switch the FOMA terminal to Secret mode or Secret data only modep.103 2 Folder list screen (p.225)Secret Move the frame to an image u (FUNC)Put out 3 Select a folder N
If you put out a mail message from the Secret folder, the mail turns into a normal mail message. Therefore, an old mail message may be deleted when new mail messages are sent or received. It is recommended to protect the mail message before putting it out from the Secret folder. S e c u r i t y S e t t i n g s Preventing Others from Viewing Your Personal Information or Performing the Phone/Mail Operations
<Original lock>
You can lock the functions which use your personal information such as mails and phonebook to prevent others from viewing these information or altering improperly. You can also restrict making or receiving voice/videophone calls, and sending i-mode mails or SMS.
You can store the function or data you want to lock to Original lock 1 to 3 individually depending on the usage or purpose.
Original lock is not released even when the power is turned off.
Functions and data you can lock are described in Table 1 (p.108). You can specify (customize) whether to lock or not for each group and item. p.107 Activating Original lock 1 iSETTINGSLock/Security LockEnter your security code The Lock selection screen appears. 2 Select Original lock 1 to 3 The lock is activated and the function or data to be locked is locked. appears on the screen. Icons displayed when other lock function is set at the same timep.27 To change the function or data to be Lock selection lockedp.107 To edit the title
Highlight one of Original lock 1 to 3 u (FUNC)Edit titleEnter the title To release Original lock
OFF 106 Operations during Original lock If you try to use the locked function or data when Original lock is set, you are asked to enter your security code.
If you enter your security code, the lock is deactivated temporarily and you can use the locked function or data (you cannot use the functions of Dial/sending mail and Incoming/Mail disp. when the lock is released temporarily). When you exit from the activated function and return to the standby screen, the lock is activated again.
<Example: To view an i-mode mail when Original lock is set>
1 On the standby screenu 2 Enter your security code Original lock is released temporarily and the mail menu appears. 3 Read an i-mode mail 4 Exit the mail menu and return to the standby screen Original lock is activated and the screen. appears on Customizing the function or data to be locked
You can store particular settings such as locking the phonebook only or restricting the outgoing calls/mails only to Original lock 1 to 3 individually depending on the usage or purpose.
You can set (customize) the lock by each category, group or function such as Table 1 (p.108).
The contents of the lock you set (customize) are retained even when Original lock is set or released. 1 Lock selection screen (p.106) Highlight one of Original lock 1 to 3 o (Detail) The Category list screen appears. the item in the category is to be locked and appears when all items are to be locked. appears when any of Function menup.110 Category list 2 Select the category appears when any of you want to change the setting The Group list screen appears. the item in the group is to be locked and when all items are to be locked. appears 3 Select the group you want to change the setting The Function list screen appears. Group list Function menup.110 S e c u r i t y S e t t i n g s 4 Use c to select (checkbox) o (Finish) The checked (
be locked. Deselect items you do not want to lock.
) item is to 5 o (Finish) Function list o (Finish)d (Set) The number of times you press o (Finish) varies depending on the category. Function menup.110 Continued on next page 107
[Table 1] Functions and data for the Original lock Group Function Operations when locked/Notes Data disp. Edit del. Mail Mail Mail member i-mode Bookmark i-ppli i-ppli i-mode ToruCa ToruCa Multi media My picture S e c u r i t y S e t t i n g s Schedule Memo Music i-motion Melody 1Seg Kisekae Tool My document Chara-den Document viewer Voice announce Music&Video Channel Camera Bar code reader Text reader Schedule Alarm To Do list Play/Erase msg. Play/Erase VP msg. Locks the activation of each function.
You can view the Area Mail contents. Locks the i-mode function (i-mode, Full Browser and i-Channel). Locks the i-mode and Full Browser bookmark list displays. Locks the i-ppli function or IC card list display.
IC card function is not locked.
When the i-ppli standby screen is set, the i-ppli standby screen is deactivated when the lock is set. Locks the display of ToruCa folder list screen.
The ToruCa acquisition is available with a reader/writer unit even when the lock is set, but the New ToruCa shortcut icon does not appear (once the lock is released, the New ToruCa shortcut icon appears). Locks the activation of each function.
The data cannot be accessed from other functions.
If the data to be locked is set as the ring tone, receiving screen, standby screen, etc., the default settings are used when the lock is set.
When My picture or Chara-den is to be locked and an substitute image is sent for a videophone call when the lock is set, the Pre-installed substitute image is sent. Locks the activation of each function.
Music&Video Channel programs can be downloaded even when the lock is set. Locks the activation of each function.
The alarm notification is not given when the lock is set and Missed alarm shortcut icon appears. Locks the activation of each function (you can set the Record message).
During any lock function is set, and when you press s () with the FOMA terminal folded, you cannot check Record message. Voice memo Voice memo (in-call) Locks the activation of each function.
The play/erase a voice memo is not locked (Set the lock for Play/Erase msg. screen) Phonebook Phonebook/
Choku-Den My profile Dialed calls Received calls 108 Locks the activation of the phonebook and Choku-Den (this affects many other functions which use the phonebook).
The stored name is not displayed when the lock is set in the Dialed and Received call or Mail list screen. A phone number or mail address is displayed.
When MSG display settings of Chaku-moji is set to Only number in PH-
book, a Chaku-moji message is not displayed.
You cannot set Reject unknown at the same time.
Call rejection, Call acceptation, Call Forwarding and Voice Mail settings are deactivated.
Even if you press s () with the FOMA terminal folded while lock is set, the FOMA terminal does not read out the caller or senders name of a missed call or new mail. Locks the activation of My Profile. Locks the activation of Dialed calls, Redial and Sent address. Locks the activation of Received calls and Received address.
Even if you press s () with the FOMA terminal folded while lock is set, the FOMA terminal does not check a missed call. Group Other settings Function Operations when locked/Notes Text memo Notice designate calls No alarm notification is given even when the specified upper cost limit is Locks the activation of text memo. Chaku-moji Dial/sending mail Keypad dial Keypad dial Sending mail Input add by keypad exceeded.
Once the lock is released, the Notice designate calls shortcut icon appears. Locks the function of editing or setting Chaku-moji, and the function of Select message or Sent messages when you send the Chaku-moji, and Chaku-
moji is not displayed.
You can send or receive the Chaku-moji. You cannot make calls by dialing the phone number directly (you can make calls using the phonebook, Redial/Dialed calls records and the Received calls record of the recorded party.).
You cannot add or edit phonebook entries, perform UIM operation or copy phonebook from a microSD card.
You can still call the emergency numbers (110, 119 or 118). Locks to send i-mode mails or SMS by entering the address directly (you can use only the phonebook, Redial/Dialed calls records, the sent address list, the received calls record or the received address of the recorded party.).
You cannot add or edit phonebook entries, perform UIM operation or copy phonebook from a microSD card.
Addresses of all mails in the Draft mailbox and the mails with addresses only are deleted. S e c u r i t y S e t t i n g s Sending mail Locks the i-mode mail and SMS. Incoming/Mail disp. Incoming call Disp. recv. mail/msg. Rejects voice and videophone calls and packet communication (these are recorded as missed calls).
Once the lock is released, the Missed call shortcut icon appears. You can still receive MessageR/F, i-mode mail or SMS automatically, but the receiving screen or reception results screen does not appear. Also, there is no ring tone or other reaction when a call comes in and you are not notified of a received call.
You can still receive the Area Mail automatically and view the contents.
Once the lock is released, shortcut icons such as New mail appear.
* When the data to be locked are pasted as Shortcut icon on the standby screen, these shortcut icons are not displayed when the lock is set. 109 Operations during Keypad lock
appear on the screen while the Keypad lock is set. and
During Keypad lock, all the key operations are unavailable except for answering voice or videophone calls, turning on/off the FOMA terminal, the operation of IC card authentication function and a ( ) (check for missed call/new mail).
While in Keypad lock, the FOMA terminal receives MessageR/F, i-mode mail, SMS and Area mail, but viewing or reading out messages is not available.
You can still receive the Area Mail automatically and view the contents.
Even when Keypad lock is set, the Alarm, Schedule, To Do list, 1Seg booking program and 1Seg timer recording alarms are given.
If you can operate the FOMA terminal even when Keypad lock is set (e.g. when receiving a voice call or alarm notification is given), appears under the function display. N
Even when keypad lock is set, you can directly dial and make voice calls to emergency numbers (110, 119 and 118).
The lock may not be set during a call, data communication (such as i-mode) or playback of melody/i-motion/music, or when activating the camera, etc.
When After folded or Timer is set to ON then the power is turned off, Keypad lock automatically activates even if the FOMA terminal remains opened or the time has not reached the specified time. Releasing Keypad lock temporarily 1 Enter your security code on the screen when Keypad lock is setd To release the lock temporarily using the IC card authenticationp.111 S e c u r i t y S e t t i n g s Category list screen (p.107)/
Group list screen (p.107) SelectSelects all items in the highlighted item. ReleaseDeselects all selected items in the highlighted item. Select allSelects all items under the displayed item. Release allDeselects all selected items under the displayed item. Function list screen (p.107) Select allSelects all the displayed items. Release allDeselects all the displayed items. Locking the Key Operation Automatically
<Keypad lock>
You can lock the key operations automatically when the FOMA terminal is folded or no operation is performed for a certain period of time.
The center illumination lamp flashes in blue while in Keypad lock. Setting Keypad lock 1 iSETTINGSLock/Security Keypad lockEnter your security codeSelect any item:
After foldedSets whether to lock the keypad automatically when the FOMA terminal is folded
(ON/OFF). TimerSelects the setting from OFF/ON after 1 minute/ON after 5 minutes/ON after 15 minutes/ON after 30 minutes. For example, when set to ON after 5 minutes, the lock is set automatically after no operation is performed for 5 minutes. When set to OFF, timer is deactivated and no lock is set. 2 Set the respective itemso (Finish) 110 Using the IC Card Authentication
<IC card authentic.>
You can release Dial lock or Keypad lock or you can perform the user authentication without entering your security code on the screen which requires your security code entry only by placing the FOMA terminal on a FeliCa-compatible contactless IC card
(external IC card).
You can use the IC card authentication even when IC card lock is set.
You can store up to 2 contactless IC cards. Activating the IC card authentication You can store the contactless IC card to enable the user authentication. 1 iSETTINGSLock/Security IC card authentic.Enter your security code The IC card authentic. screen appears. 2 ONOK To activate the stored contactless IC card
ON To deactivate the IC card authentication
OFFYES or NO Select YES when you delete all the contactless IC card data, and select NO when you do not delete them. IC card authentic. Function menup.111 3 Place the contactless IC card on the FeliCa mark e on the FOMA terminal disappears when the card is stored. IC card authentic. screen
(p.111) New ext. IC cardStores up to 2 contactless IC cards. If 2 cards are already stored, delete the old data to store the card. Del. ext. IC cardDeletes the contactless IC card data. Using the IC Card Authentication
<Example: To release the Dial lock/Keypad lock>
1 Open the FOMA terminal when Dial appears on the screen and the user lock/Keypad lock is set authentication is enabled for about 10 seconds. Pressing p (iC auth.) on the standby screen also enables the user authentication. To release the lock with the FOMA terminal folded Pressing a ( ) (1 second or longer) enables the user authentication for about 10 seconds. 2 Place the contactless IC card on the FeliCa mark e on the FOMA terminal The lock is released when the user authentication is performed successfully. S e c u r i t y S e t t i n g s Contactless IC card Hold the contactless IC card and the FOMA terminal in your hand, and put e of the back cover close to the IC card.
* Put the IC card close to the FOMA terminal as illustrated The FOMA terminal may have difficulty in authentication depending on the IC card. In this case move the card horizontal or vertical. appears when the security code entry When entering your security code screen appears and the user authentication is enabled for about 10 seconds. If you place the contactless IC card stored with this function on the FeliCa mark on the FOMA terminal, the user authentication is performed. N
Even though the contactless card is compatible with FeliCa, this function may not be available depending on the card.
When using the IC card authentication, hold the contactless IC card and the FOMA terminal with your hands.
If you fail 5 times in sequence, the IC card authentication is deactivated and the authentication can be performed only with the security code. After the authentication with your security code is performed successfully, you can use the IC card authentication again. 111 S e c u r i t y S e t t i n g s Disabling the Side Key
<Side key guard>
You can disable the function of the side keys (a (
) and s ()) when the FOMA terminal is folded.
In the following situations, the side key is enabled regardless of this setting:
When the FOMA terminal is opened
When a flat-plug earphone/microphone with switch (optional), etc. is connected 1 iw (1 second or longer) The side key operations are disabled (ON) and appears. To enable the external keys when the FOMA terminal is folded
Repeat step 1 disappears. Preventing Unwanted Mail Display
<Mail box lock/Folder lock>
You can lock your Inbox, Outbox, Draft mailboxes or other folders so that their contents cannot be viewed by other people without your approval. Mail box or folders which is locked cannot be opened without entering a security code.
Once you enter your security code, it remains valid until the mail task is finished, and you can open mail folders without security code even if the lock is set.
For folders that are locked, icons such as or appear before the folder name on the folder list screen.
Icons such as appear next to the mail box which is locked. (Only when in Standard Menu, Simple Menu or Original theme)
When lock is set to mail box or folder, mail addresses for which lock is set are not recorded in the Sent address and Received address lists. Setting lock for individual mail boxes 1 uMail settingsMail box lock 2 Use c to select a checkbox ( ) Enter your security code About multiple-choicep.38 112 3 o (Finish) Setting lock for individual folders 1 Inbox/Outbox folder list screen
(pp.170, 171)Highlight the folder to be locked u (FUNC)Folder lock
Enter your security codeYES To release the setting
Repeat step 1 Restricting Incoming and Outgoing Calls for Specific Phone Numbers
<Restrictions>
You can restrict incoming and outgoing calls for each phone number stored in the Phonebook to prevent personal phone calls or nuisance calls.
You can specify restrictions for up to 20 phone numbers in each directory.
This setting is not available for the FOMA card
(UIM) phonebook.
This function is applied to only calls of which caller ID is notified. It is recommended to set Caller ID Request or Call setting w/o ID at the same time.
You cannot set Call rejection and Call acceptation to the same phone number, or Call forwarding and Voice mail to the same number.
If you set restrictions for the phone number and then edit or delete that phone number, the restrictions on the selected function are released
(however, when Restrict dialing is set, you cannot edit or delete the phonebook). Setting restrictions 1 Phonebook detail screen (p.73) u (FUNC)RestrictionsEnter your security codeSelect any item:
Restrict dialingRestricts outgoing calls to the phone numbers that are not specified. To make a call to the specified phone number, call the number from the phonebook. Call rejectionRestricts incoming calls from the specified phone number. Call acceptationRestricts incoming calls from the phone numbers that are not specified. Call ForwardingForwards incoming calls from the specified phone number regardless of the Call forwarding service setting (Activate/Deactivate). Voice MailTransfers incoming calls from the specified phone number to the Voice mail service center regardless of the Voice mail service setting
(Activate/Deactivate). appears next to the selected function. To release a selected function
Select the function with The function is released and the disappears. To set restrictions for multiple phone numbers
Press t twice to return to the phonebook list screenSelect the phonebook entry you wantRepeat step 1 Once you press y to return to the standby screen after setting Restrict dialing, you cannot continue to add restrictions. To add more numbers, release the Restrict dialing that have already been set for the phone number and then set the Restrictions again including the released phone number. When Restrict dialing is set
You cannot dial including the specified phone numbers using the Dialed calls and Received calls records. Also, you cannot call numbers other than the specified ones, add to, edit or delete phonebook, exchange data between the FOMA terminal (Phone) and the FOMA card (UIM), or operate phonebook by UIM operation.
The current records of Redial/Dialed calls and Sent address list are deleted after setting the Restrict dialing. However, you can dial or send mails using the records of Redial/Dialed calls or Sent address list that have been stored after setting. N
If you use 2in1, the restrictions on the selected function work differently depending on the combination of the current mode setting and Phonebook 2in1 setting as shown below.
In A mode, the specified phone number in the A or common setting phonebook is applied.
In B mode, the specified phone number in the B or common setting phonebook is applied.
In Dual mode, the specified phone number in all of the phonebooks is applied. However, as for Restrict dialing, you cannot call the phone numbers that are not specified regardless of the 2in1 mode setting.
<Restrict dialing>
You can still make calls to emergency numbers (110, 119 and 118) when the Restrict dialing is set. S e c u r i t y S e t t i n g s N
<Call rejection> <Call acceptation>
The FOMA terminal receives i-mode mail and SMS regardless of this function.
If you receive a call from a number that is specified on Call rejection or from a number that is not specified on Call acceptation, the number is recorded as Missed calls in the received calls records and the Missed call shortcut icon is displayed on the standby screen.
If you receive a call from a phone number for which Call rejection is set or from a phone number other than the number for which Call acceptation is set, the call is rejected even when the Voice Mail and Call Forwarding services are Activate. Note that if the FOMA terminal is turned off or or if the ringing time set for Voice Mail or Call Forwarding is 0 (zero) second, Voice Mail or Call Forwarding is enabled.
<Call Forwarding> <Voice Mail>
If you receive a call from the specified phone number, the FOMA terminal rings for about 1 second and the call is forwarded to the designated number or connected to the Voice mail service center, and the Missed call shortcut icon appears on the standby screen.
If no call forwarding number is designated or if you have not subscribed to the Call Forwarding or Voice Mail service, calls from the specified phone number are handled as missed calls. Checking the restriction settings 1 Phonebook list screen (p.73) u (FUNC)RestrictionsEnter your security code The Restrictions screen appears. Restrictions Function menup.113 Restrictions screen (p.113) Check settingsDisplays a list of the phonebook entries for which the function is set. Release settingsReleases the function and disappears. 113 S e c u r i t y S e t t i n g s Rejecting Calls from Unidentified Callers
<Call setting w/o ID>
Muting Ring Tones for Callers Not Stored in the Phonebook
<Ring time(sec.)>
You can accept or reject voice/videophone calls from callers who do not provide the caller ID depending on the reason for no caller ID. 1 iSETTINGSLock/Security Call setting w/o IDEnter your security codeSelect any item:
UnknownSpecifies whether to accept or reject calls from callers who are unable to provide the caller ID, such as calls from overseas or calls from ordinary phones sent via a call forwarding service. Some phone companies provide caller IDs. PayphoneSpecifies whether to accept or reject calls dialed from pay phones. User unsetSpecifies whether to accept or reject calls made by callers who withhold their caller IDs. 2 Accept or Reject When Accept is selected
Select ring tone or Select calling disp.
Select the ring tone from Same as ring tone/
Melody/i-motion/Music/Voice announce/
Random melody/OFF for Select ring tone
(when Same as ring tone is selected, the Phone setting of Select ring tone is used).
Select the calling display from Same as display/My picture/i-motion for Select calling disp. (when Same as display is selected, the Calling setting of Display setting is used). When Reject is selected The call is rejected and the other party hears the busy tone. N
The ring tone or calling display selected in this function is the setting for voice phone calls without caller ID. When you receive videophone calls without the caller ID, Videophone of Select ring tone or V.phone Calling of Display setting is used.
When you receive a call from a caller who is set to Reject, the call is rejected even when Voice Mail or Call Forwarding service is set to Activate. However, if the FOMA terminal is turned off or or if the ringing time set for Voice Mail or Call Forwarding is 0 (zero) second, Voice Mail or Call Forwarding is enabled.
The FOMA terminal receives i-mode mail and SMS regardless of this function. You can set the mute period for the ring tone for voice/
videophone calls from the phone number which is not stored in the FOMA terminal (Phone) phonebook or UIM phonebook (Set mute seconds). You can prevent accidentally dialing numbers, such as nuisance calls that only ring for a short period from Received calls record.
Set mute seconds also works when you receive a voice/videophone call without caller ID or when there is another incoming call during a voice/videophone call.
You cannot set Set mute seconds when Reject unknown is set to Reject. 1 iSETTINGSIncoming call Ring time(sec.)Select any item:
Set mute seconds ONEnters the time for which the ring tone is muted before starting up (01 to 99 seconds). OFFSets the time for which the ring tone is muted before starting up to 0 second. Missed calls displaySpecifies whether to record received calls for which no ring tone sounded to the missed calls record or the shortcut icon. N
When you receive a call from someone who is stored in the phonebook as a secret data, the FOMA terminal operates as specified in this function.
If the mute time is longer than the ringing time for the Record message function, the FOMA terminal switches directly to Record message without ringing first. To have the FOMA terminal ring before it records a message, make sure that the ringing time for Record message is longer than the mute time. The same applies to the ringing times for Voice Mail, Call Forwarding and Auto answer setting. Rejecting Calls from Callers Not Stored in the Phonebook
<Reject unknown>
You can specify whether to accept or reject calls from callers who are not stored in the phonebook of the FOMA terminal (Phone) or the FOMA card (UIM).
This function is applied to only calls of which caller ID is notified. It is recommended to set Caller ID Request or Call setting w/o ID at the same time. 114
You cannot set Reject unknown when Set mute
Data exchange via Infrared data exchange/iC seconds of Ring time(sec.) is set to ON. 1 iSETTINGSLock/Security Reject unknownEnter your security codeReject or Accept N
When you receive a call from someone who is stored in the phonebook as a secret data, the call is not rejected regardless of this setting.
When this function is set to Reject, the caller hears the busy tone even if you have activated Voice Mail or Call Forwarding. If the FOMA terminal is turned off or is displayed or if the ringing time set for Voice Mail or Call Forwarding is 0 (zero) second, the caller does not hear the busy tone and is connected to the Voice Mail service center or the forwarding number.
The FOMA terminal receives i-mode mail and SMS regardless of this function. Disabling Making/Receiving Calls, etc.
<Self mode>
You can set the FOMA terminal not to make or receive voice or videophone calls, use i-mode, or send or receive mails. This is useful when you want to use the FOMA terminal without worrying about interruptions such as incoming voice or videophone calls.
You can make voice calls to emergency numbers
(110, 119 and 118) even when Self mode is set. Note that making a voice call at an emergency number cancels Self mode. 1 iSETTINGSLock/Security appears. Self modeYES Self mode is set and To cancel Self mode
Repeat step 1 Self mode is canceled and When Self mode is set
Received voice or videophone calls are not disappears. recorded in the Received calls record and the Missed call shortcut icon also does not appear on the standby screen.
MessageR/F or i-mode mails sent to you are kept at the i-mode center and SMS are kept at the SMS center.
The caller of the voice or videophone call is notified with a guidance or message that the FOMA terminal is in out of signal range or is turned off. When you use the Voice Mail or Call Forwarding service, you can use the same service provided when the FOMA terminal is turned off. communication, packet communication or 64K data communication with a PC connected, user authentication by IC card authentication are also unavailable. However, you can read and write data on the IC card using data transfer via USB connection (OBEX connection) or Osaifu-Keitai i-ppli. Data Security Service
<Data Security Service>
The automatic update function allows you to back up the Phonebook and other data on your FOMA terminal at Data Center to be able to smoothly restore data if you lose your FOMA terminal or when changing models. Broadcast report is available to let others know that you changed your mail address. Packet communications charges do not apply to send mail. The service gives you even more convenience if you have a PC (My docomo).
* For details on how to use the Data Security Service, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide
[i-mode] FOMA version. S e c u r i t y S e t t i n g s How the service works Saving/Downloading phonebook entries, mails or images FOMA terminal Restoring data easily when lost, exposed to water or changing model Downloading data edited on a PC Data Security Center Internet PC, etc. Viewing or editing data kept at the Center
Data Security Service is a pay service you need subscription (you need to subscribe to i-mode service in advance). Continued on next page 115
Refer to the following pages for storing operations of Data Security Service:
Storing the Phonebook at the Data Security Centerp.79
Storing mails at the Data Security Center p.176
Storing images at the Data Security Center p.229 Purpose To reject SMS To reject advertisements Function/
Service name Spam Mail Prevention (SMS Rejection Settings)*
Spam Mail Prevention (Reject Unsolicited Ad Mail)*
Other Security Settings Apart from those explained in this chapter, there are functions/services relating to security settings as shown below. To restrict the size of received mail Limit Mail Size*
To check the status of the mail function settings To temporarily stop the mail function Confirm Settings*
Suspend Mail*
Purpose Function/
Service name To search for the rough location of your lost mobile phone Keitai-Osagashi Service*
* : Refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide [i-mode] FOMA version. N
Be careful when calling back to the numbers you do not know. In particular, sending your caller ID to the unknown party may cause unnecessary problems.
<Nuisance Call Blocking priority sequence>
Priority is assigned when nuisance call barring function is set at the same time:
Nuisance Call Blocking service Reject unknown or Ring time(sec.)/Call setting w/o ID/Call rejection S e c u r i t y S e t t i n g s To prevent others from using the IC card functions To avoid nuisance phone calls such as prank phone calls or unsolicited sales phone calls IC card lock setting p.206 Nuisance Call Blockingp.315 To reject calls that has no caller ID Caller ID Request To send data securely by using the user certificate service
* Only available on sites that support FirstPass To update the FOMA terminal software when necessary Protecting the FOMA Terminal from Harmful Data To accept only necessary mails when receiving i-mode mails To leave/hear the information about the safety using i-mode at the time of disaster To change your mail address To reject mails with URLs p.316 FirstPassp.150 Software Update p.377 Scanning function p.383 Receive option p.164 i-mode Disaster Message Board service*
Change Mail Address*
Spam Mail Prevention (Reject Mail with URL)*
To accept/reject mail from specified domain Spam Mail To accept/reject i-mode mail only To accept/reject mail from specified address To set the recommended settings of Spam Mail Prevention easily To reject i-mode mail from senders who have already sent 500 or more messages from the same i-mode mobile phone in the same day Prevention (Reject/
Receive Mail Settings)*
Spam Mail Prevention
(Simple mail setting))*
Spam Mail Prevention (Reject Mass i-mode Mail Senders)*
116 Camera Before Using the Camera ............................................................................................... 118 123 Shooting Still Images .................................................................................... 126 Shooting Movies ........................................................................................... 128 Capturing Important Scenes.................................................................... Using Voice Mode .......................................................................................... 128 Changing the Shooting Settings ..................................................................................... 128 129 Using the Bar Code Reader..................................................................... Scanning Text ................................................................................................. 131 Photo mode Movie mode Chance capture Voice mode Bar code reader Text reader Copyright/Portrait Right Take care not to infringe on the copyrights when you duplicate or edit the images you shot or recorded using the FOMA terminal. Also take care not to infringe on the portrait rights by using or altering another persons portrait without his or her permission. It may be prohibited to shoot or record the stage performance, entertainment or exhibition even if you only want to enjoy it personally. Please be considerate of the privacy of individuals around you when taking and sending photos using camera-equipped mobile phones. 117 Before Using the Camera When using the camera You can use the FOMA terminals built-in camera to shoot photos (still images) and movies.
You cannot activate the camera function or shoot images when the FOMA terminal is folded. Using the camera To set to camera mode There are 3 methods:
Select the shortcut icon (
Press p (1 second or longer) on the standby
) on the standby screen screen. Select Camera from LIFEKIT of the main menu or Simple Menu.
When there is no key operation for more than about 3 minutes, the camera mode ends automatically. N
To paste the shortcut icon again after deleting it, select Camera in step s main menu above and press u (FUNC) to select Add shortcut. C a m e r a Lens selector switch
To take a close-up image, set to the close-up mode by moving the lens selector switch to lens). When set to the close-up mode, the camera is focused on an object approx. 6 to 8 cm away from the camera.
(macro
To use Bar code reader or Text reader, set to the close-up mode by moving the lens selector switch to
(macro lens).
When you move the lens selector switch, move the switch to the (standard lens) position or the
(macro lens) position. Do not leave the switch in the middle of these positions. Lens selector switch Using the standard lens Slide to the position Using the macro lens Slide to the position Notes on shooting
The camera of the FOMA terminal is made with the extremely high-precision technology. However, it may include lines or spots that look dark or bright. Noises such as white lines may also appear on the photographed images particularly when shooting in very poorly lit locations.
Before shooting, wipe the lens clean with a soft cloth. Fingerprints or grease spots on the lens could prevent the camera from focusing properly and cause blurred images.
Take care not to press the lens with excessive force when folding the FOMA terminal. This may cause malfunction.
Image quality may be adversely affected if the FOMA terminal is left in a hot location for a long period of time.
The color tones and brightness levels in still images and movies shot may differ from those of the actual object.
Do not leave the camera under the direct sunlight for a long period of time or shoot the sun or a powerful lamp directly. This could lead to the discoloration of the photographed images or cause the camera to malfunction.
Take care that your fingers, hair, or the strap do not cover the lens when you shoot images.
The shooting uses a large amount of the battery. It is recommended to turn off the camera immediately after you finish shooting. The screen may look dark or blurred if you shoot images when the battery is low.
You cannot change or delete the volume of the shutter sound and Auto timer tone. Also, you cannot set the downloaded melody as the shutter sound.
When shooting a still image, keep the FOMA terminal steady until it emits the shutter sound and finishes loading the shot image.
When you take pictures indoors, flickering may appear due to the effect of fluorescent lighting, etc. In such a case, changing the Flicker setting to the electric wave frequency in the use region additionally may suppress flickering.
After you display the shooting screen, switch the camera modes or change the camera settings, it may take time for the brightness or color tone to become its best. 118 Flashing of illumination when shooting
The center illumination lamp lights up or flashes as follows:
Shooting screen activated: Flashes in red
Shooting still images, M-continuous mode: Lights in red (about 3 seconds)
A-continuous mode: Lights in red (when shooting)
Shooting movies, recording in Voice mode:
Flashes in red
Auto timer activated: Flashes in bluep.128 Saving the still images, movies, etc. you shot
The images, movies, etc. are saved in the folder specified in Select to save.
You can save the still images, movies, etc. you shot automatically when Auto save set is set to ON.
If the battery is low, you may not be able to save the still images, movies, etc. you shot.
The shooting is not interrupted in the following cases:
When you receive mails or MessageR/F when using the camera (including the case that the shooting screen appears), the reception result screen does not appear and the shooting mode continues regardless of the Receiving setting.
When Alarm setting is set to Operation preferred, you can continue the shooting, make settings or operate the Auto timer without interruption even when the alarm specified time is reached. When using the microSD card
When saving the data on the microSD card, flashes. Do not remove the microSD card during this period. This may cause a malfunction to the FOMA terminal or microSD card.
When microSD is selected in Select to save and there is no folder in the microSD card, a folder is created automatically.
If the FOMA terminal is turned off or the battery pack is removed while saving the files, incomplete files may be saved.
If the number of files in the microSD folder selected in Select to save has reached the maximum, you cannot set to the folder. When the shooting is interrupted
The shooting is interrupted when you receive a voice/videophone or 64K data communication, or alarm notification (1Seg booking program, 1Seg timer recording, Alarm, Schedule or To Do list), or operate other functions.
When shooting images continuously or shooting movies, the shooting is interrupted and respective screens appear. When you exit from these screens, the camera screen reappears so that you can save the data you shot before receiving calls or alarm notification.
When adjusting the zoom or brightness of the camera, the adjusting setting is set and the screen returns to the camera menu.
The Auto timer is canceled. Image size and maximum number of images/shooting time The following Table 1 to 3 (pp.119, 120) shows the image sizes, number of still images and movie shooting time supported by FOMA SO706i.
[Table 1] The image sizes and shooting mode Movie mode Photo mode Continuous Image size mode 2M (1,200 1,600) 1M (960 1,280) VGA (640 480) CIF (352 288) Screen (240 427) QVGA V. (240 320) QVGA (320 240) QCIF (176 144) SubQCIF (128 96)
[Table 2] The approximate number of still images that can be saved by destination to save Quality 2M 1M VGA CIF Screen QVGA V. QCIF SubQCIF C a m e r a 341 140 700 Destination: FOMA SO706i (Phone) 116 Super Fine 140 Fine Normal 229 Destination: microSD (64M bytes) 99 Super Fine Fine 118 189 Normal
The number of images that can be saved varies depending on the shooting environment, etc. 118 542 948 948 1,265 1,000 1,000 291 542 948 700 1,000 1,897 1,897 3,795 Continued on next page 119
[Table 3] The approximate shooting time that can be saved by destination to save Available shooting time for a single movie Available total shooting time Quality setting Fine mode Normal Super Fine Long dur. mode mode Quality setting Fine mode Normal Super Fine mode Image Size File size Movie type set Long dur. mode Destination: FOMA SO706i (Phone) 82s QVGA 88s 2MB Normal Video Voice QCIF 500KB Normal Sub QCIF 2MB Video Voice Normal Video Voice 500KB Normal 2MB Video Voice Normal Video Voice 104s 128s 428s 524s 176s 256s 12min. 17min. Destination: microSD (64M bytes) 82s QVGA 88s 2MB C a m e r a 8s 8s 16s 16s 63s 66s 20s 22s 82s 88s 8s 8s 34s 35s 53s 64s 219s 262s 67s 86s 276s 350s 34s 35s 21min. 316s 21min. 316s 21min. 21min. 16s 17s 20s 22s 82s 88s 29s 32s 119s 131s 16s 17s 327s 331s 47min. 50min. 19min. 20min. 9min. 10min. 280s 280s 735min. 247min. 125min. 303min. 151min. 47min. 52min. 38min. 38min. 750min. 249min. 127min. 305min. 152min. 47min. 51min. 37min. 39min. 735min. 418min. 608min. 159min. 204min. 68min. 75min. 47min. 52min. 750min. 420min. 161min. 595min. 204min. 69min. 76min. 47min. 51min. 735min. 43min. 46min. 18min. 18min. 512s 544s 672min. 164s 165s 27min. 28min. 11min. 11min. 327s 331s 672min. 256s 256s 164s 165s 16s 16s 63s 66s 227min. 115min. 279min. 139min. 43min. 48min. 34min. 34min. 689min. 228min. 116min. 279min. 139min. 43min. 46min. 33min. 35min. 672min. Long time 27min. 28min. 11min. 11min. 104s 128s 428s 524s 120min. 53s 64s 219s 262s 316s 21min. 20s 22s 82s 88s Normal Video Voice Normal Video Voice QCIF 500KB Normal Sub QCIF 2MB Long time Video Voice Normal Video Voice Normal Video Voice 500KB Normal 2MB Long time Video Voice Normal Video Voice Normal Video Voice 120min. 120min. 71min. 86min. 27min. 28min. 20min. 21min. 228min. 279min. 71min. 86min. 27min. 28min. 20min. 21min. 176s 256s 12min. 17min. 120min. 67s 86s 276s 350s 29s 32s 119s 131s 316s 21min. 20s 22s 82s 88s 672min. 384min. 558min. 146min. 187min. 63min. 69min. 43min. 48min. 689min. 384min. 147min. 544min. 186min. 63min. 69min. 43min. 46min. 672min. 120min. 120min. 90min. 115min. 39min. 43min. 27min. 28min. 90min. 384min. 544min. 115min. 39min. 43min. 27min. 28min. 120min. 672min.
Available recording times if deletable pre-installed data are deleted.
The time is the approximate time that can be shot with the file size.
The available shooting time varies depending on the shooting environment, etc. 120 Key operation for camera mode 3 1 2 4 5 d: Shutter j: Zoom in h: Zoom out 1 to 6: Displays the following shooting menu respectively 1: CHG camera-mode 2: Select size 3: Quality setting or File size setting 4: Photo mode 5: Brightness 6: White balance
Some menus are not displayed depending on the camera mode. 0: Displays the explanation of keys Guide to the shooting screen The shooting screens display the icons of the Camera settings. Each icon means as follows:
Photo mode shooting Movie mode standby 1 2 3 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 Movie mode shooting 8 4 5 8 9 Remaining storage count/Memory info*1 The number of images that can be saved
White: 11 or more
Yellow: 10 or less
Red: No memory available The available capacity that can be saved against the total capacity
Blue: 500K bytes or more remaining
Yellow: Less than 500K bytes remaining
Red: No memory available*2
*1: The displayed count and the capacity are only an approximate figure. This icon does not appear when the destination to save is set to microSD and no microSD card is inserted.
*2: Shooting is available except when shooting movies with File size set to Long time. The shot is saved or overwrites the data in the FOMA terminal (Phone)/
microSD card after shooting. Select to save (pp.123, 127) The destination set to save (FOMA terminal (Phone)/microSD card) Shooting menu (p.122) The settings of the shooting menu Auto timer (p.128) The Auto timer is set Zoom (p.128) C a m e r a to to The zoom settings Movie type set (p.127) Normal (video and voice) Video only Voice only Quality setting (p.127) Long dur. mode Normal Fine mode Super Fine mode Shooting status The movie is being shot The movie shooting is in standby mode Shooting time Remaining time (hour:
minutes: seconds) 121 Selecting the shooting menu When you display the shooting menu on the screen, you can set various settings only by selecting icons. Shooting screen Description of the displayed menu and highlighted icon Icons and settings of the shooting menu
The selectable items are different depending on the camera mode.
Some menus are unavailable depending on the shooting condition (when using the camera from other function such as mail function, etc.) o C a m e r a When you press one of 1 to 6 keys, respective menus are displayed directly.
* In this chapter, operations are described in this way. v c CHG camera-mode Movie modep.126 Chance capturep.128 Photo modep.123 A-Continuous modep.124 M-Continuous modep.124 Voice modep.128 Select size Photo mode
(Default: Screen) to 2M (1,200 1,600) to SubQCIF
(128 96) Movie mode (Default: QCIF) to QVGA (320 240) to SubQCIF
(128 96) Quality setting/File size setting Photo mode (Quality setting)
(Default: Super Fine) Super FineSuper Fine mode (File size:
Press d (Select) and set to the function of the highlighted icon. large) FineFine mode (File size: medium) NormalNormal mode (File size: small) Movie mode (File size setting)
(Default: 2MB) 500KBUp to 500K bytes 2MBUp to 2M bytes Long timeLong time (microSD only) Photo mode Photo mode (Default: Auto) Movie mode (Default: Portrait) AutoAutomatic shooting mode PortraitSuitable for shooting portraits Scenery Suitable for shooting scenery
(including night view) Close-upSuitable for close-up shooting Sports mode Suitable for shooting moving objects Night mode Suitable for shooting portraits, etc. in the dark 122 OFFTurns off the shooting effects.
* Only Portrait, Scenery or Close-up can be set for Movie mode. Brightness (When the camera launched: 0)
/ Brightness of the image (+2/
+1/0/-1/-2) White balance (Default: Auto) In Photo mode, this can be set only when Photo mode is set to OFF. AutoCompensates the tone automatically Fine Suitable for shooting outside on a sunny day CloudySuitable for shooting outside on a cloudy day or in the shade Light bulb Suitable for shooting under the incandescence Fluorescent lamp Suitable for shooting under the fluorescence Shooting Still Images
<Photo mode>
1 On the standby screendSelect The Photo mode shooting screen appears. Photo mode shooting Function menup.123 2 Point the camera at the object d (Record) The Photo mode checking screen appears. To retake the shot
tYES 3 d (Save) Photo mode checking Function menup.124 N
Depending on image size, image quality may be degraded. Photo mode shooting screen
(p.123)/Continuous mode screen (p.124) CHG camera-modeChanges the camera mode. Select sizeQuality settingSets the same setting as the shooting menu (p.122). Interval/Number*2Sets the shooting interval and the number of images you want to take on the continuous mode.p.125 Camera Settings Photo modeSets the same setting as the shooting menu (p.122). BrightnessAdjusts the brightness for shooting in 5 steps -20+2 using v. The brightness is automatically specified if you do not press any key for 2 seconds. 0 is the default setting when you launch the camera. White balanceSets the same settings as the shooting menu (p.123). Color mode setSelects the effect for the photographed image from Normal/Sepia/
Monochrome. FlickerAvoids the flicker on the shooting screen. Selects from Auto/Mode 1(50Hz)/Mode 2(60Hz). C a m e r a Shutter sound (default: Sound 1)Sets the shutter sound. Auto timerSets the auto timer.p.128 Select frame*2Sets the frames for images.p.126 Auto save setSpecifies whether to save a shot image to the folder selected in Select to save automatically or not (ON/OFF). Select to save (default: Camera of Phone)Sets the folder to save the shot image. File restriction (default: File unrestricted)Specifies whether to allow the redistribution of the shot image. p.228 Memory infoDisplays the amount of stored images. HelpDisplays the guide for shooting.
*1: This function is available only for the Continuous mode screen.
*2: This function is available only for the Photo mode screen. N
<Shutter sound>
When Manner mode is set (VM tone set to OFF), the FOMA terminal does not play the shutter sound for checking. Continued on next page 123 C a m e r a N
<Memory info>
The displayed file size is only an approximation. Photo mode checking screen
(p.123) SaveSaves the images to the folder specified in Select to save. Mirror saveInverts the left and right of the displayed image and saves the image to the folder specified in the Select to save setting. Compose message*p.126 You can also compose an i-mode mail or Deco-mail by pressing o (MAIL) on the Photo mode checking screen. Edit imageAdds a frame or effect to the image. Editing Imagesp.231 Set as displaySets the still image to the standby screen, etc. Changing the Displayp.88 Setting an image to sendp.67 Change frameShooting framed imagesp.126 Mirror displayNormal displaySelects the checking screen display from normal display or mirrored display. Select to save (default: Camera of Phone)Sets the folder to save the shot image. File restriction (default: File unrestricted)Specifies whether to allow the redistribution of the shot image. p.228 CancelDeletes the photographed image and returns to the photo mode shooting screen.
* : Not available when 2in1 is in B mode. N
<Edit image>
Selecting Edit image changes the display to the Normal display.
You cannot edit the image larger than 1M (960 1,280).
<Set as display>
You cannot set the image larger than 1M (960 1,280). If the file size exceeds 100K bytes, the image cannot be set other than stand-by screen and wake-up display.
The still images to be set to the standby screen are saved to the folder set in Select to save. However, when set to microSD, the images are saved to the Camera folder under My pictures of the FOMA terminal (Phone) (the images is not saved on the microSD card). 124 Shooting continuously <Continuous mode>
You can shoot up to 20 still images continuously. There are two types of continuous mode: A-Continuous mode (Auto) and M-Continuous mode (Manual).
A-Continuous mode is the function that automatically shoots images of specified numbers at the set interval once you release the shutter.
M-Continuous mode enables you to shoot images for the set number, releasing the shutter for one by one.
You can enjoy the continuously shot images as an animation after putting them into the Original animation.
Folding the FOMA terminal terminates the continuous mode. 1 Photo mode shooting screen (p.123) or 1 The Continuous mode screen appears. Shot number/
Max. shot count Continuous mode
(Ex. manual) Function menup.123 2 Point the camera at the object d (Cont./Record) To stop the continuous mode A-Continuous mode:
yNO M-Continuous mode:
t The shooting is finished and the Continuous mode checking screen appears. To check the images in detail
Use b to move the frame to the image you want to checko (Detail) Use v to change the image to check. To save only 1 still image displayed in detail
d (Save) Continuous mode checking Function menup.125 Continuous mode detail checking Function menup.125 3 p (
) (1 second or longer) Save or Mirror save The image is saved to the folder specified in Select to save. To store selection
Select images you want to savep (
Save or Mirror save About multiple-choicep.38 To store Original animation
u (FUNC)Store all&animeSave or Mirror save
) N
If you shoot strong light or moving object in A-Continuous mode, the interval may become longer than the specified one. Setting the shooting interval and number of images 1 Continuous mode screen (p.124) u (FUNC)Interval/NumberSelect any item:
Shot interval (default: 0.5 seconds)Selects the interval for shooting images from 0.5 seconds/1.0 seconds/2.0 seconds. Cannot be set for M-Continuous mode. Shot number (default: 5)Sets the number of images (05 to 20 images in 2 digits). The maximum number of images varies by the image size. When the image size is CIF (352 288), the number of shots is automatically set to 4. When the image size is Screen (240 427) or QVGA V.
(240 320), the number of shots is set to about 5 to 10. 2 After setting is finished, press t t The continuous mode screen reappears. Continuous mode checking screen (p.124)
). Store selectionSaves the still image marked with a checkbox (
Store allSaves all the still images in normal or mirror display. Store all&animeSaves all the still images you shot in normal or mirror display, and stores as the Original animation. Select thisSelects the still image indicated by the frame and marks the checkbox of the image (
). C a m e r a
). Select allSelects all the still images you shot and marks the checkboxes of the images (
Release thisReleases the still image indicated by the frame and releases the checkbox of the image (
Release allReleases all the still images and releases the checkboxes of the images (
Mirror displayNormal displaySelects the checking screen display from Mirror display or Normal display. Select to save (default: Camera of Phone)Sets the folder to save the shot image. File restriction (default: File unrestricted)Specifies whether to allow the redistribution of the image with
. p.228 Restriction all (default: File unrestricted)Specifies whether to allow the redistribution of all the shot image. p.228 CancelDeletes all the photographed images and returns to the continuous mode screen. N
<Store all&anime>
When Select to save is set to microSD, the images are saved to the Camera folder under My pictures of the FOMA terminal (Phone) (the images is not saved on the microSD card). Continuous mode detail checking screen (p.124) SaveSaves the images to the folder specified in Select to save. Mirror saveInverts the left and right of the displayed image and saves the image to the folder specified in the Select to save setting. Compose message*p.126 You can also compose an i-mode mail or Deco-mail by pressing o (MAIL) on the Continuous mode detail checking screen. Mirror displayNormal displaySelects the checking screen display from normal display or mirrored display. File restriction (default: File unrestricted)Specifies whether to allow the redistribution of the shot image.p.228
* : Not available when 2in1 is in B mode. 125 Shooting framed images
<Framed photography>
N
Not available when 2in1 is in B mode. C a m e r a The image sizes supported by FOMA SO706i is under VGA (640 480).
You can use the downloaded frames in addition to the pre-installed ones. 1 Photo mode shooting screen (p.123) u (FUNC)Select frameSelect a frame To cancel the framed image
OFF 2 Point the camera at the object d (Record) The Frame shooting check screen appears. To change the frame before saving
u (FUNC)Change frame 3 d (Save) Composing an i-mode mail message or Deco-mail message using the still image You can compose an i-mode mail message with the still image you shot attached or insert the still image into the Deco-mail message body. 1 Photo mode checking screen (p.123)
o (MAIL) Select any item:
Attach image*1 Attach mailAttaches the image without changing the image size. QVGA scale downAttaches the image by changing the image and file size without changing the aspect ratio. Insert image*2 Insert mail*3Inserts the image without changing the image size. SubQCIF scale downInserts the image by changing the image and file size without changing the aspect ratio.
*1: When the image is shot with the image size smaller than QVGA V. (240 320), the selection screen of Attach mail/QVGA scale down does not appear.
*2: When the image is shot with the image size of SubQCIF (128 96), the selection screen of Insert mail/SubQCIF scale down does not appear.
*3: Cannot be selected when the image size is other than QCIF (176 144). 2 Compose the message Composing and sending i-mode mailp.156 Composing and sending Deco-mailp.158 126 Shooting Movies
<Movie mode>
When File size is set to Long time, the shooting ends after saving the shot movie on the microSD card.
The shooting time varies by the conditions.
You cannot shoot a movie while you are talking on the phone.
Folding the FOMA terminal terminates the movie shooting. 1 Photo mode shooting screen (p.123) 1 The Movie mode shooting screen appears. Movie mode shooting Function menup.127 2 Point the camera at the object d (Record) The shooting starts. You can zoom in/out during the shooting. If the file size reaches Movie mode shooting screen the limit specified in File size
OK The movie mode checking screen appears. 3 d (Stop) The shooting terminates and the Movie mode checking screen appears. To play the movie you shot
p (Play) To retake the shot
tYES 4 d (Save) Movie mode checking Function menup.127 N
If you perform a key operation such as zoom in/out during the shooting, the operation sound may be recorded. Movie mode shooting screen
(p.126) Front cameraRear cameraSwitches between front camera and rear camera. CHG camera-modeChanges the camera mode. Select sizeFile sizeSets the same setting as the shooting menu (p.122). Quality setting (default: Normal)Selects the quality and duration for shooting movies from Long dur. mode/
Normal/Fine mode/Super Fine mode. When set to Long dur. mode, the shooting time becomes the longest but the image quality becomes the lowest. Contrary, when set to Super Fine mode, the image quality becomes the highest but the shooting time becomes the shortest. Camera Settings Photo mode*Sets the same setting as the shooting menu (p.122). BrightnessAdjusts the brightness for shooting in 5 steps -20+2 using v. The brightness is automatically specified if you do not press any key for 2 seconds. 0 is the default setting when you launch the camera. White balanceSets the same settings as the shooting menu (p.123). Color mode setSelects the effect for the photographed image from Normal/Sepia/Monochrome. Flicker*Avoids the flicker on the shooting screen. Selects from Auto/Mode 1(50Hz)/Mode 2(60Hz). Shutter sound (default: Sound 1)Sets the shutter sound. Auto timerSets the auto timer.p.128 Movie type set Normal (when the camera is launched)Records video and voice. VideoShoots a movie without any voice. VoiceRecords voice without movies. Auto save setSpecifies whether to save a shot movie to the folder selected in Select to save automatically or not (ON/OFF). Select to save (default: Camera of Phone)Sets the folder to save the shot movie or movie with voice only. When saving the movie on the microSD card, movie with video is saved in SD Video folder and movie with voice only is saved in Multi media folder. File restriction (default: File unrestricted)Specifies whether to allow the redistribution of the shot movie.p.228 Memory infoDisplays the amount of stored data for movies. HelpDisplays the guide for shooting.
* : Cannot be operated/set for the front camera. N
<Photo mode>
The Photo mode is fixed to the Portrait for the front camera.
<Shutter sound>
When Manner mode is set (VM tone set to OFF), the FOMA terminal does not play the shutter sound for checking.
You cannot set the downloaded melody as the shutter sound. In addition, you cannot change the volume of the shutter sound.
<Memory info>
The displayed file size is only an approximation. Movie mode checking screen
(p.126) C a m e r a PlayPlays the movie you shot. SaveSaves the movie to the folder specified in Select to save. Compose message*Composes an i-mode mail with the shot movie attached.p.156 You can compose an i-mode mail with the shot movie attached by pressing o (MAIL) on the movie mode checking screen. Set as stand-bySets the shot movie to the standby screen. Edit titleEdits the movie title. You can enter up to 9 double-byte or 18 single-byte characters. Select to save (default: Camera of Phone)Sets the folder to save the shot movie or movie with voice only. When saving the movie on the microSD card, movie with video is saved in SD Video folder and movie with voice only is saved in Multi media folder. File restriction (default: File unrestricted)Specifies whether to allow the redistribution of the shot movie.p.228 CancelDeletes the movie and returns to the movie mode screen.
* : Not available when 2in1 is in B mode. N
<Set as stand-by>
The movie to set to the standby screen is saved to the folder set in Select to save. However, when set to microSD, the movie is saved to the Camera folder under i-motion of the FOMA terminal (Phone). 127 Capturing Important Scenes
<Chance capture>
Changing the Shooting Settings Even if the available shooting time is reached when shooting a movie, you can continue the shooting until the scene you want to shoot comes.
The movie you shot is saved for the available shooting time (the default is 3 minutes 38 seconds) from the end of the movie with the starting point reset to fit that time. The movie shot before that time is not saved. 1 1 Photo mode shooting screen (p.123) 2 Point the camera at the object d (Record) The shooting starts. You can zoom in/out during the shooting. After the available shooting time is reached, the remaining time display flashes. The shooting is finished. 3 d (Stop) 4 d (Save) Using Voice Mode
<Voice mode>
You can record your voice without movies. C a m e r a 1 Photo mode shooting screen (p.123) 1 The Recording start screen appears. Function menu of the movie mode screen p.127 The recording starts. 2 d (Record) 3 d (Stop) The recording finished. The Recording check screen appears. Function menu of the movie mode checking screenp.127 You can change the camera settings such as the zoom or Auto timer. Using the zoom Using the zoom enables you to adjust the image being shot to your desired size.
The zoom is digital. 1 Each shooting screenUse v to adjust the zoom The image is zoomed in/out by one step each time you press v, and hold down it to zoom in/
out continuously. N
1 is the default setting when you launch the camera. Changing the image size or camera mode also changes the zoom to 1. Maximum zoom rate (16 steps) for each image size Image size 2M/1M VGA CIF Screen QVGA V. QVGA QCIF SubQCIF Photo mode Movie mode Approx. 1.8 Approx. 1.7 Approx. 1.8 Approx. 2.4 Approx. 3.3 Approx. 4.6 Approx. 1.8 Approx. 3.3 Approx. 4.6 Using the auto timer
The Auto timer is reset to OFF each time you finish shooting. 1 Each shooting screenu (FUNC) Auto timerONEnter the time for the Auto timer (01 to 15 seconds in 2 digits) 10 seconds is the default setting. 4 d (Save) 128 appears on the screen to indicate that the Auto If you set the Auto timer timer is set. Pressing d (Record) plays the Auto timer tone and the Auto timer starts. The center illumination lamp flashes in blue and on the screen also flashes. The countdown tone sounds about 5 seconds before the shooting. The illumination flashes rapidly. To cancel the Auto timer settings
u (FUNC)Auto timerOFF To stop the timer while it is running
o (Quit) or t N
During the Auto timer countdown, you can shoot manually by pressing d (Record).
The Auto timer cannot be used in M-Continuous mode. Using the Bar Code Reader
<Bar code reader>
The FOMA terminal can scan JAN codes and QR codes using the camera. The scanned data can be used for displaying/copying the text, using the functions of Phone To/AV Phone To, Mail To, Web To, i-ppli To, or adding to bookmark/phonebook especially in QR code. The FOMA terminal can also scan the image, melody or ToruCa data to play or save.
The FOMA terminal can save up to 5 scanned bar codes.
Hold the FOMA terminal firmly to ensure that it does not shake during the scanning.
When scanning bar codes, use the rear camera and hold the FOMA terminal about 6 to 8 cm away from the scanned code. JAN codes and QR codes
JAN code A bar code consisting of vertical lines (bars) of various widths and spaces to represent numbers. The FOMA terminal can scan 8-digit
(JAN8) and 13-digit (JAN13) bar codes.
* When the FOMA terminal scans the JAN code on the right above, it is displayed as 4942857113068.
QR code A type of two-dimensional codes consisting of the horizontal and vertical patterns to represent numbers, alphabets, kanji, kana or pictographs. Some QR codes express images or melodies. Some data are divided into several QR codes.
* When the FOMA terminal scans the QR code on the right above, it is displayed as NTT
(NTT DOCOMO, Inc.). C a m e r a Scanning codes
Before scanning, set to the close-up mode by
(macro moving the lens selector switch to lens).p.118 1 iLIFEKITBar code reader 2 Position the JAN code or QR code Scanning inside the recognition field The scanning starts automatically. The recognition field is expressed using ,, , at the corners of the screen. Focus the JAN code or QR code so that the entire code is displayed as big as possible inside the recognition field. Finishing the scan plays the completion sound. It may take time to scan the data. To cancel the scanning
d (Quit) OK To adjust the zoom j: Zooms in. h: Returns to default. To scan the data consisting of several QR Function menup.130 codes
OKd (Read) Position the QR code inside the recognition field The FOMA terminal can scan up to 16 QR codes expressing one data. 3 Check the scanned data To discard the scanned data
tYES 4 u (FUNC) StoreYESOK The scanned data is saved. N
The FOMA terminal cannot scan a code if it is not a JAN code or QR code. You may be unable to scan some bar code, depending on the size.
The FOMA terminal may fail to scan the code, depending on the scratch, stain, damage, print quality, the reflection of light or the QR code version.
You can also run the Bar code reader from the text editing screen. The scanned data is entered in the screen.
Some scanned images cannot be saved depending on the image size or file size. Continued on next page 129 N
You cannot save the scanned data to the microSD card. 2 Select the scanned data The Reading data detail screen appears. Scanning screen (p.129) Reading data listUsing the scanned datap.130 Add shortcutp.94 Using the scanned data
You can use the following scanned data:
Item Add to phonebook Compose message C a m e r a Description Stores the name, reading, phone number, mail address, birthday, postal code, address and memo to the phonebookp.70 Composes an i-mode mail with the recipient address, subject and message enteredp.156 Stores the URL and title to the Bookmark p.142 Runs the specified i-pplip.187 Add bookmark Activate i-ppli Melody icon Plays the melodyp.240 Phone number ToruCa Icon Mail address URL Image Web To functionp.147 Save imagep.144 Mail To functionp.147 Phone To/AV Phone To function p.147 Displays the ToruCap.204 1 Scanning screen (p.129)u (FUNC)
Reading data list The Reading data list screen appears. Reading data list Function menup.130 130 c Reading data detail Function menup.130 3 Select any of the displayed items N
If the data you want to scan contains characters that cannot be read by the Bar code reader, those characters are converted to spaces (blanks).
The title of the scanned data will be:
Title: yyyymmdd_hhmm_xxxx (Year/month/
day_time_4-digit number) If the same date and time are set for more than once, the 4-digit numbers are assigned to the data in numerical order. Reading data list screen
(p.130) Edit titleEdits the title of the data. You can enter up to 9 double-byte or 18 single-byte characters. ResultDisplays the Bar code reader reading data detail screen. Delete thisDelete allDeletes one or all scanned data. Reading data detail screen
(p.130) StoreSaves the reading data. Display listDisplays the Reading data list screen. If the displayed data is not stored yet, a message appears asking whether to delete the data. InternetAccesses the site when the URL is highlighted. Web To functionp.147 Compose message*Composes an i-mode mail with the reading data entered when Compose message is highlighted. When the mail address is highlighted, an i-mode mail with the address entered is composed. DialingCalls the phone number when it is highlighted. Phone To/AV Phone To functionp.147 Add to phonebookStores the scanned data to the phonebook when Add to phonebook is highlighted.p.70 When a phone number is highlighted, it is stored to the phonebook. When a mail address is highlighted, it is stored to the phonebook. Add bookmarkStores the reading data to Bookmark when Add bookmark is highlighted.p.142 When a URL is highlighted, it is stored to Bookmark. Save imageStores the image data to My picture of the Data box. If you do not set the image to the standby screen, select NO after selecting the folder. Save melodyStores the melody data to Melody of the Data box. If you do not set the melody to the ring tone, select NO after selecting the folder. Save ToruCaStores the ToruCa to the ToruCa folder. Start i-ppliRuns the i-ppli specified in the scanned data when Start i-ppli is highlighted. CopyCopies the text included in the scanned data. p.308
* : Not available when 2in1 is in B mode. N
<Internet> <Add bookmark>
You cannot use the Web To function or add a bookmark if there are unusable characters in the URL.
<Compose message>
The address cannot be entered if it includes characters that cannot be entered.
<Dialing>
As the image settings for videophone are not retained after the dialing or talking is finished, set this item each time you make a call. Scanning Text
<Text reader>
Using the camera, the FOMA terminal can scan printed text then add the scanned text data as a phonebook entry or bookmark, or use the data to compose a mail. You can also make a call or access website using the data.
The FOMA terminal can save up to 8 scanned bar codes.
Hold the FOMA terminal firmly to ensure that it does not shake during the scanning.
When scanning text, hold the camera about 6 to 8 cm away from the text.
The FOMA terminal can scan vertically written Japanese text. Scanning mode The following are the scan modes. Select the mode suitable for the data to scan:
Item Card read Compose message URL Mail address Phone number Free memo Description Scans the name, phone number, mail address, postal code, address and memo printed on the business card to add to the phonebook. Composes an i-mode message with the scanned recipient address, subject and message entered. Scans URL, and accesses the site or adds the URL to bookmark. Scans the mail address and composes an i-mode message. Scans the phone number and makes a call. Scans Japanese or English text to save to Text memo. The number of characters that can be scanned The following table shows the maximum number of characters that can be scanned for each item:
C a m e r a Card read Item Name Phone number Mail address Postal code Address Memo Compose message Receiver Subject Message URL Mail address Phone number Free memo Maximum number of characters that can be scanned 16 in double-byte, 32 in single-
byte 26 in single-byte numbers including #, , +, p (pause),
50 in single-byte alphabets, numbers and symbols 7 in single-byte 50 in double-byte, 100 in single-
byte 100 in double-byte, 200 in single-byte 50 in single-byte alphabets, numbers and symbols 100 in double-byte, 200 in single-byte 128 in double-byte, 256 in single-byte 256 in single-byte alphabets, numbers and symbols 256 in single-byte alphabets, numbers and symbols 256 in single-byte numbers including #, (, ), -
128 in double-byte, 256 in single-byte Continued on next page 131 Scanning text
<Example: To scan text in Card read mode>
Before scanning, set to the close-up mode by
(macro moving the lens selector switch to lens).p.118 1 iLIFEKITText reader The Text reader screen appears. 2 New The Scanning mode selection screen appears. Scanning modep.131 3 Card read The Text reader scanning screen appears. Text reader Function menup.133 Text reader scanning Function menup.133 4 Use v to highlight the icon for the item to scanDisplay the text in the recognition field Focus the text so that the entire text appears as large as possible inside the recognition field. If the recognition field cannot display the whole text, the text can be scanned several times. To adjust the zoom f: Changes from Normal to Large. g: Returns from Large to Normal. 5 d (Read) The FOMA terminal scans the text, and the recognized text appears in red. To rescan the text
tYES If the screen does not display the entire text, press b to check. Pressing o (Store) stores the scanned text, and then the reading data screen (detail) appears. The following are the two methods to edit the scanned text:
Item Maximum number of characters that can be scanned Dictionary*
Japanese 32 in double-byte, 64 in single-
English byte 64 in single-byte
* : This option is available when the Text reader is launched from Dictionary. Guide to the scanning screen
<Example: Card read mode>
Guidance Recognition frame Item icon C a m e r a Recognition text field NEGA mode Recognition mode Remaining characters
: Displays the operation. Guidance Recognition frame: Displays the recognition field. Item icon
: Displays the item to scan. Card read mode: Name/phone number/mail address/postal code/
address/memo Compose message mode:
Receiver/subject/message Recognized text field:
Displays the scanned text (The guidance appears on some screens). Recognition mode:
Displays the recognition mode used for scanning Kanji (lateral writing/
vertical writing)/postal code/phone number/mail address/URL. Remaining characters:
Displays the remaining number of single-byte characters that can be scanned. NEGA mode : Appears if the NEGA/POSI mode is set to Negative fix. 132 To select the character to edit
Use v to highlight the character to editPress the candidate No. Press r to change the cases between upper and lower if it can be changed. Candidate To edit in the text editing
u (FUNC) EditEdit the text The text can be edited in the typical text editing. To return to the candidate selection, press u (FUNC) and select Select recog. data. Go on to Step 6 when you finish editing. 6 d (Set) The entry is fixed as the text. To scan the remaining text
Display text in the recognition rangeRepeat Steps 5 to 6 Ensure that the last two or more characters of the scanned text are included in the recognition field. To scan another item
Repeat Steps 4 to 6 In Card read mode, you can scan up to 4 phone numbers and up to 3 mail addresses. 7 u (FUNC) Store The Reading data detail screen appears. Press t to return to the Reading data list screen. N
Do not move the FOMA terminal while the Processing message appears on the screen.
The FOMA terminal cannot recognize handwritten characters. If the text is faxed or copied, if the fonts are decorated, if the character spaces are not fixed, or if the fonts and background cannot be easily distinguished, the FOMA terminal may fail to recognize the text. Also, the FOMA terminal may not recognize the text correctly depend on the ambient lighting. Text reader screen (p.132) Add shortcutp.94 Using the text data
You can use the following scanned data:
Item Add to phonebook Compose message Description Adds the name, phone number, mail address, postal code, address and memo to the phonebookp.70 Composes an i-mode mail with the recipient address, subject and message enteredp.156
* Select any displayed item such as Phone number or Mail address to edit the data. 1 iLIFEKITText reader Reading data list The Reading data screen
(list) appears. 2 Select the scanned data The Reading data screen
(detail) appears. Reading data (list) Function menup.133 C a m e r a Reading data (detail) Function menup.133 3 Select any of the displayed items Text reader scanning screen
(p.132)/Reading data screen
(list/detail) (p.133) Edit*1Edits the scanned text. Store*2Saves the reading data. InternetAccesses the site of the scanned URL in URL mode. Web To functionp.147 Compose message*3Displays the New mail screen with the reading data entered and composes i-mode mail. The entered data varies depending on the displayed reading data or screen. DialingCalls or sends the SMS of the phone number in Phone number mode. Phone To/AV Phone To functionp.147 Continued on next page 133 Add to phonebookAdds the scanned data to the phonebook. The stored data varies depending on the displayed reading data or screen. Add bookmarkAdd the URL to the Bookmark in URL mode. Search phonebookSearches the phonebook using the scanned data. You cannot search the phonebook on the scanning screen, in Card read mode or Compose message mode. Add to memoAdds the scanned data to Text memo. You cannot store the scanned data in Card read mode or Compose message mode. Reading mode set*2Selects the scanning mode from Card read/Compose message/URL/Mail address/Phone number/Free memo. NEGA/POSI mode*2 Sets the type of printing. C a m e r a Auto settingAutomatically sets the positive or negative. Positive fixSuitable for printing the dark text on the light background. Negative fixSuitable for printing the light text on the dark background. Guidance OFFGuidance ON*2Sets whether to display the guidance or not. Vertical writingLateral writing*2Selects the vertical writing or lateral writing for the Japanese text to scan. Display detail*4Displays the Reading data screen
(detail). Display list*5Displays the Reading data screen (list). Copy*6Copies text contained in the scanned data. Delete thisDelete all*6Deletes one or all scanned data.
*1: Unavailable on the Reading data screen (list).
*2: Available only on the Scanning screen.
*3: Not available when 2in1 is in B mode.
*4: Available only on the Reading data screen (list).
*5: Available only on the Reading data screen (detail).
*6: Unavailable on the Scanning screen. N
As the image settings for videophone are not retained after the dialing or talking is finished, set this item each time you make a call. 134 i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel i-mode menu/site Save image i-melody My Menu Change i-mode Password Internet connection Bookmark Screen memo What is i-mode?.............................................................................................................. 136 Viewing sites Viewing a Site ........................................................................................ 136 Viewing and Using Sites ................................................................................................. 139 141 Registering My Menu Entries............................................................................ Changing Your i-mode Password................................................ 141 141 Viewing Websites................................................................................. 142 Accessing Websites and Sites Quickly ............................................................ Saving Site Contents .................................................................................. 143 Downloading images and melodies from sites Downloading Charged Contents..................................................................................... 144 144 Downloading Images from Sites .................................................................... Downloading Melodies from Sites ..................................................................... 145 Downloading PDF Data from Sites ................................................................................. 145 Downloading Kisekae Tool from Sites ............................................................................ 146 Downloading Various Data from Sites ............................................................................ 146 i-mode utility functions Using the Phone To/AV Phone To, Mail To, Web To and Media To Functions
................................................................. 147 Using Location Information ............................................................................................. 148 Specifying your i-mode settings Specifying Your i-mode Settings ..................................................................................... 148 Using certificates Using SSL Certificates.................................................................................................... 149 Setting FirstPass............................................................................................................. 150 Changing the Certificate Host......................................................................................... 151 Using i-motion What is i-motion? ............................................................................................................ 151 152 Downloading i-motion .......................................................................... Setting Whether to Play an i-motion Automatically ............................. 152 Using i-Channel What is i-Channel? ......................................................................................................... 153 Viewing Sites from the Channel List ............................................................................... 153 Setting i-Channel .................................................................................... 154 Phone To/AV Phone To, Mail To, Web To and Media To Download i-motion i-motion auto-replay i-Channel setting 135 What is i-mode?
Viewing a Site
<i-mode menu/site>
The i-mode service enables you to use an i-mode-
compatible FOMA terminal (i-mode terminal) display to access online services such as i-mode mail, connecting to the Internet and sites (programs), etc.
i-mode is a pay service you need to apply for.
For details on i-mode, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide [i-mode] FOMA version. You can access the services provided by IPs
(information service provider). (You may need a subscription.) 1 oiMenu i-mode menu screen appears first, then iMenu screen appears. Notes on using i-mode
Contents on sites (programs) or Internet websites are normally protected by copyright laws. The loaded documents, pictures, and other data from these sites (programs) or websites to your i-mode terminal is permitted only when intended for your personal use only. No data may be copied in part or in whole, whether modified or not, for resale or redistribution without the consent of the copyright holder.
Note also that when the FOMA card (UIM) is replaced or the mobile phone is turned on with no FOMA card (UIM) inserted, some types of mobile phone may be incapable of viewing or playing melodies, images and movies downloaded from sites, files attached to sent or received mail
(images, movies or melodies), screen memos and MessageR/F.
If a file with restrictions on viewing and playback imposed by the FOMA card (UIM) is set as the standby screen or as a ring tone, the FOMA terminal operates under the default settings if the FOMA card (UIM) is replaced or the FOMA terminal is turned on without the FOMA card (UIM) inserted. i
m o d e
i
m o t i o n
i
C h a n n e l i-mode menu iMenu Select iMenu in the i-mode menu screen, then i-mode communication starts. icon flashes while the communication with icon the i-mode Center is in progress, and flashes when you are receiving i-mode service
(during i-mode). 2 Select links and other options to display the site screen you want to view Viewing and Using Sites p.139 To cancel the download of pages
t Sites Function menup.137 3 To quit i-mode, press yYES disappears. blinks, After N
The i-mode service area is the same as the FOMA service area (the area in which calls can be made and received).
Some sites may require you to pay additional information fee.
The number of colors displayed on certain sites exceeds the maximum number of colors that the FOMA terminal can display. For this reason, the site may not appear as intended. 136 N
On some i-mode-compatible site and websites, some characters may be difficult or impossible to see due to the selected colors.
When you are requested information on music you play by the site, the confirmation screen concerning transmission of music information appears. Select YES to send the information (title, artist name and play date) on the music you play in your FOMA terminal. The information is used to offer information that IP (information service provider) customized to the customer. N
The sent information mobile phone/FOMA card (UIM) manufacturer numbers is used by the IP (information service provider) to classify customers and provide customized services for you and to confirm that you can use the content the IP is offering.
The Mobile phone/FOMA card (UIM) manufacture numbers is sent to the IP (information service provider) via the internet and may be disclosed to the third party as a result. However, this operation does not disclose your phone number, address, age and gender to the IP (information service provider), etc. iMenu in English English iMenu is available. 1 oiMenuScroll down to the bottom to select English English Sites screen (p.136) Add bookmarkp.142 Bookmarkp.142 Add screen memop.143 Screen memo listp.143 Save imagep.144 URL historyp.138 Window Open new windowUsing multi window p.140 Close windowCloses the displayed window. Change windowSwitches windows when multiple websites are open. i-Channelp.153 i
m o d e
i
m o t i o n
i
C h a n n e l Select to return to the Japanese display. N
English iMenu is not available for
(tokusuru menu), (Rakuten-auction),
(i-area), (My Box) and (News).
Generally, the Whats New site is updated every other Monday.
English iMenu sites differ from Japanese version. Enter URLEnters a URL to connect to the website. Add to phonebookp.140 Add shortcutp.94 Save scheduleStores a scheduled event while browsing the page.p.285 Refer dictionaryStarts the dictionary.p.296 Home Mobile phone/FOMA card (UIM) manufacturer numbers If you select an item while a site or website is displayed on the FOMA terminal, a message may appear notifying you that the mobile phone/FOMA card (UIM) manufacturer numbers will be sent.
The disclosure notification message is always displayed before your mobile phone/FOMA card
(UIM) manufacturer numbers are sent. Such information is never sent automatically. Set as home URLStores the URL of the displayed page as home URL. You can only store 1 URL as the home URL. Display homeDisplays the page stored as the home URL. Available when Home URL is set to Valid.p.148 ReloadRefreshes the page. Compose message*Composes i-mode mail or Deco-mail with a URL for the page pasted into the message or the image pasted/attached. iMenuDisplays the iMenu screen. Continued on next page 137 1 Display an SSL page The SSL page and the icon appears. To cancel the authentication
Cancel 2 Move from the SSL SSL page page to an ordinary pageYES SSL communication ends and the disappears. icon N
The message This site is not certified Connect? may appear when you attempt to open an SSL page. This message appears when the SSL certificate for the page has expired or is not supported. In this case, you can continue to view the page by selecting YES. However, you may not be able to safely send your personal information such as your credit card number or contacts. Reconnecting to sites you visited before
<URL history>
URL history records the last 30 URLs of the sites you visited before. You can reconnect to the website displayed using the URL history. 1 oURL history The URL history screen appears. 2 Select the record URL history Function menup.138 URL history screen (p.138) Add bookmarkp.142 URLDisplays the stored URL. DeleteSelects the deleting method from Delete this/
Delete selected/Delete all. About multiple-choicep.38 Site info TitleDisplays the page title to check. URLDisplays the page URL to check. If the entire URL does not appear, press d (Select), then use c to move the cursor to check the rest of the URL. Pressing d (Select) again hides the cursor. CertificateDisplays the contents of the SSL certificate when the page is compatible with SSL. Site settings ReplayPlays the Flash movie or animation on the page again from the beginning. Set image disp.Sets whether to display the images on the page or not. When set to OFF, appears instead of the image which is not displayed. Sound effectSets whether to play the Flash movie sound effect or not (ON/OFF). Change CHR codeChanges the character code to redisplay the page that is not displayed correctly. Switch to FBSwitches to the Full Browser to display a website that cannot be displayed in i-mode.p.218
* : Not available when 2in1 is in B mode. N
<Certificate>
When certificates are displayed, the screen scrolls at the regular speed regardless of the Scroll setting.
<Change CHR code>
If text is not displayed correctly, repeat the procedure. Note that when you perform the procedure for the 4th time, the site is displayed in the original character code setting.
Some sites may not be displayed correctly even when the character code is changed.
If you change the character code when a site is displayed correctly, the site may not be displayed correctly. Displaying SSL pages To view SSL pages, the following certificates are required:
CA certificate: Issued by an certification organization and stored in your FOMA terminal at the time of purchase.
DOCOMO CA certificate: Required for connecting to the FirstPass center and stored in the FOMA card (green/white).
Client certificate: Downloaded from the FirstPass center by selecting Client certificate in the i-mode menu and stored in the FOMA card (green/white). i
m o d e
i
m o t i o n
i
C h a n n e l 138 Viewing and Using Sites This section describes the operations for viewing sites or websites. Image display
The FOMA SO706i can display GIF and JPEG format images and Flash movies (p.140). However, the FOMA terminal may be unable to display some images regardless of the format.
When a Flash movie is displayed, the display operation may differ from that on a normal site.
When you play the Flash movie that is stored in Data Box, Screen memo, microSD card, the display operation may differ in some stored parts.
You can specify whether or not images are displayed in the Set image disp. setting. Displayed image icons
(color): Displayed while an image is loaded or when OFF is selected in the Set image disp. setting
: Displayed when image loading is failed
(B/W): Displayed when image cannot be loaded Scroll function When you are viewing a page on a site and the text or a list does not fit in the screen, you can scroll up or down to view the rest of the text. g: Scrolls down f: Scrolls up s (): Scrolls down by screens a ( ): Scrolls up by screens
Scroll settingp.148 Selecting links and other options When you are using i-mode, you may need to perform operations such as those described below. Link Link Text box Pull-down menu Radio button Checkbox Button Select the item to proceed to the linked page. Text box You can enter text directly. When you select a text box, the Character entry (edit) screen appears. Pull-down menu You can select one option from the list of selectable options. Only a part of the selectable options is displayed but hidden options appear as a list when you select the pull-down menu. Radio button You can select only one option. selected radio button. Checkbox indicates a You can select multiple options from a range of options. indicates a selected checkbox. Button i
m o d e
i
m o t i o n
i
C h a n n e l When you select a button, the function assigned to the button is activated. Jumping to previous/next pages You can jump forward or back to a page that has been stored in the FOMA terminals cache. Up to 30 pages are stored in per window (up to 100 pages are stored in all windows). 1 Press h to jump back to the previous page or j to jump forward to the next page When the page display sequence is A, B, C, B and D A v B v v
: Sequence of viewing pages
: Back from the screen D C D To display the pages stored in cache
Cache refers to an area of memory on the FOMA terminal itself in which data from sites or Internet websites you have visited is temporarily stored. If you press v to move to another page while you are viewing a site or website, the FOMA terminal displays the page stored in cache rather than connecting to the i-mode Center and accessing the page on the actual site. However, if the cache is full or if the page is set to always display the latest information, the FOMA terminal connects to the site even when you press v. Also, even when the page is stored in the cache, if the date and time information for that page has been updated, the FOMA terminal connects to the site and displays the latest data. Continued on next page 139
When site data is loaded from cache, the text and settings you entered on previous visits is not displayed.
The cache is cleared when you exit i-mode.
When you download SSL-compatible pages from cache, the message appears indicating that the SSL page will be displayed. Using multi window You can open up to 5 websites (up to 6 websites when including i-Channel).
You can use the tab to switch pages with o (
) when multiple websites are opened. Tab o ( ) i
m o d e
i
m o t i o n
i
C h a n n e l 1 Sites screen (p.136)Highlight the link
p (Open) The page opens with a new window. To close a opened website
tYES Opening websites other than linked pages 1 Sites screen (p.136)u (FUNC) WindowOpen new window Select any item:
LinkDisplays the linked pages in the same way as p (Open). BookmarkDisplays the website registered as bookmark. Enter URLEnters a URL to display the website. Display homeDisplays a website registered as home URL. N
You cannot arrange the multi-opened websites side-
by-side. 140 Adding phone number and e-mail address to the phonebook
<Add to phonebook>
You can add a phone number or e-mail address displayed on a site page or screen memo to your phonebook.
<Example: To add a phone number displayed on a site page>
1 Sites screen (p.136)u (FUNC) Add to phonebookYESAdd the phone number to phonebook Adding information to the phonebookp.70 If the name, reading and mail address are attached to phone number, they are also entered to the phonebook together with phone number. Enter remains of necessary items and then save to the phonebook. Operating the Flash movies Flash is an animation technique supported by the FOMA terminal that uses both images and sound. Flash gives you access to a wide range of animations and visually exciting sites. You can also download a Flash movie to your FOMA terminal and set it as the standby screen.
A Flash playing error prevents successful completion of the saving.
Note that if you play a Flash movie to which vibration is set, your FOMA terminal vibrates regardless of the Vibrator setting.
Some Flash movies may not run correctly.
You may also be able to control a Flash movie even does not appear at the bottom of the when screen.
Flash movies are not displayed if you select OFF in Set image disp..
Selecting YES in Use phone information allows you to use the FOMA terminal data (time, date, reception level, battery level, ring volume, language, model type and model info). N
Some Flash movies use sound effects. To run a Flash movie without the sound effects, select Sound effect and then select OFF. Even if Vibrator is set to Melody linkage, this setting is invalid for sound effects of Flash movie.
When a Flash movie is set as a screen such as standby by using Display setting, the sound effects or vibrator that are set in the Flash movie do not run. Replay is also unavailable.p.138 N
When some Flash movies are saved or saved as a screen memo, part of the images may not be saved or they may otherwise differ from the way they appear on the site. Registering My Menu Entries
<My Menu>
My Menu provides you with a quick and convenient way to connect to frequently visited sites.
You can register up to 45 sites in My Menu.
Some sites cannot be registered to My Menu.
To connect quickly to a website, use Bookmark. 1 Sites screen (p.136)My Menu RegistrationSelect the Input password boxEnter your i-mode passwordSelect i-mode passwordp.141 N
Charged sites in the iMenu list are automatically registered to My Menu after subscription. Viewing sites registered to My Menu 1 oiMenuEnglishMy Menu
Select a site Changing Your i-mode Password
<Change i-mode Password>
You need a 4-digit i-mode password to register or unregistered sites in My Menu, to subscribe to or unsubscribe to message services and to set your mail preferences.
At the time of subscription, it is set to 0000 (4 zeros) by default. Change the i-mode password to your favorite one.
Take particular care not to disclose your i-mode password to others.
If you forget your i-mode password, the registered service subscriber must take a form of identification
(such as a drivers license) to an NTT DOCOMO service counter. 1 oiMenuEnglishOptions Change i-mode Password 2 Select the Current Password box Enter your current i-mode password The numbers of the entered password is displayed as . 3 Select the New Password boxEnter the new i-mode password Enter a 4-digit number. 4 Select the New Password
(Confirmation) boxEnter the new i-mode password again Enter the number you entered in step 3. 5 Select Viewing Websites
<Internet connection>
This function allows you to view website by entering its URL.
Websites that are not i-mode-compliant may not be displayed properly.
A website may be displayed differently in your terminal from when it is viewed on PC.
You can view websites designed for a PC in Full Browser.
You can enter a URL up to 256 single-byte characters long including http:// or https://. 1 oGo to locationEnter URL The URL list screen appears. i
m o d e
i
m o t i o n
i
C h a n n e l URL list Function menup.142 2 <NEW>Enter URLOK Viewing sites from the URL history The FOMA terminal records the last 10 URLs you entered in the URL history. 1 oGo to locationEnter URL 2 Select a URLOK To edit the selected URL
Select the Internet address boxEdit the URL Continued on next page 141 N
When you enter URLs and connect to sites, visits to the same URL are logged as separate entries. URL list screen (p.141) Add shortcutp.94 Compose message*Composes an i-mode mail with the URL pasted in the message. Set as home URLStores a URL as your home URL. You can only store 1 URL as your home URL. DeleteSelects the deleting method from Delete this/
Delete selected/Delete all. About multiple-choicep.38
* : Not available when 2in1 is in B mode. Accessing Websites and Sites Quickly
<Bookmark>
i
m o d e
i
m o t i o n
i
C h a n n e l Adding frequently visited websites or sites to your Bookmarks folders allows you to access those sites quickly and easily.
You can change the titles of your bookmarks and organize the bookmarks into categories by using folders. Adding bookmarks
You can bookmark up to 100 sites.
You can enter up to 256 single-byte characters for a URL.
Some sites cannot be bookmarked.
<Example: While displaying a site>
1 Sites screen (p.136)u (FUNC) Add bookmarkYESSelect a folder N
Bookmark titles can consist of up to 12 double-byte or 24 single-byte characters. Longer titles are truncated when the bookmark is added. If no title is given, the URL is displayed (excluding http:// or https://). 142 Using a bookmark to access a site or website 1 oBookmark The Bookmark folder list screen appears. When the FOMA terminal is in Secret mode or Secret data only mode, the Secret folder is also displayed. 2 Select a folder The Bookmark list screen appears. 3 Select a bookmark Bookmark folder list Function menup.142 Bookmark list Function menup.143 Bookmark folder list screen
(p.142)
You cannot rename or delete the Bookmark folder already created on the FOMA terminal at the time of purchase. Add folderEnters a folder name to add a folder. You can add up to 9 folders. You can enter up to 10 double-
byte or 20 single-byte characters. Edit folder nameEdits the folder name of the added folder. You can enter up to 10 double-byte or 20 single-
byte characters. Sort folderSelects the position to move to and rearranges the folder. No. of bookmarksDisplays the total number of bookmarks in all the folders. iC trans. allp.260 Send all Ir datap.258 CopyAll to microSDp.248 Delete folderDeletes the folder and bookmarks in the folder. Delete allDeletes all the bookmarks. However, the bookmark folders are not deleted. N
<No. of bookmarks>
The number of data in the microSD folder and Secret folder are not displayed. Bookmark list screen (p.142) MoveSelects from Move this/Move selected/Move all and moves the bookmark to the other folder you select. About multiple-choicep.38 Edit titleEdits the title. You can enter up to 12 double-
byte or 24 single-byte characters. Add shortcutp.94 Compose message*1Composes an i-mode mail with the URL pasted in the message. Attach to mail*1Composes an i-mode mail with a bookmark attached. iC transmissionp.259 Send Ir datap.258 Copy to microSDp.248 Set as home URLStores a URL as your home URL. You can only store 1 URL as your home URL. Copy URLCopies a bookmarked URL.
Use b to move the cursor to the first character to copyd (Start)Use b to highlight the end of text to copyd (End) You can paste the copied URL to the Character entry
(edit) screen.p.309 No. of bookmarksDisplays the total number of bookmarks in the folder. DeleteSelects the deleting method from Delete this/
Delete selected/Delete all. About multiple-choicep.38 Keep in secretPut out*2Preventing Others from Viewing Datap.104 Bookmark info*3Displays the bookmark information.
*1: Not available when 2in1 is in B mode.
*2: Available only in Secret or Secret data only mode.
*3: Available only for bookmarks stored on the microSD card. Saving Site Contents
<Screen memo>
When you have found some useful information (travel information, etc.), you can save the displayed page on your FOMA terminal as a screen memo for later reference.
You can save up to 100 screen memos. However, the number you can actually save varies depending on the amount of data on each saved page. Saving a screen memo 1 Sites screen (p.136)u (FUNC) Add screen memoYES N
When you save a screen memo of an SSL page, the SSL certificate for that page is also saved.
If you save the same page twice, it is saved as a new screen memo and is not replaced with the earlier save.
If you save a site in which an item is already entered in a radio button, checkbox, text box, pull-down menu or selection box as a screen memo, you cannot view the item when displaying the screen memo.
When you save a screen such as the data acquisition screen, the data for that screen is saved along with the screen. However, the data acquisition screen for i-motion or Chaku-Uta-Full with set playback period can not be saved as a screen memo. Displaying a screen memo 1 oScreen memo The Screen memo list screen appears. 2 Select a screen memo The Screen memo detail screen appears. Screen memo list Function menup.144 Screen memo
(Screen memo detail) Function menup.144 N
Information on the screen memo is the one stored and may differ from the latest one. i
m o d e
i
m o t i o n
i
C h a n n e l 143 Screen memo list screen
(p.143) Downloading Charged Contents i
m o d e
i
m o t i o n
i
C h a n n e l Edit titleEdits the title. You can enter up to 11 double-
byte or 22 single-byte characters. Protect ON/OFFProtects or unprotects screen memo. Protected memo titles are marked with
. No. of memosDisplays the numbers of stored and protected screen memos respectively. DeleteSelects the deleting method from Delete this/
Delete selected/Delete all. About multiple-choicep.38 N
<Protect ON/OFF>
Up to 50 screen memos can be protected. However, the number of screen memos you can protect varies depending on the data size. Screen memo detail screen
(p.143) Save imageSaves the images displayed in a screen memo.p.144 Add to phonebookAdds the phone number and e-mail address displayed on the screen memo to the Phonebook.p.70 Edit titleEdits the title of the screen memo. You can enter up to 11 double-byte or 22 single-byte characters. Protect ON/OFFProtects or unprotects screen memo. Protected memo titles are marked with
. Compose message*Composes i-mode mail and Deco-mail with the URL for a screen memo pasted into the message or the image pasted/attached. Save scheduleStores a scheduled event by browsing the screen memos. Refer dictionaryStarts the dictionary.p.296 URLDisplays and checks the screen memo URL. CertificateDisplays the SSL certificate details when the screen memo is SSL-compatible. Sound effectSpecifies whether the settings for Flash movie sound effects are enabled or not (ON/OFF). ReplayPlays the Flash movie or animation in the screen memo again from the beginning. DeleteDeletes the screen memo.
* : Not available when 2in1 is in B mode. 144 Some sites may charge you for downloading contents
(images, melodies or Chaku-Uta-Full). When you try to download charged contents, a confirmation message for the purchase and the i-mode password entry screen appears. N
You cannot download the contents if more than 2 minutes have passed before starting downloading after you enter the i-mode password. Enter the i-mode password again. Downloading Images from Sites
<Save image>
You can save an image, background image or animation displayed or attached to the currently displayed site, screen memo, i-mode mail or MessageR/F, then set the saved image in screens such as standby screen and wake-up display.
You can store up to 1,000 images including images that can be set as Deco-mail pictures or Deco-
mail pictographs as well as shot still images (the number of images you can actually store may be reduced depending on the file size).
<Example: To save a normal image displayed on a site page>
1 Sites screen (p.136)u (FUNC) Save imageNormal image Select an imageYESSelect a folder Position the frame saved. To save the background image
Save imageBackground imageYES Select a folder over the image to be 2 YESSelect an item When you do not set the image to the standby screen, etc.
NO N
When 2in1 is set to Dual mode or B mode, and also Setting standby screens for each mode is set to other than Same as A Number, the saved image cannot be set to the standby screen. The screen for A mode or OFF in 2in1 mode is applied. Downloading Melodies from Sites
<i-melody>
You can set your favorite song, the latest hit song downloaded from a site or a stored melody attached to an i-mode mail as a ring tone on your FOMA terminal.
You can store up to 200 melodies (the number of melodies you can actually store may be reduced depending on the file size).
<Example: To save a melody downloaded from a site>
1 Sites screen (p.136)Select a melody 2 SaveYESSelect a folder To play a melody
Play To display melody information
Property 3 YESSelect an item When you do not set the melody to the ring tone, etc.
NO N
Downloaded melodies may be subject to restrictions such that only a pre-designated part of the melody can be played. While a melody of this type is played in full when played back on the FOMA terminal, when it is set as a ring tone, only the designated section is played. Downloading PDF Data from Sites You can download PDF-formatted data from a website and display it on the FOMA terminal (Phone).
You can store up to 400 PDF data on the FOMA terminal. (The number of data you can actually store may be reduced depending on the file size.) 1 Sites screen (p.136)Select a PDF data file The PDF data (p.261) screen appears. Operation for viewing a PDF documentp.263
* When a PDF file that enables you to download the specified pages is selected, the first downloaded page appears. The subsequent pages are downloaded when you move to those pages. To cancel the download
o (Quit) or t When the message asking whether to save the partly downloaded data appears, select YES to save it. In this case, you can download the remaining data later.p.146 If the password entry screen appears Enter the password set to the PDF data. To save the PDF data
u (FUNC)SaveYESSelect a folder For PDF data that requires download of all the data, all the pages are saved. For PDF data that enables you to download the specified pages, the data (pages) downloaded so far are saved. You can download the remaining pages later. p.145 To end display of PDF data
t When the PDF data is not saved, a message asking whether to close the PDF appears. To save the PDF data, select NO. Downloading remaining PDF data after downloading partially When you have saved partly downloaded PDF data, you can download the remaining pages (data) later. The method of downloading varies depending on the status of the downloaded PDF data. For partially downloaded (by page) PDF data (
(pale blue)) 1 PDF list screen (p.261)Select a PDF file to view The message notifying that downloading will resume appears and then the PDF data screen
(p.261) appears. Operation for viewing a PDF documentp.263 on the toolbar 2 o (Tool)Press to view pages not yet downloaded Connected to the site to download the pages. To specify the page number you want to download
Select page number display on the toolbar Enter the page number you want to view To download all the remaining data at one time
u (FUNC)DL remaining dataYES To save the PDF data
u (FUNC)SaveYES The document including the newly downloaded pages is saved. 145 i
m o d e
i
m o t i o n
i
C h a n n e l Selecting NO allows you to save the partly downloaded data. 2 SaveYES To check the Kisekae Tool package
Preview To display the Kisekae Tool package information
Property N
If the pre-installed Kisekae Tool is deleted, you can download from PlayNow by SO. iMenu (Menu List)
(Mobile phone manufacturer)PlayNow by SO You can read the QR code on the right and select the displayed URL to access website. Downloading Various Data from Sites You can enormously expand the range of uses for your FOMA terminal by downloading additional data such as dictionaries, Deco-mail pictures, Template, Chara-den, and ToruCa from sites.
You can save up to the following number of downloaded data, including the pre-installed data.
Dictionary : up to 5
Deco-mail picture, etc. : up to 1000
Template : up to 500
Chara-den : 10
ToruCa : up to 100
* The number of data you can actually store may be reduced depending on the file size.
<Example: To download a dictionary from a site>
1 Sites screen (p.136)Select a data SaveYES To display dictionary information
Property When the dictionaries are full
Select the dictionary to deleteYES The selected dictionary is overwritten and new dictionary is saved. For PDF data that could only be downloaded partially <
(pale blue),
(pale blue)>
1 PDF list screen (p.261)Select a PDF file to view Before the document is displayed, a message appears asking whether to download all the remaining data. 2 YES Connected to the site and downloading of all the remaining data starts. After downloading is completed, the PDF data screen (p.261) appears. (Some documents may not be viewable even if the download was successful.) To save the PDF data
u (FUNC)SaveYES i
m o d e
i
m o t i o n
i
C h a n n e l N
It may take a long time to display some PDF data.
PDF data may not be properly displayed if it contains formats unsupported by PDF viewer or complicated designs.
Note that the communication fee for downloading large amounts of data will be expensive.
If you attempt to download a PDF file larger than 500K bytes, the confirmation message asking whether to download the file appears.
You cannot download a PDF file whose size is unknown or larger than 2M bytes.
When the PDF data that you try to download has the same definition file (information file for defining PDF) as the PDF data stored in the FOMA terminal or microSD card, they are recognized as the same data. Consequently, the PDF data will not be downloaded and the saved PDF data will be displayed. Downloading Kisekae Tool from Sites You can download Kisekae Tool packages from i-mode sites and save them on your FOMA terminal.
You can save up to 100 Kisekae Tool packages, including the pre-installed ones (the number of packages that can be saved may be less depending on the size of Kisekae Tool data). 1 Sites screen (p.136)Select a Kisekae Tool package To cancel the download
t You can resume downloading if the message asking whether to do it appears. 146 N
If the pre-installed Chara-den is deleted, you can download from PlayNow by SO. iMenu (Menu List)
(Mobile phone manufacturer)PlayNow by SO You can read the QR code on the right and select the displayed URL to access website.
The file name used for Template with no title is YYYY/
MM/DD hh:mm (Y = year, M = month, D = day, h =
hour, m = minute).
You may not be able to download data depending on sites or the file size. Mail To function You can send a mail to a mail address displayed on a site, in a mail, PDF data or the Full Browser screen.
You cannot use the Mail To function when draft mails are full.
You may not be able to use the Mail To function when 2 or more e-mail addresses are displayed in sequence.
You can enter up to 50 single-byte characters as an e-mail address.
When 2in1 is in B mode, this function is not available.
<Example: To send mail from the sites screen>
Using the Phone To/AV Phone To, Mail To, Web To and Media To Functions
<Phone To/AV Phone To, Mail To, Web To and Media To>
These functions provide quick and simple procedures for making calls, composing SMS, sending mail or viewing websites using information (phone numbers, e-mail addresses, URLs, etc.) displayed in mail or on a site. 1seg can be activated.
You may not be able to use this function for the mails or sites sent from a PC.
You may use items in which a phone number, mail address, and URL are not indicated but linked (e.g. Please contact here). Phone To/AV Phone To function You can call or compose an SMS for the phone number in the displayed site or mail.
You can enter up to 26 digits as a phone number.
<Example: To make a voice call to a number displayed on a site>
1 Sites screen (p.136)Select a phone number When the 2in1 is in Dual mode The Outgoing number selection screen appears. Select a phone number. 2 Voice phone 3 Dial address 1 Sites screen (p.136)Select a mail 2 Compose and send an i-mode mail p.156 i
m o d e
i
m o t i o n
i
C h a n n e l Web To function You can display websites in the displayed site or mail.
You can enter up to 512 single-byte characters as a URL.
<Example: To open another website from the sites screen>
1 Sites screen (p.136)Select a URL Media To function Use information such as date and time, channel and program name displayed in a web page or mail to activate 1seg or book viewing/recording.
<Example: To activate 1seg from a site>
1 Site screen (p.136)Select date and time, channel, program name, etc. N
The Media To function may not work even if information is selected. 147 Using Location Information Select a link with location information added on a site, use the location information.
<Example: To use the information on a site>
1 Sites screen (p.136)Select a link with location information addedSelect any item:
Run i-ppliDisplays the list of i-ppli compatible with the location information function
(that can use location information). Read a MapAccesses the i-mode site and displays the peripheral map, etc. using the location information. Paste to mail*Pastes the location information URL into an i-mode message to compose a new message.
* : Not available when 2in1 is in B mode. N
When the location information URL is pasted into the is prefixed to the location information message, URL.
The number of characters of the pasted location information URL is counted as the number of characters of the message. Specifying Your i-mode Settings 1 oi-mode settings The i-mode settings screen appears. i
m o d e
i
m o t i o n
i
C h a n n e l Font size (default: Standard)Selects the character size of the detail screen for a screen memo, MessageR/F or a page on a site, from Small/Standard/Large/X-large.p.93 Set image disp. (default: ON)Sets whether the detail screen for screen memos and pages on a site are displayed or not. If you select OFF, the icon will be displayed instead of the images not to be displayed. i-motion auto-replay (default: ON)p.152 Auto-display setting (default: MessageR preferred) Sets for the automatic display of MessageR/F. Start attachment (auto) (default: ON)Sets whether the attached/pasted melody automatically plays when opening the MessageR/F. Use phone information (default: Accept)p.149 Message list display (default: 2 lines)Sets the number of lines in the message list screen. Home URLSets for using the home URL display function. When set to Valid, pressing a on the standby screen displays the screen of the stored URL. You can enter up to 256 single-byte characters for the URL. Invalid (default)Disables the home URL display setting. ValidEnables the home URL display setting. Select the Home URL field and enter a URL to be stored. Sound effect (default: ON)Sets whether to play the sound effects for the Flash movies in a site or screen memo. Tab display setting (default: Open at the back side) Sets whether to change (Open at the front) or keep (Open at the back side) the current display when you open a website in new window. Check settingsDisplays the settings set in i-mode settings. ResetResets the settings specified in i-mode settings to the default settings. 2 Select any item:
ScrollSets the scrolling speed and link display of the detail screen for a site, screen memo or MessageR/F. Speed (default: High speed)Selects the scrolling speed from High speed/Low speed. During scroll in focus (default: OFF)Sets whether to highlight the linked pages while scrolling. i-mode settings N
<Home URL>
If a flat-plug earphone/microphone with switch
(optional) is connected to the FOMA terminal, pressing the switch in the standby screen will also display the site set as the home.
<Sound effect>
Even if sound effects are set to ON, some Flash movies may not make any sound. 148 Setting the connection timeout
<Set connection timeout>
This option sets time-out duration for which the FOMA terminal automatically stops trying to connect when a site is busy and there is no response. 1 iSETTINGSi-mode common setSet connection timeout Select any item:
60 secondsAutomatically stops connecting if there is no response for 60 seconds. 90 secondsAutomatically stops connecting if there is no response for 90 seconds. UnlimitedDoes not automatically stop connecting. Setting a host different from i-mode host (ISP connection)
<Host selection>
* There is normally no need to change this setting. You need to select a different host when you want to use a service other than i-mode. If you change the host to a host other than i-mode, you can not use i-mode and i-mode mail.
You can store up to 10 hosts other than i-mode. 1 iSETTINGSi-mode common setHost selectionHighlight
<Not recorded>o (Edit)Enter your security codeSelect any item:
Host nameSets the host name. You can enter up to 9 double-byte or 18 single-byte characters. Host numberSets the host number. You can enter up to 99 single-byte characters. Host addressSets the host address. You can enter up to 30 single-byte characters. Host address2Sets the host address2. You can enter up to 30 single-byte characters. 2 Set the respective itemso (Finish) N
Note that costs of packet communication while you are connected to a host other than i-mode are not covered by the Pake-Houdai or Pake-Houdai full deal.
When you change the host, the ticker of i-Channel is turned off. The ticker is turned on again automatically when the information is updated automatically or when p is pressed to receive the latest information. N
After changing the host, the i-Channel information may not be updated automatically. To receive the latest information, press p to display the channel list screen. Specifying whether to use terminal data in Flash movies
<Use phone information>
Use this function to specify whether terminal data is used when a Flash movie is running.
The terminal data may be used depending on the particular Flash movie. Select Accept in Use phone information of i-mode settings so that images use the terminal data. The default setting is Accept. Such movies may use the following types of terminal data:
Battery level
Signal strength
Date and time
Ring volume setting
Select language
Model data 1 i-mode setting screen (p.148)Use phone informationAccept or Reject Using SSL Certificates You can check the details of an SSL certificate or to set to valid/invalid. i
m o d e
i
m o t i o n
i
C h a n n e l setCertificate 1 iSETTINGSi-mode common 2 Select a certificateCheck the details To validate or invalidate SSL certificates
Highlight a certificateu (FUNC)Valid/
Invalid N
When set to Valid, appears. When set to Invalid, appears.
If you select Invalid, you cannot view SSL pages with that SSL certificate. 149 Setting FirstPass User certificates prove that the user is a proper FOMA service subscriber. Downloaded user certificates are saved on your FOMA card (UIM) and enable you to access client authentication-compliant sites. Connect to the FirstPass Center Follow the procedure below to request and download the user certificate.
You can request a user certificate or download from the FirstPass Center.
User certificates cannot be used with the FOMA card (blue).
The FirstPass cannot be used overseas.
To connect to the FirstPass Center, you must first set the date and time on your FOMA terminal. p.45
The screens and procedures used at the FirstPass Center are subject to change. 1 oClient certificateCheck the descriptionEnglish 2 Request your certificate To apply invalidation Select Other settings and then select Revoke your certificate. Enter your PIN2 code and then proceed as directed by the on-screen instructions. i
m o d e
i
m o t i o n
i
C h a n n e l 3 Check the descriptionContinue 4 Enter the PIN2 code 5 Check the messageDownload PIN2 codep.100 Check the descriptionContinue Menu The confirmation message appears. The FirstPass menu screen reappears after the downloading is completed. N
Packet communication charge for connection to the FirstPass Center is free. 150 N
Before using the FirstPass Center, select The usage regulation (Japanese only) and read the information carefully.
You cannot use the following function during connection to the FirstPass Center.
Sending or receiving i-mode mail (sending and receiving SMS is available)
Check new message (Check new SMS is available)
Reception of MessageR/F
Downloading attached files of mails manually
Web To function from the mail detail screen
Always send a certificate request before downloading a new or updated user certificate. You cannot download a certificate without first requesting the certificate.
Once an application for user certificate invalidation has been completed, you can no longer access FirstPass-compliant sites that require that user certificate.
If you use FirstPass after completion of invalidation, apply issue for the user certification again and download it. Using a user certificate to connect to a site 1 Sites screen (p.136)Confirm user certificate transmissionYESEnter your PIN2 code N
The Packet communication charge of connecting to FirstPass-compliant sites is covered by the Pake-
Houdai or Pake-Houdai full deal.
FirstPass is also available in Full Browser. However, the packet communication charge for connecting to FirstPass-compliant sites in Full Browser is not covered by the Pake-Houdai or Pake-Houdai full deal.
If you connect to a FirstPass-compliant site without a user certificate, or if your user certificate has expired, a message appears informing you of that fact. You can still connect to the site and view subsequent pages by selecting YES in some cases, but note that it may not be safe to send your personal information (credit card number, contact details, etc.). To disconnect, select NO, then reconnect the site after downloading the user certificate from the FirstPass Center. Notes on using FirstPass
FirstPass is DOCOMOs digital authentication service. Using FirstPass enables the client authentication in which the site authenticates the FOMA terminal.
FirstPass can be used either when the FOMA terminal is directly connected to the Internet or when it is connected via a PC. When the FOMA terminal is connected to the Internet via a PC, the FirstPass PC software included in the provided CD-
ROM for FOMA SO706i is required. For more information, refer to the PDF-format FirstPass-
Manual contained in the FirstPassPCSoft folder on the CD-ROM. (The FirstPass-Manual is in Japanese only.) To view the PDF-format FirstPass Manual, Adobe Reader is required. If this software is not installed on your PC, install the Adobe Reader in the provided CD-ROM to view the file. Refer to the Adobe Reader (Help of the Adobe Reader) for details on how to use it.
When requesting a user certificate, carefully read and agree to the The usage regulation of FirstPass displayed on your screen before proceeding with your request.
To use a user certificate, you will need to enter your PIN2 code (p.100). Take great care to prevent unauthorized persons from using your FOMA card
(UIM) or PIN2 code since all the actions performed subsequent to PIN2 code entry will be assumed to have been performed by you.
If your FOMA card (UIM) is lost or stolen, you can have your user certificates invalidated at NTT DOCOMO Information counter on the back cover of this manual.
NTT DOCOMO is not responsible for and accepts no liability whatsoever regarding the sites or the content provided by FirstPass-compliant sites. Any disputes are to be resolved between the customer and the FirstPass-compliant site.
NTT DOCOMO and its authentication company provide no guarantee regarding security or secrecy in the use of FirstPass and SSL certificates. Such certificates are used entirely at the discretion of the user. Changing the Certificate Host
* There is normally no need to change this setting. You can set the host for downloading the user certificate. 1 iSETTINGSi-mode common setCertificate host 2 Highlight <Not recorded>o (Edit)
Enter your security codeSelect any item:
Default URLSets the URL of the initial screen for the host. You can enter up to 100 single-byte characters. Host numberSets the host number. You can enter up to 99 single-byte characters. 3 Set the respective itemso (Finish) N
To change a stored User setting host, use the same procedure for storing.
To delete a stored User setting host, select Delete from the function menu. What is i-motion?
An i-motion is a file containing video, voice and music data. It can be downloaded from an i-motion site to your FOMA terminal. You can also set an i-motion as a ring tone. Chaku-motionp.82 i-motion types i-motion can be broadly divided into 2 types as follows. The type of the i-motion you downloaded depends on the site or data. Type i
m o d e
i
m o t i o n
i
C h a n n e l Playback type Playback after downloading Playback while downloading Playback while downloading Type Standard type
(Can be saved*)
(Up to 10M bytes) Streaming type
(Cannot be saved)
(Up to 10M bytes) Description Plays the i-motion after downloading all the data. Plays the i-motion while downloading the i-motion data. Plays the i-motion while downloading the i-motion data. As the data is discarded after the playback, you cannot repeat playback or save the i-motion to the FOMA terminal.
* : May not be saved depending on the i-motion. 151 Downloading i-motion Saving i-motion
<Download i-motion>
Some i-motion cannot be saved on the FOMA 1 Sites screen (p.136)Select i-motion When data downloading is completed, the Data acquisition screen appears. To cancel downloading
t 2 Play The downloaded i-motion is played. Operations on the Music Player screenp.278 terminal.
You can save up to 100 i-motion, including the movies shot by the camera. The maximum number of i-motion to be stored varies depending on the amount of various stored data.
i-motion folderp.224 1 Data acquisition screen (p.152) SaveYES To cancel the saving
NO Returns to the data acquisition screen without saving the i-motion. Data acquisition 2 Select a folder Function menup.152 N i
m o d e
i
m o t i o n
i
C h a n n e l N
Some sites and i-motion do not allow downloading or the playback during the download.
For standard type i-motion, the downloading itself continues even if the playback is stopped during downloading.
Some i-motion is restricted to be played. is displayed at the beginning of the title for the i-motion with restrictions on the play count, period or time limit. The i-motion restricted on the playback period cannot be played before or after the period. If the battery pack is removed from the FOMA terminal for a long period of time, the date and time settings stored on the FOMA terminal may be reset. In this case i-motion restricted on the playback period or time limit cannot be played.
Some i-motion cannot be correctly played.
The playback while downloading may be interrupted or the images may be distorted due to the signal reception. Data acquisition screen (p.152) Add screen memoSaves the data acquisition screen to the screen memo.p.143 CertificateDisplays the contents of the SSL certificate when the page is compatible with SSL. N
You can also play an i-motion from a Screen memo after saving the data acquisition screen as a screen memo. However, you cannot save the data acquisition screen of:
i-motion restricted to be played
Streaming type i-motion
Incomplete i-motion 152
An i-motion without title is listed as movieXXX (XXX are numbers). Viewing i-motion details You can check the details of the i-motion, including the title, file size and replay restrictions. 1 Data acquisition screen (p.152) Property The i-motion info screen appears. Use c to scroll the display up or down to check the details such as the remaining count of the replay, the playback period and the time limit. Setting Whether to Play an i-motion Automatically
<i-motion auto-replay>
You can set whether to play an i-motion automatically when:
Downloading i-motion from the site screen
Displaying the Screen memo of the data acquisition screen
i-motion auto-replay setting is activated only for the standard type i-motion. The streaming type i-motion is played back automatically regardless of this setting. i-motion typesp.151 1 i-mode settings screen (p.148) i-motion auto-replaySelect any item:
ON (default)Automatically plays the i-motion after downloading. Some i-motion is played while downloading. OFFDisplays the data acquisition screen without playing the i-motion automatically after downloading. What is i-Channel?
i-channel is a news and information service distributed for i-mode subscribers with i-channel compatible handsets. A variety of information including news and weather forecasts is automatically delivered to the phones standby screen as subtitles, and subscribers can check a channel list of the information received by simply pressing the i-channel button (p). (Displaying the channel listp.153) i-Channel is a pay service you need to subscribe to
(you need to subscribe to i-mode service). There are two types of channels that you can enjoy with i-channel service: Basic Channel distributed by DOCOMO and Optional Channel by information service providers (IP). Basic Channel does not incur packet communications charges when information is updated. Optional Channel that users can choose and register at their own will incurs packet communications charges when information is updated. Detailed content will incur packet communications charges. During international roaming, both auto update and detailed content view incur packet communications charges. For details on i-Channel, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide [i-mode] FOMA version. This service provides only Japanese channels. Ticker on the standby screen If you have subscribed to i-Channel, the information is displayed on the standby screen as a ticker when the information is received.
flashes while i-Channel information is being delivered.
You can set the ticker display with i-Channel setting.p.154 i
m o d e
i
m o t i o n
i
C h a n n e l Ticker N
Ticker is displayed even when i-motion or i-ppli standby screen is set on the standby screen. Ticker is also displayed when the Self mode is set.
The ticker does not appear when the FOMA card
(UIM) is not inserted, when Public mode (Driving mode) is set or in Power saver mode. Viewing Sites from the Channel List You can display channel list screen to access information sites of i-Channel. You can display up to 15 channels including both Basic channel and Optional channel on the channel list. 1 On the standby screenp The Channel list screen appears. From the main menu
oi-Channel i-Channel list Channel list Function menup.154 2 Select channel item N
Information may be received when the channel list screen is displayed in some cases. Continued on next page 153 Ticker size setting (default: Standard) Selects the ticker font size from Small/
Standard/Large.p.93 Reset i-ChannelResets the i-Channel settings to the default settings. N
The i-Channel setting cannot be changed in Public mode (Driving mode), at the time of purchase (Reset i-Channel) or if the FOMA card (UIM) is not inserted, etc.
<Ticker display setting>
The ticker display setting remains when you unsubscribe from i-Channel or when you unsubscribe from i-mode service before unsubscribing from i-Channel, but tickers will not be displayed automatically.
Settings are retained for each mode of 2in1.
<Reset i-Channel>
i-Channel tickers are not displayed just after resetting i-Channel. The ticker is turned on again automatically when the information is updated automatically or when p is pressed to receive the latest information. i
m o d e
i
m o t i o n
i
C h a n n e l N
When information is received, the ring tone will not sound, and the vibrator does not vibrate. Also, the illumination does not flash. Channel list screen (p.153) Add shortcutp.94 ReplayDisplays the channel list screen from the beginning. Sound effectSets whether to play the sound effect of the channel list screen or not (ON/OFF). Window Open new windowUsing multi window p.140 Close windowCloses the displayed i-Channel window. Change windowSwitches windows when multiple websites are open. N
The setting of Sound effect set on the channel list screen is applied to Sound effect of i-mode settings. Setting i-Channel
<i-Channel setting>
You can set whether i-Channel information is displayed on the standby screen as a ticker or not. You can also set the scroll speed, color/front size of the ticker on the standby screen.
When set to ON, ticker always appears on the standby screen. When set to Receiving, ticker appears twice on the standby screen when news is received. 1 oi-ChannelSelect any item:
i-Channel listDisplays the channel list. i-Channel setting Ticker display setting (default: ON)Sets whether the ticker of channel information is displayed on the standby screen (ON/
Receiving/OFF). Ticker speed setting (default: Normal) Selects the scrolling speed of the ticker from Normal/High/Low. Ticker color setting*Selects the ticker color (White/Yellow/Blue/Red/Green).
* : Move the highlight to display the ticker color. 154 Mail Receive option Check new messages Reply to mail Forward mail Compose message/Send Deco-mail Template Attach file Save i-mode mail What is i-mode Mail? ...................................................................................................... 156 Composing i-mode mail/Deco-mail 156 Composing and Sending i-mode Mail......................................... Composing Deco-mail...................................................................................................... 158 Using Templates to Create Deco-mail............................................................................ 159 160 Attaching Files ................................................................................................. Saving i-mode Mail to Send Later.......................................................... 161 Storing Addresses in Mailing Lists.................................................................................. 162 Receiving and using i-mode mail When You Receive i-mode Mail ...................................................................................... 162 164 Receiving i-mode Mail Selectively ............................................................. 164 Checking for i-mode Mail ................................................................. 165 Replying to i-mode Mail ............................................................................... Forwarding i-mode Mail to Other Recipients................................................ 165 Adding Mail Addresses to Phonebook............................................................................ 166 Downloading Attached Files Selectively ......................................................................... 166 Checking and Saving the File Attached to i-mode Mail .................................................. 166 Having the FOMA Terminal Read Out Mail..................................................................... 168 Using mail boxes Displaying Mail in the Inbox and Outbox...................................................... Using mail records Using Mail Records............................................................ Specifying mail settings Setting up the FOMA Terminal Mail Functions .............................................. Using the message services When You Receive a Message ....................................................................................... 179 Viewing Messages in the Message Box ...................................................... 180 Using Early Warning Area Mail What is Early Warning Area Mail?................................................................................ 181 181 When You Receive Early Warning Area Mail ..................................... Setting Early Warning Area Mail .......................................................... 182 Using SMS Composing and Sending SMS.......................................................... When You Receive an SMS........................................................................ Checking for SMS ................................................................................... Specifying the SMS center setting.................................................... Compose SMS/Send Receive SMS Check new SMS SMS center selection Receive Area Mail Area Mail setting Sent address/Received address 182 183 184 184 Inbox/Outbox MessageR/F Mail Setting 178 177 170 155 3 4 Entering a mail address directly
Enter addressEnter a mail address You can enter up to 50 single-byte alphabets, numbers or symbols for a mail address. When you enter a mail address, the new mail address field is displayed below the filled field. You can enter other mail addresses and send a same mail message to multiple recipients. You can enter up to 5 mail addresses.
Enter a subject The Subject screen appears. You can enter up to 100 double-byte or 200 single-byte characters.
<No message>Enter the message body You can enter up to 5,000 double-byte characters. You can also insert a line feed (hard return) while editing the message. You can also insert a line feed by pressing g at the end of a sentence. counted as 1 double-byte character. Spaces are also counted in the same way as characters. You can also compose Deco-mail.p.158 You can use Template to compose and send the Deco-mail.p.159 Function menupp.158, is also Message 306 When you enter the message, number of bytes of the message appears on the upper right corner of the message. An animation appears while sending a mail. After sending a mail, select OK to return to the mail menu screen. After sending a mail, select OK to return to the mail menu screen. To cancel the transmission
p (Quit) or t (1 second or longer) Depending on the timing, the i-mode mail may be sent. When you are requested to send the mail again
YES 5 o (Send) What is i-mode Mail?
Subscribing to i-mode enables you to send and receive e-mail messages via the Internet not only between i-mode terminals. In addition to the message body, you can attach up to 10 files (pictures, videos, etc.) within the total of 2M bytes. As the FOMA terminal is compatible with Deco-mail, you can send expressive mail by changing font color, size, or background color of the message body or using Deco-mail pictographs.
For details on i-mode mail, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide [i-mode] FOMA version. Composing and Sending i-mode Mail
<Compose message/Send>
M a i l Use this procedure to compose and send a new i-mode mail message.
You can change the size and color of the text used in the message body, assign actions to the text and insert images, lines and other decorative features. Deco-mailp.158
You can store up to 500 sent mails (i-mode mail and SMS) (the number of mails you can actually store may be reduced depending on the file size). 1 uCompose message Mail menu New mail Function menup.157 2 The New mail screen appears.
<No address>Enter an address Enter an address to select the mail address input method. Searching in the phonebook
PhonebookSearch the phonebook (p.73) Select a mail address in the phonebook detail screen Searching in the address list
Sent address or Received addressSelect a mail address Using Mail member
Mail memberSelect a mail member For information on mail memberp.162 156 Entering Deco-mail pictographs Deco-mail pictograph is an image which fulfills certain conditions including moving pictograph. On the SO706i, you can enter Deco-mail pictograph in the mail message easily because Deco-mail pictograph entry is arranged by the categories.
You can download Deco-mail pictograph from websites, in addition to the pre-installed Deco-mail pictograph.p.144
Mails with Deco-mail pictographs are handled as Deco-mail. Entering Deco-mail pictograph Press and hold p (Pict/Sym) (
Pictograph D in the operation guidance area) for 1 second or longer on the Message screen to display the Pictograph D
(Deco-mail pictograph) entry screen which is arranged by the categories. Use b to move the frame and press d (Select) to enter Deco-mail pictograph.
[Category]
(Face mark/i-pictograph)
(Decoration)
(Weather/Seasons)
(Life)
(Food)
(Character)
(Text/Phrase)
(Miscellaneous)
[Other key operations]
u (Switch): Displays the previous category o (Switch): Displays the next category p (JUMP): Displays the category list t: Quits entering Deco-mail pictograph Composing i-mode mail from the phonebook screen Locate and display an e-mail address stored in the phonebook and then press d (MAIL), then the new mail screen with the mail address entered to the address appears. Searching the phonebookp.73 WEB mail Selecting WEB mail on the Mail menu (p.156), you can access the WEB mail site and compose and send mail from Address B of 2in1*.
* : For details on 2in1, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide
[2in1]. N
If the storage capacity for sent mails is full when you send a mail, mails are deleted from the oldest one (protected mails and mails in the Secret folder are not deleted). M a i l N
Some phones may be unable to receive a part of a subject.
When you use pictographs in the subject or message body and send the mail to the devices of other mobile phone companies (au/SoftBank), the pictographs are automatically converted to similar ones on the other partys device. However, pictographs may not be displayed properly depending on the model or functions of the other partys mobile Phone. When the receiver does not have the corresponding pictographs, the pictographs are converted to characters or .
When the recipient address is a phone number and the number is preceded by the 184 or 186 prefix, a message appears asking whether to delete the prefix before sending the mail when you try to send i-mode mail.
Depending on the signal quality, the recipient may not be able to display the text correctly. Also, the Transmission failed message may appear even after the message has been sent.
When 2in1 is in B mode, you cannot compose and send i-mode mail. New mail screen (p.156) SendSends i-mode mail. Savep.161 Delete receiverIf there are 2 or more addresses entered, you can delete the address you select. Change rcv. typeChanges the address type with an address highlighted. ToThe recipients address. The mail address entered in the To field is displayed in other recipients terminals. CcBroadcasts address. The mail address entered in the Cc field are also displayed to the other recipients. Select this option to send copies of the message sent to the address in the To field to other addresses. BccBroadcasts address. The mail address entered in the Bcc field are not displayed to the other recipients. Templatep.159 Attach fileAttaches a file such as melody, image or i-motion to an i-mode mail.p.160 Activate cameraActivates the camera function to shoot still images or movies. Photo modep.123 Movie modep.126 Delete att. fileDel all att. filesDeletes one or all attached file(s). Add headerPastes a header into the i-mode mail message. Continued on next page 157 Add signaturePastes your signature into the i-mode mail message. Erase messageErases the message body in the current i-mode mail message. DeleteDeletes the current i-mode mail message. N
<Change rcv. type>
E-mail addresses entered in the To and Cc fields are usually displayed to the recipient. However, depending on the terminal device and mail software used by the recipient, the e-mail addresses may not be displayed. Message screen (p.156)
For the functions other than the following, refer to the function menu of the Character entry (edit) screen (p.306). Decorate mailDecoration menusp.158 Select areaYou can decorate, copy or cut the selected text.p.308 PropertyDisplays the file name and size of an image inserted into the message when the cursor is at the left of the image. PreviewDisplays a preview of the message. M a i l Decorating the entered text Select the text you want to decorate and select decorating menu. The specified text is decorated. from the decoration menu, specify 2 Press u (Exit) to end the decoration menu N
If you forward received Deco-mail or quote Deco-mail in a reply, inserted images and decorations appear as quoted in the message.
If you quote or forward Deco-mail that includes an image that cannot be sent as mail, the image is deleted.
Some i-mode terminals receive mail that includes URL for viewing the Deco-mail. However, incompatible terminals may receive only the message with no URL. Decoration menus
When decoration applied by lines (ticker/swing/
inserting line/alignment) is selected, a line feed is automatically inserted when the menu is selected.
You can combine multiple decorations (example:
changing the color and size of characters and making them blink). Menu Description Changes the character color. You can select the pallet of 25 colors or 256 colors. Composing Deco-mail
<Deco-mail>
<25 colors>
The Deco-mail function allows you to make your text in the i-mode mail more visually appealing and exciting by changing the size and color of the text, the background color, assigning actions to text, and inserting images into your message.
If you decorate the message, you can enter fewer characters than in the i-mode mail which is not decorated.
When decorating text, you can enter text while decorating or you can decorate text after entering. 1 Message screen (p.156)rUse b to move the frame to select the decoration menu The Decoration menu appears.p.158 Decorating text while entering Decorated text is entered after decoration menu is selected. 158 Decoration menu Use b to move the frame and select the color to change. The latest 5 colors selected from the pallet of 256 colors are displayed at the bottom. The pallet of 25 colors and 256 colors switches each time you press o (Change). Selects the character size from
(Large/Standard/Small).
*1
Selects the image to insert from My picture folder. Makes characters Blink/Scroll from right to left (Ticker)/Scroll from right to left and left to right (Swing).
*1
*2 Starts or Ends the decoration. Sets or Releases the decoration of specified area. Menu Description Selects the character alignment position from
(Left/Center/
Using Templates to Create Deco-mail
<Template>
*1
*1
*1
*2
*1 Right). Inserts a line. Changes the background color of the message. Select the background color from the pallet in the same way as the character color. Return the entered character or message decoration 1 step back. Decorates the entered characters, or sets/
releases the decoration. Releases the decoration. Releases all the decoration. Displays the preview screen of the decoration.
*1: Cannot be selected in the decoration menu when is selected.
*2: Available in the decoration menu only when is selected. N
<Font color/Background color>
Pictographs are also displayed in the specified color.
, To return them to their original color, select specify the area to be changed and then select color of Deco-mail pictographs. However, you cannot specify the character
<Font size>
You cannot change the size of Deco-mail pictographs.
<Insert image>
You can insert up to 20 files, up to 90K bytes, of JPEG or GIF images, or Deco-mail pictographs regardless of the number of bytes of the message body or the file size of the attached file (the maximum number depends on the file size).
If you insert multiple copies of the same image, they are handled as 1 image. However, if you save or send an image once and then edit the image and insert it again, it is handled as a separate image.
If you insert an animation, the animation stops once a set time has elapsed.
<Blink/Ticker/Swing>
Blinking, ticker subtitling or swinging stops once a set time has elapsed.
<Edit decoration>
Even if you delete the decorated text, the decoration data itself may be retained and the number of characters that can be entered may be reduced. You should remove the decorations and then delete the text. If you hold down t for 1 second or longer, all the characters and decoration data are deleted. Template is a form for Deco-mail to which the layout and the ornament are already set. By using a template, you can compose Deco-mail easily.
You can download Template from sites.p.146
When you try to use Template in the following cases, a message appears asking whether to delete the edited content in the message:
When text is already entered in the mail message
When the header or signature is automatically inserted
When there is an attached file 1 uTemplate The Template list screen appears. To search templates by i-mode
Search by i-mode
YES 2 Select Template The Template preview screen appears.
During preview display, use v to display other templates. M a i l Template list Function menup.160 Template preview Function menup.160 3 o (MAIL)Edit the message body To activate Template from the New mail screen (p.156)
u (FUNC)TemplateLoad template Select Template 159 Attaching Files
<Attach file>
You can send i-mode mails with files attached.
You can attach the following files:
Image (still image, image)
SWF Flash movie
movie, i-motion
Melody
PDF data
Documents in a microSD card
ToruCa, ToruCa (detail)
Phonebook entry
My profile data
Schedule or To Do list entry
Bookmark
Other files in the microSD card 1 New mail screen (p.156)p (Att.) Select any item:
Imagei-motionMelodyPDFSelects a folder on the Phone or microSD, and then selects data to attach. The number of selecting folders varies depending on the selected device (Phone/microSD). DocumentSelect a document in a microSD card. ToruCaSelects a folder on the Phone or microSD, and then selects data to attach. The number of selecting folders varies depending on the selected device (Phone/microSD). PhonebookSelects the phonebook on the Phone or microSD, and then searches for a phonebook entry (selects a folder for microSD) to select data to attach. How to search the phonebookp.73 My ProfileAttaches the My Profile data. ScheduleSelects the Schedule or To Do list, and then selects data to attach. BookmarkSelects the bookmark on the Phone
(i-mode/Full Browser) or microSD, and then selects data to attach. OtherSelects other files in the microSD card. Saving a template You can save Deco-mail you compose as Template.
You can save up to 500 Templates.
If the message has any attached file other than inserted images, the file is deleted.
Template is saved in Template in the Mail menu. 1 Message-decorated New mail screen u (FUNC)TemplateSave templateYES N
The subject of the message being composed is used as Template title. If no subject is entered, YYYY/MM/
DD hh:mm is used as the title (Y: year, M: month, D:
day, h: hour, m: minute). Template list screen (p.159) M a i l Compose messageUses Template to create Deco-mail.p.159 SortSorts Template in a selected criteria. Edit titleEdits the title of Template. You can enter up to 10 double-byte or 20 single-byte characters. InfoDisplays Template size, save date and whether or not it includes images. No. of messagesDisplays the number of saved Template. DeleteSelects the deleting method from Delete this/
Delete selected/Delete all. About multiple-choicep.38 Template preview screen
(p.159) Compose messageUses Template to create Deco-mail.p.159 EditEdits Template. Save insert imageSelects the image inserted to Template and saves it on the My picture folder. If the image can be set as the standby screen, you can select whether to set it as the standby screen or not after saving it. N
Template is not available when 2in1 is in B mode.
<Edit>
The title used when the template is saved as a separate file is YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm (Y: year, M:
month, D: day, h: hour, m: minute). 160 To send an image to a mova terminal as i-shot You can send a mail attached with an image to a mova terminal as i-shot. When you send a mail to a mova terminal, you can attach only 1 JPEG image. If you attach a GIF image downloaded from sites, etc., the attached file is deleted and only the message reaches the recipient. When you send mail to a mova terminal, unless the recipient has set the incoming message length, he or she can only receive a message up to 184 double-byte characters (369 bytes) long. If the recipient has set the incoming message length, the recipient can receive a message up to 2,000 double-byte characters including the i-shot URL (where the image is kept). 2 Compose and send an i-mode mail To check the attached file
Select a file You cannot play the melody which exceeds 100K bytes or the SWF Flash movie. To delete the attached file
Highlight the fileu (FUNC)Delete att. fileYES To delete all the attached files, select Del all att. files. For details of the subsequent procedure, see Composing and Sending i-mode Mail (p.156). N
You can attach up to 10 files, up to 2M bytes regardless of the number of bytes of the message body or the file size of the inserted image (the maximum number depends on the file size). When attaching ToruCa, you can attach ToruCa up to 1K bytes and ToruCa (detail) up to 100K bytes for 1 case.
You cannot attach a file which is forbidden to be sent as a mail attachment or output from your FOMA terminal.
You can attach images or movies shot with the camera even if File restriction is set to File restricted.
If you send an attached file which is not supported by the receiving terminal, the attached file may be deleted automatically at the i-mode Center. In this case, the (Attached file deleted) message is added to the mail message.
If an image selected for Image is larger than 320 dots wide 240 dots high or 240 dots wide 320 dots high, Attach image appears and you can select Attach mail or QVGA scale down.
Depending on the recipients mobile phone model, sent image may be displayed incorrectly or may not be displayed. A coarse image may also be displayed. N
When you send an i-motion mail to the terminal which is not compatible with the i-motion mail (i-motion attached i-mode mail), the recipient receives an mail with the URL for viewing the i-motion and can view the i-motion by selecting the URL.
When you send an i-motion mail, depending on the recipients mobile phone model, movies may not be received or displayed correctly, may be choppy or converted to continuous still images for viewing. When sending a mail to a terminal other than 2MB-compatible handsets, it is recommended to set File size to 500KB, Select size to QCIF (176 144) and Quality setting to Fine mode when shooting movies. Playing moviesp.233
If the recipient is not FOMA SO706i, melodies you send may not be played correctly. Saving i-mode Mail to Send Later
<Save i-mode mail>
You can save the composing mail on the FOMA terminal temporarily, then edit and send the saved mail afterwards. M a i l Saving i-mode mail
The Draft mailbox can hold up to 50 i-mode mail and SMS in total.
You cannot compose i-mode mail when draft mails are full. 1 New mail screen (p.156)u (FUNC) Save The mail which is not edited cannot be saved. Sending draft i-mode mail 1 uDraft The Draft mail list screen appears. Draft mail list Function menup.162 2 Select a mailEdit the address, subject or message body and then send the mail Continued on next page 161 N
When 2in1 is in B mode, you cannot display the Draft mail list screen. 3 Highlight <Not stored>o (Edit) Enter the mail address To store more e-mail addresses, repeat step 3. Mail member list screen (p.162) Compose messageComposes an i-mode mail message with the members of the mail member pasted into the recipients field. Edit member nameEdits the name of the mail member. You can enter up to 10 double-byte or 20 single-
byte characters. Reset member nameResets the mail member name to the default name. Mail member detail screen (p.162) Edit addressEdits the e-mail address. Look-up addressEnters the e-mail address by browsing the phonebook, sent address list or received address list. Delete thisDelete allDeletes one or all mail member(s). When You Receive i-mode Mail When the FOMA terminal is in a service area, i-mode mail or MessageR/F is automatically sent to the FOMA terminal from the i-mode Center.
You can store up to 1,000 received mails (i-mode mail and SMS) (the number of mails you can actually store may be reduced depending on the file size).
You can have the FOMA terminal read out the received mail message.p.168 Displaying new messages automatically
<Auto receive mail/Message>
1 The Receiving screen appears when the reception of i-mode mail or Message starts and the Received result screen appears when the reception is finished. Draft mail list screen (p.161) List settingSelects a mail-list format from Subject/
Name/Address. iC transmissionp.259 Send Ir datap.258 iC trans. allp.260 Send all Ir datap.258 Copy to microSDp.248 No. of messagesDisplays the number of mails in the Draft mailbox. Store in Centerp.176 DeleteSelects the deleting method from Delete this/
Delete selected/Delete all. About multiple-choicep.38 M a i l Storing Addresses in Mailing Lists By storing addresses in the Mail member, you can easily enter multiple addresses only by selecting the Mail member.
You can store up to 20 mail members with up to 5 e-mail addresses in each list. 1 iOWN DATAMail member The Mail member list screen appears. Mail member list Function menup.162 Mail member detail Function menup.162 2 Select a mail member The Mail member detail screen appears. 162
flashes while receiving a mail and stops flashing and lights up when the reception is finished.
or flashes while receiving a Message. 2 The number of received mail or MessageR/F appears on the received result screen.
The number of mails includes the number of SMS.
When you select mail or Message on the received result screen, the Received mail list screen (pp.170, 171) or Message list screen
(p.180) appears.
If no operation is performed for about 15 seconds while the received result screen is displayed, the previous screen appears for mails and Detail screen appears for Message. The display duration may vary depending on the Mail/Msg. ring time setting.
Press o (Read) on the received result screen to have the FOMA terminal read out the mail message.p.168
The detail screen of MessageR/F is displayed automatically when the message is received on the standby screen.
If no operation is performed for about 15 seconds while the Message detail screen is displayed, the standby screen reappears. However, if you use operations such as scrolling, the detail screen continues to be displayed.
You can set the FOMA terminal to display the detail screen of MessageR/F automatically with Auto-display setting. When you receive a mail exceeds 100K bytes If the total amount of mail message, inserted image(s) and attached file(s) exceeds 100K bytes, the attached file(s) cannot be automatically received when receiving mail. In this case, receive manually later on. You can download the attached file which exceeds 100K bytes manually from the i-mode Center.p.166 N
If the storage capacity for received mails is full when you receive a mail, mails are deleted from oldest read mails (unread or protected mails and mails in the Secret folder are not deleted).
When the FOMA terminal cannot receive any more mails (because it is full with unread and protected mails),
(red) appear. Read the unread mails or unprotect the unnecessary mails.
(red)/
When 2in1 is in A mode or B mode and a mail arrives only at address in unspecified mode, the Mail Receiving... screen appears, but the receiving results screen and ring tone does not sound. do not appear. In addition, the mail N
If you receive i-mode mail from a terminal capable of specifying To, Cc and Bcc recipients, refer to the mail detail screen to see whether your own address is in the To, Cc or Bcc field.pp.170, 172
If you receive i-mode mail when the standby screen is not displayed and Operation preferred is set in Receiving setting, the FOMA terminal does not ring. When Alarm preferred is selected, the FOMA terminal plays the ring tone and displays the reception results screen.
If you receive an i-shot service mail sent from a mova terminal, images arrive as attached files. Viewing a new mail 1 On the standby screendSelect Shortcut icon To display the unread mail list
On the standby screendUse b to select The Unread mail list screen appears. M a i l Unread mail icon Unread mail list Function menup.175 N
Characters that cannot be displayed appear as spaces.
If the number of characters in the i-mode mail message body exceeds the maximum number of characters that can be received, either / or // is inserted at the end of the message and the remaining portion is automatically deleted.
If the size of received i-mode mail exceeds the size set in Limit Mail Size, the pasted data is deleted at the i-mode Center and you cannot download it.
If you receive decorated mail (HTML mail) from a PC, the decorations may not be displayed correctly. 163 M a i l Receiving i-mode Mail Selectively
<Receive option>
You can check the subject of i-mode mail kept at the i-mode Center, then select the mail to receive or delete the mail at the i-mode Center without receiving.
To use this function, set Receive option setting to ON beforehand. When set to ON, you cannot receive i-mode mail automatically. When mail arrives A message appears saying that mail is kept at the i-mode Center, and the screen. When you confirm the message and press any key, the message and icon disappear. icon is displayed at the top of Receiving mail selectively 1 uReceive option You can also access Receive option as follows:
oiMenu (Menu List)
(Receive option) If Receive option setting is set to OFF A message appears asking whether you want to enable mail receive options. Select Receive option setting to specify the Receive option setting. When you set the receive option to ON, the Mail menu screen reappears. 2 Select and set option for each item of i-mode mail
(Accept): Accepts the selected mail.
(Delete): Deletes the selected mail.
(Hold): Leaves the selected mail at the i-mode Center. Use Check new message to receive the mail. To delete all mails
(Delete) at the bottom of the page
(OK) When there are multiple pages of mail
(Previous page) or
(Next page)Move to other pages and select the mail to be accepted When you view the 2nd page, your selections on the 1st page remain valid. The meanings of the icons displayed after
(Size):XXX (bytes) are as follows:
: Image file attached
: Melody file attached
: i-motion attached 164
: ToruCa attached
: Other file attached 3 (Receive/Delete)
(OK) The completion screen appears and mail reception begins. To cancel selective reception
(Cancel) When there are multiple pages of mail Selecting / (Receive/Delete) mid-way through the pages applies your options (hold, receive or delete) to the mail up to the selected page and mail on the remaining pages remains kept at the i-mode Center. N
If you use Check new messages, all messages are received even if the receive option setting is set to ON. Deselect Mail in Set check new messages if you do not want to receive any mail.
If you display the receive option screen, the icon disappears even when you do not receive or delete mail. The terminal off or display the mail screen. icon also disappears if you turn the FOMA
When 2in1 is in B mode, you cannot launch the Receive option. Checking for i-mode Mail
<Check new messages>
The i-mode mail or Messages which the FOMA terminal could not receive are kept at the i-mode Center. You can receive the kept i-mode mail or Messages by checking for i-mode mail at the i-mode Center.
i-mode mail messages are kept at the i-mode Center is displayed in the following cases:
When the FOMA terminal is turned off
When
When the Inbox is full
When Receive option setting is set to ON
During a videophone call
When Self mode is set
When connecting to the FirstPass Center
Use Set check new messages to specify which items are checked for. 1 u (1 second or longer) The check new messages screen appears. You can also check new messages by following procedures.
oCheck new messages
uCheck new messages To cancel the inquiry
p (Quit) or t (1 second or longer) during the inquiry A message may be received depending on the timing of the cancellation. 2 Check for new i-mode mails, Message R/FBack N
Depending on the signal reception status, you cannot check for new mails or the checking may be canceled.
Even when there is i-mode mail kept at the i-mode icon may not be displayed if the mail Center, the arrived at the Center while the FOMA terminal is turned off or the is displayed.
You can store up to 100 MessageR/F respectively at the i-mode Center, and stored up to 72 hours. Once the maximum number of stored messages is reached, messages are deleted as a new message arrives, starting with the oldest message. Replying to i-mode Mail
<Reply to mail>
You can send a reply to an i-mode mail message. You can also quote the received i-mode mail in your reply. 1 Received mail list screen (p.171)/
Received mail detail screen (p.172) o (Reply) To reply by quoting the received message
u (FUNC)Reply with quote You can select this option on the received mail detail screen. A single quotation symbol (set to > by default) is displayed at the start of the quoted message in the reply. To edit the quotation symbolp.179 To reply to the sender of mail with multiple addresses
Reply or Reply with quoteTo sender To reply to the sender and all addresses of mail with multiple addresses
Reply or Reply with quoteTo all If replies cannot be sent to the sender, all the addresses, including the other broadcast addresses, are deleted from the displayed mail reply screen. If the list of broadcast addresses includes some to which replies cannot be sent, these addresses to which replies cannot be sent are deleted from the displayed mail reply screen. 2 Edit the subject and message body o (Send) After the reply has been sent the changes to
. icon N
When 2in1 is in B mode or Dual mode, you cannot reply or reply with quote an i-mode mail sent to Address B.
When data such as a melody or specification for activating i-ppli is pasted into the mail message, the pasted data is deleted. Forwarding i-mode Mail to Other Recipients
<Forward mail>
You can forward i-mode mail you have received to other people. 1 Received mail detail screen (pp.170, 172)u (FUNC)Forward
<No address>Enter an address You can edit the subject and message body before you send a mail. M a i l 2 o (Send) After the reply has been sent the changes to
. icon N
If the file which is prohibited to be attached to mails or output from the FOMA terminal is attached to or pasted, the file and its information are deleted.
When data such as a melody or specification for activating i-ppli is pasted into the mail message, the pasted data is deleted.
When there is any attached file whose downloading is not completed, the file is not attached.p.166
When 2in1 is in B mode, you cannot forward the mail.
When 2in1 is in Dual mode, a forwarded mail to Address B is sent as a mail of Address A. 165 Adding Mail Addresses to Phonebook You can add the e-mail address or phone number of the sender of received mail to your phonebook.
For the received SMS message, the senders phone number is stored in the Phonebook as a phone number.
<Example: To add the senders e-mail address to the phonebook>
1 Received mail detail screen (pp.170, 172)u (FUNC)Save address When there are multiple e-mail addresses to be added
On the e-mail address selection screen, select the e-mail address you want to add To add an e-mail address or phone number included in the body
Mail detail screenHighlight an e-mail address or phone number you want to add u (FUNC)Add to phonebook 2 YESPhone or UIM Adding information to the phonebookp.70 M a i l Downloading Attached Files Selectively When the size of a mail including the message body, inserted images and attached files exceeds 100K bytes, you cannot receive the attached files automatically when you receive the mail. In this case, you need to download the attached files, manually.
You also have to download the files manually for the files that are not checked in Prefer attachment. appears
On the received mail detail screen, when the attached file is not downloaded and appears when the attached file is downloaded halfway. 1 Received mail detail screen (pp.170, or icon 172)Select the attached file with Data downloading begins. When data downloading is completed, the screen about data downloading completion appears. To cancel downloading
p (Quit) The data downloaded halfway is saved. In this case, you can download the rest of the data repeating step 1. 166 2 After downloading the data, contents of the data is displayed according to the file type of the attached file N
When there is any attached file whose downloading is not completed, the data retention period of the attached file is displayed on the Received mail detail screen(pp.170, 172). When all the attached files are downloaded, the retention period disappears from the screen. You cannot download the attached file whose retention period is expired.
When the storage capacity of Inbox is exceeded when you receive an attached file, the received mails are deleted automatically according to the size of the attached file (many received mails may be deleted depending on the size of the attached file). Note that unread or protected received mails and received mails in Secret folder are not deleted. It is recommended to protect mails you want to keep.p.175 Checking and Saving the File Attached to i-mode Mail You can check and save the data attached to or pasted into received i-mode mail.
You cannot save the attached file whose downloading has not completed. To save the data, download the data beforehand.p.166 Saving melodies
<Save melody>
You can save a melody (
into received i-mode mail to the FOMA terminal.
If the sender is not FOMA SO706i, the received
) attached to or pasted melodies may not be played correctly. 1 Received mail detail screen (pp.170, 172)Highlight the melody u (FUNC)Save dataYES Select a folder To stop the melody
p, r, 0 to 9, w, q 2 YESSelect an item When you do not set the melody to the ring tone, etc.
NO N
If there are multiple pasted files, you may not be able to view the pasted files themselves.
To prevent melodies from playing automatically when you open mail, set Start attachment (auto) to OFF. Saving images
<Save image>
You can save images (
received i-mode mail. Saving the inserted imagep.176
) attached to or pasted into 1 Received mail detail screen (pp.170, 172)Move the frame to the image u (FUNC)Save dataYES Select a folder To change image display to file name display
Select an image To return to the image display, select the file name. 2 YESSelect an item When you do not set the image to the standby screen, etc.
NO Saving i-motion
<Save i-motion>
You can save the i-motion (
i-mode mail.
) attached to received 1 Received mail detail screen (pp.170, 172) Highlight an i-motion u (FUNC)Save dataYES Select a folder Saving ToruCa
<Save ToruCa>
You can save the ToruCa and ToruCa (detail) (
attached to received i-mode mail.
) 1 Received mail detail screen (pp.170, 172)Select a ToruCa The ToruCa appears. 2 o (Save)Select a folder You can also save the data by selecting Save data from the function menu. 2 u (FUNC)SaveYESSelect a folder
Documents can only be saved to a microSD card.
If there is no folder in the microSD card, a folder is created automatically and there is no need to select one. To return to the received mail detail screen
t Saving the tool data You can save the tool data (phonebook, schedule or bookmark) (
) attached to received i-mode mail.
<Example: To save the schedule>
1 Received mail detail screen (pp.170, 172)Select a file The information of schedule appears. You can also save the data by selecting Save data from the function menu. 2 d (Save) Phonebook
d (Save)Phone or UIM Adding information to the phonebookp.70 Bookmark
d (Select)Select the destination For i-mode, i-mode Browser and microSD can be selected. For the Full Browser, Full Browser and microSD can be selected. N
You cannot save the schedule on the microSD card.
When you save the file which contains multiple data on the FOMA terminal, only the first data is saved
(when you save the data on the microSD card, all the data is saved). Saving other files Saving PDF data and documents Save PDF data (
received i-mode mail.
) or documents (
) attached to 1 Received mail detail screen (pp.170, 172)Select a file A PDF data or document appears. Viewing PDF data or documentsp.263 You can save other files (
i-mode mail.
Other files are automatically saved to the Other
) attached to received folder on the microSD card. When the data is saved, the file name is changed.p.244 1 Received mail detail screen (pp.170, 172)Highlight the other file u (FUNC)Save dataYES M a i l 167 Having the FOMA Terminal Read Out Mail
The voice may be heard by others while reading out, so move to an area where it will not disturb other people.
The FOMA terminal reads out at the volume level set in Phone in Ring volume. When set to Silent or Step, messages are read out at the Level 2 volume.
A mail is not read out when:
Read out received mail under Read out setting is set to OFF
During a call or data communication (excluding packet communication)
In Manner mode and no equipment such as a flat plug earphone/microphone with switch (optional) is connected
Playing music with the Music Player Having the FOMA terminal read out new mail M a i l When the reception results screen appears with receiving the mail or when the checking result screen appears after performing Check new messages, the FOMA terminal can read out the mail message.
When Select language is set to English, a mail is not read out.
<Example: When Check new messages is performed>
1 Press o (Read) while the checking result screen is displayed If the senders name and e-mail address are stored in the phonebook, the message is read out after the voice notification
(This is from ). When reading out mails is completed, the FOMA terminal emits the pipip tone and ends the reading out screen. When you receive multiple mail at the same time The FOMA terminal reads out mails in reverse chronological order of reception date. When you press j during reading out, the FOMA terminal emits the beep sound before reading out the next mail. If there is no more mail, the FOMA terminal stops the reading out. Having the FOMA terminal read out mail in the mail box Messages written in English are spelled out in alphabetic reading. 1 Received mail detail screen (pp.170, 172)u (FUNC)Read out message To cancel reading out
d (Stop) Press d (PLAY) again to start over reading out. To end reading out
o (Exit) N
While a message is being read out, an image appears in the upper half of the screen. When the sent address and image of the received mail are stored in the phonebook, the stored image appears.
While a message is being read out, press c, a (
) or s () to scroll the message. Pressing any of other keys cancels reading out. However, when you press 5 or 2 for 1 second or longer to turn the display light or Shield view function ON or OFF, it does not end reading out.
If you receive a call while a message is being read out, reading out is canceled and the ringing screen appears.
If you receive a new mail or message while a message is being read out, the setting in Receiving setting is applied. When the specified alarm time is reached while a message is being read out, the setting in Alarm setting is applied.
Mail-linked i-ppli mail cannot be read out on the result screen but on the detail screen.
The FOMA terminal cannot read out SMS report.
The FOMA terminal may not be able to read out mails received from PCs. Reading out rules The read out mail function generally follows the following rules when reading out received mail. Symbols and pictographs Symbols and pictographs are not read out, except for certain symbols.
* The FOMA terminal may not correctly read out sentences that include symbols and pictographs. Numbers The FOMA terminal reads out numbers up to 16 digits long. Example: 1234 Sen nihyaku sanju yon 168 Amount of money If a currency symbol (e.g. (single-byte or double-
byte)) is placed at the beginning of a number up to 16 digits long, the FOMA terminal reads out the number as amount of money. If commas (,) are used as a delimiting character in an input string, the FOMA will recognize the string as amount of money only if the commas are used every 3 digits. Example: 12345 12,345 Phone number If numbers are delimited by hyphens - or parentheses
() as the phone number for the general phone, the mobile phone or the free dial phone, the FOMA terminal reads them out as phone numbers but not as sequences of digits. The FOMA terminal will also read numbers preceded by Tel: as phone numbers. Example: Tel: 0120-102-... Teru zeroichinizero Ichiman nisen sanbyaku yonjuu goen ichizeroni ... Time Numbers separated by a colon : are read out as time.* If the hour component is a 1- or 2-digit number and the minute component is a 2-digit number, the number is read out as time. If AM or PM is added before or after the number, it is read out before the number. Hour : Minute (Hour = 0 to 29: Minute = 00 to 59) Example: 23:15 Nijusanji jugofun AM Hour : Minute or Hour : Minute AM
(Hour = 0 to 12: Minute = 00 to 59) Example: AM 5:05 Gozen goji gofun
* : The time entered in the format of Hour : Minute :
Second (e.g. 23:15:10) is not read out. Date Numbers separated by a slash (/) or a period (.) in the pattern for date are read out as date. If M, T, S or H (upper case) is inserted before a date, the corresponding (Japanese) era name (Meiji, Taisho, Showa, Heisei) is read out. Year/Month/Day or Year.Month.Day
(Year = 0 to 9999; Month = 1 to 12; Day = 1 to 31) Example:2008/8/1 2008/8/01 2008.8.1 2008.8.01 Nisenhachinen hachigatsu tsuitachi H Year/Month/Day or H Year.Month.Day
(Year = 0 to 99; Month = 1 to 12; Day = 1 to 31) Example: H20.8.1 Heisei nijunen hachigatsu tsuitachi
The above formats for numbers, amount of money, phone numbers, time and date are also used for double-byte characters.
When amount of money, phone numbers, time or date are read out and the string read out is immediately preceded or followed by any of the characters listed below, the numbers will not be delimited correctly. If you want to have the FOMA terminal read out amount of money, phone numbers, time or date correctly, it is recommended to use a space as the delimiting character before and after the string. 0 to 9, A to Z (upper case), :, , /, ., -
(double-byte or single-byte) Symbol The FOMA terminal can read out the following symbols when used with numbers.
$ (dollars)doru
(yen)en
(degrees)do
$ (dollars)doru
% (percent)paasento
(degrees)do
(yen)en
(percent)paasento
(mm)miri
(cm)senchi
(grams)guramu
(ares)aaru
(liters)rittoru
(calories) karorii
(cents)sento
(millibars)miribaaru
(millimeters) mirimeetoru
(kilometers) kiromeetoru
(kilograms) kiroguramu
(square meters) heihoumeetoru
(kilograms)kiro
(meters)meetoru
(tons)ton
(hectares)hekutaaru
(watts)watto
(dollars)doru
(percent)paasento
(pages)peeji
(centimeters) senchimeetoru
(milligrams) miriguramu
(cc)siisii M a i l Others
Alphabetic characters are read out in alphabet reading, but may be read otherwise in certain combinations.
Depending on the content of a sentence or description (especially geographic names or proper nouns), the FOMA terminal may not read out the sentence or may read it out incorrectly.
The voice used to read out is different from natural voice. The pronunciation or accent may be difficult to understand in some cases.
The FOMA terminal separates sentences to read out when there is punctuation marks (periods and commas), line feeds and spaces, except when a period (.) or comma (,) is preceded and/or followed by numbers. When there is no delimiting punctuation in the text, the sentences are separated automatically. Depending on the sentences, it may take time before the FOMA terminal starts reading out. The FOMA terminal may read out incorrectly when there are kanji characters. To ensure that the content of the mail is read out correctly, it is Continued on next page 169 recommended to ask people you frequently correspond to follow the following guidelines:
Create message using katakana for nouns, especially and proper nouns such as geographic names and personal names.
Create message using punctuation marks. N
On the received mail detail screen, you can have the FOMA terminal read out the mail message.p.168
When 2in1 is in B mode, you cannot display the Outbox folder list screen. Displaying Mail in the Inbox and Outbox
<Inbox/Outbox>
The FOMA terminal can store up to 500 received i-mode mail and SMS in total and up to 400 sent i-mode mail and SMS in total.
You can protect up to 500 received mails and 250 sent mails.
The number of the messages the FOMA terminal can store or protect varies depending on the data size. When data with large file size is stored, the number decreases. Reading i-mode mail messages M a i l
<Example: To read a received mail message>
1 uInboxSelect a folderSelect a mail The Secret folder is displayed in the folder list screen when the FOMA terminal is in Secret mode or Secret data only mode. Changing the mail character size or list display mode Changing the mail character size
Press v on the mail detail screen for 1 second or longer to change the character size. N
When you change the display mode with the above keypad operation, the settings of Mail of Character size in Font and Font size also changes. Changing the mail list screen display mode (1line+body/2 lines/1 line)
You can switch among 1line + body, 2 lines and 1 line using the Mail list disp. setting in Mail Setting in the Mail menu. 1line+body 2 lines 1 line Changing the mail list screen display mode (Name/Address/Subject)
Press q on the mail detail screen for 1 second or longer to switch the Subject Name Address. Mail menu Inbox folder list Function menup.173
<Example: 1 line+body>
3 Subject Name Address Received mail list Received mail detail Function menup.175 Press v on the mail detail screen too view the previous or next mail. Function menup.176 170 N
You can also change the display mode by selecting List setting from the function menu of the mail list screen, then selecting Subject, Name, or Address.
The part of Subject/Name/Address may not be displayed properly. Display light function
When you open the FOMA terminal, press a key or send or receive an i-mode mail or SMS, the FOMA terminals display light is turned on for about 15 seconds (The time for which the backlight stays on varies depending on Mail/Msg. ring time setting). However, when an i-mode mail or SMS is displayed, the time for which the backlight stays on varies depending on the length of the message.
The backlight does not turn on if Lighting is set to OFF in Backlight. Guide to the mail folder list screens Guide to the mail list screens 1 2 2 1 3 4 Received mail list Sent mail list Mail status
-1 Received mail Icon Description Unread mail Read mail Read and protected mail Forwarded mail Replied-to mail Inbox folder list Outbox folder list Icon Description Normal folder Mail-linked i-ppli folder Secret folder
: Contains unread mail
: Folder lock set
: Automatic sorting settings (p.174) set
: Protected
-2 Sent mail M a i l Icon Description
: Protected Mail to one recipient Mail to multiple recipients
(broadcast mail)
: Failed to send some mails
: Failed to send Message sent/received time and date
-1 The time is displayed for mail sent/received today
-2 The date is displayed for mail sent/received yesterday or earlier Sender/receiver, subject or information When there is no subject, No title is displayed. Mail type, attached file information Icon Description SMS in the FOMA terminal SMS in the FOMA card Continued on next page 171 Icon Description N SMS with SMS report received
When you view i-mode mail with an attached image in the received mail detail screen, the screen switches between image display and file name display each time you move the frame to the image and press d (Select). On the sent mail detail screen, selecting file name display displays images. Press t or y to display file names.
When 2in1 is in A mode or B mode, a mail arrived at the unused address is not displayed. Guide to the mail detail screens 2 5 8 9 0
1 1 3 4 2 6 7 9 0
Received mail detail Sent mail detail Mail status Refer to of Guide to the mail list screen (p.171) Mail sent/received time and date Recipient type (Received mail) Icon Description The recipient type addressed by the senderp.157 Mail address information of the 2in1 setting Icon
Description Mail to Address B of 2in1
* : Displayed only when the 2in1 is in Dual mode Sender (Received mail) Icon Description The name or e-mail address of the sender
: Cannot reply-to Icon stored in the phonebook When the mail address or phone number is stored in the phonebook, the icon stored in the phonebook is displayed.
M a i l Area Mail Mail to Address B of 2in1 Time-adjusted mail Mail with an attached or pasted melody Mail with attached or inserted images Mail with an attached i-motion Mail with attached ToruCa or ToruCa
(detail) PDF-attached mail Mail with attached Tool data
(phonebook, schedule or bookmark) Document-attached mail Mail with attached Other files An i-ppli can be launched from the message body An i-ppli cannot be launched from the message body (the mail is moved to the Secret folder) Mails sent/received by a mail-linked i-ppli Mail with undownloaded attached file p.166 Mail with incomplete attached file p.166 Mail with undownloadable attached file Mail with multiple attached files or mixture of attached files and pasted files Mail with multiple pasted data (also displayed when the data is pasted along with i-ppli To) Mail with the FOMA card security function (you use the FOMA card different from the one used when the mail is sent/received)
* : Displayed only when the 2in1 is in Dual mode
: Attached file is deleted (for ToruCa or Flash movie, also displayed when the attached file is deleted by scanning function) All the files of multiple files are deleted
: A part of the file of multiple files is deleted 172 Recipient and recipient type (Sent mail) Icon Description The name, e-mail address of the recipient and the recipient typep.157
: Failed to send Recipient and recipient type of broadcast mail
(Received mail) Up to 4 recipients can be displayed. Icon Description The names, e-mail addresses of the recipients except yourself and the recipient type for broadcast mailp.157
: Cannot reply-to Subject at the beginning for received SMS when the SMS is on the FOMA If there is no subject, No title is displayed. Displays
(displays the card) When an SMS report has been received, also displayed. Displays Area Mail when an Area Mail has been received is Message body Displayed at the end of the message body Attached file information The file name and file size are also displayed. Icon Description Invalid inserted image
* Other than the above icons, the same icons as the list screen may appear in some cases. Refer to Mail type, attached file information in p.171. N
In the following cases, the e-mail address is displayed instead of Name, even when the phone number or e-
mail address is stored in the phonebook:
When Restrict dialing is set and the phone number is not designated in the Restrict dialing setting
When the FOMA terminal is in Secret data only mode and the phone number or e-mail address is not stored as secret data
When the FOMA terminal is not in Secret or Secret data only mode and the phone number or e-mail address is stored as secret data
When 2in1 is set to A mode and the phonebook is set to B mode, or the mode is set to B mode and the phonebook is set to A mode. M a i l Mail folder list screen
(pp.170, 171) Add folderAdds a folder and set the Auto-sort for the new folder. Also, set whether to add the same folder to the Inbox/Outbox. You can add up to 22 folders. Setting Auto-sortp.174 Auto-sortp.174 Edit folder nameEdits the folder name of the added folder. You can enter up to 10 double-byte or 20 single-
byte characters. Folder lockSets/Releases the folder lock.p.112 Sort folderSelects the position to move to and rearranges the folder. No. of messagesDisplays the number of messages, unread messages and protected messages in all the folders. Open folderDisplays list of the mails in a folder. Add shortcut*p.94 iC trans. allp.260 Send all Ir datap.258 CopyAll to microSDp.248 Delete folderDeletes a folder. Delete read*Deletes all the read mails. Delete allDeletes all mails.
* : This function is available only for the Inbox folder list screen. N
You cannot delete, sort or rename the folders (Inbox and Outbox) that are already installed on the FOMA terminal at the time of purchase. You cannot use the Auto-sort function with these folders either.
<Add folder>
When you download a mail-linked i-ppli, an i-ppli mail folder is automatically created (up to 5).
<Sort folder>
You cannot run Sort folder when only one folder is added.
<No. of messages>
You cannot check the number of the following i-mode mail or SMS messages.
Messages in the Secret folder
Messages set not to be displayed in the 2in1 setting
You cannot check the MessageR/F.
<iC trans. all> <Send all Ir data> <CopyAll to microSD>
The MessageR/F are not included. Continued on next page 173 N
<Delete folder>
You cannot delete an i-ppli mail folder if there is a corresponding mail-linked i-ppli. You can delete an i-
ppli mail folder if there is no corresponding software, but the folder created in the Inbox folder screen or Outbox folder screen is also deleted.
If you delete a folder that is specified in the Auto-sort settings, the automatic sorting setting for that folder is also canceled.
<Delete read> <Delete all>
The following i-mode mail or SMS messages will not be deleted.
Protected messages
Messages in the Secret folder List settingSelects a mail-list format from Name/Address. ReleaseReleases the Auto-sort criteria by selecting Release this/Release selected/Release all. About multiple-choicep.38 N
If received or sent mail meets multiple sort criteria, the priority of the Auto-sort settings is assigned as follows. Sort all Reply/Send impossible Mail address/Phone number Mail member Phonebook group Subject sort
Mail received or sent before the Auto-sort settings are
For Delete all, hidden mail messages are also deleted not sorted. by 2in1 setting.
The MessageR/F are not deleted. M a i l Setting Auto-sort You can sort mail messages into the specified folders by the set criteria such as mail address or subject. 1 Mail folder list screen (pp.170, 171) Highlight the destination folder u (FUNC)Auto-sortSet any item from the following When the sorting is already set, the setting is displayed. Press u (FUNC) again. When Original lock is set to the Phonebook or mail members When checking auto-sort-set folder conditions, the group name appears as Group even after changed, and the mail member name appears as Mail member even after changed. Address sortSets the e-mail address. Look-up addressSets the e-mail address by browsing the phonebook or address list. Look-up groupSets the group of the phonebook. Look-up memberSets the mail member. Enter addressSets a mail addresses by entering it. Subject sortSets the subject. Reply impossible (Send impossible)Sets an e-mail address to which you cannot reply or you could not send a mail as an Auto-sort criteria. Sort allThis can only be set for mail-linked i-ppli folders. Sorts all mails into a mail-linked i-ppli folder. Edit addr/subjEdits a previously specified e-mail address or mail subject. 174
The mails sent as broadcast message are searched for the sorting criteria in the order of address entered.
When using 2in1 and setting Auto-sort, select the criteria from Look-up address (Phonebook,/Sent address/Received address list), Look-up member, Direct input, Subject sort, Reply impossible, Sort all, or Edit addr/subj.
The Area Mail is not included for Address sort, Subject sort and Reply impossible.
<Address sort>
You can set a total of 700 addresses for automatic sorting (more than one setting is available for 1 folder).
<Address sort (Look-up group)>
When you set address sort to the mail address stored as secret data and receive mail from the address, the mail is stored in the Inbox folder when the FOMA terminal is not in Secret or Secret data only mode and stored in the sorting destination folder when the FOMA terminal is in Secret or Secret data only mode.
<Address sort (Enter address)>
Ensure that the e-mail address domain (the part that follows the @ symbol) is entered correctly. However, if the address format is [phone number]@docomo.ne. jp, simply enter the phone number.
<Subject sort>
If the subject meets the sort criteria for multiple folders, the mail is sorted into the folder closest to the Inbox or Outbox folder.
You cannot use this function to sort i-mode mail that has no subject entered and is displayed as No title even if you set No title as a sort criteria.
You cannot use this option to sort SMS.
<Reply impossible>
You cannot use this option to sort SMS reports.
Reply impossible can only be set for 1 folder of Inbox.
<Send impossible>
Send impossible can only be set for 1 folder of Inbox. N
<Sort all>
You cannot use this option to sort SMS reports or SMS received directly to the FOMA card (UIM).
Sort all can only be set for 1 i-ppli mail folder for received and sent i-ppli mail respectively. Mail list screen (pp.170, 171) Reply*1p.165 Edit*2Edits the recipient, subject or message body of the sent mail. Press o (Send) to send the mail. MoveSelects from Move this/Move selected/Move all and moves the mail to the other folder you select. About multiple-choicep.38 Search mailSearches for mail using a specified criteria. Search sender*1/Search receiver*2Searches for mail by specifying the mail address from the phonebook mail address list or entering the mail address manually. Search subjectEnters a subject to search. Display allReturns the search and sort displays or displays that use filter functions to their original display settings (all Chronological). SortSorts the mail in a selected criteria. FilterDisplays only the mails which meet the selected criteria. Color codingSets the color coding for the mail from Default (black)/Red/Blue. You can also change the color by pressing w (1 second or longer) in the mail list screen. List settingSelects a mail-list format from Subject/
Name/Address. Read all*1Marks all the unread mail in the folder as read. Protect*1Selects the protecting method from Protect this/Protect selected/Protect all*3. About multiple-choicep.38 Unprotect*1Selects the unprotecting method from Unprotect this/Unprotect selected/Unprotect all. About multiple-choicep.38 Protect ON/OFF*2Protects or unprotects mail. Unprotect all*2Unprotects all protected mail. iC transmissionp.259 Send Ir datap.258 Copy to microSDp.248 UIM operationMoving or copying SMS from the mail screenp.255 Mail info*1Displays the information such as sender of the mail. No. of messagesDisplays the total number of mails in the folder. Store in Centerp.176 DeleteSelects the deleting method from Delete this/
Delete selected/Delete all. About multiple-choicep.38
For received mails, you can delete only read mails or SMS reports at once by selecting Delete read/Delete all SMS-R. Keep in secretPut out*4Select the setting from Keep this/keep selected/keep all. About multiple-choicep.38 Preventing Others from Viewing Datap.104
*1: Available only with the received mail list screen.
*2: Available only with the sent mail list screen.
*3: Only available in the Secret folder.
*4: Available only in Secret or Secret data only mode. Unread mail or Area Mail cannot be saved to the Secret folder. Unread mail list screen (p.163) M a i l Replyp.165 List settingSelects a mail-list format from Subject/
Name/Address. Protect ON/OFFProtects or unprotects mail. Delete thisDeletes one mail. N
<Search mail>
You can also search the results of a search.
You cannot use this function to search i-mode mail that has no subject entered and is displayed as No title even if you set No title as a criteria for searching by subject.
<Sort> <Filter>
The sort and filter function can be used together. For example, to view only the unread mail in the received mail list screen in chronological order, select Chronological in the sort menu and then Unread in the Filter menu.
When you exit from the mail list screen, the sort display and filter function are canceled.
<Read all>
If you view mail with the filter function and then select Read all, only the currently displayed mail is marked as read. Continued on next page 175 N
<Protect ON/OFF>
A mail that is not displayed by the setting of 2in1 is not targeted for setting of Protect all nor Unprotect all even if either of them is selected.
<Keep in secret> <Put out>
A mail that is not displayed by the setting of 2in1 is not targeted for setting of Keep all nor Put out all even if either of them is selected. Storing mails at the Data Security Center You can store i-mode mails and SMS stored in the FOMA terminal at the Data Security Center.
Data Security Service is a pay service you need to apply for. If you have not subscribed to the service and try to connect to the Data Security Center, the notification screen appears. 1 Mail list screen (pp.161, 170) u (FUNC)Store in CenterUse c to select (checkbox)o (Finish) You can select up to 10 mails. M a i l 2 Enter your security codeYES The FOMA terminal connects to the Data Security Center to start saving the mails. 3 o (Finish) N
You cannot store SMS stored in the FOMA card at the Data Security Center.
When saving mails with attached files, the attached files are deleted.
When saving received mails in which images prohibited to be output from the FOMA terminal are pasted into, these images are deleted.
The setting of Color coding is not saved. To restore the mail The mail data stored at the Data Security Center can be stored on the FOMA terminal from the site of the Data Security Center. For details on how to use, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide [i-mode] FOMA version. Mail detail screen (pp.170, 172) Reply*1*2p.165 Reply with quote*1*2p.165 Forward*1*2p.165 Edit*3Edits the recipient, subject or message body of the sent mail. Press o (Send) to send the mail. Resend*3Resends the message. 176 Protect ON/OFFProtects or unprotects mail. MoveSelects the destination folder to move a mail message to the folder. CopyCopies the message body, subject or e-mail address. The copied text can be pasted into the Character entry screens, etc.p.308 Save addressAdd to phonebookp.166 Save dataChecking and Saving the File Attached to i-mode Mailp.166 Save insert imageSelects the image inserted to the Deco-mail and saves it on the My picture folder. After saving the image, you can specify whether to set it as the standby screen. Add shortcutp.94 Save templateSaves an i-mode mail as a template. p.160 Refer dictionaryStarts the dictionary.p.296 PropertySelects an image to display the file name and size of an image inserted into the message in Deco-mail. Read out message*1p.168 Disp. SMS report*3Displays the SMS report for an SMS. iC transmissionp.259 Send Ir datap.258 Copy to microSDp.248 UIM operationMoving or copying SMS from the mail screenp.255 Message scroll (default: 1 line)Selects the number of scrolling lines in a screen from 1 line/3 lines/5 lines. Font size (default: Standard)Selects the font size from Small/Standard/Large/X-large.p.93 Delete att. fileDel all att. filesDeletes one or all attached file(s). DeleteDeletes a mail. Keep in secretPut out*4Preventing Others from Viewing Datap.104
*1: Available only with the received mail detail screen.
*2: Not available when 2in1 is in B mode.
*3: Available only with the sent mail detail screen.
*4: Available only in Secret or Secret data only mode. N
<Delete att. file> <Del all att. files>
You cannot delete the data pasted into the message body or undownloadable file (
). N
When 2in1 is set to A mode or B mode, up to 30 message histories arrived at or sent from the used address are displayed. However, if set to B mode, the Sent address list screen cannot be displayed.
When 2in1 mode is set to Dual mode, icon appears in Number B/Address B received records. Address screen (list/detail)
(p.177) Add to phonebookAdds the mail address to the phonebook.p.166 Look-up phonebookDisplays the detail screen of the phonebook in which the mail address is stored. Add shortcutp.94 Compose message*Composes an i-mode mail with the mail address set as the recipient. DialingUses the Phone To/AV Phone To function to make a voice/videophone call for the phone number in the phonebook entry that contains the e-mail address. p.147 Received calls*2Switches to the Received calls record screen.p.53 Redial*3Switches to the Redial screen.p.53 Big fontStandard font*4Switches the font size between Big font/Standard font.p.93 DeleteSelects the deleting method from Delete this/
Delete selected/Delete all. About multiple-choicep.38
*1: When an SMS is selected, this option changes to Compose SMS, which composes an SMS with the phone number pasted in as the recipient. Composing and Sending SMSp.182
*2: This function is available only for the received address screens (list/detail).
*3: This function is available only for the sent address screens (list/detail). If the Sent address screen appears from Dialed calls, Dialed calls appears.
*4: Only available on the Address screen (list). M a i l Using Mail Records
<Sent address/Received address>
When you send or receive mail, the mail addresses are recorded in the Sent address list or Received address list. You can send mail by selecting an address from these address lists.
Up to 30 i-mode mail address or SMS phone number entries can be stored in the respective Sent address and Received address lists. However, up to 60 received addresses can be stored if you use 2in1.
When the Mail box lock is set to Inbox or Outbox, the mail address is not recorded in the address list. Checking an address list
<Example: To open the received address screen>
1 On the standby screenh (1 second or longer) The Received address screen (list) appears. To display the sent address screen (list) j (1 second or longer) Displayed icon on the Address screen (list)
: i-mode mail transmission successful/
failed
: SMS transmission successful/failed 2 Select a sender The Received address screen (detail) appears. Displayed icon on the Address screen (detail)
: i-mode mail
transmission successful/
failed
: SMS transmission successful/
failed 3 Check the details Received address (list) Function menup.177 11 Received address (detail) Function menup.177 N
Turning the FOMA terminal off or deleting sent or received mail messages does not delete the entries in the address lists. You should delete the record entries themselves to prevent others from viewing them. 177 Setting up the FOMA Terminal Mail Functions
<Mail Setting>
1 uMail settings The Mail Setting screen appears. Prefer attachment (default: all selected)Selects the attached file type to receive at the time you receive the mail from Image/i-motion/Melody/PDF/
ToruCa/Tool data (Phonebook, Schedule, Bookmark)/Other (including documents). About multiple-choicep.38 Read out setting Select voice (default: Female 1)Sets the type of voice used for reading out mail. Read out received mail (default: ON)Sets whether to allow the mail to be read out or not when it is received. Mail Setting SMS settings 2 Select any item:
Message scroll (default: 1 line)Selects the number of lines that are scrolled when you press c on the mail detail screen, from 1 line/3 lines/5 lines. Font size (default: Standard)Selects the font size displayed on the mail detail screen from Small/
Standard/Large/X-large.p.93 Mail list disp. (default: 1line+body)Sets the number of lines and item to be displayed on the mail list screen. Select the lines to display from 2 lines/1 line/1 line+body and the format from Subject/
Name/Address. Message displaySets the position from where to start displaying the message body. SMS report request (detail: OFF)Sets whether to request an SMS report after sending an SMS. SMS validity period (default: 3 days) Selects the storage period of the sent SMS kept at the SMS center from None/1 day/2 days/3 days. When set to None, SMS messages are not stored at the SMS center. SMS input character (default: Japanese
(70char.))Sets the SMS body character input method. When set to Japanese, you can enter up to 70 characters regardless of double-
byte or single-byte. When set to English, you can enter up to 160 single-byte alphanumeric characters. From header (default)Displays the message from the headers onwards (date and time received/sent). From messageDisplays the message from the message body onwards. Start attachment (auto) (default: ON)Sets whether to automatically play the attached or pasted melody when opening an i-mode mail. Header/Signaturep.179 Mail box lockp.112 Receiving settingSets whether to give display priority to the receiving and received result screen if a mail, MessageR/F is received while you are using the FOMA terminal. Alarm preferred (default)Displays the receiving and received result screen. Operation preferredGives priority to the screen being used rather than displaying the receiving and received result screen. Receive option setting (default: OFF)Sets whether to receive mails selectively (ON) or automatically(OFF). Area Mail settingp.182 Check settingsAllows you to check the settings specified in Mail Setting. ResetResets the settings specified in Mail Setting to the default settings. N
When 2in1 is in B mode, you cannot select Mail Setting.
<Font size> <Mail list disp.>
When set to X-large, the Mail list disp. setting is automatically set to 2 lines. When Mail list disp. is set to 1 line or 1 line+body while Font size is set to X-large, automatically switch it setting to Large.
<Receiving setting>
When you are receiving/sending a voice call, during a voice call or using functions such as an i-ppli or the camera, the receiving and received result screen may not appear when you receive mail or Message R/F even when set to Alarm preferred.
When 2in1 is in A mode and a mail arrives only at the mail address of B mode, the receiving screen appears, but the received result screen does not appear even when set to Alarm preferred. M a i l 178 N
<Receive option setting>
This option applies to i-mode mail only. SMS, MessageR/F are received automatically regardless of this setting.
<Prefer attachment>
To check the contents of the file, you have to download the file manually afterwards.p.166
When Other is deselected, documents are not received. Editing Headers, Signatures and Quotation Marks By storing your header or signature, you can automatically paste it into an i-mode message. You can also edit the quotation marks when you reply to received mail by quoting the original message. Signature 1 Mail Setting screen (p.178)Header/
2 Edit header or Edit signature d (Edit) To edit the quotation marks
Edit Quotation marks 3 Enter the header or signature o (Finish) You can enter up to 5,000 double-byte or 10,000 single-byte characters for the header and signature. You can decorate the header or signature. p.158 To enter the quotation marks
Enter the quotation marks You can enter up to 10 double-byte or 20 single-
byte characters. When you add the header or signature automatically
Insert settingSelect the checkbox of Header and/or Signatureo (Finish) Deselect the checkbox when you do not add it automatically. N
Even if you select the Insert setting checkbox, the header or signature is not pasted into i-mode mail composed using Template. Insertion is also unavailable when sending i-ppli mail with mail-linked i-ppli. Specifying which items are checked for in Center inquiries
<Set check new messages>
You can specify which items are checked for Check new messages whether to check for Mail (i-mode mail), MessageR and/or MessageF. setSet check new messages 1 iSETTINGSi-mode common 2 Use c to select (checkbox) o (Finish) A deselected checkbox () denotes that the FOMA terminal will not check for that item. When You Receive a Message When the FOMA terminal is in a service area, MessageR/F are automatically sent to the FOMA terminal from the i-mode Center.p.162
You can store up to 100 MessageR/F respectively on the FOMA terminal (the number of messages you can actually store may be reduced depending on the file size).
Perform Check new messages when you receive the messages kept in i-mode center.p.164 N
If the storage capacity for messages is full when you receive a message, read messages are deleted from the oldest one (unread or protected messages are not deleted).
When the FOMA terminal cannot receive any more M a i l
(red)/
(red) appears (
(red),
(F: red) may appear to display the 2 messages (because it is full with unread and protected messages),
(R: red), conditions simultaneously). Read the unread messages or unprotect the unnecessary messages.
When the i-mode center keeps Messages,
appears. Perform Check new messages to receive messages. When the messages kept at the i-mode center are full,
(red) appears.
(red)/
Received MessageR/F are not automatically displayed when displaying other than the standby screen, an i-ppli is running, Public mode (Driving mode) is set, Dial lock is set, or when Original lock is set to i-mode or Mail disp. 179 How to view the MessageR/F screens 1 3 4 2 2 List (2-line display) Message status Detail Description Icon Unread Message Read Message Read and protected Message
: Protected Message received time and date
-1 The time is displayed for Message received M a i l today
-2 The date is displayed for Message received yesterday or earlier Attached file information
<List screen>
Icon Description Message with an attached or pasted melody Message with an attached image Message with an attached ToruCa Message with multiple attached or pasted data
: One or more data is invalid
: Invalid data
: Deleted by the scanning function Description Pasted melody
<Detail screen>
Icon
: Invalid data Subject 180 Viewing Messages in the Message Box
<MessageR/F>
When a MessageR/F from the i-mode Center arrives on the FOMA terminal, the appears at the top of the screen. or icon 1 uInboxMessageR or MessageF The Message list screen appears. Message list Function menup.180 Message detail Function menup.181 2 Select a message The Message detail screen appears. To display the next or previous message in the message detail screen, press v. In the message detail screen, press t to return to the message list screen. Message list screen (p.180) Display allThe original display (all Chronological) is reverted from a sorted or filtered display. SortSorts the messages in a selected criteria. FilterDisplays only the messages which meet the selected criteria. Protect ON/OFFProtects or unprotects MessageR/F. Unprotect allUnprotects all the protected MessageR/F. No. of messagesDisplays the number of stored MessageR/F, unread messages and protected messages. DeleteSelects the deleting method from Delete this/
Delete selected/Delete read/Delete all. About multiple-choicep.38
When selecting Delete read, you can delete only the read messages at once. N
<Sort> <Filter>
The sort display and filter function can be used together. For example, if you want to display the unread messages in chronological order, select Chronological in the sort menu, then select Unread in the filter menu.
When you exit from the MessageR/F list screen, the sort and filter are canceled. Message detail screen (p.180) Add to phonebookAdds the phone number and e-mail address displayed on MessageR/F to the phonebook.p.70 Save melodySaves a melody attached to MessageR/F. Save imageSaves an image attached to or inserted in MessageR/F. Save ToruCaSaves a ToruCa attached to MessageR/F. Protect ON/OFFProtects or unprotects MessageR/F. DeleteDeletes the MessageR/F. N
<Save melody>
Some saved melodies may not play correctly. What is Early Warning Area Mail?
A service that you can receive the urgent earthquake news flash, etc. delivered by the Meteorological Agency.
Area Mail is available without subscribing to i-mode.
To receive Area Mail, the receiving setting is required.p.182 In the following situations, area mails are not received regardless of this setting.
During international roaming
Omakase Lock is set
When Self mode is set
Area Mails may not be received when:
During a videophone call
Data communication in progress When You Receive Early Warning Area Mail
<Receive Area Mail>
When the FOMA terminal is in a service area, the Area Mail is automatically received.
When you receive Area Mail, the appears at the top of the screen. icon
Received Area Mail is stored in Inbox.
You can store up to 100 Area Mails on the FOMA terminal.
The Area Mail ring tone sounds in the pattern and color set in Mail receiving under Illumination set. p.92 N
The vibration pattern links to the beep tone/ring tone regardless of the Vibrator setting.
If the storage capacity for Area Mails is full when you receive an Area Mail, Area Mails are deleted from the older read mails first and then the older unread ones in order. When you receive the Area Mail for the earthquake early warning M a i l When you receive the Area Mail, you are notified on the description screen with beep and vibration. The screen returns to the previous screen, when you press any of d, t and y .
The beep tone volume is fixed to Level 6 and cannot be adjusted. However, you can set the ring time for beep or the beep ON/OFF with setting for Beep setting in the Area Mail setting. The ring tone for the Area Mail sounds when the beep sound setting is set to OFF.
When Manner mode is set, the beep is determined by Manner mode set.
Vibrator pattern links to the beep while in beep sounding, and follows the Mail setting under Vibrator while in incoming mail sounding. If an earthquake early warning is received, the vibrator always works regardless of the manner mode setting. When you receive the Area Mail other than the earthquake early warning When you receive the Area Mail, you are notified on the Receive Area Mail or the Description Screen, then notifies them with a beep for the Area Mail (the screen is specified by the provider). The Receive Area Mail screen returns to the previous screen, if no operation is performed or you press any key. The description screen returns to the previous screen, when you press any key d, t and y . Continued on next page 181 N
The volume of the ring tone is set to the same volume set at Mail of Ring volume.
The description screen or Receive Area Mail screen may not appear when you receive the Area Mail during using functions such as an i-ppli or the camera. If an earthquake early warning is received, the vibrator always works regardless of the manner mode setting. Setting Early Warning Area Mail
<Area Mail setting>
Make the settings for receiving Area Mail. 1 Mail Setting screen (p.178)Area Mail setting Area Mail setting screen appears. M a i l Area Mail setting 2 Select any item:
Receive setting (default: No)Sets whether to receive the Area Mail.
The confirmation message asking whether to use Area Mail appears before setting, read the given notes carefully and select YES/NO. Beep setting Beep setting (default: ON)Turns the beep ON/OFF. Beep time (default: 10 seconds)Sets the beep time between 01 and 30 seconds. Receive entryRegisters Area Mail name (any name) and Message ID (provided by the service provider) of information you want to receive except early warning. Select <Not recorded> at the Receive entry screen, and enter Area Mail name and Message ID after you enter your security code. The urgent news flash is sent regardless of the settings of Receive entry. Composing and Sending SMS
<Compose SMS/Send>
Your SMS address is your subscriber mobile phone number.
This service allows you to exchange text messages with subscribers to overseas carriers other than DOCOMO. For information on the supported country and the supported overseas carriers, refer to the DOCOMO website. 1 uCompose SMS The New SMS screen appears. New SMS Function menup.183
<No address>Enter an 2 address Select the mail address input method to enter the address. Sets the e-mail address by browsing the phonebook, received address list or entering text directlyp.156 If the recipient is using an overseas carrier other than DOCOMO
Enter + (0 (1 second or longer)), the country code, the other partys mobile phone number If the mobile phone number begins with zero (0), omit the zero. You can also send SMS by entering 010, the country code, the other partys mobile phone number in this order. (To reply to received SMS from overseas, enter 010.) 3
Enter the message body The numbers and types of characters that can be entered are as specified in the SMS input character settings. When set to Japanese, you can enter up to 70 characters regardless of double-byte or single-byte. When set to English, you can enter up to 160 single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols. Spaces are also counted in the same way as characters. 4 o (Send) An animation is displayed while the SMS is being sent. Editing sent and unsent SMSpp.175, 176 182 N
You cannot send SMS to the entered address when:
The address contains the characters other than numbers, * or #
The address contains + except for the head of the address
The address contains a space
Depending on the signal quality, types of characters or device of the other party, the recipient may not be able to display the text correctly.
Even when Caller ID Notification is set to OFF, your caller ID is provided to the recipient during SMS transmission.
The line feed symbol is counted as 2 characters in Japanese input mode and as 1 character in English input mode.
You cannot send an SMS from the additional number of multi number. Set the multi number setting to the basic number.
When 2in1 is in B mode, you cannot compose and send SMS. New SMS screen (p.182) SendSends an SMS. PreviewAllows you to check the SMS recipient and message before sending it. Savep.161 SMS report req.* (detail: OFF)Sets whether to request an SMS report after sending an SMS. SMS valid. per. *(default: 3 days)Selects the storage period of the sent SMS kept at the SMS center from None/1 day/2 days/3 days. When set to None, the SMS is resent and deleted when set time elapses. SMS input char.*Sets the SMS body character input method. Japanese (default)You can enter up to 70 characters regardless of double-byte or single-byte. EnglishYou can enter up to 160 single-byte alphanumeric characters. Erase messageOnly the message body is deleted. DeleteDeletes the SMS being edited.
* : This function menu is only valid for the current SMS. Set in the Mail Setting (p.178) if you want to keep the setting to all SMS.
<SMS report req.>
SMS reports SMS reports are the mail to notify you that the other party has received SMS. You can check SMS reports in the Inbox or in the Disp. SMS report in the function menu of the sent SMS detail screen. SMS reports are indicated by SMS report in the subject line. When You Receive an SMS
<Receive SMS>
When the FOMA terminal is in a service area, SMS is automatically sent to the FOMA terminal from the SMS Center.
The operations when SMS is received is same as the operations when i-mode mail is received. Also, the storage capacity and the operation when the storage capacity for received mails becomes full are the same as i-mode mail.p.162
SMS in the received mail list screen, the beginning of the message is displayed as the subject. N
If you receive Short Mail sent from a mova terminal, etc., the senders phone number is displayed. If the caller ID is not provided, the reason is displayed.
If a received SMS includes double-byte characters that are not listed in the Kuten code list, those characters are displayed as blanks (spaces). For the Kuten code list, refer to the PDF format Kuten Code List in the provided CD-ROM.
Pressing d (Select) while the sender of the current SMS is highlighted allows you to make a voice or videophone call to that number, compose SMS or select an image for videophone (Phone To, AV Phone To, and Mail To function).p.147 Forwarding and replying to received SMS You can forward SMS and send a reply to the sender. p.165
You cannot enter a subject. N
You cannot reply to an SMS when the sender has withheld his or her caller ID (User unset) or is sending from a pay phone (Payphone) or a phone that does not support caller ID notification (Not supported). M a i l
Even if you reply to or forward an SMS on the FOMA remains on the received mail list
card (UIM), the screen and received mail detail screen and the icon does not appear.
When 2in1 is in B mode or Dual mode, you cannot reply an SMS sent to Number B. 183 Checking for SMS <Check new SMS>
The SMS that are not received by the FOMA terminal are kept at the SMS Center. You can receive the kept SMS by checking new SMS.
SMS are kept in the following cases:
When the FOMA terminal is turned off
When
When the Inbox is full
When Self mode is set is displayed 1 uCheck new SMS SMS Checking appears while you check for new SMS. Press d (Select) after checking for new SMS. The automatic receiving starts if the center keeps any SMS. The automatic receiving may not start immediately after inquiry. Specifying the SMS center setting
<SMS center selection>
M a i l
Refer to the SMS settings (p.178) in the Mail Setting screen about the SMS settings other than the SMS center.
* There is normally no need to change this setting. Use this setting to specify whether the FOMA terminal uses the DOCOMO SMS Center or another providers SMS center for SMS. 1 iSETTINGSi-mode common setSMS center selection Select any item:
DoCoMoUses the DOCOMO SMS Center. User settingEnters SMS centers address, then selects from International/Unknown to use the other SMS center. ResetDeletes the User setting data and resets the setting to DoCoMo. N
If the entered SMS Center address includes # or
*, you cannot select International. 184 i-ppli What is an i-ppli? .......................................................................................................... 186 Downloading i-ppli from Sites ....................................................................................... 186 Launching an i-ppli ....................................................................................................... 187 Pre-installed Software..................................................................................................... 190 Launching i-ppli Automatically ...................................................................................... 197 Launching an i-ppli from a Site or Mail ........................................................... 197 Setting the i-ppli Standby Screen ..................................................... 198 Organizing i-ppli............................................................................................................ 199 i-ppli To Set i-ppli stand-by 185 i
p p l i What is an i-ppli?
Downloading an i-ppli from a site enables you to use i-mode terminal in more convenient. Some i-ppli allow you to store data from the i-ppli directly into the phonebook or your schedule, and Some i-ppli linked to Data box allow you to save or download images. As the FOMA terminal supports mega i-ppli with large capacity, you can enjoy high-resolution 3D games or long roll-playing games.
For details on i-ppli, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide [i-mode] FOMA version. Downloading i-ppli from Sites You can download software from an i-mode site and run the software on your FOMA terminal.
Up to 1M-byte i-ppli can be downloaded. Up to 200 i-ppli can be stored. The maximum number of software applications that can be saved varies depending on the data size. The number includes partly downloaded i-ppli. 1 Select software Press d (Select) when the Completed message appears. For the software that is immediately launched from the site, the software starts up without displaying a completion message. To cancel data downloading in progress
During downloadingd (Cancel) or t When the software setting screen appears
Set the softwareYES Software settingsp.188 2 YES The downloaded software is launched. Not to launch the software
NO Downloading Mail-linked i-ppli
When you download a mail-linked i-ppli, an i-ppli mail folder is automatically created in the inbox or Outbox folder. The folder names are assigned by the downloaded mail-linked i-ppli and cannot be changed. The FOMA terminal can store up to 5 mail-linked i-ppli.
Mail sent and received using a mail-linked i-ppli is automatically sorted into the dedicated folders created when that mail-linked i-ppli was downloaded. You can also manually sort received mails. 186
You cannot download mail-linked i-ppli in the following cases:
If there are already 5 dedicated folders for mail-
linked i-ppli
If there is already saved a mail-linked i-ppli that uses the same folder
Mail box lock is set for Inbox/Outbox N
To restore deleted software that had been pre-installed, download from PlayNow by SO. iMenu
PlayNow by SO QR code on the right is also available to select the displayed URL and access the site.
Some i-ppli software automatically opens communication after being downloaded. You can set your terminal not to automatically communicate by using Network set in Software setting.
If you download an i-ppli that uses the terminal data
(the stored information or mobile phone/FOMA card
(UIM) manufacture numbers) or an i-ppli DX, a message appears notifying that the i-ppli uses the terminal data. When you select YES, your terminal information is sent to the IP (information service provider) via the internet and may be disclosed to the third party as a result.
Depending on the data storage capacity of the IC card, you may not be able to download Osaifu-Keitai i-ppli even when there is capacity available in the software storage area. Follow the confirmation screen, delete the displayed software and download again. You may not be able to delete the software depending on the software type you are going to download. Depending on the software, the software itself is deleted after the software is launched and data in the IC card is deleted.
When 2in1 is set to B mode, the activation confirmation screen may not appear after download, depending on the i-ppli. Viewing i-ppli information during downloading
<Disp. Software info>
You can specify whether the software information is displayed for checking when downloading software. 1 iSETTINGSi-ppli settings Disp. Software infoDisplay Not to check information
Not display Launching an i-ppli N
If the memory used to store trace information is full, Launching an i-ppli 1 o (1 second or longer) The Software list screen appears at the bottom of the screen. To search i-ppli by i-mode
Search by i-mode YES Software list Function menup.188 2 Select software When you launch the software, appears at the bottom of the screen. Pre-installed softwarep.190 or Quitting an i-ppli 1 t (1 second or longer) or y YES N
If you receive a voice or videophone call while i-ppli is active, the software is paused. The software screen reappears when the call ends. However, the setting of V-phone while packet applies to videophone during i-ppli communication.
The i-ppli mail used with mail-linked i-ppli may not be displayed correctly.
You can save the data you use (i-ppli data (microSD)) to the microSD card depending on the software.
Some i-ppli allows you to use the Phone To/AV Phone To or Web To function from the i-ppli. However, you cannot use these functions from the i-ppli standby screen. (You can use these functions when an i-ppli is activated.)
Images used in i-ppli* and data you enter may be automatically sent to the server via the Internet.
* : Images used in i-ppli refers to images shot by the camera activated by a camera-linked i-ppli, images retrieved using an i-ppli Infrared data exchange or iC communication function, images downloaded by an i-ppli from an i-mode site or website or images loaded by an i-ppli from Data box. the oldest entry is overwritten.
Some i-ppli software may not make sounds.
If the camera is activated from an i-ppli, the shot images are saved and used as part of the i-ppli.
You can use an i-ppli to activate the Bar code reader and read JAN codes and QR codes. The read data are used by the software. i
p p l i
With some software applications, the IP (information service provider) may access software stored on your FOMA terminal and directly disable the use of the software. In this case, you can no longer launch, upgrade or set the software as the standby screen. You can only delete the software or view the software information. To use the software again, you have to contact the IP and have them send an instruction to re-
enable the software.
With some software applications, the IP (information service provider) may send data to software stored on your FOMA terminal.
When an IP (information service provider) sends a disable or re-enable instruction or other data to software stored on your FOMA terminal, the icon flashes. No communication charges are applied in this case.
When 2in1 is set to B mode or Dual mode, you may not be able to launch, operate or set an i-ppli depending on the i-ppli.
You cannot launch an i-ppli:
While an image is edited
While an i-motion or Chaku-Uta Full is downloaded
Some software is displayed on fullscreen, and the remaining battery icon or the signal strength icon may not be displayed. Motion tracking The FOMA terminal supports motion tracking that operates i-ppli using camera recognition technology
(by waving or shaking the FOMA terminal).
The function may not be available in the following cases:
The camera lens is dirty
Clothes and background colors are similar
Background changes quickly, e.g. when in transit
The location is dark or too bright Warning
Motion tracking i-ppli is a game that you play by tilting or shaking the FOMA terminal. Shaking the terminal may hit a person, thing, etc. and result in an accident or damage. When playing the game, firmly grip the FOMA terminal, do not shake it too much, and confirm safety around. 187 Move to microSDMoves one i-ppli or i-ppli data in the FOMA terminal to the microSD card. Displaying the i-ppli data in the microSD cardp.199 Memory infoDisplays the amount of the stored i-ppli. DeleteSelects the deleting method from Delete this/
Delete selected/Delete all. About multiple-choicep.38 N
<Software setting (Network set)>
If you specify OFF, note that you may not be able to receive timely information.
<Software setting (Icon info)>
If you set this function to ON, as information about whether there are unread messages and mail, icons for in/out of service area, the battery level and the status of manner mode are sent to the IP (information service provider) via the Internet in the same way as your mobile phone/FOMA card (UIM) manufacturer numbers, there is a possibility that the information may be disclosed to the third party.
If this function is set to OFF, some i-ppli that require the icon information may not work.
<Software setting (Program guide key set)>
When No is selected, a message appears asking whether to release the setting. When Yes is selected, the pre-installed G (G-GUIDE EPG Remote Control) is set.
This can only be set for 1seg-linked i-ppli DX whose Program guide key i-ppli To in Software info is set to ON.
<Software setting (Power saver)>
When After folded is set to ON, the software is paused when the FOMA terminal is folded. Note that you may not be able to receive timely information.
When Timer is set to ON, the software is paused following the setting of Backlight in Settings when FOMA terminal is not operated during i-ppli is activated. Note that you may not be able to receive timely information.
<Move to microSD>
When i-ppli on the FOMA terminal (Phone) is moved to the microSD card, the data of i-ppli on the FOMA terminal (Phone) is also moved to the microSD card.
Mail-linked i-ppli folder in the FOMA terminal is not deleted even if the mail-linked i-ppli is moved to the microSD card.
Use Software info (p.189) to check whether the i-ppli can be saved to the microSD card. Software list screen (p.187)/
IC card content screen (p.202) Software settingSpecifies the software settings. Press o (Finish) to finish the setting operation. Stand-by displayp.198 Network setSets whether to communicate when an i-ppli is launched. When Check every start is selected, you can select whether to communicate every time you launch an i-ppli. Stand-by netSets whether the i-ppli set as standby screen communicates. Icon infoSpecifies whether the use of unread mail or message icon information is permitted when an i-ppli is running. Change mld./img.Specifies whether to allow the ring tones for phone calls, mail and messages, images such as those used in the standby screen or when mail is sent or received or menu icon to be changed when an i-ppli DX is running. When Check every change is set, you can select whether to change the ring tone or image every time an i-ppli attempt to change such item automatically. See P.book/hist.Sets whether to allow the application to look up the phonebook, the latest Dialed and Received calls records, and the latest unread mail automatically when an i-ppli DX is launched. Program guideSets whether to use the software as program guide i-ppli to activate by pressing p (EPG) on the 1seg screen (p.210). Downloaded program guide i-ppli can also be set. G
(G-GUIDE EPG Remote Control) is set at the time of purchase. Power saverSets whether to set the Power saver during i-ppli is activated. Sets whether to pause the i-ppli when the FOMA terminal is folded during i-ppli is activated, or sets whether to pause the i-ppli following the setting of Backlight in Settings when the FOMA terminal is not operated during i-ppli is activated. Software infop.189 Upgradep.199 List settingSelects the list display style for i-ppli from Title image+icon/Icon/Software name. Set i-ppli Top.197 Auto-start timep.197 Add shortcut iconp.94 i
p p l i 188 N
<Delete>
When deleting a mail-linked i-ppli, a message appears asking if you also delete the corresponding dedicated folder for the mail-linked i-ppli. Select NO to delete only the software and select YES to delete the folder at the same time. However, even when you select YES, you cannot delete the folder dedicated for the mail-linked i-ppli if it is being used, if the folder is locked, or if the folder contains a protected mail.
For some Osaifu-Keitai i-ppli, the software itself is deleted after the data in the IC card is deleted. After selecting Delete this for this kind of software, launch and delete the data in the IC card following the confirmation screen, then delete the software itself. Since Delete selected or Delete all cannot launch the software, delete the data before deleting the software.
Some Osaifu-Keitai i-ppli cannot be deleted.
When 2in1 is in B mode, some i-ppli cannot be deleted. Adjusting the volume of i-ppli
<i-ppli vol.>
You can adjust the volume of i-ppli. 1 iSETTINGSi-ppli settings 2 Adjust the volume i-ppli vol. N
You can set the volume depending on the software. However, when i-ppli vol. is set to Silent, there is no sound regardless of the volume setting of the software.
When Manner mode is set, the volume of the i-ppli is set to the Manner mode setting. Checking the information of i-ppli 1 Software list screen (p.187) u (FUNC)Software infoCheck the software information N
The software name displayed by this function cannot be changed.
On the software list screen, software types and settings can be checked by the following icons.
: i-ppli DX
: Mail-linked i-ppli
: Auto-start time is set
: Set i-ppli stand-by is set
: Auto-start time and Set i-ppli stand-by are set
: i-ppli To setting can be set
: Set i-ppli stand-by can be set
: i-ppli To setting and Set i-ppli stand-by can be set
: Software downloaded from an SSL-compatible page
: Software whose data can be saved to the microSD cardp.200
: Partially downloaded i-ppli
: Osaifu-Keitai i-pplip.202
When you select partly downloaded i-ppli (
i-ppli only with management information (
the Software list screen (p.187) or IC card content screen (p.202), you can download the rest of the data.
) or
) on Checking the security error history When an i-ppli or i-ppli DX attempts to launch a function that is not permitted to run, a security error occurs and the details of the error are recorded in the security error history. i
p p l i 1 iI-APPLIi-ppli action info Security error history The Security error history screen appears. Security error history Function menup.190 2 Check the details of the security errors 189 Security error history screen
(p.189) Copy infoCopies the security error details. Delete infoDeletes the security error details. Launching software from active software Activate software from the currently active software. Downloading software that launches the specified software enables you to launch that software without returning to the software list screen.
If the software to be launched is not specified, specify the software.
If the software to be launched is specified but is not stored on the FOMA terminal, you must download the software beforehand. 1 Select an item for launching software Pre-installed Software 10 applications are pre-installed at the time of purchase.
Note that looking at the display for extended i
p p l i periods of time may cause eye strain.
(deco-e maker) Clip text, face, etc. out of pictures taken with Camera and edit them to use for Deco-mail. 1 Software list screen (p.187)
(deco-e maker) To exit
u ( (Exit))
(YES) To mute
(Sound:
On) To see how to play
(Help) for SO Shopping game to buy requested things. Cooperate with fellows to enjoy shopping. 1 Software list screen (p.187) To exit
o ( (Exit)) To mute
u () To see how to play
(Help) Google (Mobile Google map) Enjoy interactive maps, aerial photos and rich shopping store/service information. Zoom in/out and scrolling are available. You can look up detailed maps or local information on 16 or more countries over the world including United States and Europe.
For first time use, agree with the terms of service. 1 Software list screen (p.187) Google (Mobile Google map) To exit
u ( (Menu))
(Exit) To see how to play
u ( (Menu))
(Help) 2008 Google - Map data 2008 Geocentre Consulting, NFGIS, Zenrin, Europa Technologie 190 Map i-ppli
(Map i-ppli) is i-ppli that you can get the confirmation at current location with Open i-area, get a map you specify or find the route. You can use transfer guide easily through voice input.
Packet communications charges apply for use. For this software, use of Pake-hodai/Pack-hodai Full is recommended.
To restore this software after deletion, download from (i-area -Surrounding area information-).
Not available if 2in1 is in the B mode.
We are not liable for accuracy and immediacy of the map and route information.
During driving, a person other than the driver must operate the software. Basic service and additional service This software provides the basic service and additional service. Basic service: Service provided by DOCOMO free of charge Additional service: Pay service provided by ZENRIN DataCom The additional services other than traffic information are available free of charge for 90 days from the first launch of this software. To use additional services thereafter, membership registration (charged) for
(ZENRIN Map + Navi) provided by ZENRIN DataCom is necessary. If you register membership during the use of this software, you need not download the software again. This software can be used as it is. Menu
(Map) Description
Use Open i-area or enter a keyword, address, phone number, etc. to view the current location map.
Enter an address by voice to view a map easily. 91st day and later Free Description
Change the map mode to the normal map, moving map by waving the FOMA terminal, 3D map, train-
route-emphasized map, etc.
Show colored views of previously Open i-area-positioned locations in the unit of city, town, village, ward and prefecture.
Back up information on previously Open i-area-
positioned locations to the server.
Search for facilities useful in case of emergency.
Emergency i-ppli without any communication required, linking to the map i-ppli.
Check the settings and usage of map view and route view. 91st day and later Free Charged Charged Free Menu
(Extra)
(Emergency)
(Setting/
Help) Screen and operation for the TOP menu of Map i-ppli
The screens shown here are for reference only and may look different from the actual screens.
Check the map of the location Charged
Upon the initial activation, the terms of service and precautions on use are displayed. Top screen Menu list appears on the front top screen. Closing menu returns to the last map accessed. Free i
p p l i stored in this software or the server, or the location you previously searched.
Saving location into the server shares its information in PC.
Check information including shops (iD accepted shop as well) or facilities around the current or specified location, and acquire coupons from gourmet information.
Check information on parking lots nearby.
Check surrounding area information simply through voice input.
Search for routes by all transportation means including vehicle, walk and car.
Search for routes to home you marked.
(Local Search)
(Route)
(Transfer)
Check transfer and timetable of Charged the train.
Check the train route by map and set the alarm before departure.
Start the transfer guidance simply through voice input. Charged If 91 days elapse without membership Top menu registration Message appears to notify limitation of the available function and make inquiry for subscription when using this software first time on 91st day or later. The similar messages are displayed when the additional service menu is selected.
* Subscribe on the website of
(ZENRIN Map+Navi) using this software when you register as a member. 191 Map view and operations Map view Key operations in map view 2008 ZENRIN DataCom CO., LTD. Key operation u (
(Menu)) d o (
(Zoom)) b t w 0 q i
p p l i Action Displays menu screen. Displays easy access menu A scale slide bar appears. Press f and g to zoom in and out, respectively. Press o () to set the scale and clear up the slide bar. Moves on the map in all directions. Closes menu screen or returns to the location accessed last. Rotates the map counterclockwise. Sets the north of the map to the north. Rotates the map clockwise. Key operations in the easy access menu Action Checks information on the focused area of the map shown and the surrounding area as well. Searches for a route from a specified starting location to the center of the displayed map. Fires off the URL of the displayed map. Saves location information on the center of the map into this software or the server. Saving location into the server enables you to share its information in PC as well. Exits the easy access menu. Displays the point that allows you to browse the 3d intersection or panorama image. When the point is selected, you can view the 3d intersection or panorama image. Displays buildings in the area and allows you to check the tenants by clicking. Key operation f (
(Search around)) g (
(Here)) h (
(Send here)) j (
(Save here)) d (
(To map)) 1 (3D
(3D Panorama)) 2 (
(Tenant)) 192 Screen and operation for the search result for surrounding area information
The screens shown here are for reference only and may look different from the actual screens.
The screen and operation are provided when the search result is displayed with the map but not provided as a result of selection from the list. Search result screen for surrounding area information 2008 ZENRIN DataCom CO., LTD. Key operation in the search result screen for surrounding area information
If the cursor does not hit the shop, etc. as the search result, the easy access menu appears. Key operation d b 5 4 6 u (
(Menu)) o (
(Zoom)) Action Checks detail information of the search result. Moves the map in four directions. Re-searches with the displayed map as the center. Checks the previous search result. Checks the next search result. Displays menu screen. The scale slide bar appears. Press f to display a wider range, or g to display the detailed map. Press o (
) (close) to set the scale and clear up the slide bar. Finding the route Set the start and destination to search for a route. Displays the route for walk, public transport, and cars. 1 Top Menu screen (p.191)
(Route) (Search route) 2 Select (Start) from following items:
(Here)Positions and sets the approximate location by Open i-area.
(By keyword)Searches by keyword.
(From map)Sets the starting location with map. TEL (By number/code)Searches by phone number or zip code.
(From address list)Selects an address.
(From genre)Selects a category.
(From history)Selects from previously viewed maps.
(From marked point)Sets from the location information stored in this software or the server.
(Home)Sets location information on your home.
(Check)Checks information on the starting location. Step 2 3 Select (Destination) as in 4 Select (Time) from the following item:
(Current time)Checks the route using the current time.
(Start time)Sets the start time to check the route.
(Arrival time)Sets the arrival time to check the route.
(Last train)Checks the route with the last train of the day. 5 Select (Condition) from the following item (Set above)
(Transfer)Selects transfer priority criteria from (Fast/Cheap/Easy).
(Walking route)Selects route priority criteria from
(Recommended/Many roofs/Less up-and-down).
(Express)Selects whether to use an express if the total distance of the route is 100km or shorter.
(Vehicle type)Selects the vehicle type to be used. 6 Search for route Using a variety of route search
) and car route search
(Search by
(Search only by car), you can search and find the route. As a search result, a route
(up to 6 routes) are displayed. If there is another transfer route, the characteristics of the route are indicated by icon. Route Level
(Fast)
(Cheap)
(Easy)
(Recommended)
(Toll)
(Open) Meaning Takes a short time Low cost Fewer transfer times Meets the above three conditions Uses toll road (car) Uses open road (car) To register the route
(Register route) 7 Select the route (Check route) Starts checking route to the destination. Using the voice input The voice input menu enables voice input to simply check surrounding area information and transfer guidance, or view a map.
<Example: To use the Local Search voice input>
1 TOP menu screen (p.191)
(Local Search) (Voice input) The voice input guidance screen appears. 2 (Voice input start) Enter information through voice input After the voice input screen appears, enter the desired peripheral information through voice input.
<Example: (Convenience stores near here)>
i
p p l i Continued on next page 193 3 Voice is recognized and a confirmation screen appears When recognition is incorrect
(Retry)
When you use this application for the first time, agree to the license agreement and set the default settings.
Packet communication charges will apply.
When using this software overseas, set Set main time to the Japanese time.
For details on G (G-GUIDE EPG Remote Control), refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide [i-mode] FOMA version. Using / (Setting/Help) 1 TOP menu screen (p.191)/
(Setting/Help)Select any item:
(Settings)Make the basic settings/
route guide settings/home settings/station settings, delete history and reset the settings.
(Help/Terms)Shows usage, FAQ and terms of service.
(Membership information) Checks your subscription state to
(ZENRIN Map+Navi). PC (PC check method)View URL, login ID or password to view a PC-designed map i-ppli site. i
p p l i G (G-GUIDE EPG Remote Control) This is a useful monthly-charge-free i-ppli containing the program guide and AV remote control function. You can obtain digital, analog or BS digital TV program information easily anywhere at any time. You can check the program title, contents of program and start/
end time, etc. 1seg can be activated from the program guide. The program guide can be activated from 1seg. If you are interested in some program, you can set timer recording via the Internet to record the program on the DVD recorder (a DVD recorder compatible with the online timer recording function is required. To use this function, you need initial settings on this application). You can also search for program information by keyword such as TV program genre, your favorite personality or pickup keyword on the top of the main screen. Moreover, the remote control is possible for TV/Video/DVD player (some models do not support this function). 194
* The above is a screen image. The actual screen may look different. The displayed TV guide corresponds to the area where you live. Booking program function You can book a 1seg view by selecting a program from the program guide of this application.
Timer activation Activate this application to select a program you want to watch. Select (Book) from
(Book program) in (Menu) to activate the booking scheduler. Follow the on-screen instructions. Timer recording function You can reserve 1seg recording by selecting a program from the program guide of this application.
Timer recording Activate this application to select a program you want to record. Select (Book) from
(#1Seg timer recording) in
(Menu) to activate the booking scheduler. Follow on-screen instructions.
(* Alternatively, activate this application, select a program, and press q.) Online timer recording If you have a DVD recorder compatible with the online timer recording, you can set timer recording from the program guide of this application via the Internet while you are away from your house. To use online timer recording, you need initial settings on this application.
Initial settings Perform the Internet connection setting on the DVD recorder (refer to the manual supplied with the DVD recorder). Launch this application. When you select
(Online timer recording) on
(Menu), instructions appear. Follow the instructions to perform initial settings.
Timer recording After initial settings completes, specify the program and select (Online timer recording) from the menu. You can connect to the DVD player set with this application and set the timer recording.
* If a timer recording is already set for the time you set, a message appears on the program guide.
You are charged for the packet communication. N
Not available when 2in1 is in B mode.
NTT DOCOMO accepts no liability whatsoever regarding the information set on the FOMA terminal. iD (iD setting application) The electronic cash iD does not need to be charged, it is the credit service which enables you to pay or use a cashing service only by holding the Osaifu-Keitai. You can easily enjoy shopping without leaving signature. The cash service is also available according to the credit card company.
To use iD, besides a
* The above is a screen image. The actual screen may look different. subscription to a company issuing iD-supported credit card, you also need iD application and Osaifu-Keitai for which settings for the card application provided by the card company are completed or a credit card that contains iD.
To use iD as Osaifu-Keitai, complete the iD appli settings, download or start the card application provided by the card issuer, and configure the specified settings on the card application. Depending on the card, only the card application settings are required, and the iD appli settings not required.
The cost for using the card compatible with iD
(such as annual fee) varies depending on the card company.
See the i-mode site of iD for information on iD.
i-mode site (Japanese) :
oiMenu
(Menu List)iD DCMX (DCMX credit application) DCMX is the iD-compatible credit service provided by NTT DOCOMO. DCMX is categorized into DCMX mini that will offer a monthly credit line of 10,000 yen, and DCMX/DCMX GOLD that offers the higher limit than DCMX mini while earning DOCOMO Point. You can easily apply for DCMX mini from this application and start the mobile credit service immediately. Function
* The above is a screen image. The actual screen may look different. Application/Audit*1 Set card information Use No complicated charging! Wave your mobile phone over a reader at stores with the following iD mark, and enjoy shopping without your signature*2. Check Check the DCMX service content, monthly available credit*3, receipt, etc!
Change Make model change settings or validity term updates!
*1 : A simple audit will be performed online at the time of application. Applications for other than DCMX mini will be connected to the application page on i-mode.
*2 : Security code entry may be required.
*3 : Only available for DCMX mini.
See the i-mode site of DCMX for details on the service contents or how to apply.
i-mode site (Japanese) :
oiMenuDCMX iD Continued on next page 195 i
p p l i i
p p l i N
When you launch this application for the first time, agree with (Notes on using the application).
Packet communication charges are applied for settings or operations. Notes on Osaifu-Keitai i-ppli
NTT DOCOMO accepts no liability whatsoever regarding the information set on the IC card.
(i-ppli banking) This i-ppli enables you to conveniently use mobile banking. Mobile banking is a service that you can check your bank balance or account activity, or you can transfer money whenever or wherever, by using a mobile phone. You can use Mobile banking for up to 2 banking facilities, only by entering the password you have set when launching the i-ppli.
To use the mobile banking service, a bank account of the banking facility and application to the mobile banking service is required.
You are charged for the packet
* The above is a screen image. The actual screen may look different. communication.
For details on i-ppli banking, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide [i-mode] FOMA version.
For information on i-ppli banking, see the i-mode site.
i-mode site (Japanese) :
oiMenu
(Menu List)
196 2 (Rakuten Auction application 2) 2 (Rakuten Auction application 2) is a useful application that you can easily sell goods at Rakuten Auction site. It provides a guidance display for new users who use the i-ppli for the first time. There are helpful functions such as shooting/editing a photo or saving the history, and you can bring goods to the auction in a shorter time than from a site.
You need to agree to
(Terms and conditions) before you use i-ppli for the first time.
* The above is a screen image. The actual screen may look different.
Packet communication is charged.
For more information, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide
[i-mode] FOMA version.
Member subscription and auctioneer registration to Rakuten are required to sell goods on Rakuten Auction.
For details, see i-mode site
(Japanese).
i-mode site:
oiMenu
(Auction) FOMA
(FOMA communication environment check application) FOMA communication environment check application is the application that checks whether the FOMA terminal can use the FOMA High-speed area.
To use the FOMA communication environment check application, agree with
(Notes on using the application).
* The above is a screen image. The actual screen may look different. N
The displayed items may be different or the description that the FOMA terminal is out of service area is displayed depending on the conditions
(weather, the signal quality, or network traffic) even if it is the same place and time.
When you use other functions during this application is activated, the checking may fail. Launching i-ppli Automatically You can set the software to launch automatically at the specified date and time or interval of time. Enabling automatic launching
<Auto-start set>
You can set 3 automatic startup times for each application.
Set to OFF at the time of purchase. 1 iI-APPLIAuto-start setON or OFF Setting the launch date/time
<Auto-start time>
You can specify the date and time to launch the software automatically.
Software does not start up automatically in the following cases:
When the FOMA terminal is turned off
When another function is running
During calls
During communication
When the time for Software Update, Alarm, Schedule, To Do list or 1Seg booking program is the same as Auto-start time
If the time to launch is set within 10 minutes after the same application is automatically launched for the last time 1 Software list screen (p.187) u (FUNC)Auto-start timeUse c to select a checkbox () To enable the time interval set for the software
Check the Time interval set checkbox To set the launch date and time
Check the Start time set checkbox 2 o (Finish)Set the launch date and time To set the launch date and time
Select a date and timeEnter the launch date and time To set the automatic launch repetition
Select the repeat setting itemDaily or Weekly If you select Weekly, use c to select a checkbox () and press o (Finish). 3 o (Finish) Checking whether an i-ppli launched automatically You can check whether an i-ppli automatically started up at the specified time.
You can also check for the software whose launching from the IC card function failed. 1 iI-APPLIi-ppli action info Auto-start info The screen displays information such as the software name, the automatic launch time and whether or not the software was launched. StartO indicates that the software started up automatically, StartX indicates that it did not start up automatically and Start- indicates that the time for automatic launch has not yet been reached. N
If the software could not be launched automatically, the
(Not run soft) shortcut icon appears on the standby screen. Select the icon to view the Auto-start info screen. Select software that could not be activated. Shortcut icons that provide informationp.94 i
p p l i Launching an i-ppli from a Site or Mail
<i-ppli To>
You can launch an i-ppli from a function other than i-ppli, such as an i-mode site or mail.
<Set i-ppli To>
Enabling software launching with i-ppli To You can specify whether i-ppli software can be launched from i-mode sites, mail, the Infrared data exchange function, Bar code reader, IC card function, ToruCa or data broadcast.
This setting can be specified separately for each software application. 1 Software list screen (p.187) u (FUNC)Set i-ppli To 2 Use c to select (checkbox) o (Finish) 197 Launching i-ppli from a site When an i-ppli software launch specification is displayed on an i-mode site, this setting allows the software to be launched from the site.
This function cannot be used with some sites. 1 Sites screen (p.136)Select an item for launching the softwareYES N
Unlike ordinary i-ppli, some i-ppli software is immediately launched from an i-mode site.
These i-ppli are not stored on the FOMA terminal after downloading from i-mode sites,
Some i-ppli software cannot be stored on the FOMA terminal. Launching i-ppli from a mail When an i-ppli software launch specification is pasted into a received i-mode mail, this setting allows the software to be launched from the i-mode mail. 1 Received mail detail screen (pp.170, 172)Select an item for launching the softwareYES i
p p l i N
The i-ppli launch specification cannot be quoted even when you reply with a quote or forward the i-mode mail. You cannot quote a launch specification of an i-ppli by forwarding mail using the Infrared data exchange function or DOCOMO keitai datalink
(p.329), etc. Launching i-ppli from other functions You can launch an i-ppli from various functions such as Infrared data exchange function, Bar code reader, IC card function, ToruCa, data broadcast, etc. Infrared data exchange function When the FOMA terminal received the i-ppli launching signal while Infrared data exchange, i-ppli software launches. Bar code reader When the data scanned by the Bar code reader contains an i-ppli software launch specification, you can launch the software from the Bar code reader. IC card function You can launch the software by holding the FeliCa mark on the FOMA terminal over the reader/writer unit. 198 ToruCa When an i-ppli software launch specification is pasted into an acquired ToruCa, you can launch the software from ToruCa. Data broadcast When 1seg data broadcast site contains i-ppli activation specification, the software can be activated from the site. N
<IC card function>
The software is not launched in the following cases:
When another function is running
During calls
When the software you want to launch cannot be found Setting the i-ppli Standby Screen
<Set i-ppli stand-by>
You can set a selected i-ppli software as the standby screen.
Some software applications cannot be set as the standby screen. 1 Software list screen (p.187)o (Set) Stand-by displayONo (Finish) N
Only 1 i-ppli can be set as the i-ppli standby screen.
If software that communicates is set as the standby screen, it may not run correctly when problems such as poor signal quality occur.
If you select OFF for Stand-by net in Software setting, note that you may not be able to receive timely information.
If Dial lock or Original lock is set or 2in1 is set to B mode or Dual mode while the i-ppli standby screen is displayed, the i-ppli standby screen ends. If Dial lock or Original lock is released or 2in1 is set to A mode, the i-ppli standby screen reappears.
When you switch tasks and display the standby screen, the screen specified in Stand-by display of Display setting appears even though the i-ppli standby screen is set. Activating the i-ppli standby screen You can activate the software set as the i-ppli standby screen. 1 On the i-ppli standby screent flashes The i-ppli is activated and at the bottom of the screen. or Deactivating the i-ppli standby screen
<Deactivate i-ppli standby screen>
Deactivating the i-ppli standby screen while running an i-ppli 1 While running an i-pplit (1 second or longer) or ySelect any item:
CancelReturns to the screen of running the i-ppli standby screen. EndReturns to the i-ppli standby screen. TerminateDeactivates the setting of the i-ppli standby screen. Deactivating the i-ppli standby screen while it is displayed End stand-by display 1 iSETTINGSi-ppli settings 2 TerminateYes To cancel deactivating
End N
No information is recorded if the i-ppli standby screen ends normally (at normal exit). Organizing i-ppli Upgrading i-ppli
<Upgrade>
You can upgrade downloaded software when a new version is available on the site. 1 Software list screen (p.187) u (FUNC)UpgradeYES N
You cannot upgrade mail-linked i-ppli that rename mail folders in the following cases:
Mail box lock is set
Folder lock is set
Inbox or Outbox folder for the mail-linked i-ppli to be upgraded is being used Displaying the i-ppli software in the microSD card
<microSD software>
Checking the i-ppli standby screen exit information If an error occurs that causes the i-ppli standby screen to be deactivated, you can check the recorded information on the name of the software in which the error occurred, the time of the error and the reason. You can display the i-ppli data list which is stored on the microSD card. 1 iI-APPLImicroSDmicroSD software The microSD software list screen appears. Function menup.199 i
p p l i 1 iI-APPLIi-ppli action info End stand-by info The End stand-by info screen appears. End stand-by info Function menup.199 End stand-by info screen
(p.199) Copy infoCopies the contents of the end stand-by info screen. Delete infoDeletes the contents of the end stand-by info screen. microSD software list screen
(p.199) Software infoDisplays the i-ppli software data which is stored on the microSD card. Move to phoneMoves one i-ppli or i-ppli data in the microSD card to the FOMA terminal. Memory infoDisplays the amount of the stored i-ppli. DeleteSelects the deleting method from Delete this/
Delete selected/Delete all. About multiple-choicep.38 N
You cannot launch an i-ppli from the microSD software list.
You may not be able to use the i-ppli saved on the microSD card on the other FOMA terminal. Continued on next page 199 N
When i-ppli that is stored on the microSD card is moved to the FOMA terminal (Phone), the data of i-ppli that is stored on the microSD card is also moved to the FOMA terminal (Phone).
Use Software info (p.189) to check whether the i-ppli can be moved to the FOMA terminal (Phone) from the microSD card. Displaying the i-ppli data in the microSD card
<microSD data>
You can display the folder name list of the i-ppli data
(microSD) stored on the microSD card. 1 iI-APPLImicroSDmicroSD data The microSD data list screen appears. Function menup.200 microSD data list screen
(p.200) i
p p l i Display infoDisplays the maker of the i-ppli, the available software and whether to use the microSD card. Delete thisDelete selectedDelete allSelect the deleting method. About multiple-choicep.38 N
You may not be able to use the i-ppli data saved on the microSD card from the software on the other FOMA terminal.
Use Software info (p.189) to check whether the i-ppli data will be saved to the microSD card from the software. 200 Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa What is Osaifu-Keitai? .................................................................................................... 202 What is iC Transfer Service? .......................................................................................... 202 Launching Osaifu-Keitai i-ppli....................................................................................... 202 203 Checking the IC Card Owner Information................................................ 203 What is ToruCa? .................................................................................................. Acquiring ToruCa ...................................................................................... 204 204 Viewing ToruCa.......................................................................................... 206 Making the ToruCa Settings..................................................................... 206 Setting Illumination for IC Card Function ............................................ Locking the IC Card Function .............................................................. 206 Check IC owner ToruCa Acquire ToruCa ToruCa viewer ToruCa settings IC card Illumination IC card lock setting 201 What is Osaifu-Keitai?
Hold the Osaifu-Keitai up to a reader/writer at a member store and pay for your shopping, or utilize as membership card, coupons, and more. You can also use the i-mode network to add e-money credit, check balances and usage history. Enough security is provided so the Osaifu-Keitai can be used without worries.
For details, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide
[i-mode] FOMA version.
* In order to use Osaifu-Keitai services, please download the i-ppli for Osaifu-Keitai from the Osaifu-
Keitai site* and then make the necessary settings.
i-mode site (Japanese): oiMenu
(Menu List) (Osaifu-Keitai) O s a i f u
K e i t a i
T o r u C a
If a malfunction occurs with the FOMA terminal, the data (including e-money, points, etc.) on the IC card may be erased or altered (If you need to send your cell phone to NTT DOCOMO for repairs, please delete the data yourself as we cannot accept your cell phone for repair if there is data on it). For support such as having data reissued or restored or to have it temporarily kept or transferred (except for transferring data using iC transfer service), please contact your Osaifu-Keitai service provider. Make sure to use the service which provides backup service for important data.
NTT DOCOMO shall not be liable for any loss of or damage to data stored on the IC card, or any other loss related to Osaifu-Keitai service under any circumstances whatsoever, including but not limited to malfunctions, model changes, etc.
If the FOMA terminal is lost or stolen, contact your Osaifu-Keitai service provider immediately about what to do. Please note, you can use Omakase Lock and IC Card lock with this FOMA terminal. pp.101, 206 What is iC Transfer Service?
The iC Transfer Service*1 is a service that allows you to move all the data on your Osaifu-Keitais IC card*2 to a replacement Osaifu-Keitai*3 when your Osaifu-
Keitai is replaced due to a model change, repairs, etc. Once you move the IC card data, it is a snap to start using the Osaifu-Keitai services by simply downloading*4 the Osaifu-Keitai i-ppli. The iC transfer service is available at a NTT DOCOMO shop or service counter near you.
For details, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide
[i-mode] FOMA version.
*1 : To use the iC Transfer Service, both the new and the old phones must be Osaifu-Keitai compatible. To use the service, please visit your nearest DOCOMO shop. 202
*2 : Some iC transfer services may not be supported by all Osaifu-Keitai services; only the data inside the IC card of an iC transfer service compatible Osaifu-Keitai service can be moved.
*3 : This service does not copy the data; it moves it, so no data inside the IC card is left on the source FOMA terminal. There may be instances when the iC transfer service may not be utilized. Use back-up services of your Osaifu-Keitai service.
*4 : Packet communication charges do apply for downloading i-ppli and the different kinds of settings. Launching Osaifu-Keitai i-ppli You can launch the Osaifu-Keitai i-ppli from the software list screen. You can use the Osaifu-Keitai i-ppli to read and write the data in the IC card to use useful functions such as charging electronic money or ticket, or browsing the balance and transaction history on the FOMA terminal.
Take great care not to disclose your security code and passwords of each service to others.
The reading/writing of the data from the software to the IC card is interrupted in the following cases. In this case, the read/written data is discarded. The operation after the call varies depending on the service.
If you receive a call while launching i-ppli
If the battery fails
When Osaifu-Keitai i-ppli is activated or downloaded for the first time, FOMA card (UIM) information is linked to an IC card. After this, you cannot use the IC card function unless the linked FOMA card (UIM) is inserted. If you use another FOMA card (UIM), you cannot use the IC card functions unless you delete (Reset IC owner) Osaifu-Keitai i-ppli first. 11iOSAIFU-KEITAIIC card content The IC card content screen appears. IC card content Function menup.188 22Select the Osaifu-Keitai i-ppli You can also launch the Osaifu-Keitai i-ppli from the Software list screen (p.187). N
When 2in1 is set to B mode, you cannot launch an i-ppli which uses the mail function. Checking the IC Card Owner Information
<Check IC owner>
Using the Osaifu-Keitai By holding the FeliCa mark e on the FOMA terminal over the reader/writer unit, you can pay with the electronic cash or use the FOMA terminal as a ticket. These functions can be used without launching the software.
Though you cannot launch the Osaifu-Keitai i-ppli during a call, you can use the Osaifu-Keitai by holding the FeliCa mark over the reader/writer unit. 1 Hold the FeliCa mark e over the reader/writer unit to use the service you want The center illumination flashes following the IC card Illumination setting when you use Osaifu-
Keitai. Hold the FeliCa mark (e) over the reader unit N
You can use the IC card function by holding the FeliCa mark over the reader/writer unit even when the FOMA terminal is turned off or the battery is low. (You cannot launch the Osaifu-Keitai i-ppli.) However, you may not be able to use this function when the battery pack is not attached, the battery pack is attached but not used for a long period of time, or when the FOMA terminal is left uncharged after the battery alarm sounds, so be sure to charge the battery pack.
Do not shock the FOMA terminal when holding the FeliCa mark over a reader/writer unit.
If the FeliCa mark is not recognized, hold the FOMA terminal close to the reader/writer section of the unit, move the FOMA terminal back and forth and around to be parallel to the reader/writer unit.
The Osaifu-Keitai i-ppli may be launched when you hold the FeliCa mark over the reader/writer unit. Check if the IC card in Osaifu-Keitai links to the inserted FOMA card (UIM). To use another FOMA card (UIM), delete (reset) the Osaifu-Keitai i-ppli then use the IC card functions. 1 iOSAIFU-KEITAICheck IC owner If another FOMA card (UIM) is inserted, select Reset IC owner to change the IC owner (reset Osaifu-Keitai i-ppli). To change the IC owner (reset Osaifu-
Keitai i-ppli)
Change IC ownerReset IC ownerYES
Enter your security codeYES What is ToruCa?
<ToruCa>
ToruCa is the electronic card that can be acquired via Osaifu-Keitai, which can be used as an flyer, restaurant card, coupon, etc. ToruCa can be acquired via a reader/writer unit or websites, and can be easily exchanged via mail, Infrared data exchange or microSD card.
The acquired ToruCa is stored in ToruCa of OSAIFU-KEITAI menu.
This function is available with ToruCa-compatible models. For details, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide [i-mode] FOMA version. ToruCa usage flow O s a i f u
K e i t a i
T o r u C a Hold Osaifu-Keitai over the reader unit to acquire ToruCa ToruCa ToruCa (detail) Select ToruCa from the list. Pressing the (Detail) button displays the detailed information. Continued on next page 203 How to acquire ToruCa Reader unit External memory
(microSD card) Mail Viewing ToruCa
<ToruCa viewer>
1 iOSAIFU-KEITAIToruCa The ToruCa folder list screen appears. Infrared data exchange iC communication Exchanging ToruCa between i-mode terminals O s a i f u
K e i t a i
T o r u C a QR code i-ppli Website N
Packet communication charge is applied when acquiring ToruCa or ToruCa (detail) from sites.
Depending on settings of the IP (Information service provider), some ToruCa cannot be updated or redistributed using a mail or Infrared data exchange. Acquiring ToruCa <Acquire ToruCa>
You can acquire ToruCa from the reader/writer unit.
You can save up to 100* ToruCa on the ToruCa folder. You can save up to 1K bytes for 1 ToruCa. You can save up to 100K bytes for 1 ToruCa (detail).
* : You can save up to 20 ToruCa separately in the used ToruCa folder. 1 Hold the FeliCa mark e on the FOMA terminal over the reader/writer unit The illumination flashes following the IC card Illumination setting. ToruCa acquisition tone sounds, and the acquired ToruCa or ToruCa
(detail) are displayed for about 15 seconds. When holding the FOMA terminal over the reader/writer unitp.203 N
Acquired ToruCa is not displayed when another function is activated.
You cannot change the ToruCa acquisition tone. The volume is set to the same volume set at Phone of Ring volume. When set to Step, the tone sounds at the volume of Level 4.
You cannot acquire ToruCa from the reader/writer unit when IC card lock or Omakase Lock is set. 204 ToruCa folder list Function menup.205 2 Select a folderSelect ToruCa Guide to the ToruCa list screens/ToruCa The ToruCa display screen appears. display screen ToruCa list Function menup.205 ToruCa display (ToruCa) Function menup.205 ToruCa display (ToruCa (detail)) Function menup.205 Folder title ToruCa category icon ToruCa status
: Unread ToruCa
: Read ToruCa
: Expired ToruCa Location, etc. (index) ToruCa title ToruCa contents (you can also use the Phone To/AV Phone To, Mail To, Web To or i-ppli To* function)
*: Available with ToruCa (detail) only Acquire ToruCa (detail) N
You may not be able to use the Phone To/AV Phone To, Mail To, Web To or i-ppli To function depending on ToruCa. ToruCa folder list screen
(p.204) Add folderEnters a folder name to add a folder. You can add up to 20 folders on the FOMA terminal. For the folders on the FOMA terminal, you can enter up to 10 double-byte or 20 single-byte characters, and for the folder on the microSD card, you can enter up to 31 double-byte or 63 single-byte characters. Edit folder name*1Edits the folder name of the added folder. Search all*2*3Displays the corresponding ToruCa list by selecting the item (Index/Title) and entering the text to search. Filter all*2*3Displays only the ToruCa which meets the selected criteria. Display all*2*3Displays all the saved ToruCa after releasing the display arranged by Search all or Filter all function (except for data in the microSD or Used ToruCa folder). iC trans. all*2*3p.260 Send all Ir data*2*3p.258 Delete folder*1Deletes the folder. No. of ToruCa*3Displays the number of ToruCa stored on the FOMA terminal. Delete allDeletes all the ToruCa stored on the FOMA terminal.
*1: Unavailable with the folder other than the user-created folders.
*2: Unavailable with the folder in the microSD folder.
*3: Except for the data in the microSD and Used ToruCa folders. ToruCa list screen (p.204) Move*1Selects from Move this/Move selected/Move all and moves ToruCa to the other folder you select. About multiple-choicep.38 Copy*1Selects from Copy this/Copy selected/Copy all and copies the ToruCa to the other folder you selected. About multiple-choicep.38 Search*2Displays the corresponding ToruCa list by selecting the item (Index/Title) and entering the text to search. Disp all in folder*2Releases the search, sort or filter result display, and all ToruCa in the folder appear.
When Search all, Filter all or Display all is performed on the ToruCa folder list screen, this item is displays as Display all. Sort*2Sorts ToruCa in a selected criteria. Filter*2Displays only the ToruCa which meets the selected criteria. Compose message*1*3Composes an i-mode mail with ToruCa attached. iC transmission*2p.259 Send Ir data*2p.258 Copy to microSD*2p.248 Copy to phone*4p.249 No. of ToruCa*1Displays the number of ToruCa saved in the FOMA terminal. ToruCa info*1Displays the ToruCa information. DeleteSelects the deleting method from Delete this/
Delete selected/Delete all. About multiple-choicep.38
*1: Unavailable in the used ToruCa folder.
*2: Unavailable in the microSD and Used ToruCa folders.
*3: Unavailable when 2in1 is in B mode.
*4: Available only for ToruCa stored on the microSD card. ToruCa display screen (p.204) MoveSelects the destination folder to move a ToruCa to the folder. CopySelects the destination folder to copy a ToruCa to the folder. Compose message*1Composes an i-mode mail with ToruCa attached. iC transmission*2p.259 Send Ir data*2p.258 Copy to microSD*2p.248 Copy to phone*3p.249 Update*2*4Updates ToruCa (detail) information. Save image*2*4Saves the ToruCa (detail) image. Selects the setting from Normal image/Background image. Add to phonebook*2Stores the phone number or mail address displayed on ToruCa.p.70 Replay*2*4Plays the Flash movie or animation of ToruCa (detail) again from the beginning. DeleteDeletes 1 ToruCa.
*1: Unavailable when 2in1 is in B mode. Continued on next page 205 O s a i f u
K e i t a i
T o r u C a
*2: Unavailable in the microSD folder.
*3: Available only for ToruCa stored on the microSD card.
*4: Available only when ToruCa (detail) stored on the FOMA terminal is displayed. N
You may not be able to copy ToruCa, perform attaching ToruCa to mail, iC transmission, Send Ir data, copying to the microSD card or updating depending on ToruCa. Making the ToruCa Settings
<ToruCa settings>
1 iOSAIFU-KEITAISetting ToruCa settingsSelect any item:
Receive from R/WSets whether to acquire
(Accept) ToruCa or not (Reject) when holding the FeliCa mark over a reader/writer unit. When set to Accept, set whether to check if the acquired ToruCa is duplicated with those stored on the FOMA terminal (except for Used ToruCa folder and expired ToruCa). Auto reading settingSets whether to automatically read the available ToruCa when holding the FOMA terminal over the reader/writer unit to use ToruCa. When set to ON, an available ToruCa on the FOMA terminal (except for Used ToruCa folder and expired ToruCa) is recognized automatically and moved to Used ToruCa folder. ScrollSelects the number of scrolling lines in a screen from 1 line/3 lines/5 lines. N
<Receive from R/W>
When the Repetition check is set to Yes, you cannot acquire the same ToruCa. If you want to acquire the same ToruCa, set to No. The default setting is Yes.
<Auto reading setting>
If you hold the FOMA terminal over the reader/writer when set to OFF, a confirmation message about using the auto reading function or a message that the auto reading is not available may appear. To use ToruCa, select YES and set this function to ON. O s a i f u
K e i t a i
T o r u C a 206 Setting Illumination for IC Card Function <IC card Illumination>
Turn on/off the illumination for IC card function. 1 iOSAIFU-KEITAISetting IC card IlluminationON or OFF Locking the IC Card Function
<IC card lock setting>
You can lock the IC card function to prevent others from using the IC card functions without your consent.
IC card lock is not released even when the power is turned off. 1 On the standby screenw (1 second or longer) IC card lock is set and appears. To release the setting
w (1 second or longer)
Enter your security code N
When you remove the battery pack, IC card lock is set automatically. In this case, attaching the battery pack automatically release IC card lock.
IC card lock is not released even when the power is turned off because the battery runs out when IC card lock is set.
You may not be able to download, version upgrade or uninstall some Osaifu-Keitai i-ppli when IC card lock is set. Locking the IC card function when the power is turned off
<IC lock (power-off)>
You can lock the IC card function to disable the Osaifu-Keitai when the power is turned off. 1 iOSAIFU-KEITAIIC card lock settingEnter your security code IC lock (power-off)Select any item:
MaintainKeeps the same IC card lock setting as before turning off the power. IC card lock ONThe IC card function is locked regardless of the IC card lock setting. 1seg What is 1seg? ................................................................................................................. 208 209 Setting Channels ..................................................................................... 210 Watching 1seg Programs............................................................................... 212 Using G-GUIDE EPG Remote Control ............................... 212 Using Data Broadcasting .......................................................................... Using TV Link ...................................................................................................... 213 213 Recording Scenes While Watching.............................................................. 214 Using Timer Activation/Recording .......................... 215 Configuring 1seg Settings............................................................................ Notifying New Message Arrival While Watching .............................................. 216 Channel setting Active 1Seg G-GUIDE EPG Remote Control Data broadcast TV link Record 1seg Booking program list/Timer recording list User settings Mail ticker 207 Display when using 1seg for the first time The disclaimer screen appears. Press g or j to check content, press d (OK), then select YES. If NO is selected, the screen will not appear from the next time. Storage area for broadcasts The storage area for broadcasts is a storage area in the handset that is dedicated to 1seg. Some information you enter while following the instructions of data broadcasts when watching programs may be saved to the storage area for broadcasts. That includes answers to quizzes, membership numbers, and your gender, age, and occupation. Furthermore, stored information may be displayed while viewing a data broadcast or data broadcasting site without re-entering or sent to the corresponding broadcasting company (broadcaster). To reset storage areap.215 If another FOMA card is inserted, a message appears asking whether to initialize storage area. Select YES to initialize. When NO is selected, storage area services are not available. Display when reading storage area When using information stored in storage area while watching program, Use saved information? It may include information used by the same broadcasting group appears. Select YES not to confirm by screen display when reading information while watching the same program hereafter. If YES(Always) is selected, the screen will not appear from the next time even if programs are changed. What is 1seg?
1seg is a mobile digital terrestrial audio/video and data broadcasting service. Use i-mode to get detailed program information, join a quiz show, enjoy TV shopping, etc. For 1seg service details, visit the following website:
The Association for Promotion of Digital Broadcasting
(Dpa) http://www.dpa.or.jp/english/index.html PC:
i-mode: http://www.dpa.or.jp/1seg/k/ (Japanese) Using 1seg
1seg service is provided by TV broadcast station, etc.
1seg video/audio/data broadcast can be received for free, and no application is required.
There are two types of data displayed in the storage area: Data broadcast and Data broadcast site. Data broadcast is broadcast with video and audio. By Data broadcast site, a site that TV broadcast station, etc. prepares is accessed from broadcast information. i-mode site, etc. may be accessed. i-mode application is required for site access.
Packet communications charges apply to view Data broadcast site and i-mode site. Information charges may apply for some sites
(i-mode pay sites). Signals 1seg is one of the broadcast services, and receive signals (broadcast waves) different from those of FOMA services. Programs cannot be viewed in/out of FOMA range when waves do not reach or broadcast is paused. Even in digital terrestrial broadcast range, signals may be weak or not be received in the following cases:
Far from the signal tower
Hiding behind objects; e.g. in a mountain or building
In tunnels, underground areas, buildings, etc. 1seg antenna is built in the FOMA terminal. Also, attempt to move the antenna, keep the FOMA terminal away from/close to your body, or move to another location for better reception. 1 s e g 208 Before use View procedure Step 1 Set channelsp.209 Register channels for the area and set a list. Step 2 View 1segp.210 When a call, etc. arrives while watching or recording When one of the following arrives while watching or recording, video and audio are interrupted and each function activates (Recording is not interrupted). Watching can be resumed after each function is finished.
Voice call
Videophone call
Alarm, Schedule, To Do, booked program (When Alarm setting is set to Alarm preferred) N
1seg programs cannot be viewed if FOMA card (UIM) is not inserted, subscription to DOCOMO is canceled, or FOMA service usage is stopped.
Even if subscribed FOMA card (UIM) is inserted, 1seg may not be activated, e.g. if 1seg programs are watched repeatedly out of FOMA range. In this case, move into FOMA range and retry activation.
Do not activate in the following situations when watching 1seg programs for the first time:
Out of FOMA range
Self mode activating
Prolonged 1seg watching while charging may shorten battery life. Important
The information stored in your mobile phone (still images recorded with 1seg, TV links, information saved to the storage area for broadcasts, etc.) cannot be transferred. We recommend that you take precautions such as keeping a separate note of important information. Setting Channels
<Channel setting>
To use 1seg, set channels and select a channel list beforehand. Register a channel list for each area. Selecting the channel list allows you to watch local channels.
Up to 10 channel lists can be registered, each of which can contain up to 50 broadcast stations.
Receivable channels vary depending on the area. Registering channel lists 1 i1SEGChannel setting Select area To search for channels automatically and register a channel list
Auto channel settingYESYESEnter title To interrupt search, press o (Cancel) or t then select YES. 2 Select areaSelect prefectureYES N
Select area may not work properly depending on the area. In this case, use Auto channel setting.
Perform Auto channel setting in a digital terrestrial TV service area with strong signals.
Remote control No. duplicated may appear in Auto channel setting. In this case, select area manually. 1 s e g Changing channel lists Select a channel list to set channels. 1 i1SEGChannel list The Channel list screen appears. Channel list Function menup.210 Continued on next page 209 2 Select channel list Channel list is set, and the Channel info screen appears. Channel info Function menup.210 Channel list screen (p.209) Channel settingp.209 Edit titleEdit channel list title. Delete thisDelete the channel list. Channel info screen (p.210) Remote control No.Change channel set to remote control No. Delete thisDelete the channel. When all channels in the channel list are deleted, the channel list is also deleted. N
Current channel list cannot be deleted on the channel 1 s e g list selection screen or channel info screen. Change the channel list then delete. Watching 1seg Programs
<Active 1Seg>
1 i1SEGActive 1Seg The 1seg screen appears with last-viewed channel.
To end watching, press y, or t (1 second or longer), then select YES.
The disclaimer screen appears the first time 1seg activates.p.208 1seg Function menup.211 210 N
G-GUIDE EPG Remote Control, channel link displayed on a site or mail message, etc. are also available to activate 1seg. Media To functionp.147 Guide to the 1seg screen Portrait Landscape Program title Video Subtitles Data broadcasting TV/Data modep.212 TV mode Data broadcast mode ECO modep.215 ECO mode activating Recording status Recording/Timer recording Recording paused Save destination microSD Signal strength (approximate) Good Poor appears when out of range. Channel (remote control No.) Subtitle reception appears when receiving subtitles. Volume Mail ticker Ticker displays information on i-mode mail, SMS, Area Mail and MessageR/F received while viewing 1seg. 1seg screen (p.210) Program infoDisplay information on the viewed program. Operations available while viewing 1seg Mail*
Some key operations are not available in data broadcast mode. Key v 0 to 9 wq v (1 second or longer) c (a ()/
s ()) t d 9 (1 second or longer) r r (1 second or longer) o o (1 second or longer) p Action Forward channel selection One-touch channel selection Press keys corresponding to channels from 1 to 12. Channel search Searches for receivable channels in frequency order. To interrupt search, press o or t. Volume adjustment Mute Switch screen directions In order of Portrait Wide (90 right) Wide (90 left) Switch TV/data BC Switch display In order of Data broadcast Visual image+DBC V.img+Caption+DBC Still image recording, Recording end Recording start Activate G-GUIDE EPG Remote Control
In data broadcast mode, press c/d to highlight/
select a link, v to move between pages, and t to go back. N
Subtitles may not appear depending on the program.
Data broadcast cannot be displayed in landscape display.
E.g. when you move to another location and perform channel search, you may find a channel that was not found in Auto channel setting. Perform Add Channel to watch the channel from the next time. InboxShows the Inbox folder list screen. Compose messagep.156 Suggested messageCompose mail by pasting information on a channel being viewed into the message body.p.156 On the recipient handset, the program can be activated using the Media To function. Program guideActivate G-GUIDE EPG Remote Control.p.212 Display setting Switch displayChange screens. Visual image+DBCDisplay TV/data broadcast. V.img+Caption+DBCDisplay TV, subtitles and data broadcast. Data broadcastDisplay data broadcast only. 1seg audio plays. SubtitlesShow subtitles at bottom
(ON(Wide:Bottom)), at top (ON(Wide:Top)), or hide
(OFF). BrightnessAdjust brightness between three levels. Icon show(Wide) (default: Show always)Set whether to always or temporarily show icons other than program title in landscape mode (p.210). 1 s e g Sound Main/Sub sound (default: Main sound)Set sound output mode. Sound switchChange sounds. Can only be performed when the sound can be changed. TV sound w/ closedSet whether to continue outputting sound when the FOMA terminal is closed while watching. ECO mode (default: OFF)Set whether to reduce backlight brightness to conserve battery. Channel Channel infoDisplay information on the selected channel list. Channel listp.209 Channel settingp.209 Continued on next page 211 Using Data Broadcasting
<Data broadcast>
In 1seg, use data broadcast as well as video/audio. Make use of program-linked site and other various information including pictures and videos. Select item (link) to use Phone To/Mail To functions, etc.p.147
Data broadcast cannot be displayed in landscape display. 1 1seg screen (TV mode) (p.210)
r Data broadcast mode activates and appears. To view data broadcast only
1Seg screenu (FUNC)Display setting Switch displayData broadcast 2 Select an item (link) If i-mode access confirmation appears, select YES. If YES(Always) is selected, the screen will not appear from the next time.
Operation during site viewingp.139 N
1seg audio plays in data broadcast mode.
In data broadcast/data broadcast site text entry, pictographs cannot be entered.
If YES(Always) is selected on the data broadcast confirmation screen, data broadcast information automatically updates and packet communications charges may apply. Select serviceSelect service to view when multiple services (programs) are broadcast from the same channel. Add channelAdd currently viewed channel to channel list. Data broadcast TV link listDisplay the TV link list screen. p.213 Re-readReload the displayed data broadcast site. Show certificateDisplay certificate used on SSL communication.p.149 Back to data BCEnd viewing data broadcast site and return to data broadcast. Data BC settings Set image disp. (default: ON)Set whether to display images on data broadcast site. Sound effect (default: ON)Set whether to enable sound effects for data broadcast/data broadcast site. Reset disp. set.Set to hide a confirmation screen afterwards by selecting YES(Always). Perform this setting to redisplay a confirmation screen. Switch TV/data BCSwitch between TV and data broadcast modes while viewing. Add desktop iconp.94 1 s e g
*: When 2in1 is in B mode, you cannot compose and send i-mode mail.p.320 Using G-GUIDE EPG Remote Control
<G-GUIDE EPG Remote Control>
G-GUIDE EPG Remote Control allows activating 1seg from program guide or booking program/timer recording.p.194 1 i1SEGProgram guide The program guide appears. To view a program
Highlight a programu (TV (Activate TV)) N
To use downloaded Program guide i-ppli, select Program guide from the Software setting on the Software list screen (p.188). 212 Using TV Link
<TV link>
TV link list screen (p.213) Sites or memos can be added to TV link depending on data broadcast/data broadcast site. Add to TV link to view often-used sites or memos easily. Adding to TV link If selected item (link) can be added to TV link, a message appears asking whether to add to TV link.
Up to 50 entries can be added. 1 On the 1seg screen (data broadcast mode) (p.212)Select available itemYES If selected URL or memo is already added A message appears asking whether to overwrite the existing one. Select YES to overwrite. N
URLs or memos added to TV link are only available on 1seg, not on i-mode or full browser.
Some links may have validity periods. Opening sites or memos from TV link 1 i1SEGTV linkSelect TV link If i-mode access confirmation appears, select YES. If validity period has expired A message appears asking whether to delete the link. TV link list Function menup.213 TV link list icons Icon Type Memo Data broadcast site i-mode contents
Videos/Subtitles do not appear even if accessing data broadcast site. Display detailView Title, URL, Outline, Contents type and Expiration Date. No. of TVlinkView the number of stored TV links. Delete this/Delete selected/Delete allSelect the deletion method. Selecting multiplep.38 Recording Scenes While Watching
<Record 1seg>
Save current program as a video or picture.
Recorded videos are saved to a microSD card.
Maximum number of videos: 99*1
Maximum recording time*2: 600 min.*3
*1 : Actual storable count may be decreased depending on the data size.
*2 : Maximum recording time varies depending on the channel or program.
*3 : Figure estimated with 2GB microSD card.
Pictures are saved to the Image folder in Data Box 1Seg folder.
<Example: To record video>
1 On the 1seg screen (p.210) o (1 second or longer) Recording starts. Channels cannot be changed during recording. To record picture
o Picture is saved. 1 s e g 2 o Recording ends and video is saved.
If storage area becomes full, recording automatically ends and video recorded until then is saved. N
Recording may not be performed due to copyright restrictions, etc.
Recorded video or picture cannot be set as standby screen, ring tone, receiving screen, etc.
Data broadcast cannot be recorded.
The following shows saved video file name and title:
File name: PRGXXX (XXX: Alphanumeric) Title: YYYYMMDDhhmmXXX (Y: Year, M: Month, D:
Day, h: Hour, m: Minute, X: Number)
The following shows saved picture file name and title:
YYYYMMDDhhmmXXX (Y: Year, M: Month, D: Day, h:
Hour, m: Minute, X: Number)
Video cannot be recorded if signal strength is
. Continued on next page 213 2 u (FUNC)New To edit booked schedule
u (FUNC)Edit Software key o displays New if no entry is stored and Edit if any. 3 Select any item Date setting (Start/End)*1Enter date and time to start/end. Enter dateEnter date and time. Choose dateSelect date from Calendar, then enter time. ChannelSelect channel. Edit titleEnter program title. RepeatSelect 1 time, Daily or Select day. Alarm*2Set whether to play the alarm at specified date and time of time recording. Alarm*3Select ON, ON/Set time (15 seconds before to 10 seconds before) or OFF for alarm at timer activation date and time. Alarm toneSelect the alarm tone from Clock Alarm Tone or melody, i-motion or music folders at timer activation date and time. VolumeUse c to adjust the alarm tone volume. Priority*2Set operation to be performed when the start date and time arrives while using 1seg/Music group (1seg, Data Box (1seg), Music, Music&Video Channel). RecordingInterrupt/End current operation to start recording. Operation preferredA screen appears asking whether to start recording. Select YES to interrupt/end current operation to start recording. Activate TV w/ alarmSet whether to activate 1seg from the alarm notification screen. If ON is selected, press d (TV) then select YES to activate 1seg in alarm notification.
*1 : For booking program, set Date setting(from).
*2 : Set only for timer recording.
*3 : Set only for booking program. 4 Set each itemo (Finish) N
<Video recording>
If signal strength becomes
, recording continues but video/audio are not saved. flashes during recording.
Recording is not interrupted even if screens are changed by Multitask or a call arrives.
During recording, alarm sounds for about 2 seconds, one minute before recording scheduled time. Operation is performed based on Priority set at the time of timer recording registration as follows:
Recording: Confirmation message appears, video recording is finished and timer recording starts.
Operation preferred: Message appears asking whether to start timer recording. Select YES to end video recording and start timer recording. Select NO to continue video recording.
Some data cannot be recorded until the memory is full.
1seg contains copy control signals: Copy Never, Copy Once, Copy Free. Each broadcast station sets copy control signals.
Copy Never program cannot be recorded. When copy control signal changes to Copy Never during recording, recording stops and video recorded until then will be saved. Using Timer Activation/
Recording
<Booking program list/Timer recording list>
1 s e g Set date and time, channel, program title, etc. Alarm sounds at specified date and time indicating the program/recording start.
Timer activation/recording alarmsp.289
Up to 100 activation/recording entries can be booked.
Program guide i-ppli, channel link displayed on a site or mail message, etc. are also available for timer activation/recording.
<Example: To book activation>
1 i1SEGBooking program list The Booking program list screen appears. To book timer recording
Timer recording list The Timer recording list screen appears. Booking program list Function menup.215 214 When recording is finished view up to 100 results from the latest. Select recording result to play recorded program. appears on the standby screen. Select to N
<Booking program>
If multiple alarm entries are added for the same date and time, priority is given to an entry with earlier start date and time. If the same start date and time is set, priority is given to an entry added later.
To set alarm illumination, go to Illumination set then Schedule/Alarm.
<Timer recording>
Recording is not possible if the FOMA terminal is in the following statuses one minute before start date and time:
Powered off
During Dial lock/Omakase Lock
During infrared data exchange/iC communication
Software updating
Recording may not start at specified date and time in the following cases:
Weak signals
Unstable reception
Video image is not provided
Insufficient memory in destination
During international roaming
Out of FOMA service area
1seg audio does not play while recording by timer recording. To play audio, press t or adjust volume. Booking program list screen
(p.214)/Timer recording list screen (p.214) New, EditNewly add or edit booking program/timer recording entries.p.214 SortSort entries by selected condition. DeleteSelect Delete this, Delete selected, Delete past or Delete all. Selecting multiplep.38
Delete past deletes entries with start date and time set before current date and time. Memory info*View video storage capacity.
*: Only available on the Timer recording list screen. Configuring 1seg Settings
<User settings>
1 i1SEGUser settings 2 Select any item SubtitlesShow subtitles at bottom
(ON(Wide:Bottom)), at top (ON(Wide:Top)), or hide
(OFF). Rec. while low batterySet whether to continue recording when battery becomes low while recording. ON (default)Continue recording without displaying the confirmation screen. OFFA screen appears asking whether to finish recording. TV sound while closed (default: ON)Set whether to continue outputting sound when the FOMA terminal is closed while watching. ECO mode (default: OFF)Set whether to reduce backlight brightness to conserve battery. Display lightSet display light for watching. Constant light (default)Always turn on display light. Lighting durationSet display light duration (01 to 30 minutes). Data BC settings 1 s e g Set image disp. (default: ON)Set whether to display images on data broadcast site. Sound effect (default: ON)Set whether to enable sound effects for data broadcast/data broadcast site. Reset disp. set.Set to hide a confirmation screen afterwards by selecting YES(Always). Perform this setting to redisplay a confirmation screen. Icon show(Wide) (default: Show always)Set whether to always or temporarily show icons other than program title in landscape display (p.210). Check TV settingsConfirm User settings. Reset channel settingDelete all channels. Reset storage areaDelete channel information from storage area. Delete thisDelete selected channel only. Delete allDelete all channels. Reset TV settingsReset User settings to default. Continued on next page 215 N
<TV sound while closed>
If set to ON, data broadcast site information may automatically update and packet communications charges may apply even when the FOMA terminal is closed.
<ECO mode>
When activating the view style in ECO mode, cache data broadcast site data will be cleared.
<Reset disp. set.>
1seg activation confirmation screen (p.208) is not reset.
<Icon show(Wide)>
Even if set to Show temporarily, an icon may appear in a weak signal location. Notifying New Message Arrival While Watching
<Mail ticker>
Ticker shows new message arrival while viewing 1seg: i-mode mail, SMS, Area Mail and MessageR/F. 1 iSETTINGSDisplayMail tickerSelect any item Display senderDisplay sender name stored in Phonebook. Display sender/subjectDisplay sender name stored in Phonebook and subject. Not displayHide mail ticker. N
Only new arrival appears in the following cases:
Sender e-mail address is not stored in phonebook
Area Mail or MessageR/F arrives
New filtering message comes to lock-active folder
Inbox is locked
Original lock is active for the phonebook or message 1 s e g 216 Full Browser 218 Displaying Website Designed for PC ............................................................ Setting the Full Browser.................................................................... 221 Cookie............................................................................................................................. 221 Referer............................................................................................................................ 222 Full Browser Full Browser settings Home URL, bookmark and other data registered in Full Browser are not available for i-mode. Furthermore, the settings performed in Full Browser are invalid for i-mode. 217 Displaying Website Designed for PC
<Full Browser>
You can enjoy viewing websites designed for PC with the Full Browser function. Some websites incompatible with i-mode can be displayed correctly.
Some websites may not be displayed or be displayed incorrectly.
Note that the communication charge can become expensive if large volumes of data is acquired by viewing websites containing many image data or downloading files. For details on packet communication fee, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide [i-mode] FOMA version.
You can view a website composed of frames*1. You can also select a frame to display it.p.220
You can view SSL/TLS*2-compliant websites in Full F u l l B r o w s e r Browser.
*1: The frame used in this chapter refers to each of separated sections that constitute a website page and differs from that used for framed photography.
*2: SSL and TLS are authentication/encryption technology to protect your privacy in data transmissions. Data sent to or received from a SSL/TLS page is encrypted to prevent hackers from eavesdropping data, site spoofing or altering, thus making credit card transactions and the sending of personal information (e.g. address) safer. Displaying a website 1 oFull Browser 2 Select any item:
HomeDisplays a website with the URL registered as home URL. BookmarkDisplays the website registered as bookmark. URL historyp.138 Enter URLEnters a URL to display the website. Full Browser settingsp.221 218 When the confirmation message asking whether to use Full Browser appears The default setting of Access setting (setting whether to use Full Browser) is OFF. When OFF is set for Access setting, the confirmation message asking whether to use Full Browser appears. Read the given notes carefully and perform the setting. When you select Yes on the confirmation message, ON is set for Access setting (p.221) and the setting will be retained. N
You cannot save a page displayed in Full Browser as a screen memo.
Websites displayed in Full Browser cannot be viewed in i-mode.
The Full Browser does not support Flash movies or PDF.
Be sure to insert the FOMA card (UIM) before setting Access setting.
When Access setting is set to ON and the FOMA card (UIM) is replaced, the Access setting changes to OFF. Guide to the Full Browser screen XX XX XX XX XX XXXXXX XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXX Full Browser Function menup.220 Tab
As many tabs and titles as the number of websites displayed simultaneously (if there is no title, the URL is displayed)
indicating that the selected frame (p.220) appears
is also displayed when another frame is in communication while the selected frame is displayed (p.220). Scroll bar Current position in the displayed website (Not displayed for Mobile layout) Change window icon Pressing o (
multiple websites are open. or
) switches pages when when Mobile layout mode is used) Appears during connection to the Internet with Full Browser.
(Displays Layout 2 display mode are available (Original layout/Mobile layout). XXXXXXXX XXXXXX XXXX XXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXX XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX Original layout Operations on the Full Browser screen Scrolling Key Description b a ( ) s () a ( ) (1 second or longer) s () (1 second or longer) Scrolls to the direction that the key is pressed. Holding the key scrolls the screen continuously in the same direction. Scrolls up or down by screens. Jumps to the top or bottom of the website. Useful keys for the Full Browser screen XXXX Mobile layout Key Description 1 Zooms out Original layout Websites are displayed in the similar size to the display of 800 dots wide 600 dots high on a PC. You can view the area not displayed on the screen by scrolling vertically and horizontally. Mobile layout Websites are displayed in the width of a FOMA terminal display. Only vertical scrolling is required for viewing websites. Switching the display mode The display mode switches between Original layout and Mobile layout each time you select Change disp. mode from the function menu.
The default mode can be set in Display mode setting (p.221) of Full Browser settings.
The display mode is retained when Full Browser is exit. The same display mode is applied when the Full Browser is activated next time. 2*
(Makes the font size smaller in Mobile layout) Selecting a desired portion of the entire page, then displaying the designated part.
(Not available for the landscape screen) 3 Zooms in
(Makes the font size bigger in Mobile layout) 4 Goes back one page from the current page. 5 Displays the Bookmark folder list screen. 6 Jump forward to a page that has been 9*
stored in the FOMA terminals cache. Displays the website in landscape screen or release the landscape screen (return to the portrait screen). 0 Displays a description of an operation assigned to a key.
* : Available only in Original layout. N
The function key is available in the landscape screen even though the function screen is not displayed.
The landscape screen returns to the portrait screen after pressing t to close any window while multiple windows are active. 219 F u l l B r o w s e r Displaying a page composed of frames You can view websites composed of frames that are designed for PC. 1 Full Browser screen (p.218)Display a website composed of frames XXXXXXXX XXXXX XX XXX XXXXX XXXX XX XXXX XX XXXX XXXXXX XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXX XXX XXX XXX XXXX 2 Select a frame The selected frame is displayed. XXXXXXXX XXXXX XX XXX XXXXX XXXX XX XXXX XX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXX XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXX XXX XXX XXX XXXX All frames XXXXXXXX XXXXXX XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXX Selected frame To return to the all frames screen
t N
For a website including several frames, all the frames may not be displayed (resulting in frames without characters or images). Uploading images You can upload JPEG or GIF images stored in your FOMA terminal to websites depending on websites.
Procedure for uploading images depends on websites. Follow the procedure described on the website you visit. N
You cannot upload multiple images that exceed 80K bytes in total or data in which the selected image and other data exceed 100K bytes in total.
Some websites may not support uploading function.
You cannot upload images that are not allowed to be output to a device outside the FOMA terminal. 220 Full Browser screen (p.218) Add bookmarkAdds the website to the bookmark. Up to 100 entries can be stored. BookmarkOpens the Bookmark folder list screen. Up to 12 Bookmark folders can be created, and the minimum folders are 3 (including Secret folders). Save imageSaves the image on the displayed page. Enter URLEnters a URL to display the website. URL historyp.138 Change side modeRelease side mode*1Displays the website in landscape screen or release the landscape screen (return to the portrait screen). Zoom*2Selects the screen size from Small 2/Small 1/Standard/Large 1/Large 2/Zoom in position. When you select the Zoom in position, select a desired portion of the entire page. Change font size*3Selects the font size from Small/
Standard/Large/X-large.p.93 Window Open new windowUsing multi window p.140 Close windowCloses the displayed window. Change windowSwitches windows when multiple websites are open. All framesReturns to the all frames screen from the Selected frame screen Change disp. modeSwitches between Original layout and Mobile layout. ReloadRefreshes the displayed website. Compose messagePastes the URL of the displayed website to compose an i-mode message. History backGoes back one page from the current page. History forwardReturns to the page that had been displayed before performing History back. Add shortcutp.94 Home Set as home URLRegisters the URL of the displayed website as the home URL. Only one URL can be stored. Display homeDisplays a website registered as home URL. Site info TitleDisplays the title of the displayed website. URLDisplays the URL of the displayed website. F u l l B r o w s e r CertificateDisplays the SSL/TLS certificate details when the displayed website supports SSL/
TLS. Browser settings ReplayPlays an animation in the displayed website from the beginning. Set image disp. (default: ON)Sets whether to display images. When OFF is set, appears instead of images. Referer setting (default: Send)p.222 Cookie settings (default: Valid)p.222 Delete cookiesp.222 Change CHR codeChanges the character code to redisplay a website that is not displayed correctly. HelpDisplays a description of an operation assigned to a key.
*1: Unavailable in Mobile layout.
*2: Appears when Original layout mode is used.
*3: Appears when Mobile layout mode is used. N
<Save image>
PNG and BMP images are automatically saved in an OUDXXX (XXX are numerals) folder under the OTHER folder of the microSD card. Display mode setting (default: Original layout) Original layout (default: Standard)Selects the display from Small 2/Small 1/Standard/
Large 1/Large 2. Mobile layout (default: Standard)Selects the font size from Small/Standard/Large/X-
large. Script setting (default: Valid)Sets whether to validate JavaScript* or not when displaying a page. Some websites may be displayed incorrectly unless Script setting is set to Valid. Window open guard (default: Invalid)Sets whether to automatically open a new window by using JavaScript*. When set to Valid, a window is not opened automatically. Tab display setting (default: Open at the back side) Sets whether to switch the screen (Open at the front) or not (Open at the back side) while the current screen is displayed. Check settingsChecks the Full Browser settings. ResetResets the settings specified in Full Browser settings to the default settings.
* : JavaScript is a programming language that can be included on web pages to make them more interactive. Setting the Full Browser
<Full Browser settings>
Cookie Using Cookie* enables you to effectively access the websites that you have seen once.
* : Cookie is the mechanism for temporarily saving the date you accessed the website, number of accesses and your other information. The information is sent from server, saved temporarily in your FOMA terminal and used for contents service. If Cookie is sent, the information such as date you accessed the website and number of accesses is also sent to the site. Please note that NTT DOCOMO is not responsible for any reveal of your information to third parties because of sending Cookie. However, some websites and contents services require you to validate the Cookie settings for their correct display and use. 1 oFull BrowserFull Browser settingsSelect any item:
Access setting (default: No)Sets whether to use the Full Browser. Home URL (default: Google (http://www.google.co.jp)) Sets the home URL. Scroll Speed (default: High speed)Selects the scrolling speed from High speed/Low speed. During scroll in focus (default: OFF)Sets whether to highlight the linked pages while scrolling. Set image disp. (default: ON)Sets whether to display images. When OFF is set, appears instead of images. Cookie settings (default: Valid)p.222 Delete cookiesp.222 Referer setting (default: Send)p.222 221 F u l l B r o w s e r Referer You can set whether to send Referer*.
* : Referer is information of source link. Sending Referer transfers information such as the page from which you access the site. Please note that NTT DOCOMO is not responsible for any reveal of your information to third parties because of sending Referer. However, you may not access the linked pages in some websites unless Referer is sent. Setting Referer 1 oFull BrowserFull Browser settingsReferer settingSelect any item:
SendSends Referer. UnsendDoes not send Referer. NotifyConfirms whether to send Referer. Setting Cookie 1 oFull BrowserFull Browser settingsCookie settingsSelect any item:
ValidAlways validates Cookie. No confirmation is made when Cookie is sent or received. InvalidAlways invalidates Cookie. Notify (sending)Enables you to choose whether to send Cookie every time you connect to a page. No confirmation is made when Cookie is received and the information is saved in your FOMA terminal. Notify (receiving)Enables you to choose whether to receive Cookie every time you connect to a page. No confirmation is made when Cookie is sent. Notify (send/recv.)Enables you to choose whether to send or receive Cookie every time you connect to a page. N
Cookies are deleted in the ascending order of no use when the number and size of Cookies exceed the maximum limit.
Resetting the Full Browser settings deletes Cookies. Deleting Cookie You can delete the Cookies for Full Browser stored in your FOMA terminal. 1 oFull BrowserFull Browser settingsDelete CookiesEnter your security codeYES All the Cookies for Full Browser stored in your FOMA terminal are deleted. (You cannot delete them separately.) 222 F u l l B r o w s e r Data Display/Edit/Management 240 235 Melody 225 231 233 235 Video player Kisekae Tool Rec. Chara-den i-motion Edit movie My picture Edit image Data Box ......................................................................................................................... 224 Mastering still images Displaying the Stored Images.......................................................................... Editing Images ................................................................................................ Mastering movies Playing Movies/i-motion ...................................................................................... Editing Movies ................................................................................................. Mastering video Playing Video ................................................................................................ Mastering Chara-den What is Chara-den?........................................................................................................ 237 Saving Chara-den Character as Image or Movie..................................... 239 Mastering melodies Playing Melodies.................................................................................................. Mastering Kisekae Tool Managing Kisekae Tool................................................................................ Mastering Memory Cards microSD Card ................................................................................................................. 243 Displaying the Data in the microSD Card ....................................................................... 247 Exchanging the Data Between the microSD Card and FOMA Terminal......................... 248 Moving the Copyrighted Data Among the microSD Card and FOMA Terminal
............................................................................................................... 250 Managing the microSD Card .......................................................................................... 251 Setting the USB Mode .......................................................................... 251 Using the FOMA Terminal as a microSD Reader/Writer................................................. 252 Setting How to Print Images Stored on the microSD Card ......................... 252 Mastering various data Working with Folders and Files....................................................................................... 253 Managing the Phonebook and SMS on the FOMA Card............................ 254 Transferring data with Infrared data exchange/iC communication/cable connection Infrared Data Exchange/iC Communication ................................................................... 255 257 Forwarding Data with Infrared Data Exchange .............................. 259 Forwarding Data with iC Communication.............................................. Forwarding Data by Cable Connection ............................................... 260 Barring Phonebook Image Forwarding ................................................. 260 Using the Infrared Remote Control Function .................................................................. 261 Mastering PDF/Document viewer 261 Viewing PDF Data ...................................................................................... Viewing Documents ............................................................................... 263 PDF Data Screen/Document View Screen ..................................................................... 263 Infrared data exchange iC communication OBEX connection Forwarding image My document Document viewer USB mode setting Movable contents UIM operation DPOF setting 242 223 Data Box In Data Box, still images and movies shot using the FOMA terminals camera or data downloaded from mails or websites are saved. Folders
The following items and folders are prepared and you can categorize the data into the folders depending on the file type. Folder Contents Folder Picture micro SD Decorate PI*2 Image Box Frame Stamp Music Playlist Inbox WMA My picture Inbox Camera Decomail-
picture*1 You can select this folder to save still images shot using the FOMA terminals camera, and images retrieved from websites, mails or Bar code reader. Images copied from the microSD card or forwarded by infrared data exchange are automatically saved to this folder. You can select this folder to save same images as Inbox. Images shot with Chara-den shooting are automatically saved to this folder. Images for Deco-mail are pre-
installed. You can select this folder to save same images as Inbox. Deco-mail pictographs are stored in the folder which is arranged by the categories. Deco-mail pictographs downloaded from website, attached to mails or copied from the microSD card are saved. Standby screens, wakeup images and animations are pre-installed. Save the images you want to prevent others from viewing. User-created You can select this folder to save folder*4 same images as Inbox. Original animation Animations created from Decorate PI*2 Pre-installed Secret*3 continuous mode and original animations are stored. 224 D a t a D i s p l a y
E d i t
M a n a g e m e n t Contents Still images you shot, JPEG/GIF images copied from the FOMA terminal, JPEG/GIF images stored on the microSD card from a PC are saved. Deco-mail pictographs copied from the FOMA terminal or stored on the microSD card from a PC are saved. GIF animations and SWF Flash movie copied from the FOMA terminal, JPEG images, GIF animations stored and SWF Flash on the microSD card from a PC are saved. Frames are pre-installed. Frames retrieved from websites are automatically saved to this folder. Image stamps are pre-installed. Stamps retrieved from websites are automatically saved to this folder. Playlists created on the FOMA terminal are saved. You can select this folder to save music data. Music data transferred from a PC to the microSD card is saved. Movable contents Music data moved from the FOMA terminal to the microSD card is saved. Music data is pre-installed. You can select this folder to save same the music data as Inbox. Pre-installed User-created folder*4 Music&Video Channel Delivery program The stored programs appear. User-created folder*4 You can select this folder to save the programs that is moved from the Delivery program. i-motion Inbox Camera You can select this folder to save movies shot using the FOMA terminals camera, movies and i-motion retrieved from websites or mails. Movies/i-motion copied from the microSD card or forwarded by infrared data exchange are automatically saved to this folder. You can select this folder to save same movies and i-motion as Inbox. Movies shot with Chara-den shooting are automatically saved to this folder. Folder Contents Secret*3 User-created folder*4 micro SD Save the movies and i-motion you want to prevent others from viewing. You can select this folder to save same movies and i-motion as Inbox. SD Video*5 Movies you shot, movies/i-motion copied from the FOMA terminal or Multimedia*6 movies stored on the microSD card from a PC are saved. Movable contents Movie/i-motion moved from the FOMA terminal to the microSD card is saved. This folder is used for playing a movie playlist.p.234 Playlist Melody Inbox Pre-installed User-created folder*4 Voice announce microSD Playlist My document Inbox User-created folder*4 microSD You can select this folder to save melodies retrieved from websites, mails or Bar code reader. Melodies copied from the microSD card or forwarded by infrared data exchange are automatically saved to this folder. Melodies and sound effect are pre-
installed. You can select this folder to save same melodies as Inbox. Voice recorded using the voice announce function is automatically saved to this folder. Melodies copied from the FOMA terminal or stored on the microSD card from a PC are saved. This folder is used for playing a melody playlist.p.242 PDF data is pre-installed. You can select this folder to save PDF data obtained from websites or mail. PDF files copied from a microSD card or forwarded by infrared data exchange are automatically saved to this folder. You can select this folder like Inbox to save PDF data. PDF files copied from the FOMA terminal or PC to a microSD card are saved. Chara-den Chara-den is pre-installed. Chara-den retrieved from websites are automatically saved to this folder. Kisekae Tool Packages are pre-installed. Packages retrieved from websites are automatically saved to this folder. Folder 1Seg Image Inbox User-
created folder*4 Video microSD Document viewer microSD Contents 1seg still images are automatically saved here. Still images can be moved from Inbox to save here. 1seg videos are saved here. Documents obtained from mail or copied from a PC to a microSD card are saved.
*1: Images set to functions cannot be saved.
*2: You can save only Deco-mail pictographs (20 dots wide 20 dots high, non-file-restricted JPEG/GIF images, GIF animations) to this folder.
*3: Displayed only in Secret or Secret data only mode.
*4: You can create up to 20 folders with Add folder. Enter the folder name when using Add folder. You can change the folder name afterwards using Edit folder name.
*5: Movies/i-motion with video are saved.
*6: Movies/i-motion with sound only (including the music data of AAC format) can be stored. Displaying the Stored Images
<My picture>
Still images shot using the FOMA terminals camera or downloaded from websites can be displayed in My picture of the Data Box. 1 iDATA BOXMy picture The Folder list screen appears. Contents of the My picture folderp.224 To view still images recorded with 1seg
iDATA BOX1Seg
Image 2 Select a folder The Image list screen (9 images) appears. Image list screenp.226 To search images by i-mode
Search by i-mode YES Folder list Function menup.253 Image list Function menup.228 Continued on next page 225 D a t a D i s p l a y
E d i t
M a n a g e m e n t 3 Select an image The My picture screen appears. Use v to display the previous or next image. To switch the screen mode My picture Function menup.228
p (Normal/Full) In the Full screen mode, the oblong image is displayed just as it is, and rectangular image rotates to the right 90 degrees and displayed. To zoom in an image
d (
The image is zoomed in or out by one step each time you press o (+) or p (-). Pressing u (Actual) displays the image in the actual size. If the image does not fit in the screen, use b to scroll the image. To return to the original zoom, press d (Back).
) N
The following images cannot be displayed:
An image which exceeds 2M bytes
An image whose width or height exceeds 2,592 dots or total number of dots exceeds 2,592 1,944 dots
A progressive JPEG or GIF image whose total number of dots exceeds 854 480
While displaying in the large size, you cannot change to the previous or next image by using v or display the function menu.
When enlarging an image larger than 1,705 dots wide 1,705 dots high, you may not be able to display the image in the actual size.
Original animation, GIF-formatted animation or Flash movie cannot be displayed in the large size.
Flash movies are played at the volume set in Phone in the Ring volume settings (if Step is set, Flash movies are played at the Level 2 volume). Guide to the 9 images view/list view Image type icon Image type icon Retrieval method icon Allowable operation icon p (Disp SW) Title Allowable operation icon Pop-up guide 9 images Title Retrieval method icon List only 9 images 9 images stored on the FOMA terminal appear on the screen.
* Original animations are always displayed in list view. List only 11 images are listed on the screen. Image type icon Icon Description JPEG format image GIF format image GIF (IFM) frame, image stamp SWF Flash movie MP4 movie/i-motion MP4 i-motion with sound effect
(Blue note) ASF i-motion
(Orange note) MP4 i-motion with playback restriction MP4 format i-motion with sound effect and playback restriction Partially downloaded i-motion Guide to the 9 images view/list view
(Green note) i-motion that can be moved to the FOMA terminal (Phone) Setting the Image list display mode
<Viewer settings>
(Blue note) Sound effected i-motion that can be moved to the FOMA terminal (Phone) 1 iSETTINGSDisplayViewer settingsSelect any item:
List only (default)Changes to the list view. 9 imagesChanges to the images view. i-motion that is prohibited to move to the FOMA terminal (Phone) AFD Chara-den Video recorded with 1seg Image to which the FOMA card security function applies 226 D a t a D i s p l a y
E d i t
M a n a g e m e n t
: Data that are file-restricted or not allowed to be attached to mails or output from the FOMA terminal i-motion with playback restriction (
turns to period or limit expires) when the playback count,
: Movable only when the FOMA card being used was also used to save the i-motion
: Movable only when the model and FOMA card being used were also used to save the i-motion Retrieval method icon Icon Description No icon Pre-installed data Data downloaded from site, mail, ToruCa or retrieved from i-ppli Data you shot with camera Data acquired via Infrared data exchange, iC communication, the microSD card, Bar code reader or PC Downloaded frames and image stamps Chara-den shots Data recorded with 1seg Data clipped out of PDF data Allowable operation icon Icon Description Movies/i-motion of QVGA size (can be displayed only on the i-motion folder) Movies/i-motion data of VGA size (can be displayed only on the i-motion folder) Can be attached to i-mode mail (2M bytes or smaller) Can be inserted into Deco-mail Can be set to the screen Can be specified as Ring tone Can be transferred via Infrared data exchange and iC communication Can be copied to the microSD card Can be edited i-motion data that can be moved to the microSD card Larger than 10M bytes (10M bytes is not included) (can be displayed only on the microSD folder)
: Movable only when the FOMA card being used was also used to save the i-motion
: Movable only when the model and FOMA card being used were also used to save the i-motion File format Folder File format My picture Inbox Camera Decomail-picture Decorate PI Pre-installed Secret User-created folder Original animation microSD Frame Stamp Music Playlist Inbox WMA Movable contents Pre-installed User-created folder Music&Video Channel Delivery program User-created folder i-motion Inbox Camera Secret User-created folder microSD Movable contents Playlist Melody Inbox Pre-installed User-created folder Voice announce microSD Playlist My document Inbox User-created folder microSD Chara-den JPEG, GIF, SWF JPEG, GIF JPEG, SWF JPEG, GIF, SWF JPEG, GIF, SWF IFM 3GP WMA SB2 3GP 3GP, MP4 MP4 D a t a D i s p l a y
E d i t
M a n a g e m e n t MP4, ASF (ASF is for playback only) SB1 SMF, MFi MFi SMF, MFi SMF, MFi PDF AFD Continued on next page 227 Folder File format Kisekae Tool 1Seg Image Video Document viewer microSD UCM, UCP JPEG MPEG2-TS Word, Excel, PowerPoint Titles and file names
Still images or movies you shot are automatically titled and named. Title File name : yyyymmddhhmmxxx
: yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm (Year/Month/Day Time*) Date and time*
(3-digit number is added in the xxx part for still image)
* : The time when the still image is saved or when the movie shooting is finished is used. Note that the time when the movie is saved is used if the Auto save set is set to OFF.
Original titles are assigned to downloaded i-motion and Chara-den characters.
The file names and titles are the same for downloaded images.
Titles and file names of videos or still images recorded with 1segp.213
The title is displayed on the Image list screen of the FOMA terminal.
The file name is displayed when the data is transmitted to PC.
If the file name contains an inappropriate character, the file is automatically renamed to imagexxx or moviexxx. File restriction This setting specifies whether you allow the receivers FOMA terminal to redistribute (attach or forward) the image or movie you shot or melody when attaching it to a mail. When set to File unrestricted, the receiver can redistribute the file freely. However, when set to File restricted, the receiver cannot redistribute the file.
You can change the file restriction setting after saving the image or movie.pp.228, 234, 241 Image list screen (p.225) /My picture screen (p.226)
The available functions vary depending on the folders, which means that the items listed in the function menu are different. Edit imagep.231 Edit title*1Edits the title of the image. You can enter up to 9 double-byte or 18 single-byte characters (you can enter up to 18 double-byte or 36 single-byte characters for the microSD card. 228 D a t a D i s p l a y
E d i t
M a n a g e m e n t Display image*1Displays the image (displays the My picture screen). Set as displaySets the image for screens such as the standby screen. appears next to the selected item. Changing the Displayp.88 Setting an image to sendp.67 Image infoFile name and File save date and time are displayed. Compose message*2Composes an i-mode mail by selecting either attaching the still image or inserting it in the message. p.230 iC transmissionp.259 Send Ir dataIrSSp.258 Set image disp.*3Sets the display size of images. Normal (default)Displays the image in the actual size. Fit in displayDisplays the image fit in the screen regardless of the image size. NormalFull screen*3In the Full screen mode, the oblong image is displayed just as it is, and rectangular image rotates to the right 90 degrees and displayed. In the Normal mode, the oblong image or the rectangular image is displayed just as it is. Add shortcutp.94 Copy to microSDp.248 Add image to PBSaves the image to the phonebook. p.71 Edit file name*1Edits the file name of the image. You can enter up to 36 single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols (- and _ only). File restriction*1Specifies whether to allow the redistribution of the saved image.p.228 Move*1Selects from Move this/Move selected/Move all and moves the image to the other folder you select. About multiple-choicep.38 Memory info*1Displays the amount of image stored and available space (the amount of the data of the FOMA terminal does not contain the amount of the secret data). Sort*1Sorts images in a selected criteria. Chg. list viewChg. images view*1Switches between list view and images view. Composite image*1p.230 Retry*3Replays the displayed animation from the beginning. Store in Center*1p.229 Delete*1Selects the deleting method from Delete this/Delete selected/Delete all. About multiple-choicep.38 Delete this*3Deletes one image. Keep in secretPut out*1*4Preventing Others from Viewing Datap.104 Copy to Phone*5p.249 DPOF setting*5p.252 Copy*1*5Copying the data to the different folder in the microSD cardp.250
*1: Available only with the Image list screen.
*2: Not available when 2in1 is in B mode.
*3: Available only with the My picture screen.
*4: Available only in Secret or Secret data only mode.
*5: Available only for images stored on the microSD card. N
<Edit title>
You may not be able to edit the title when the space is not enough on the microSD card.
You cannot edit the titles of the pre-installed images.
<Set as display>
You can set the images in Inbox, Camera or User-
created folder to the following screens:
Standby screen, wake-up display
Dialing/calling screens of voice or videophone calls
Mail sending/receiving/checking/receiving result
Answer hold/on hold/substitute image/record message/preparing message/voice memo for videophone calls
You cannot specify the following images to the screens:
An image whose width or height is larger than 854 dots
An image whose file size exceeds 100K bytes
(except for standby and wake-up display)
<Normal/Full screen>
In case of GIF animations and SWF Flash movies, the display does not change even if you switch the Normal mode and Full screen.
<Add image to PB>
You can add an image whose size is 100K bytes or smaller and whose width or height is 854 dots or smaller.
You cannot add images other than JPEG or GIF.
<Edit file name>
You cannot edit the names of the following images:
Pre-installed images
A still image of Chara-den character with Rec. File Restriction
Images that is prohibited to be output from your FOMA terminal
You cannot use single-byte spaces for file names.
<File restriction>
You cannot change restrictions if it is:
Neither JPEG nor GIF
A still image of Chara-den character with Rec. File Restriction N
<Sort>
By source sorts the images in the following order. Downloaded images or images acquired from i-ppli or ToruCa Still images shot by the camera Images retrieved using Infrared data exchange, iC communication or from microSD card, etc. Chara-den shots Images clipped out of PDF data Pre-installed images Storing images at the Data Security Center You can store images, etc. stored in the FOMA terminal at the Data Security Center.
Data Security Service is a pay service you need to apply for. If you have not subscribed to the service and try to connect to the Data Security Center, the notification screen appears. 1 Image list screen (p.225)u (FUNC)
Store in CenterUse b to select an imageo (Finish) You can select up to 10 images. 2 Enter your security codeYES The FOMA terminal connects to the Data Security Center to start saving the images. 3 o (Finish) N
You cannot save images when the file size for a image exceeds 100K bytes, when it is prohibited to be output from the FOMA terminal, pre-installed Deco-mail pictures or pictographs. To restore images The image data stored at the Data Security Center can be stored on the FOMA terminal from the site of the Data Security Center. For details on how to use, refer to Mobile Phone Users Guide [i-mode] FOMA version. D a t a D i s p l a y
E d i t
M a n a g e m e n t 229 Attaching or inserting image to compose an i-mode mail or Deco-mail You can attach the saved still image to an i-mode mail message or insert it in a Deco-mail message. 1 Image list screen (p.225)u (FUNC)
Compose messageSelect any item:
Attach imageAttaches the image that is not larger than 240 dots wide 320 dots high or 320 dots wide 240 dots high. Select any of the following items to attach an image that is larger than the image described above. Attach mailAttaches the image without changing the image size. QVGA scale downAttaches image by reducing its image size to 240 dots wide 320 dots high or 320 dots wide 240 dots high or smaller without changing its aspect ratio. Insert imageInserts the image that is smaller than 96 dots wide 128 dots high or 128 dots wide 96 dots high and its file size is 90K bytes or less to the Deco-mail message. Select any of the following items to attach an image that is larger than the image described above. Insert mailInserts image by reducing its file size to 90K bytes or less without changing the image size. SubQCIF scale downInserts image by reducing its image size to 96 dots wide 128 dots high or 128 dots wide 96 dots high without changing its aspect ratio. Also, changes the file size if its file size is larger than the maximum. 2 Check the edited imaged (Set) Compose message When you select Attach mail/Insert mail There is no checking operation of the image. Composing and Sending i-mode Mailp.156 Composing Deco-mailp.158 D a t a D i s p l a y
E d i t
M a n a g e m e n t 230 Making a composite image from 4 images
You cannot specify images larger than 352 dots wide 288 dots high or 288 dots wide 352 dots high, except the following:
VGA (640 480), VGA V. (480 640)
Screen (240 427)
CIF V. (288 352)
QVGA V. (240 320)
Composite image 1 Image list screen (p.225)u (FUNC) 2 Select the positionSelect a folder Select an imageRepeat the step to select 4 images To cancel the specified image
Select the image to cancelRelease this on the folder selection screen 3 o (Finish)d (Save) To retry creating the composite image
o (Cancel) Creating animations
<Original animation>
You can create an animated cartoon made of up to 20 frames using stored images.
You can specify JPEG images which are 854 dots wide 854 dots high or smaller as an original animation.
You can create up to 20 animations. 1 iDATA BOXMy picture Original animation The Original animation list screen appears. 2 <New>
3 Select a frameSelect a folderSelect Original animation list Function menup.231 an imageRepeat the step to specify images To cancel the specified image
Select the frame to cancelRelease this on the folder selection screen 4 o (Finish) Original animation list screen
(p.230) Edit titleEdits the title of the original animation. You can enter up to 9 double-byte or 18 single-byte characters. Org. animationNewly creates Original animation when <New> is highlighted. Edits the original animation when the existing one is highlighted. Display imagePlays the original animation (Displays the original animation playback screen). Set as displaySelects the item to which the original animation is set. Image infoChecks the destination to save the original animation set in Set as display. If there is no setting, No set is displayed. Release animationCancels the original animation. Playing the original animation 1 Original animation list screen (p.230) Select an original animation The Original animation playback screen appears. If there are two original animations or more, use v to play the previous or next animation. Original animation playback Function menup.231 Original animation playback screen (p.231) Set as displaySelects the item to which the image is set. Set image disp.Specifies the display mode of an image smaller than the image display area. Normal (default)Displays the image in the actual size. Fit in displayEnlarges the movie to the display size. RetryPlays the animation from the beginning. Editing Images
<Edit image>
You can edit the still images you shot, etc.
The following are the contents and size you can edit:
[Frame]
854 480, 480 854 dots
640 480, 480 640 dots
352 288, 288 352 dots
320 240, 240 320 dots
427 240, 240 427 dots
176 144, 144 176 dots
128 96, 96 128 dots
[Image effect/Correct backlight/Refresh skin tone]
Up to 854 480, 480 854 dots
[Image stamp/Character stamp/Trim away/
Brightness/Rotate/Change size]
2,592 1,944, 1,944 2,592 dots
2,304 1,728, 1,728 2,304 dots
2,048 1,536, 1,536 2,048 dots
1,616 1,212, 1,212 1,616 dots
1,600 1,200, 1,200 1,600 dots
1,280 960, 960 1,280 dots
Up to 854 480, 480 854 dots However, an image larger than 854 480 or 480 854 dots is scaled dowen to 640 480 or 480 640 dots before editing.
* Even if the image size is able to edit in the descriptions above, some image may not support editing function. You can edit only the image with
. You cannot select the menu that cannot be edited.
When Edit image is selected in the photo mode checking screen function menu, only the Frame, Image effect, Refresh skin tone and Correct backlight are available. 1 My picture screen (p.226)u (FUNC)
Edit imageSelect any item:
Framep.232 Image effectApplies effects to the image. SharpSharpens the outline of the image. BlurSoftens the outline of the image. SepiaMakes the sepia-tone image. EmbossBrings out the image in relief. NegativeMakes the negative image. Horizontal flipReverses the left and right in the image (mirroring). Image stampp.232 Character stampp.232 Continued on next page 231 D a t a D i s p l a y
E d i t
M a n a g e m e n t Trim awayTrim a constant size.
Select the image size for trimming Adjust the position to trim with bd (Set) BrightnessSelects the brightness in 5 levels from -2 to 0 to +2 using v. RotateSelects the angle to rotate the image from 90 to right/90 to left/180. Change sizeSelects the image size for changing. The image is enlarged or reduced to fit in the selected size keeping the aspect ratio. Correct backlightMakes the dark part clear, which is caused by the backlight. Refresh skin toneCorrects the skin parts. Compose message*1*2p.230 Save*1Saves the edited image.
*1: This function is available after editing an image.
*2: Not available when 2in1 is in B mode. 2 Check the edited imaged (Set) 3 d (Save)YES or NO Selecting YES overwrites the original image. Selecting NO saves a new image to the folder where the original is stored. N
Editing repeatedly may impair the image quality or increase the file size. Adding frames
You can use the downloaded frames in addition to the pre-installed ones. 1 My picture screen (p.226)u (FUNC)
Edit imageFrameSelect a frame The image is displayed in the selected frame. Use v to change to another frame. To rotate the frame 180
o (Rotate) To cancel the selected frame
u (FUNC)Cancel N
If the size of the image that has been trimmed or resized is the same as that of the frame, the image can be framed. D a t a D i s p l a y
E d i t
M a n a g e m e n t 232 Pasting image stamps
You can use downloaded image stamps in addition to pre-installed ones.
You can rotate, enlarge or reduce image stamps. 1 My picture screen (p.226)u (FUNC)
Edit imageImage stamp Select an image stamp To edit an image stamp
u (FUNC)Select any item:
90 to rightRotates 90 clockwise. 90 to leftRotates 90 counterclockwise. 180Rotates 180. Scale upDoubles the size. Scale downReduces the size to half. 2 Adjust the image stamp position with bd (Put) To paste another image stamp
o (Add)Repeat steps 1 to 2 N
You can only use downloaded stamps of 240 dots wide 240 dots high or smaller. The stamps larger than the above size are handled as GIF images. Pasting character stamps
You can enter up to 15 double-byte or 30 single-
byte characters as a stamp. The number of characters that can be entered differs depending on the image size and character size.
You can change the character stamp color, font and size. 1 My picture screen (p.226)u (FUNC)
Edit imageCharacter stamp Enter characters To edit a character stamp
u (FUNC)Select any item:
Character inputEnters the character. Character colorSets the color. To use another color palette, press o (Change). Font typeSelects Gothic or Ming-cho. Font sizeSelects the size from Enlargement size/Standard size/Reduction size. 2 Adjust the character stamp position with bd (Put) N
The font thickness is specified in the Font setting. Playing Movies/i-motion
<i-motion>
N
For some i-motion, you can also select a chapter to play. You can play movies you have shot and i-motion downloaded from i-mode sites or websites. Guide to the preview/list view 1 iDATA BOXi-motion The Folder list screen appears. i-motion folderp.224
The icons for image types, retrieval methods and the available settingsp.226
Titles and file namesp.228 Image type Image type 2 Select a folder The Movie list screen
(Preview) appears. Movie list screenp.233 To search i-motion by i-mode
Search by i-mode YES For partly downloaded i-motion Folder list Function menup.253 Movie list (Preview) Function menup.233 A confirmation message about downloading the remaining data appears. You cannot play the i-motion unless you download the rest of the data.
Selecting YES starts downloading of the rest of the data.
Selecting NO redisplays the Movie list screen. 3 Select a movie The Music Player screen appears and the movie playback starts. Guide to Music Player screenp.277 Operations on the Music Player screenp.278 N
Movies transmitted from blu-ray disc recorder can be played. For details, visit the following website:
http://www.sonyericsson.co.jp/so706i/bd.html
A movie may not be properly played if it was not shot with FOMA SO706i.
You can start playback from the point the playback was stopped last time when you receive a call during playback or when the playback is stopped by t or y. However, the playback may not start the precise point the playback was stopped last time. Retrieval method icon Title Retrieval method icon Allowable operation icon Preview Title Allowable operation icon List view Preview Preview The screen lists 6 movies and displays a preview image of the highlighted movie under the list. Preview images are not displayed for movies with no video such as a sound only i-motion (an i-motion with no video, such as a singers voice). List view 11 movies are listed on the screen. Movie list screen (p.233)
The available functions vary depending on the folders, which means that the items listed in the function menu are different. Edit moviep.235 Edit titleEdits the movie title. You can enter up to 9 double-byte or 18 single-byte characters (You can enter up to 18 double-byte or 36 single-byte characters for the microSD card). Select ring toneSets the movie sound as a ring tone. p.82 Stand-by displaySets the movie to the standby screen. i-motion infoDisplays an i-motion file name, a file save date and whether the i-motion can be moved to the microSD card. Compose message*1Composes an i-mode mail message with the movie attached.p.156 iC transmissionp.259 Send Ir datap.258 Continued on next page 233 D a t a D i s p l a y
E d i t
M a n a g e m e n t N
<Stand-by display>
You cannot set the movie to the standby screen when:
The movie or i-motion is voice only
i-motion with the playback restriction
The size of the movie is larger than QVGA (320 240)
<Memory info>
The displayed file size is only an approximation.
<Sort>
By source sorts the images in the following order. Movies or i-motion with the same retrieval icon are arranged in the order in which they were displayed before you selected By source. Downloaded i-motion or i-motion retrieved from i-ppli, etc. Movies shot by camera Movies retrieved using Infrared data exchange, iC communication or from microSD card, etc. Chara-den shots Playing movies in your preferred order
<Play movie playlist>
You can select and store up to 25 movies or i-motion to play multiple movies in sequence.
There are 5 Playlist folders. 1 Folder list screen (p.233)Select Playlist The Playlist folder list screen appears. 2 Highlight the destination playlist folderu (FUNC) Edit playlist Playlist folder list Function menup.235 3 Select No. for the movieSelect a folderSelect a movie Repeat steps to add To release the added movie
Select the movie to releaseSelect Release this on the folder selection screenYES 4 o (Finish) The i-motion Playlist folder list screen appears. Selecting the Playlist folder starts the playback of the playlist and the stored movie is played repeatedly. Copy to microSDp.248 Move to microSDp.250 MoveSelects from Move this/Move selected/Move all and moves the movie to the other folder you select. About multiple-choicep.38 Add shortcutp.94 Edit file nameEdits the file name of the movie. You can enter up to 36 single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols (- and _ only). File restrictionSpecifies whether to allow the redistribution of the saved movie. File restrictionp.228 Reset titleResets the title to the default. Memory infoDisplays the amount of movie stored and available space (the amount of the data of the FOMA terminal does not contain the amount of the secret data). SortSorts the movies in a selected criteria. List settingSpecifies how to list the movies. The displayed menu differs on the FOMA terminal and microSD card. DeleteSelects the deleting method from Delete this/
Delete selected/Delete all. About multiple-choicep.38 Keep in secretPut out*2Preventing Others from Viewing Datap.104 Copy to Phone*3p.249 Move to Phone*4p.250 Copy*3Copying the data to the different folder in the microSD cardp.250
*1: Not available when 2in1 is in B mode.
*2: Available only in Secret or Secret data only mode.
*3: Available only for movies stored on the microSD card.
*4: Available only for movies stored on the movable contents folder. N
<Select ring tone>
You can only set a movie or i-motion with the Set as ring tone Available. Refer to the i-motion info to check whether it is Available or Unavailable.
You cannot set the following movie or i-motion to the ring tone:
A movie or i-motion without audio
i-motion with the playback restriction
The size of the movie/i-motion is larger than QVGA
(320 240) and smaller than VGA (640 480)
If a movie larger than VGA (640 480) is set as a ring tone, an i-motion image does not appear on the screen. D a t a D i s p l a y
E d i t
M a n a g e m e n t 234 Playlist folder list screen
(p.234) Edit playlistStarts editing the playlist. You can edit a playlist which is already set. Release playlistDeletes the set movies and releases a playlist. Editing Movies
<Edit movie>
You can edit the movies with only.
<Example: Movie list screen for Inbox, Camera or User-created folders>
1 Movie list screen (p.233)u (FUNC)
Edit movie The Edit movie screen appears. 3 Press d (Stop) when it is the last frame you want to trimo (End) When you select 500KB Trimming automatically stops once the trimmed size reaches 500K bytes. 4 The trimmed section of the movie is played The playback stops automatically when it ends. 5 d (Set)d (Save)YES N
A movie whose size is larger than QCIF (176 144) cannot be trimmed away. Playing Video
<Video player>
Use the Video Player to play videos recorded from 1seg. Edit movie 2 u (FUNC)Select any item:
Trim i-motionp.235 Compose message*Composes an i-mode mail with the movie attached. File restrictionSpecifies whether to allow the redistribution of the trimmed movie with Trim i-motion. File restrictionp.228
* : Not available when 2in1 is in B mode. N
You cannot use the Multitask function while editing movies.
Editing may impair the movie quality. Trimming a part of the movie 1 Edit movie screen (p.235)u (FUNC) 2 Any size or 500KBo (Start)
Trim i-motion Trimming starts. To start trimming at a scene mid-way 1 iDATA BOX1SegVideo The Folder list screen appears. Contents in the Video folder p.225 2 Select the microSD folder The Video list screen appears. Guide to the Video list screenp.236 Folder list m i c r o SD 3 Select the video The Video play screen appears and video playback starts. Operation during the Video playbackp.237 D a t a D i s p l a y
E d i t
M a n a g e m e n t Video list (Preview) Function menup.236 Video playback Function menup.237 through the movie
d (Play)Press d (Stop) when it is the first frame you want to trimo (Start) N
Some types of video may not be played to the end. 235 Guide to the preview/list view Guide to the video player screen Portrait display Landscape display Program title Image Subtitles Play position indication The current playback position is indicated with a marker. Selecting Position to play from the Function menu and moving the marker with v and pressing d (Set) during pause starts playback from the position. VIDEO MODE fixed display Playback status
: During playback
: During pause
: Quick view (x1.3) Subtitles on/off is displayed if there are subtitles. Volume Indicates volume level from 0 to 20.
Image type icons and retrieval method icons p.226
Titles and file namesp.226 Image type Image type m i c r o SD Title Preview Title m i c r o SD List view Preview Preview The screen lists 7 movies and displays a preview image of the highlighted movie under the list. List view 12 images are listed on the screen. Video list screen (p.235) Edit titleEdits the video title. Show infoDisplays the video program name, date and time of recording, etc. Delete this/Delete allSelect the deletion method. Multiple-choiceDelete multiple videos. Check memoryDisplays the video storage capacity. Switch listSpecifies how to display the video list screen. Initialize titleResets the title to the default. D a t a D i s p l a y
E d i t
M a n a g e m e n t 236 Operation during video playback Key press Operation d 9 (1 second or longer) o p c (a ( )/
s ()) j h Switch screen directions In order of Portrait Wide (90 right) Wide
(90 left) Pause/Resume playback Mute Adjust volume Return to fast forward/
normal playback at 1.3
(During pause) Frame forward Return to fast forward/
normal playback at 1.3 30-second skip backward 30-second skip forward h (1 second or longer) j (1 second or longer) r (1 second or longer) Turn subtitles on/off t Stops playback Video playback screen (p.235) Show informationDisplays the video program name, date and time of recording, etc. Subtitles*Sets whether to display subtitles. ON (Wide:Bottom) (default)Displays subtitles at the bottom of the video playback screen. ON (Wide:Top)Displays subtitles at the top of the video playback screen. OFFNo subtitle display. PlayPlays at normal speed. Quick view (1.3)Fast play at 1.3x speed. StopEnds playback. LocationUse v to adjust and select the play position. Main/Sub settingSets the audio output method. Main sound (default)Outputs main sound only. Sub soundOutputs secondary sound only. Main+sub soundOutputs both primary and secondary sound. Icon show(Wide)* (default: Show always)Set whether to always or temporarily show icons such as playback position in landscape display.
*: This setting is also applied to the equivalent 1seg functions. N
The function menu is available only when playback is paused.
<Quick view (1.3)>
Sound may hardly be heard during quick view. What is Chara-den?
You can send a cartoon character to your partys FOMA terminal in a videophone call instead of the image from your own FOMA terminal camera. Displaying Chara-den
Downloading Chara-den charactersp.146 1 iDATA BOXChara-den The Chara-den list screen appears. 2 Select Chara-den The Chara-den player screen appears. Chara-den list Function menup.238 Chara-den Function menup.238 Guide to the Chara-den list
The icons for image types, retrieval methods and the available settingsp.226
Titles and file namesp.228 Image type icon (Chara-den) Title Allowable operation icon Retrieval method icon D a t a D i s p l a y
E d i t
M a n a g e m e n t 237 To have the characters mouth synchronize your voice Some Chara-den characters can move the mouth synchronizing your voice as if it is talking. If you use the Function menu or press the key to make the character perform an action, the character performs the selected action rather than moving its mouth. Chara-den list screen (p.237)/
Chara-den player screen
(p.237) Chara-den callMakes a videophone call with the Chara-den character as the substitute image. Use b to search for a phone number from the Received calls, Redial or phonebook on the Chara-den dialing screen. Substitute imageSets the Chara-den character as the substitute image for videophone calls. Rec. Chara-denp.239 Edit title*1Edits the title of the Chara-den. You can enter up to 18 double-byte or 36 single-byte characters. Switch Chara-den*2Selects the Chara-den to display. Action List*2Displays the Action list. Change Action*2Changes the Action mode. Chara-den infoCara-den file name and file save date and time are displayed. Memory info*1Displays the amount of the stored Chara-den. Add shortcutp.94 Set image disp. NormalDisplays the image in the actual size. Fit in display (default)Enlarges the image to the display size. Reset title*1Resets the title to the default. Delete*1Selects the deleting method from Delete this/Delete selected/Delete all. About multiple-choicep.38
*1: Available only with the Chara-den list screen.
*2: Available only with the Chara-den player screen. Using Chara-den characters This function allows you to play a Chara-den character by selecting from pre-installed actions. 1 Chara-den player screen (p.237) Using Chara-den characters To check the action list
w The actions displayed in the list differ depending on the type of character. The number such as 1 or #1 displayed on the right of the action indicates that pressing that key during the Chara-den playback will perform the corresponding action.
<To check the action details>
Highlight the actiono (Detail)Check the detailsu (Exit) To change the Action mode
o (Parts/Whole) This command switches to Parts action mode when mode when is displayed and to Whole action is displayed.
(Whole): The action mode in which the entire Chara-den character moves to express feelings.
(Parts): The action mode in which the parts of the Chara-den character (head, hands, feet, etc.) move. To use the keypad to select actions during the Chara-den playback The keypad keys that can be pressed to make the displayed character perform actions are as follows:
Whole: 1 digit number on the right side of the action name (1 to 9) or q1 to q9 Parts: 2 digit number on the right side of the action name (11 to 99)
<Example: To select (Good night) in Whole action mode>
* The Chara-den is displayed normally (not in mirror). o
(Whole) 8 D a t a D i s p l a y
E d i t
M a n a g e m e n t 238 Saving Chara-den character as Image or Movie <Rec. Chara-den>
Guide to the Rec. Chara-den screen Shooting Still Images 1 Chara-den player screen (p.237) u (FUNC)Rec. Chara-den The Rec. Chara-den
(image) screen appears. 3 2 1 Photo mode 88 7 6 2 1 4 Currently selected action mode 9 7 5 Movie mode
: Whole
: Parts Shooting mode
: Photo mode
: Movie mode Setting of Storage setting (Image)
: Normal
: Fine
: Super Fine Setting of Storage setting (Movie)
: Normal
: Prefer img qual
: Prefer time
: Prefer motion spd Setting of File size setting
: 500KB
: 2MB Setting of Movie type set
: Video + voice
: Video Indicates the size selected in Select size
: QCIF (176 144)
: Small (117 96) Shooting status
: Stand-by
: Shooting Remaining shooting time in the min:sec format
(not displayed until shooting starts) 2 Perform an action d (Record) Operation of actions p.238 To perform a Parts action
o (Parts) To compose an i-mode Rec. Chara-den (image) Function menup.240 message with a shot image attached/
inserted
o (MAIL)Attach image or Insert image To retake the shot
t 3 d (Save) The shot image is saved to the Camera folder under My picture. Shooting movies 1 Rec. Chara-den (image) screen (p.239)
u (FUNC)Movie mode The Rec. Chara-den
(movie) screen appears. 2 d (Record) Perform an action Operation of actions p.238 To perform a Parts action
o (Parts) 3 d (Stop) Rec. Chara-den (movie) Function menup.240 To compose an i-mode message with the recorded movie attached
o (MAIL) To check the movie
u (FUNC)Check w/ playing To retake the shot
t 4 d (Save) The movie is saved to the Camera folder under i-motion. Continued on next page 239 D a t a D i s p l a y
E d i t
M a n a g e m e n t N
The image size (QCIF (176 144)) cannot be changed. N
<Switch Chara-den>
Changing a Chara-den character sets the action mode
Performing an action during shooting may record to Whole. keypad sounds. Playing Melodies
<Melody>
You can play the pre-installed melodies, sound effects or the melodies downloaded from the sites in the Melody folder of Data Box. 1 iDATA BOXMelody The Folder list screen appears. Contents in the Melody folderp.225 2 Select a folder The Melody list screen appears. Guide to the melody list p.241 To search melody by i-mode
Search by i-mode
YES 3 Select a melody The Melody screen appears and the melody playback begins. Operation during the melody playbackp.241 Folder list Function menup.253 Melody list Function menup.241 Melody Function menup.241 N
Melodies are played at the volume set in Phone under the Ring volume settings (played at Level 2 when Silent or Step is set).
Playback illumination pattern is Melody linked (if Melody linked is not registered, Flash applies). Rec. Chara-den screen (p.239) Switch Chara-denChanges a Chara-den character to shoot. Substitute imageSets the Chara-den character as the substitute image for videophone calls. Action ListDisplays the Action list. Change ActionChanges the Action mode. Set image disp. NormalDisplays the image in the actual size. Fit in display (default)Enlarges the image to the display size. Movie modePhoto modeSwitches between Movie mode and Photo mode. Select size*1Sets the size of character to shoot. Numbers in parentheses displayed in the menu is the size in dots (width height). Movie type set*2 Video + voice (default)Shoots a movie including sound. VideoShoots a movie without any voice. Storage setting*2 Normal (default)Shoots a movie with the normal quality and duration. Prefer img qualSelect this option to shoot a movie with higher quality. The available shooting time is shorter than for Normal. Prefer timeSelect this option to shoot a long movie. The quality is not as high as for Normal. Prefer motion spdSelect this option to shoot a movie with smoother motion. Storage setting*1Selects the quality for image shooting from Normal/Fine/Super Fine. File size setting*2 500KBYou can shoot up to 500K bytes. 2MB (default)You can shoot up to 2M bytes.
*1: Available only in the Photo mode.
*2: Available only in the Movie mode. D a t a D i s p l a y
E d i t
M a n a g e m e n t 240 Guide to the Melody list Operation during the melody playback Melody type icon Retrieval method icon You can use the following operations during the melody playback:
Title Key operation Operation Allowable operation icon v Melody type icon Icon Description MFi/SMF melody
: Data that are file-restricted or not allowed to be attached to mails or output from the FOMA terminal Retrieval method icon f (a( )), g (s ()) 0 to 9, w, q, r, u, d, o, i, p Plays the previous or next melody Adjusting the volume*
Stops the playback t Ends
* : When the melody is finished, the volume is restored to the level specified in Ring volume. Melody list screen (p.240)/
Melody screen (p.240)
The function menu varies depending on the folder Icon Description containing the melody. No icon Pre-installed melody Melody downloaded from sites Melody retrieved through the Infrared data exchange, iC communication, microSD card, Bar code reader or PC Allowable operation icon Icon Description Can be attached to i-mode mail (2M bytes or smaller) Can be specified as Ring tone Can be transmitted via infrared data exchange or iC communication Can be copied to the microSD card Titles and file names Original titles are assigned to downloaded melodies. The title is listed on the Melody list screen of the FOMA terminal. The file name is displayed when the data is transmitted to PC. If the file name contains an inappropriate character, it is turned to melodyxxx (xxx: 3-digit number). The 3-digit number at the end of the file name is a serial number assigned to distinguish the file from other files. Edit title*1Edits the title of the melody. You can enter up to 25 double-byte or 50 single-byte characters. Edit file name*1Edits the file name of the melody. You can enter up to 36 single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols (- and _ only). Play melody*1Plays the melody (Displays Melody screen). Ring toneSelects the item to which the melody is set. File restriction*1Specifies whether to allow the redistribution of the saved melody.p.228 Set repeat play*2Repeats the playback of the melody in the same folder. Add shortcutp.94 Compose message*3Composes an i-mode mail with the melody attached.p.156 iC transmission*1p.259 Send Ir data*1p.258 Copy to microSDp.248 Copy to Phone*4p.249 Melody infoMelody file name and file save date and time are displayed. Memory info*1Displays the amount of the stored melody. Copy*4Copying the data to the different folder in the microSD cardp.250 Reset title*1Resets the title to the default. Continued on next page 241 D a t a D i s p l a y
E d i t
M a n a g e m e n t Sort*1Sorts melodies in a selected criteria. Move*1Selects from Move this/Move selected/Move all and moves the melody to the other folder you select. About multiple-choicep.38 Delete*1Selects the deleting method from Delete this/Delete selected/Delete all. About multiple-choicep.38
*1: Available only with the melody list screen.
*2: Available only with the melody screen.
*3: Not available when 2in1 is in B mode.
*4: Available only for melodies stored on the microSD card. N
<Edit file name>
You cannot edit the file name of the file-restricted melody. However, you can edit the file name of the melody received by the Infrared data exchange, iC communication or OBEX connection.
<Ring tone>
Some melodies may have restrictions so that only a designated part of the melody will be played. When such melodies are set as a ring tone, only the designated part can be played. Play the melody from the Melody in Data Box to play all the parts of the melody.
<Sort>
By source sorts the melodies in the following order. Melodies with the same retrieval icon are arranged in the order in which they were displayed before you selected By source:
Melody downloaded from website or melody retrieved from i-ppli Melodies retrieved using Infrared data exchange, iC communication or from microSD card, etc. Playing melodies in your preferred order
<Melody play playlist>
You can select and register up to 10 melodies, and play them in sequence. 1 Folder list screen (p.240)Highlight Playlistu (FUNC)Edit playlist
Select the number to which the melody is to be addedSelect a folder
Select a melodyRepeat the procedure To release the added melody
Select the melody to releaseSelect Release this on the folder selection screen D a t a D i s p l a y
E d i t
M a n a g e m e n t 2 o (Finish) The Folder list screen appears. Selecting the Playlist folder starts the playback of the playlist and the stored melodies are played repeatedly. 242 N
The playlist playback is canceled if the registered melody titles or file names are changed or the data is deleted. Managing Kisekae Tool
<Kisekae Tool>
Check the packages of Kisekae Tool downloaded from sites.
and are stored at the time of purchase.
Downloading from sitesp.146 1 iDATA BOXKisekae Tool The Package list screen appears. Package list screenp.243 To search packages by i-mode
Search by i-mode YES Package list Function menup.243 2Select a package To set the package
u (FUNC)Set all Kisekae Tool package settingsp.97 When you select a partially downloaded package When you attempt to open a partially downloaded package, due to interruption at data acquisition, etc., a message appears asking whether to download the remaining data. To download the remaining data, follow the message to download the data. When the remaining data is downloaded, the partially downloaded data will be deleted. If the remaining data is invalid, the data downloading cannot be completed. However, if you download the data in this case, partially stored invalid data will be deleted. N
Sound-related items such as ring tone are played at the volume set in Ring volume while checking
(Played at level 2 when set to Step, and no sound when set to Silent). However, i-motion sounds at Level 2 when set to Silent. Guide to the package list Package type icon Title Allowable operation icon Retrieval method icon Memory infoDisplays the amount of the stored Kisekae Tool. SortSorts packages by the specified criteria. DeleteSelects the deleting method from Delete this/
Delete selected/Delete all. About multiple-choicep.38 Package type icon microSD Card Icon Description All the data have been downloaded Only a part of the data has been downloaded Subject to the FOMA card security function Retrieval method icon Icon No icon Description Pre-installed Data Downloaded data Allowable operation icon Icon Description Standby screen, wake-up display Dialing screen, etc. (other than standby screen and Wake-up display) Ring tone or clock alarm tone Menu*
Background on the Music Player screen Clock display Color pattern Icons such as battery icon
also appears if the package contains large-font menu. Package list screen (p.242) Set allSets the Kisekae Tool.p.97 Edit titleEdits the package title. You can enter up to 10 double-byte or 20 single-byte characters. Kisekae Tool infoPackage file name and file save date and time are displayed. Reset titleResets the title to the default. Reset screen/soundResets the items that can be set all at once to the default (p.97). FOMA SO706i supports microSD cards with up to 2G-byte (commercially available) (As of May, 2008). Visit the following website for the latest operation check information such as the manufacturer or the capacity of the microSD card. Note that the microSD card which is not listed on the website may not be operated on the FOMA terminal.
i-mode: PlayNow by SO
(As of May, 2008) iMenu
(Menu List)
(Mobile phone manufacturer)PlayNow by SO QR code on the right is also available to select displayed URL and access the site.
PC (Japanese):
Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications http://www.SonyEricsson.co.jp/memorycard/
Note that the information on the website is only the result of the operation check and does not guarantee all the operations. Notes on handling
* Make sure to format the microSD card on the FOMA SO706i. You may not be able to use the microSD card formatted on the other terminal or PC.p.251
Insert or remove the microSD card after turning off the FOMA terminal.
Do not paste a label or sticker on the microSD card.
It is your responsibility to keep a separate record of all data saved on the microSD card. Under no circumstances shall NTT DOCOMO be liable for any loss or alternation to the saved data. D a t a D i s p l a y
E d i t
M a n a g e m e n t 243 N
It may take long to read or write data for the first time after the microSD card is inserted. Folder tree on the microSD Card When you copy the data from the FOMA terminal to the microSD card, folders are created as shown in the Table 1 (p.245) and the data are stored on the respective folders. The folder name and file names are set automatically as shown in the Table 1.
When the data is copied from a PC to the microSD card, the folder structure and file name shown in the Table 1 (p.245) are needed. N
When you copy multiple data to the SD_PIM folder, the data is automatically named with year/month/day/
hour/minute (yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm).
You can save a movie with video from a PC to the MMFILE folder, but you cannot play the movie on the FOMA terminal.
A file edited on a PC then saved to the microSD card may not be displayed or played correctly on the FOMA SO706i if you use characters different from the folder/
file names shown in Table 1 (p.245).
File names of PDF data/documents copied to a microSD card remain unchanged (up to single-byte 59 characters/double-byte 29 characters). If a file name is the same as that of an existing file stored in the microSD card, a 3-digit number will be added to the original file name.
When the microSD card is formatted and SDVIDEO.DAT, MMFILE.DAT or DCIM.DAT file is deleted, the settings of the destination folder are canceled. In this case, reset the setting of Select to save.
Do not delete or move folders in the microSD card on a PC. Doing so may prevent FOMA SO706i from reading the microSD card.
You may not be able to display or play the data on the microSD card stored from the other device. Also, you may not be able to display or play the data on the microSD card stored from the FOMA terminal on the other device.
Before purchasing the microSD card reader/writer or PC card adapter, ask the manufacturer of the microSD card if it is available for the FOMA SO706i. Inserting/removing the microSD card Insert or remove the microSD card after turning off the FOMA terminal. 1 Open the cap of the microSD card slot 2 Insert the microSD card into the microSD card slot and push it until it locks into the place Insert the microSD card straight and slowly with the printed side up. When fully inserted, the card is locked in the place. microSD card slot cover The printed side up Groove of the microSD card D a t a D i s p l a y
E d i t
M a n a g e m e n t To remove the card When you push the microSD card in and release, the card pops up slightly.
* Note that the card may fly out of the slot. Grip the groove of the microSD card and slowly pull the card out. 3 Close the cap of the microSD card slot When you turn on the FOMA terminal after inserting the microSD card, appears. N
Do not insert or remove the microSD card with the FOMA terminal turned on. Doing so may damage the microSD card or the data on the card.
Note that the microSD card may fly out of the slot when inserting or removing the microSD card.
When you remove the microSD card, make sure to keep the card in the supplied protective case. You may not be able to use the microSD card if the card is kept in different protective case.
Make sure to insert or remove the microSD card straightly in the right direction (inserting the microSD card at an angle may damage the card). 244
(Table 1) Folder tree on the microSD Card and storage file (Enclosed in parentheses are file extensions) Root (microSD card) DCIM Images. Appears as Picture under My picture on the FOMA terminal. aaaSODCF DSCbbbbb.hhh Images (hhh: JPEG (JPG), GIF) SD_VIDEO Movies, i-motion and 1seg videos. PRLccc In i-motion SD-Video on the FOMA terminal. MOLccc.iii Movies (iii: 3GP, SDV, MP4, ASF) PRGccc 1seg videos. In 1Seg Video microSD on the FOMA terminal. MGR_INFO Additional information on 1seg videos. PRIVATE DOCOMO STILL Images. Appears as Image Box under My picture on the FOMA terminal. Contains: Animation (GIF), Image (JPEG (JPG)), Flash (swf) MMFILE Movies or i-motion (including AAC music data). Appears as Multimedia under i-motion on the WM WMA data. Appears as WMA under Music on the FOMA terminal. Contains: WMA (WMA) FOMA terminal. Contains: Movie (3GP), SDV, MP4, ASF DECOIMG Deco-mail pictograph files. Contains: JPEG (JPG), GIF Images downloaded through Full browser, or files that are attached to i-mode mail and cannot be OTHER used in the FOMA terminal Data Box. Appears as SD and Other on the FOMA terminal. Contains: Images (PNG, BMP), etc. RINGER Melody files. ToruCa. TORUCA Contains: TRC TABLE Contains: SMF (MID), MFi (MLD) DCIM RINGER SD_VIDEO TORUCA STILL DOCUMENT MMFILE DECOIMG Additional information on each file. DOCUMENT PDF data. PUDddd Contains: PDF, incompletely-obtained PDF ($DF), PDF definition file (DDF) SEMC SAVEDIR Destination setting files. Contains: DAT DOCUMENT Documents. DOCddd Contains: Word file (DOC), Excel file (XLS), PowerPoint file (PPT) TABLE DOCUMENT Additional information on documents. SD_PIM PIM data such as phonebook, schedule and mail. PIMeeeee.mmm PIM files (mmm: Phonebook files (VCF), mail files (VMG), text memo files (VNT), Movable i-motion, Chaku-Uta-Full, i-ppli, i-ppli data.
* Alphabets in italic that is no explanation in table mean following single-byte numbers. bookmark files (VBM), Schedule/To Do list files (VCS)) SD_BIND aaa: 100 to 999 bbbbb: 00001 to 09999 ddd: 001 to 999 eeeee: 00001 to 65535(Decimal numbers) ccc: 001 to FFF (hexadecimal numbers)
* When you store the data on the microSD card from a PC and edit the data on the microSD card, follow the instructions of
. The data may not be displayed or played correctly if you use wrong characters. 245 D a t a D i s p l a y
E d i t
M a n a g e m e n t Number of files that can be stored on the microSD card Data type Schedule Details Date (from), Date (to), Summary, Contents, Secret store*2*3, category*4, Alarm, Repeat Contents, Category*5, Completion date, Period, Change status, Priority, Alarm Make date, Last modify date, Category, Contents Unread/Read, Message type, Saved in, Sender, Receiver, Title, Receive/
Send date, Message, Attach, 2in1 setting URL, Title To Do list Text memo Received mail*6, Sent mail*6, Draft mail Bookmark*6*7
*1: May be assigned to the available number to copy and add.
*2: Secret store indicated whether the data is stored as a secret data.
*3: Can be copied by Copy all.
*4: Category is the icon information set in the schedule.
*5: Category is the category set in the To Do list.
*6: Folders (folder names) can be transferred by copying all the received mails, sent mails or bookmarks.
*7: When copied from the microSD card to the FOMA terminal, i-mode bookmarks are stored in the Bookmark folder of i-mode menu. Full Browser bookmarks are saved to the Bookmark folder under Full Browser. Data in the Data Box Data type Still image Movie Melody PDF data Other data Details JPEG, GIF and SWF data in the Inbox, Camera, Decomail-picture, Decorate PI, microSD or user created folder MP4 data in the Inbox, Camera, microSD or user created folder MFi/SMF melody in the Inbox, microSD or user created folder PDF data in the Inbox, microSD or user-created folder Data type Details ToruCa ToruCa in the ToruCa, microSD or user created folder N
If a schedule with a user icon is copied, the Category information is not copied.
You cannot copy while microSD card being accessed. The number of files that can be stored on the microSD card varies depending on the memory capacity of the microSD card. The maximum number of files that can be stored in 1 folder and the maximum number of folders are as follows:
Folder name DCIM PRL PRG SD_PIM STILL MMFILE DECOIMG OTHER RINGER TORUCA DOCUMENT Maximum number of folders 900 4,095 99 1 999 999 999 999 999 999 999 Maximum number of files that can be stored in 1 folder 9,999 4,095 4 65,535 9,999 9,999 9,999 999 9,999 999 999
You can save more files by adding folders and changing the location to copy. However, you may not be able to store the data to the maximum number depending on the file size.
You can not copy or move the data when the space is not enough on the microSD card.
When the microSD card is full, you cannot add folders or edit titles for still image, image, movies or i-motion.
Music data cannot move from the FOMA terminal to the microSD card.
If the number of files in the destination folder has reached the maximum, a new folder is automatically created and data will be saved to the new folder (except SD-PIM). However, a folder is not automatically created when taking a picture with Camera and saving directly to a microSD card. Data that can be exchanged between the FOMA terminal and the microSD card PIM data Data type Phonebook 246 Details Name, Reading, Phone number, Mail address, Memo, Address, Birthday, Image, Memory number*1, Secret store*2*3, Group number*3, Group name*3, Phonebook 2in1 setting D a t a D i s p l a y
E d i t
M a n a g e m e n t Displaying the Data in the microSD Card N
Deco-mail appears without decorations. Displaying the PIM data on the microSD card
<microSD manager>
You can display the PIM data such as phonebook, schedule, mail or bookmarks on the microSD card. 1 iLIFEKITmicroSD manager The Categories screen appears. 2 Select an item The File list screen appears. 3 Select a file The Data list screen appears. 4 Select a data The Data detail screen appears. Categories Function menup.247 File list Function menup.248 Data list Function menup.248 Data detail Function menup.248 N
While running microSD manager or displaying the data details, you cannot launch another function. Categories screen (p.247) microSD infop.251 Copy from phoneCopies all the item data to the microSD card.
For Schedule, you can select from Schedule/To Do list/All.
For Bookmark, you can select from i-mode brow./Full Brow./All. microSD formatp.251 Check microSDChecks the microSD card and fixes errors. N
<Check microSD>
Do not remove the microSD card during checking the microSD card. This may cause a malfunction to the FOMA terminal or microSD card.
The data may not be recovered depending on the microSD card.
You cannot check the unformatted or incompatible microSD card. flashes during Check microSD.
When you press o (Quit) or y while checking the microSD card, the checking is canceled and appears.
When the checking of microSD card is interrupted, some data may remain to be recovered. In this case, check the microSD card again.
It may take time to check the microSD card depending on the amount of data on the microSD card.
When you check the microSD card, the titles of the data in the microSD card are renamed to the file names. Titles and file namespp.228, 241 D a t a D i s p l a y
E d i t
M a n a g e m e n t
appears for a bookmark added on the i-mode for the one added on the browser screen, and Full Browser screen. 247 File list screen (p.247) 2 Select a folderSelect an image Edit titleEdits the file title. You can enter up to 15 double-byte or 31 single-byte characters. Copy & addCopy & overwritep.249 Copy from phoneCopies all the item data to the microSD card.
For Schedule, you can select from Schedule/To Do list/All.
For Bookmark, you can select from i-mode brow./Full Brow./All. microSD infoDisplays the amount of available space and data stored on the microSD card. DeleteSelects the deleting method from Delete this/
Delete selected/Delete all. About multiple-choice p.38 Data list screen (p.247)/Data detail screen (p.247) Copy & add thisCopy & add allCopy & OW all*
Copy & add this copies one data additionally.
Copy & add all is the same function as Copy & add of the function menu of the file list screen.
Copy & OW all is the same function as Copy &
overwrite of the function menu of the file list screen. Copying the PIM data to the FOMA terminalp.249 microSD infoChecks the amount of available space and data stored on the microSD card.
* : Copy & add all and Copy & OW all are available only for the data list screen. Displaying other data in the microSD card You can display the data in the Data Box such as images, i-motion or melodies or ToruCa stored on the microSD card.
<Example: To display an image in My picture>
1 Folder list screen (p.225)microSD
Picture, Decorate PI or Image Box The microSD folder list screen appears. Ex. microSD folder list
(Picture) Function menup.253 248 D a t a D i s p l a y
E d i t
M a n a g e m e n t Exchanging the Data Between the microSD Card and FOMA Terminal Copying the data on the FOMA terminal to the microSD card Copying the data such as the phonebook to the microSD card You can save the phonebook, schedule, To Do list, text memo, mail or bookmarks stored on the FOMA terminal to the microSD card. 1 List screen of the data (such as the phonebook list screen)u (FUNC) Copy to microSDSelect any item:
Copy thisCopy selectedCopy all*Selects the copying method. About multiple-choicep.38
* : Only the data in the folder can be copied for copying all the received mails, sent mails or bookmarks. To copy all the data, select CopyAll to microSD from the function menu of the folder list screen. Function menu of the detail screen The function of Copy to microSD on the detail screen is same as Copy this of the list screen. Function menu of the category screen The function menu Copy from phone of the category list (p.247) is same as Copy all of the list screen of the phonebook, schedule, To Do list, draft mail or text memo. Similarly, this function is same as CopyAll to microSD of the folder list screen of received mail, sent mail or bookmark. N
When you copy the mail with an i-ppli software launch specification, the information about launching i-ppli in the mail is deleted.
When you copy one secret data (phonebook or schedule), the secret setting is released when saved.
When you copy all the data to the microSD card, secret data (phonebook or schedule) are also copied. However, the data in the secret folder are not copied.
When you copy mails, the attached files may be deleted depending on the file type.
Copy all the data of My Profile after operating the Display all data. Copying the data such as images to the microSD card You can copy the data in the Inbox, Camera or user created folder to the microSD card.
Still images recorded with 1seg cannot be copied. 1 List screen of the data (such as the image list screen)u (FUNC)Copy to microSDSelect any item:
Copy thisCopy selectedCopy allSelects the copying method, then selects the destination folder to copy the data to the folder of microSD card. About multiple-choicep.38 N
Pre-installed data cannot be copied to the microSD card.
When you receive a call, mail or alarm notification while copying still images or movies to the microSD card, the copying to the microSD card is interrupted.
When the destination folder is full, a new folder is created automatically and the data is stored in the folder.
<Copy image>
The file name is set as follows after copied:
File name: DSC_mmmmm (mmmmm = 00001 to 09999)
You cannot copy the data to the microSD card in the following cases:
Images other than JPEG, GIF or SWF
The file size exceeds 2M bytes when copied
The file size may increase when copied to the microSD card.
<Copy movie>
The file name is set as follows after copied:
File name: MOLxxx (xxx = 001 to FFF: in hexadecimal) Copying the data on the microSD card to the FOMA terminal Copying the PIM data to the FOMA terminal You can copy and add/overwrite the phonebook, schedule, mail or bookmarks stored on the microSD card to the FOMA terminal.
When you copy and overwrite the schedule, the To Do list data is also copied and overwritten (when only one of these data is stored, only the stored data is overwritten).
Note that when you copy and overwrite data (Copy
& OW this/Copy & OW selected/Copy & OW all), the data stored on the FOMA terminal before copying are erased and replaced by the data in the selected microSD card. Check if there is an important data before copying and overwriting the data. 1 File list screen (p.247)u (FUNC) Copy & add or Copy & overwrite Select any item:
Copy & add thisCopy & OW thisCopies and adds/overwrites all the data of a file. Copy & add selectedCopy & OW selected Copies and adds/overwrites all the data of the selected file. About multiple-choicep.38 Copy & add allCopy & OW allCopies and adds/overwrites all the data of all the files. Function menu of the data list screen/data detail screen
Copy & add all and Copy & OW all on the data list screen (p.247) are the same functions as Copy
& add and Copy & overwrite of the file list screen.
Copy & add this of the data list screen/data detail screen (p.247) copies the selected one data additionally. N
You cannot copy the phonebook data when Restrict dialing is set.
If Copy & add is selected for the phonebook, group names on the microSD card differ from the one of the FOMA terminal, the data is saved to No Group in the phonebook.
When the Inbox or Outbox is full, copying one received mail from the data list screen/data detail screen overwrites the oldest unprotected mail or read mail. D a t a D i s p l a y
E d i t
M a n a g e m e n t 249 Copying other data to the FOMA terminal You can copy the data such as images stored on the microSD card to the folder of the FOMA terminal.
Videos recorded with 1seg cannot be copied. 1 List screen of the data (such as the image list screen)u (FUNC)Copy to phoneSelect any item:
Copy thisCopy selectedCopy allSelects the copying method. About multiple-choicep.38 N
<Copy image>
The following images cannot be copied:
SWF Flash movie which exceeds 100K bytes
An image which exceeds 2M bytes
An image whose width or height exceeds 2,592 dots or total number of dots exceeds 2,592 1,944 dots
A progressive JPEG/GIF image whose width or height exceeds 854 dots or total number of dots exceeds 854 480 dots
<Copy movie>
You cannot copy a movie in the following cases:
Movies other than MP4
MP4 movies that cannot be played
Movies whose file size exceeds 10M bytes
* You may not be able to copy the movie in other cases depending on the movie.
<Copy PDF>
PDF data larger than 2M bytes cannot be copied. Copying the data to the different folder in the microSD card D a t a D i s p l a y
E d i t
M a n a g e m e n t You can copy the data in the microSD card to the different folder in the microSD card.
You have to create a destination folder beforehand. p.253 1 List screen of the data (such as the image list screen)u (FUNC) CopySelect any item:
Copy thisCopy selectedCopy allSelects the copying method, then selects the destination folder to copy the data to the other folder. About multiple-choicep.38 N
Do not remove the microSD card until the coping completes. This may cause a malfunction to the FOMA terminal or microSD card. 250 Moving the Copyrighted Data Among the microSD Card and FOMA Terminal
<Movable contents>
You can move the movable i-motion or Chaku-Uta-Full with copyrights. Moving the data on the FOMA terminal to the microSD card
Moved i-motion is saved to the Movable contents folder (p.224) under i-motion.
The moved Chaku-Uta-Full are saved to the Movable contents folder (p.224) under Music. 1 Movie list screen (p.233)/Music list screen (p.273)u (FUNC)Move to microSDSelect any item:
Move thisSelect the destination folder Select this folder Move selectedSelect the destination folder
Select this folderUse b to select a checkbox ()o (Finish)YES Move allEnter your security codeSelect the destination folderSelect this folder YES Moving the data on the microSD card to the FOMA terminal
The moved i-motion are stored to the Inbox folder of i-motion.
The moved Chaku-Uta-Full are stored to the Inbox of Music.
Videos recorded with 1seg cannot be moved. 1 Folder list screen (pp.233, 273) Movable contentsSelect a folder View files The Movie list screen (p.233)/Music list screen (p.273) appears. 2 u (FUNC)Move to phoneSelect any item:
Move thisMove selectedMove allSelects the moving method. About multiple-choicep.38 N
Do not remove the microSD card while moving the data. This may cause a malfunction to the FOMA terminal or microSD card.
1 | 08 user guide part 2 | Users Manual | 2.81 MiB | April 06 2008 |
General Inquiries
<DOCOMO Information Center >
(In English)
(ee) 0120-005-250 (toll free)
*Can be called from mobile phones and PHSs.
(In Japanese only) tj (No prefix) 1 51 (toll free)
*Can only be called from DOCOMO mobile phones.
@Please confirm the phone number before you dial.
(In Japanese only) tj (No prefix) 1 1 3 (toll free)
*Can only be called from DOCOMO mobile phones.
(In Japanese only)
{eXe) 0120-800-000 (toll free)
*Can be called from mobile phones and PHSs.
@For application procedure, repairs and after-sales service, call inquiries above or contact your local DOCOMO sh on DOCOMO website or i-mode site. DOCOMO website: http://www.nttdocomo.co.jp/english/
Re eee) OL Vue TUE eae en CLL es ofoere) ee our teen oem CCl Erm eLiReLY) DOCOMO mobile phone International call access number 81-3-5366-311 4* toll free) Calne MONET VALE (mp .
*Calling from the fixed phone will be charged according to the call rate for Japan.
* If you use SO706i, you should dial the number +81-3-5366-3114
(to dial +, press the O key for over a second). Fixed phone
<Universal number>
Universal number international prefix (Table 2) -800-0120-0151 *
*You may be charged according to the call rate for the country where you are staying.
+ See p.334 for Intemational call access code of main countries (Table 1) and International Prefix number for the universal number (Table 2) in this manual. i-mode site: iMenu > #15 (Information) = RI-EYz
(DOCOMO shop) (Japanese) Failures encountered overseas eLearn Heke oe een cee CCIE Pam ey DOCOMO mobile phone International call access number *
Omul-MeolU NM VOUES CVA OIE (CMp) ~81-3-6718-1414 (toll
*Calling from the fixed phone will be charged according 1 the call rate for Japan.
* If you use SO706i, you should dial the number +81-3-6718-1
(to dial +, press the 0 key for over a second). Fixed phone
<Universal number>
OTT -Ter- alan octane crear tice ar prefix (Table 2) -800-5931 -8600*
*You may be charged according to the call rate for the country where you are staying.
+ See p.334 for International call access code of main countries (Table 1) and International Prefix number for th universal number (Table 2) in this manual.
@lf your FOMA terminal is lost or stolen overseas, take procedure to suspend the subscription immediately.
@ if your FOMA terminal has been damaged overseas, bring it to a repair counter designated by DOCOMO after returning to Japan. Dont forget your cellular phone ... or your manners!
OWhen using your mobile phone in public, dont forget to show common courtesy and consideration for others around you. Sales: NTT DOCOMO, Inc. Manufacturer: Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications Japan, |
To prevent damage to the environment, bring used battery packs to an NTT DOCOMO service counter, an NTT TOACAMA snant ara raruclo ranter is PRINTED WITH I \sovink ;
Utilizing recycled papers
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2008-06-04 | 1850.2 ~ 1909.8 | PCE - PCS Licensed Transmitter held to ear | Original Equipment |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 | Effective |
2008-06-04
|
||||
1 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Sony Mobile Communications Inc
|
||||
1 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0018919456
|
||||
1 | Physical Address |
4-12-3 Higashi-Shinagawa
|
||||
1 |
Tokyo, N/A 140-0002
|
|||||
1 |
Japan
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 | TCB Application Email Address |
k******@cetecom.de
|
||||
1 | TCB Scope |
B1: Commercial mobile radio services equipment in the following 47 CFR Parts 20, 22 (cellular), 24,25 (below 3 GHz) & 27
|
||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 | Grantee Code |
PY7
|
||||
1 | Equipment Product Code |
A3880003
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 | Name |
M**** K********
|
||||
1 | Title |
Head of Regulatory
|
||||
1 | Telephone Number |
+8136********
|
||||
1 | Fax Number |
+46 1********
|
||||
1 |
M******@sonymobile.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
1 | Firm Name |
Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB
|
||||
1 | Name |
P**** L********
|
||||
1 | Physical Address |
Nya Vattentornet
|
||||
1 |
Lund, 22188
|
|||||
1 |
Sweden
|
|||||
1 |
p******@sonyericsson.com
|
|||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 | If so, specify the short-term confidentiality release date (MM/DD/YYYY format) | 11/26/2008 | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 | Equipment Class | PCE - PCS Licensed Transmitter held to ear | ||||
1 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | Licensed transmitter | ||||
1 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 | Purpose / Application is for | Original Equipment | ||||
1 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 | Grant Comments | Output power listed is EIRP. This filing is only applicable for GSM 1900 MHz operations. This device contains functions that are not operational in U.S. Territories. This filing is only applicable for US operations. SAR compliance for body-worn operating configurations is limited to the specific configurations tested for this filing. Body-worn operations are restricted to belt-clips, holsters or similar accessories that have no metallic component in the assembly and must provide at least 1.5 cm separation between the device and the users body. End-users must be informed of the bodyworn operating requirements for satisfying RF exposure compliance. The highest reported SAR values are: Head: 0.90W/kg Body-worn: 0.56W/kg | ||||
1 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
n/a | ||||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 24E | 1850.20000000 | 1909.80000000 | 1.0070000 | 0.0028700000 ppm | 300KGXW |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC